Note: This is a sequel to The Unknown Potter. It is highly recommended that you read that first, otherwise this plot line may or may not make sense to you. This occurs after the final battle of Hogwarts and will follow Stephanie Potter and her friends for at least one year. Thank you for reading this fan fiction!

Disclaimer: I am not JK Rowling and I do not own the characters in this fanfic. I am not making a profit off this works. Please enjoy!

Chapter One: The Runaway

“I don’t understand why you brought all those books.” Ron shook his head as he lifted his arm towards the door. Hermione rolled her eyes as he closed his hand into a fist and knocked on the door without taking his eyes off her. “We still have three weeks until exams.”

“And you haven’t even started studying for them yet.” Hermione pointed out yet again and shifted her heavy bag slightly. She had begun to carry her study materials everywhere she went in case she had some free time to glance at them. It had been a whole year since she had attended school, after all, and she had to be prepared for the most important exams of her life. “You should take them more seriously, Ronald. If you don’t pass, you won’t be able to begin Auror training in September with Harry. You’ll be stuck at Hogwarts for another year and be in the same class as your sister.”

Ron pounded on the door again and bellowed to the people inside, this time turning to look at the door. “Stephanie, Nikki! Come on! We are going to be late.” Then he turned back towards Hermione. “Look at all we did last year, Hermione. Is there really a possibility that I could fail?”

“Yes.” Hermione snorted, rolling her eyes again and crossing her arms over her chest. Ron is impossible, she told herself. “But what do I care if you make a fool of yourself?”

Ron smiled at her, which only infuriated her even more. Why weren’t the N.E.W.T.S. more important to him? This one day of exams would decide which jobs they would qualify for and work their entire lives.

“Besides, who says that I would go back if I didn’t pass? George and Fred didn’t graduate and they did just fine for themselves. It wouldn’t be so bad helping George with the store for awhile, anyway.” She turned away when he spoke, refusing to acknowledge that he was speaking.

Ron pounded on the door again, but still no one answered, and Hermione was getting a little worried. She tried the door knob and was surprised when it opened easily. Kingsley had placed harsh security on Grimmauld Place since there were still Death Eaters roaming free and threatening Stephanie’s safety. Muggles could not see the home and only authorized witches and wizards could enter. Only a handful of people even knew that Stephanie was staying there.

“Stephanie?” She called as she walked into the entryway of the Black family home. It was eerily quiet and Hermione sensed that it was empty. But she raised her wand in preparation of defending herself just in case they weren’t alone. “Nikki?”

Nikki and Stephanie had planned to go to the memorial service with them since Harry had to be there early to help prepare and greet visitors. As they made their way down the hall, Hermione grabbed Ron’s hand; her heart raced and her mind pictured only the worst. Where are they? She wondered.

“Stephanie?” Ron called out again, but there was still no answer. As they slowly walked down the hall, Hermione couldn’t help but feel grateful that Stephanie had found a way to remove the portrait of Sirius’ mother from the hallway wall. And actually, any of them would have been able to do it had they taken a moment to carefully think about the task. Hermione couldn’t have handled the screaming rants of that despicable woman right then.

All Stephanie had done was ask Kreacher if he wanted to hang the portrait in the room she had provided him. Kreacher was so excited by the gesture that he removed it from the hall immediately, while Hermione had been disappointed in herself for not thinking of such a simple solution to their problem.

Then, something suddenly caught her eye and she immediately pulled Ron towards the kitchen, her thoughts returned to the urgency of the moment. Once she reached the table, Hermione picked up the piece of parchment and read the letter aloud:

Ron and Hermione,

Nikki had some things to do for the ceremony so we left a little early. Sorry we didn’t get word to you sooner. I will see you there.

Stephanie

“Great, we are going to be late because they couldn’t send us an owl or patronus.” Ron mumbled as he turned and headed for the door, dropping Hermione’s hand.

“Grow up, Ron.” Hermione reprimanded as she followed him outside. “We only lost five minutes. We’ll be fine.”

Ron said nothing as he extended his hand towards her once they were outside and Hermione took it yet again. She could Apparate herself, but she didn’t feel like arguing anymore. He raised his wand and Disapparated them to just outside the Hogwarts grounds where the ceremony was to be taking place. Hermione could hear Kingsley’s voice as it amplified to the crowd, asking them to take their seats.

Hermione and Ron quietly made their way to the front row where Harry had reserved seats for them. Ginny was already there, but Stephanie’s chair was empty. After she dropped her bag under the seat and sat down, Hermione leaned over the empty chair and whispered to Ginny, “Where’s Stephanie?”

“Wasn’t she coming with you?” Ginny asked.

Hermione shook her head; she was starting to get worried about her friend. “She said that she and Nikki had to come early.”

Hermione scanned the crowd looking for her friend. She couldn’t shake the feeling that something was wrong. Stephanie had been much more reserved since she was discharged from the hospital than she previously had been. Hermione knew that Stephanie was having a hard time coping with Fred’s death, but at least she wasn’t withdrawing from those that cared about her. Stephanie spent a lot of time with Hermione, Ron, Harry, and Ginny, but she could tell that Stephanie felt out of place. That’s why Hermione was so concerned about Stephanie.

“Well Nikki’s over there.” Ginny pointed towards the side of the stage where several Aurors were standing, looking out into the crowd. “Stephanie’s got to be somewhere; I’m sure she’s fine.”

Hermione nodded her head and sank back in her seat. Ginny was right, Stephanie had to be there somewhere. Nikki would never have abandoned her Auror duties in protecting Stephanie from danger; it wasn’t in Nikki’s nature to be so careless.

“Thank you for joining us today.” Kingsley began and Hermione directed her attention towards the new Minister of Magic. She noticed that Harry, Professor McGonagall, and a few others were seated just behind Kingsley on the stage. “This is not meant to be a day of sadness as we remember those we lost less than two months ago. Instead, this should be a celebration of what those who died sacrificed their lives for. Without their bravery, we would not be here today, living in a free world. So it is with great gratitude and pleasure that I reveal to you and dedicate this very special memorial.”

He pointed his wand towards the figure behind him and the cloth covering it fell to the ground. Hermione gasped in awe. It was absolutely gorgeous and it took her breath away. Tears came to her eyes as she looked the statue up and down. The square base held several figures at the top, all varying in size, age, and appearance.

“This monument is to allow all of us to remember that Tom Riddle’s defeat was only made possible because so many people and magical creatures unified and worked together in a time of need, despite disagreements and differences of the past.” Kingsley paused for effect. He looked out into the crowd as though he was looking at everyone individually, talking only to them. “We lost children, adults, house elves, unicorns, centaurs, family members, loved ones, strangers, and friends.

“We must never forget what our freedom cost each of us.” Kingsley finished as Hermione wiped her eyes. Ron rubbed her shoulders and she squeezed his hand. Then she looked back at Kinglsey who appeared to be getting ready to speak again.

“Each individual’s name who lost their life that day, whether human or magical creature, child or adult, was placed on this memorial so that we will always remember.” Kingsley pointed towards the statue again. “At the end of the ceremony, I will read through the list of names followed by a moment of silence to show our respect.

“But first I would like to grant special awards to individuals that went above and beyond their duty and expected magical ability.” A silence fell over the crowd as everyone waited in anticipation. “Would Ginevra Weasley, Ronald Weasley, and Hermione Granger please come to the stage?”

Hermione looked at Ron and Ginny in confusion. What was he recognizing them for? They hadn’t done anything all that spectacular. But her friends didn’t provide any answers; Ginny and Ron looked just as confused as she was.

Once they were on the stage, Kingsley addressed the crowd once again. “Neville Longbottom could not be here today, but we would like to recognize his courage for facing and directly assisting in the destruction of Tom Riddle by killing his snake Nagini when all hope seemed lost.”

He held up a small item and Hermione gasped in surprise. It was an Order of Merlin medallion! “We have a medal for him once he returns from Germany.”

“Ginevra, please step forward.” He turned to them and Ginny looked nervous as she made her way closer to Kingsley. Harry merely sat there, smiling proudly, and Hermione gave him a dirty look for not warning them. “For standing up for what you believe in and never leaving your friends’ side when they needed you most, I award you with the Order of Merlin, Second Class.”

Ginny breathed in disbelievingly as Kingsley pinned the medal onto her robes. Kingsley shook her hand and then called Ronald Weasley to the front. Hermione was all smiles. “Ronald Weasley, for your courage, bravery, and desire to keep going even though things looked bleak, I am pleased to grant you the Order of Merlin, Second Class.”

Hermione clapped hard for him and his face burned redder than his hair with embarrassment. Finally, it was her turn. “Hermione Granger, for your unfailing loyalty, unending pursuit of knowledge, ingenuity, and service to others, I grant you with the Order of Merlin, Second Class.”

She exhaled excitedly as Kingsley reached for her hand. The crowd clapped for the three of them as they made their way back to their seats. She glanced at Mr. and Mrs. Weasley, who were positively beaming at their accomplishments. Hermione smiled at the woman as she took her seat again.

When the applause had died down, Kignsley spoke again. “For a brave soul who sacrificed his life for ours, for living in a world so dark and evil that few people survived it, I grant Severus Snape the Order of Merlin, First Class.”

There was less applause this time. Hermione stood in appreciation for her professor, disappointed with others’ lack of enthusiasm. Harry had sworn to himself that he would make Snape’s accomplishments widely known, but he had been busy fussing over Stephanie. Severus Snape had died for them and a standing ovation was the least she could do.

Harry stood with a determined look on his face and applauded for their professor. Ron and Ginny stood next and slowly others followed their example. After a few minutes of applause, Kingsley spoke again. “Would Stephanie and Harry Potter please step forward?”

Hermione watched as Harry stood and came to the front of the stage, not with a smile, but with a look of pride. Hermione knew that Harry was ecstatic that Stephanie was finally being recognized for her accomplishments. He could care less about his own recognition; Harry didn’t want the attention, anyway. In fact, Hermione knew that her friend felt that he didn’t deserve to be the center of attention. Harry felt that he was ordinary, nothing special. And that was what was so great about him: his humility. Hermione sat forward in her chair, waiting for Stephanie to step forward, but she did not emerge from the crowd.

Harry looked at Kingsley questioningly as Kingsley immediately looked over at Nikki. Nikki shook her head and began whispering to the nearby Aurors who dispersed quickly. Hushed whispers could be heard from the audience as they waited.

After just a few short moments, Kingsley addressed the crowd, but Hermione could see the concern displayed on his face. “It appears that Stephanie Potter could not be here today. But for her sacrifices, bravery, courage, determination, and acts for this country, I award her the Order of Merlin, First Class.”

There were only a few scattered applauses, mostly from the sides of the audience where the Order members and Aurors were stationed. Suddenly, someone from the middle of the audience stood up and bellowed in protest. “That is preposterous. You are giving a known Death Eater and murderer a medal of honor!”

“She didn’t even have the nerve to show up today!” Someone else yelled and there were shouts of agreements heard throughout the crowd.

Harry stepped forward and raised his wand to his throat, amplifying his voice. His face showed both frustration and disappointment. Harry also wondered where his sister could be, but Hermione recognized his determination. He obviously had something that he needed to say. “Do you blame her?” He demanded over the roar of the crowd.

Everyone silenced and looked at Harry, who was clearly angry at this outcry. “You have done nothing but condemn her for what she has done even though you know little of what she has endured. She has had little privacy since she was discharged from the hospital and has been forced to stay indoors to escape your scrutiny. She does not deserve this treatment.”

“Neither one of you has spoken publicly, how do you think that looks to the public who only wants to know the truth?” Rita Skeeter from the Daily Prophet asked, her quill moving fiercely with every word.

Hermione cringed at the sight of the woman. Harry thought for a moment and Hermione tried to imagine what he was thinking. These people were saying horrible things about his sister who wasn’t even there to defend herself. She knew that Harry must be sick with worry over his sister’s absence. Where in the world is she? Hermione asked herself again.

When he opened his mouth to speak, Hermione expected him to scream and to lose his temper or say something he would later regret. She knew it had been a difficult decision not to provide a public appearance, but he had done so for Stephanie’s protection. They had all debated the idea, but Stephanie was not yet strong enough to endure the public’s stares, questions, and accusations. Instead, his voice was rather calm and soft, though more forceful and passionate than she had ever heard it.

“My good friend, Hermione Granger, helped me prepare a speech about how everyone seemed to do their part and how I did nothing more than most of you. I was supposed to talk about how much those who died sacrificed for us and how wonderfully everyone came together in the end. Without everyone’s involvement, Voldemort wouldn’t have been defeated. But it doesn’t seem to fit right now nor does it matter.” He paused and his eyes scanned the crowd, probably looking for his sister. “Instead, I want to tell you a story.

“And Rita,” He continued, staring at the reporter without even an ounce of hatred. He had forgiven her for how she had treated him. Hermione still despised her, but she understood that it was Rita’s personality; she was never going to change. “I want you to make sure that you get every word I am about to say. I want you to write about this in the Daily Prophet, because I am going to tell you a story of a brave, strong, and determined thirteen year old girl.

“She had lived in a home where she was treated worse than a servant for twelve years. She was continuously humiliated, degraded, berated, and abused physically and psychologically. I had no idea who she was when I first met her by chance in Diagon Alley; Stephanie was only thirteen years old. For some reason she intrigued me, and I couldn’t stop thinking about her, so I went to Professor Dumbledore with my concerns about her safety. It was then that Albus Dumbledore came to her and told her that she no longer had to remain a captive in the Malfoy home. He could protect her from a life of servitude; he could educate her. She would have been safe and well protected.

“But Stephanie did not want that. She wanted to be of use to the Order, who at the time thought that it was possible that Voldemort could return, but didn’t know for sure. And she stayed there for the possibility that she could protect a family member that she had never met, one that didn’t even know she existed. So she stayed on a whim, on a gut feeling of her own; she stayed in that home, and was treated worse than any of you could even imagine, for almost five more years.

“Stephanie stayed there and she suffered more than any of us could ever know. It was under the watchful eye of Lucius Malfoy that she was forced to participate in the Quidditch World Cup attack. She didn’t want to partake in that event nor did she completely understand what she was getting into when she decided to stay behind. And she suffered so much for what she saw that night. Lucius Malfoy forced her to read those Daily Prophet articles about her that covered the front page each day for weeks following the incident. Those articles did nothing but state how she was going to prison and how evil she was when no one had even heard of her before that night. Lucius gained pleasure from watching her break down in spirit.” Hermione was surprised by how calm Harry was remaining. His breathing was heavy and he spoke rather quickly, but there was absolutely no hatred or anger in his voice. He merely wished for the audience to understand and to forgive his sister. He wasn’t even looking at anyone in particular, his gaze moving throughout the crowd, pleading his audience to understand.

“She cut off contact from those who loved her, those who cared about her: Dumbledore, McGonagall, Kingsley, Snape, and Hermione. She ignored them because she felt that she wasn’t worthy of their concern. She isolated herself for almost three months after the attack at the Quidditch World Cup. Can you even imagine the pain she must have endured at only fourteen years old?

“And when Voldemort came back, she risked her life for me. It was then, at that moment the night of the final task of the Triwizard Tournament, that Stephanie declared where her true loyalties lay. She distracted the Death Eaters so that I could escape and then she suffered for it. Voldemort put a horrible curse on her that would change her life and cause her to suffer incredible pain beyond imagination. Stephanie is the only reason I survived the night at the graveyard.

“Voldemort was afraid of her betrayal and took measures to protect himself from the young girl. He put a tracking spell on her so that she couldn’t leave undetected. And if she did try to escape, he would have been able to find her easily, and then murder her. He put a curse on her so that if she used magic against a person that bore the Dark Mark, she would die. And then she would suffer the effects of the final curse he placed on her.

“So don’t tell me that she is the kind of person that deserves to be ostracized. After Voldemort released the Death Eaters from Azkaban, Stephanie had to participate in Dark Arts lessons with Bellatrix Lestrange. She was forced to read horrible Dark Arts books and actively participate in her lessons with Bellatrix, Lucius, and Severus Snape. She watched as Bellatrix tortured children and she was forced to blow up a train station filled with people in Spain. Finally, after so much manipulation and exposure to pain and suffering, Voldemort broke her down. She began to change and willingly commit the murders that she has become famous for and feared over.” Hermione could hear Harry’s voice starting to break, but he did not pause. If he took a moment to compose himself, Hermione knew that he would lose the courage to inform the crowd of the type of person Stephanie had become.

“It was at this time that she once again cut off contact with those that loved her. She knew that she would never be able to survive if she didn’t experience her captivity alone. So, don’t you dare tell me that she deserves what she gets. She doesn’t deserve any of it; she never wanted to do the things she has done and she has been punished way too long for things that were out of her control.

“I wouldn’t be alive today if it weren’t for Stephanie. And none of you would be around either. You can tell me that she killed and tortured people out of pleasure, but I know differently. Those people were on Voldemort’s death list and they would have been killed regardless of her participation. Don’t tell me it’s her fault. She never got any pleasure out of the suffering of others, though it may have seemed that way at times.

“After all she has done for the wizarding community it just boggles me that you would even think of questioning her as a person.” He finished and took a deep breath. Hermione could see tears in his eyes and she wanted to go to him. But like the rest of the audience, she was too stunned by his outburst to move.

After a few moments of silence, a man stood up and spoke to Harry. “But she has shown her true loyalties. She saved Draco Malfoy, a Death Eater and her alleged captor, the night Voldemort was defeated!”

Harry sighed in frustration, but before he could say anything, someone bellowed from the back of the audience. Everyone turned to see who had spoken and Hermione was shocked to see him. He was supposed to be in Germany! What was he doing at Hogwarts? “She saved me! In fact, she saved me at the exact same moment she saved Malfoy. She is no more a Death Eater than I am! Stephanie attacked a Death Eater to save Draco even though she knew that it would kill her.

“What her actions show is that Stephanie cares deeply about even those that have treated her horribly. She is a wonderfully amazing and kind hearted person!” Neville finished and Hermione couldn’t help but notice that his cheeks were flushed.

“But I heard that she tortured you, Neville, and Ginny, too!” Someone else cried out. Hermione looked at Neville, whose mouth opened to answer but Ginny beat him to it.

Ginny stood up nearby and Hermione looked at her with compassion. “She may have done that, but Voldemort would have kidnapped us anyway. He wanted to know where Harry was; he was getting desperate. Voldemort never believed that she would get the information out of us, because, in fact, we didn’t even know. He gave her that impossible responsibility so that she would fail. He wanted to watch her suffer and then he was going to kill her.

“But instead of killing us in the process, she figured out what he was planning. She made sure that four people weren’t killed that night; instead, she sacrificed herself so that we could escape his punishments and torture. And she almost died that night. Only with Dobby’s help was she able to escape. I don’t blame her because Voldemort would have killed me, us, if it hadn’t been for Stephanie Potter. She did what she had to stay alive and I know without a doubt that I would have done the same thing.” Ginny finished and Hermione saw Harry look at her with gratitude.

“So if she is this wonderful and innocent person, where is she?” A woman clutching a young child argued. She looked terrified, as though Stephanie might jump out from some corner and murder them all at any moment. “She looks guilty to me!”

Hermione stood up on her chair so that everyone could see and hear her clearly, and then she addressed the crowd. “Stephanie lost her best friend, a father figure, and the man she loved. She is hurting and I can see why Harry has hesitated to do a press conference.

“I didn’t believe him when he said people wouldn’t understand, that people would still fear her. He was trying to protect Stephanie, he is not trying to appease you. You can believe what you want because none of us are going to change your minds by arguing here today, especially not without her to speak for herself. It would have taken a lot of courage and strength for her to be here today and I know that she wanted to, but she is still recovering from the curse Voldemort made her suffer through. She is still weak and we must think about her well being for once.”

Hermione wanted to continue, but she stopped herself when she noticed that an owl was pecking at Harry’s face and he was trying to swat it away. Finally he realized that there was a letter in the owl’s beak and a look of understanding came over his face. And Hermione watched carefully as Harry opened the letter and his face turned to absolute horror. Harry ran off the stage without another word.

Hermione quickly rushed towards him and she heard Ginny and Ron moving behind her. And she could hear Neville’s pleas for people to move as he pushed his way towards Harry. Kingsley returned to the stage but Hermione wasn’t listening to him anymore. Her gut was saying that something was wrong and that it had to do with Stephanie. She should have been more concerned over her friend’s absence before.

When they caught up with Harry, Ginny grabbed his arm to hold him back. “Harry, what’s going on? What’s wrong?”

When Harry saw Neville, he became outraged and lunged at Neville. George and Mr. Weasley, who had also just approached, had to hold him back.

“What are you doing here?” Harry demanded and Hermione immediately realized what he thought. He thought that Neville had something to do with Stephanie’s disappearance. He was now angry and irrational, not thinking clearly.

Neville looked taken aback, like he didn’t know how to react. He reached into his robes and looked at Harry solemnly. “I came because of this.”

Then he pulled out a tattered piece of parchment. Ginny stepped forward and took it from her friend. Hermione could do nothing but listen as Ginny read the letter aloud:


Hermione wiped the tears from her eyes. She hadn’t realized Stephanie was hurting so much. How horrible of a friend was she for not noticing the severity of Stephanie’s suffering?

Hermione looked towards Harry when Ginny stopped reading. He was shaking, his own letter trembling in his hands. “He has her.” He whispered disbelievingly, shaking his head.

“Who has her?” Hermione asked, gently taking the letter from his hands. Ginny continued to hold onto Harry’s arm tightly, though Mr. Weasley and George had released him.

“Malfoy.” Harry said through clenched teeth and Hermione looked down at the letter. No, it couldn’t be true. Her voice trembled as she read it aloud:


Hermione folded the letter and placed it inside her robes. Malfoy wouldn’t be stupid enough to take Stephanie to the Burrow and then tell them about it, would he? Hermione couldn’t see Malfoy making such an amateur move.

“She came to see me in Diagon Alley. He must have taken her from there.” George said thoughtfully, realization of his mistake hitting his face hard. He turned to Harry. “I’m sorry, Harry. I asked her to wait for me so that we could come together, but when I was ready she was already gone. I thought she decided to just come on ahead. I never thought she was in any danger; I should have told her to stay inside the shop until I was ready to leave.”

“She wouldn’t have listened to you, anyway.” Harry said, but he was watching Kingsley from afar. The Minister had left the stage where McGonagall was finishing the memorial service. Now he was talking with Nikki and he suddenly turned and rushed over to them when he saw them looking in his direction.

“Harry, there’s something you need to see. Come with me, all of you.” Kingsley demanded and Hermione followed the others to the portkey that would hopefully take them to where Stephanie was being held.


It has only been a month since I left Stephanie and her friends. But we all know that I couldn't leave her for too long! And I couldn't wait to start up again, though I can't promise that I will be as quick in posting chapters as the last time. Since it is now summer, things are pretty hectic. My goal is once a week, but I'm not even sure that can happen. What is a positive is that I will post as often as I can! The next chapter should be posted sometime next week! Thanks for coming back and PLEASE leave comments!

Chapter Two: Kidnapped

What was she supposed to get Harry for their birthday? She asked herself for what seemed like the hundredth time. He had provided her with no clues and she had no idea what her brother could want. Their birthday was less than a week away and she was no closer to an answer than when she had first thought about it. She had asked Hermione and Ginny, even Neville and Ron for ideas, but no one could give her a straight answer. Each of them had already gotten their gifts.

Stephanie had never bought a gift for anyone before and didn’t know how or where to start. She had made plans to go shopping with Hermione and Ginny after the memorial service that day, but she needed an idea to start her off.

So, she rummaged in Harry’s room, looking for an idea of what he might like for his eighteenth birthday. Instead, however, she opened his trunk and found something greatly disturbing. She pulled out a pile of neatly placed, perfectly cut, newspaper articles.

Stephanie flipped through them curiously, only looking at the titles; she didn’t need to read them to know what they were about. They read:

Lord Voldemort defeated, Death Eaters Captured
Stephanie Potter taken to St. Mungo’s, Condition Unknown
Kingsley Shacklebolt Named Interim Minster of Magic
Potter and Ministry Officials Remain Quiet
Stephanie Potter Granted Immunity for her Crimes, Protests Continue
Public Demands Minster Shacklebolt’s Impeachment
Death Eaters Continue to Evade Capture
Is He Hiding Something? Potter Remains Silent
Harry Potter to Make Appearance at Memorial Service Saturday.

Stephanie had known that the public would not be open to her freedom, but she never knew the full impact that her presence would have on the others. The people wanted Kingsley impeached as Minister of Magic because he refused to imprison her? She should have been sent to prison instead of endangering Harry and Kingsley’s careers and reputations. She belonged in the cell next to Lucius or Yaxley. Maybe even in the same cell as those or any of the other Death Eaters that had been arrested. And she certainly didn’t want anyone to suffer because of her.

Stephanie knew immediately what she had to do. For weeks now she had isolated herself while being surrounded by people. An Auror always stood guard for her and her friends were constantly present. The three, Hermione, Ron, and Ginny, had rarely left the house. When they had, it was only to visit the Burrow. But she felt that she did not deserve their companionship, and so she remained quiet while in their presence.

Every once in awhile she would break free from her emotional prison, but eventually the darkness of her mind took over once again. And Neville Longbottom was the only person that could make her see clearly, to understand reason.

Often, she pulled out his letters that told of his adventures in Germany and that reassured her that she was not to blame for Severus’ and Fred’s deaths. But with her constant complaining to him about her pain, she knew that she was hurting him. And she could do that no longer; it was too selfish of her because she had already put all of her friends through so much.

Stephanie placed the articles back in the trunk, left Harry’s room, and descended the stairs towards the kitchen. There wasn’t much time so she had to hurry. She had two letters to write before she left. They had to know that she was safe. Once she reached the kitchen, Stephanie sat at the table and quickly scribbled a short note and then took her time on the second. Stephanie wanted them to know that she was alright, and she knew she would be. Stephanie knew that she could take care of herself.

When she finished, she placed the longer letter in her pocket and left the other on the table for her friends to find. “Nikki?” She called out in search of the woman assigned to protect her.

“In here!” Nikki called back. Stephanie followed the sound of the woman’s voice and found her in the den.

She wasn’t sure what she thought of the woman. Nikki Fullbright clearly had had hesitations on taking this specific assignment and Stephanie knew that it was because she had participated in the murder of Nikki’s husband and child. She couldn’t blame Nikki, really, but she had never wanted to assist in those killings. Amycus had commanded her to cast the Killing Curse on the young Mackenzie, but she couldn’t bring herself to do it. Instead, she had to watch as this young child lost her life. And Stephanie knew that she and Nikki would never develop a relationship because of this, even though they definitely would have been friends under different circumstances.

“I think you should go ahead, Nikki.” Stephanie began once she entered the room where Nikki sat, curled up in a chair. “They might need you.”

“No.” Nikki responded quickly, not even looking up from her book. She obviously wasn’t surprised that Stephanie was trying to get rid of her.

“But you are Head Auror.” Stephanie pointed out in her signature sweet and manipulative voice. She was trying to get Nikki to leave her alone for a few minutes so she could make her escape. “You are the best there is. Ron and Hermione will be here in a few minutes. I’ll be fine until then.”

Nikki looked up from her book at last and looked at her questioningly. After a few moments of thought, she closed her book and then glanced at her watch. Then she moved to stand and Stephanie knew she had succeeded. Stephanie smiled.

“I suppose you are right. You will stay in this house until Ron and Hermione arrive.” She pointed her finger at Stephanie as a warning and Stephanie just nodded.

“Of course.” Stephanie responded with a smile. Soon after that, Nikki walked out the front door and Disapparated when she reached the street.

Stephanie immediately ran upstairs to fetch Princess, Neville’s owl that they had been using to write each other. Neville’s grandmother had bought the owl for him when he told her of his trip to Germany. And Stephanie had been a little surprised by his choice of name for the bird.

She pulled the letter out of her robes, gently placed it to her lips for a kiss, and then lowered it into the bird’s mouth. “Take care, Princess.” Stephanie whispered as she sent the owl on its way.

She quickly packed a few things including clothes and the photo album that Harry had given her for Christmas. Then as quickly as she could, Stephanie made her way down the stairs and out the front door, pulling the hood of her robe on top of her head and hiding her face from passersby.

But before she left, she had to do one more thing. Stephanie raised her wand towards her chest and, for the first time in months, felt the familiar tug on her naval. She closed her eyes and imagined the place she knew would be deserted as people prepared to attend the service honoring the country’s dead. When the sensation disappeared, she opened her eyes and saw that she had appeared exactly where she had intended: right in front of Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes in Diagon Alley.

As Stephanie opened the door to the store, the bell sounded to alert the store keeper that a customer had entered. She looked around and walked to a nearby shelf, fingering some of the smaller knick knacks. She sighed as she remembered that this was where Fred had once worked. This shop had been Fred’s passion, his dream. And this store had made him happy. Stephanie smiled in remembrance.

But then she realized that this was also where she had once been sent on a mission by her master to give a message to the Weasley’s. She had destroyed this store and all of the merchandise that Fred and George had created. A sudden pang of guilt surged in her stomach as she thought about that day. Fred had attempted to save her from the Aurors, but she had been too cocky and confident to listen. She had been too manipulated by the Dark Lord to realize that Fred cared about her. It was no wonder that George couldn’t even be in the same room as her, that George hadn’t visited her since the day that she had awoken at St. Mungo’s.

And she jumped when she heard a throat clear. “May I help you?” A familiar and friendly voice called out to her. Stephanie turned towards the man and lowered her hood. He looked nervous when he recognized her. “Stephanie.”

Stephanie smiled gently, put down the toy she had been looking at, and walked closer to him. “George, how have you been?” She asked in an almost whisper.

He leaned over the counter and looked at her interestedly. It was the first time they had seen each other since she had been discharged from the hospital. “Working a lot.”

He didn’t take his eyes off of her and Stephanie looked towards the counter uncomfortably. She couldn’t believe how much he le looked like Fred, though he always had. She suddenly felt a gut-wrenching pain in her stomach from anxiety over this encounter, but she didn’t flinch. She began to play with her fingers nervously. “How about you?” He asked.

“I’ve stayed to myself, mostly.” She replied quietly. She stood there, not sure of how to proceed.

He broke the silence and stood up straight. It was awkward to see him without a smile on his face. “Stephanie, what are you doing here?”

It wasn’t a hostile or angry tone, but he was clearly impatient with her. She looked up at him with her eyes wide and her mouth hanging open for a moment. Finally, she mustered up the courage to speak. “I wanted to apologize, George. I know words can’t make up for what I did, but I wanted you to know that this isn’t what I wanted.”

She took a deep breath, staring straight into his eyes. He opened his mouth to speak, but she interrupted him. He needed to hear what she had to say to him. “He wasn’t supposed to die. No one was supposed to die.”

She looked away for a moment to hide her tears and she felt George’s hands take hers. The gesture gave her the courage to continue. “I went into battle to die that night. Fred knew, but he let me go, anyway. We separated because I didn’t want him to watch me die. Had I not been so selfish, if I had been by his side, Fred would still be here today.”

“You don’t know that.” George whispered authoritatively and Stephanie looked away again. George still held her hands as he directed her to look at him. Why was he so much stronger than she was? “His death was a tragic accident, that is all. You are not to blame just as I am not at fault. He died in war so that Voldemort could be defeated. Horrible, yes. But you cannot blame yourself; no one else does.”

“But-” She began, but he stopped her.

“Enough. Come here.” And he pulled her around the corner of the counter and wrapped her in a tight embrace. She felt safe in his arms, as though Fred was holding her once again. Finally, he pulled her back and smiled at her. “Are you going to the service?”

Stephanie nodded her head and he spoke again. “I have a few things left to do here, but then I can escort you there. You’ll be alright, Stephanie. We all will.”

“I miss him so much.” She whispered, looking up into his eyes. Tears were rolling down her cheeks.

“So do I, Stephanie. So do I.” He spoke softly and she could hear the pain in his voice. Finally, he let go of her hand and she wiped the tears from her face. “I’ll wait for you outside.”

She nodded to him, knowing that she couldn’t run away now. She had nowhere to go and she couldn’t be alone. She needed her friends much more than they needed her. And she was just realizing how important her friends were going to be in her recovery. She couldn’t leave them; she had to face her fears instead.

She stepped outside, took a seat on the curb, and waited for George to finish. But suddenly her arm began to burn intensely and she cried out in pain. It felt like she was being branded with a hot metal iron. She leaned forward and rocked, holding her arm. And she tried to remain silent, attempting to conceal her pain from George, who was just inside the store.

Stephanie tried not to look around; instead, she placed her head in her lap. The pain of the Malfoy Crest on her arm had been growing stronger with each day, but this was different. She knew that he had to be close by and so she wasn’t startled when she heard the snide voice of a young girl behind her. “Draco was right; you are a horrible excuse for a servant. You should know by now to come when you are summoned.”

Stephanie looked up and saw Pansy Parkinson smiling down at her with a wand raised. Stephanie quickly reached into her robes and retrieved her own wand. “I do not serve Draco Malfoy any longer. I will not come when he calls. Not now and never again.”

“That’s too bad you say that.” Pansy giggled, shaking her wand playfully. This was the first time that they had been face to face since Stephanie had stopped serving the Malfoy family. It was weird and Stephanie quickly remembered a time when she felt jealous of Pansy. Draco had taken the girl on a date and Stephanie had only hoped to have a special moment like that.

But Stephanie was still prepared to fight this girl even though she wasn’t her strongest. Lately, she had been tiring easily with any amount of activity and hadn’t used her wand for defensive or offensive magic in two months. In fact, she had only just Apparated herself that day for the first time since leaving the hospital. But she wasn’t afraid of what could happen to her.

“Where is Draco, Pansy?” Stephanie glanced towards the store where George could not be seen through the window. She figured that he must have been in the back room. “The Wizengamot will be lenient with him if he surrenders.”

“Stephanie Potter thinks that I would lower myself to surrendering!” Draco’s smooth voice cackled from the dark shadows nearby as Pansy laughed uncontrollably. Her surprise must have shown on her face because he smiled evilly at her. Stephanie had known he was near but never expected him to show himself in public in order to retrieve her. She knew why he had come and she couldn’t let him succeed.

She turned in his direction and silently yelled “Stupefy!” in her head. But she was too slow, too tired, and too out of practice; he moved out of the way as the spell crashed into the wall behind him. She tried again, but her wand immediately flew from her hand. Pansy reacted quickly to Stephanie’s attack on Draco and had been the one to disarm her. Stephanie yelled at herself for allowing Pansy to disarm her. How could two mediocre wizards render her defenseless? She didn’t have any time to think as she looked back at Draco who was in the process of muttering a spell under his breath. Suddenly everything went black and she fell to the ground, unconscious.

*~*~*~*

Neville let go of the folding chair that had been used as an impromptu portkey transporting the group from Hogwarts. Without looking around, he realized that he, Harry, Ginny, Hermione, Ron, Kingsley, Mr. and Mrs. Weasley, and George had been brought to the Weasley home, the Burrow. Kingsley had taken them to the exact place Draco had instructed in the note for Harry to go.

And Neville would have thought it was a trap except that there were Aurors running in and out of the front door. He watched as Harry looked nervously at Kingsley. “What’s going on Kingsley?”

“We are not sure yet.” Kingsley’s deep voice chilled Neville to the core. It was direly serious and contempt. “It appears that she has been taken hostage, though we cannot be certain by whom at this point.”

Hermione looked nervous. “How do you know?” She asked with as much force as she could muster. Neville eyed Kingsley with anticipation. All he needed to know was that she was alright, that Stephanie was safe.

Stephanie had written that Hermione and Ron were going to pick her up and go with her and Nikki Fullbright to the memorial service. But she had not been there when Ron and Hermione had shown up, so he knew that Hermione must be feeling guilty about not being worried sooner or not protecting Stephanie. Neville watched as Ron wrapped her up tightly in his arms, wishing he could hold Stephanie and tell her that everything would be okay.

Kingsley just looked at her, swallowed, and hesitated before finally answering the question. “There is something you need to see.”

Kingsley gestured with his arms for them to follow him inside the Burrow. Neville’s stomach turned over and his heart flew into his throat as he walked through the front door. Above the fireplace displayed an image of Stephanie Potter, unmoving and trapped, in some sort of small bubble enclosure.

He could see the trees swaying in the warm breeze behind her and immediately his mind thought the worst, as did everyone else’s. He saw the color drain from Harry’s face as his friend saw Stephanie in the air.

“Is she…?” Neville whispered, words suddenly failing him.

“No.” A high-pitched male voice intruded. Neville turned and looked at the short and horribly obese man. He was dressed in Auror leadership robes. “We believe that she is merely unconscious. If you look closely, you can see her chest rise as she breathes.”

“Who are you?” Harry demanded skeptically, looking at Kingsley for clarification.

“I’m sorry, Harry.” Kingsley apologized, stepping closer. Neville took a seat as he watched the exchange. “This is Martin Webber. He is in charge of the new unit I have created whose main focus has been to track down and arrest the Death Eaters who have escaped.”

“So you are sure that a Death Eater did this?” Mr. Weasley asked, concern for Stephanie showing on his face.

Before Kingsley or Martin could answer, Harry stepped forward angrily. “We know who did this and it wasn’t a Death Eater. It was Draco Malfoy.”

“I doubt the young Malfoy could kidnap and restrain Stephanie Potter by himself.” Martin laughed and shook his head. “I have seen what she is capable of. The girl is one of the most powerful witches I have ever seen. And Draco never could prove himself capable or worthy of wearing the Dark Mark, though he was most definitely a Death Eater.”

Neville painfully held his tongue as Hermione pulled out the letter Malfoy had sent to Harry during the service. She explained it to them and George spoke of his encounter with Stephanie. Neville’s concentration wavered, however, and he turned to stare at Stephanie’s body.

Stephanie thought she was hiding her pain from everyone, but he had seen it in her letters. There was just nothing that he could have done all the way in Germany to make things better for her. To be honest, he had contemplated coming home many times during his three weeks of absence, but his grandmother threatened his life if he gave up the opportunity.

In truth, he missed Stephanie more than he ever thought was possible. And he had been miserable the whole time. Getting her letter gave him an excuse to return even though she instructed him not to. It was just something he had to do. He had to be there for her.

“Do you know where she is?” Ron broke through his thoughts and Neville turned his head quickly, returning his attention to Martin Webber.

“The spell transmitting this image appears to be executed perfectly; the source is untraceable, though we are certain that it is a live picture of what is happening to her at this very moment.” Martin looked at Harry through his black framed glasses and down his short, pudgy nose.

Neville didn’t want to understand what he said because it meant that they wouldn’t be able to find her.

“You mean you have no idea.” Hermione clarified and Martin nodded.

“We have Aurors attempting to track her down based on the scenery behind her, outside her encasement. But, quite frankly, she could be anywhere.” Martin spoke slowly, taking the time to look up towards Stephanie who was still unconscious on the hard, rocky ground. “It is going to take some time, but we are certain that we can locate her.”

“We don’t have time. What do we do?” Neville asked, not wanting to sit around and watch his true love die. He felt that he had been doing that exact thing his whole life. It was time to act. “What can we do?”

Martin looked over at Kingsley and Neville took a deep breath. He had learned to expect the statement that was about to come; he had heard it countless times before. They were going to tell them that doing anything would risk her life. How could he just sit by and watch for what seemed like the millionth time? They were always waiting as Stephanie suffered horribly.

“I want you to stay here at the Burrow.” Kingsley said and turned to Harry. Neville was getting angry and frustrated, but still he kept silent. He knew when he was overruled. He always had had difficulty disobeying authority figures, unlike his friends. “I mean all of you.”

Harry looked like he wanted to argue, but Mrs. Weasley placed her hand on his shoulder to calm him. Harry responded by looking to the screen so that he could observe Stephanie. He merely nodded in consternation in Kingsley’s direction.

“The reason, Harry, is that because Draco, if he truly is behind this, has placed this same image in several locations throughout the country, including Hogsmeade, Diagon Alley, and outside the Ministry of Magic.” Kingsley told them and Neville couldn’t understand what that had to do with them staying at the Burrow instead of looking for their friend; she was alone and probably scared. They had to do something!

“It is like he is flaunting this and pointing out what he has done and is going to do.” Hermione swallowed while closing her eyes, clearly picturing what Malfoy could have planned for Stephanie. Neville, on the other hand, kept his mind blank. He didn’t want to know. He looked at her and noticed the disbelief painted across her face. “He wants the world to see her like this.”

“Of course he does. It’s Malfoy for crying out loud.” Ginny responded, shaking her head. Her face was red with anger. Neville wondered what he looked like to the others. He couldn’t define his emotions—he was feeling them all: anger, sadness, fear, disbelief, and loss. He had to endure for another time the uncertainty of whether this would be the last time he would ever see Stephanie alive again.

“How can we remove those other images so that this isn’t made public?” George asked and Martin shook his head.

“All of the feeds seem to be connected. If we take one down, we lose them all.” He informed them soberly.

“Let’s take them down!” Neville could feel himself losing his temper. He could also sense himself losing all control. “Hasn’t her life been made public enough? When will it end?”

“If we do that, then she will be completely alone and we would not know if she is safe.” Kingsley answered matter-of-factly while being understanding of Neville’s argument.

“Isn’t that what Draco wants?” Ginny asked, agreeing with Neville. And he was terribly grateful for her support. “For us to watch her suffer? Wouldn’t it be better if he had more difficulty communicating with us? Wouldn’t that give us more time?”

“I believe that disconnecting the feeds would be Stephanie’s immediate death sentence.” Martin spoke solemnly but with the authority of a man who had already made his decision. “We do not know how he would react or what would happen if he loses his temper. We must keep him calm, so doing so is not an option.”

Neville walked forward so that his face was directly in front of Martin’s. He couldn’t take it anymore! Stephanie was taken captive by the boy who had tortured her for more years than she could even remember and this man was trying to tell them to do nothing. He could no longer sit by and do nothing for her. He had to do something for Stephanie Potter since no one else seemed willing to do so.

“He is going to kill her anyway!” Neville forced his voice to remain calm, though he felt immediate hatred for the man standing in front of him. Martin didn’t even flinch at his outburst, but the others reacted quickly. He felt arms gliding across his chest and forcing him to sit on the couch. All he could do was let them guide him away from Martin Webber, his new enemy, before he did anything he would regret.

“We are not removing the only connection we have to Stephanie.” Kingsley spoke to him, but looked at his friends. Ginny sat next to him and began rubbing his shoulder as his chest heaved from breathing out of anger. “We are not abandoning her and we are not just going to watch her die. We do have some options.”

“What are they?” Harry asked, sounding hopeful.

“We could restrict access to these locations so people cannot watch.” Kingsley explained slowly. “What Draco wants is for the public to watch as she suffers. Maybe he wants them to see her scared and alone, or weak as she still has not fully recovered from the battle. We all know that is one of her greatest fears, for others to see her in a weakened state.

“My guess, though, is that he either wants recognition and rewards for capturing Stephanie since the citizens of Britain continue to fear her or he wants to prove himself to the wizarding community as a skilled sorcerer. Either way, I do agree with Neville that she does deserve her privacy. Limiting access may deter him from harming her and give us more time.”

“No!” George stepped forward immediately. “What about the Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes? I can’t afford to close it for even one day.”

“She wouldn’t want that.” Hermione said, shaking her head. “It’s not just about George’s store; it’s about all the others in those busy places.”

“Then we will just have to concede that all of Britain is going to see how this unfolds.” Kingsley returned his attention back to the screen above the fireplace. Stephanie had not yet moved.

“Has he made contact yet?” Neville asked, referring to Draco Malfoy, though he already knew the answer. He just needed to keep his mind busy or else he would go crazy with worry. “Do we know for sure what he wants?”

Again, Kingsley shook his head. “You know the same as me at this point. He has not yet made any demands and all we can do for Stephanie right now is wait and hope that one of my Aurors gets lucky and stumbles across her.”

“I am going to track him down myself and he will be sorry he-” Harry muttered, returning his attention to the screen. Neville watched as his hands clenched into fists so tight that Harry’s knuckles turned white and then he released them. And Neville watched as Harry repeated this action over and over again.

“Shh.” Ginny hissed suddenly, putting her finger to her lips. “Did you hear that?”

“What?” Neville asked and Ginny immediately pointed towards the image of Stephanie. Ginny was right, Neville could finally hear the background noise. Were they about to get some answers?

Kingsley held up a hand and the Aurors scurrying about the room immediately halted. Everyone turned their attention towards Stephanie Potter.

“Just hold it up and cover me.” Neville scowled as he heard the familiar drawl of Draco Malfoy. He sounded pompous, arrogant, and content and Neville was disgusted at the sound.

“I don’t think she’d try to attack you, Draco,” came the sweetly flirtatious voice of Pansy Parkinson. “She doesn’t even have a wand.”

“Pansy!” Hermione shrieked and quickly placed her hand to her mouth, trying to silence herself so she could hear.

“The girl is more stubborn than a bloody Centaur and I am certain that she will attempt to do so. Just stand there and do as I say.” Draco demanded and he finally came into view.

He looked thinner than usual, but his clothing was impeccably clean. He had obviously taken good care of himself while he was in hiding. Neville wondered where a wealthy pureblood snob would hide from persecution. Neville hoped that it was in a hole in the woods, though he doubted it.

“Of course, Draco.” Pansy was clearly swooning over the attention Malfoy was providing her and Neville couldn’t even see her.

Then, Draco looked right at them and flashed a bright, but evil, smile. “Harry, I’m glad that you could join us today. Shall we wake her now?”

Draco laughed and Neville clutched the arm of the couch as Malfoy turned towards Stephanie and raised his wand. Stephanie immediately began thrashing about and reached for her throat as though she was choking. Draco and Pansy’s laughs could be heard as Stephanie struggled to catch a single breath of air.


So I posted much quicker than I thought I would! I just loved this chapter so much that I had to share it immediately! My favorite was the part between Stephanie and George. And now you have a few questions answered. Draco has Stephanie. But why does he have her? What is he going to do to her? We'll just have to wait and see. I will try to post the next chapter in a few days, but I'm not sure if I'll be able to get to it. Leaving me feedback always motivates me to write quickly! (That was NOT meant to be a bribe of any sort!) Have a great rest of the weekend!

Chapter Three: Draco’s Demands

Stephanie woke with a start the same way she had been awakened many times before, but it didn’t make the situation any less terrifying. She couldn’t breathe and she reached for her throat as though the action would clear her airway.

She had no idea where she was or why she was choking. But as suddenly as it started, the pressure on her chest released and she could breathe again, though the burning sensation in her lungs remained.

Stephanie lay still, gasping for breath when a chilling sound filled the air: Draco Malfoy’s familiar and tormenting laughter. She got a sudden feeling as though she was thirteen again, just after she had first made contact with her brother in Diagon Alley. She knew she was at Draco’s mercy once again, and that frightened her more than anything had in a long time. More now than ever before, she knew that he was trying to prove himself to a father who would never fully accept him as he was.

As her lungs began to refill with air and recollections of how she had gotten there came back to her, Stephanie slowly turned her body and was able to see the young Malfoy eyeing her with malicious hunger. He had been waiting for this moment since the night she had assisted in the Dark Lord’s defeat, probably even longer than that.

“Stephanie Potter.” He muttered. She forced herself to stand, though her legs felt tired and weak. She almost fell over, but regained her balance in time. Stephanie was embarrassed to even look at Draco while she was in this condition.

So instead, she looked at Pansy Parkinson and saw the girl’s arm waver violently in her direction, pointing a wand at her threateningly. With one hand, Draco gestured for Pansy to stand down and warned her to stay back.

“Draco Malfoy.” Stephanie sputtered, not taking her eyes off him now. She was defenseless against him, but she would not show him that she was afraid. She refused to give him any more ammunition.

“You have disrespected me by neglecting to come when I called you and once again by your lack of properly addressing me as your master.” The smile disappeared from his face as he raised his wand again, but she didn’t flinch; she didn’t want him to think that she was terrified, even though she was. She didn’t want to die, not after she had survived through so much. “Bow down before me, girl. Bow before your master and show the world who you serve.”

He had returned to his old ways, before she knew she had a name. He had returned her to a time when she thought that she was alone in the world. Draco had called her “girl” and she was surprised by how upset she felt by this. He thought he owned her, but he did not. No one owned her any longer and she would not stand to be treated like a servant for one more moment, even if it meant her death.

She lifted her head up high and took a step closer, trying hard not to wobble. She attempted to appear stronger than she was, though she doubted that Draco would hesitate in harming her. “I do not serve you and I will never bow down before you.”

“I said bow!” He demanded but Stephanie held her ground. He twisted his wand and she could feel him trying to perform the Imperius Curse, but she did not allow him to penetrate her mind. Sweat began to drip down his forehead as he concentrated harder even.

Draco looked at her for a moment with a blank expression and she knew that he must be wondering why his spell wasn’t working. Then, as if a light bulb went on in his head, he started laughing. “Of course. That traitor taught you the art of Occlumency. I should have remembered that. But never fear, dear girl. I have other ways to make you bow before your master. Now, bow.”

She didn’t say anything; she didn’t want to give him any form of pleasure. She would refuse as long as she could. Stephanie could not let him win. But he continued to smirk at her as if he knew a secret that she did not. He opened his mouth and Stephanie knew at once what was coming. She willed herself not to flinch and she clenched her jaws so that she would not scream. “Sectumsempra!”

He called out the spell his former mentor had created and Stephanie immediately collapsed to the ground with one long gash cutting across both her legs and blood gushing from the wound. She felt the blood drain from her face as it rushed towards her injury. There was no laughter at this. Draco and Pansy just stood and watched her as she attempted to place pressure on her bleeding legs. Stephanie would not beg for her life; she knew that she was going to die right there.

She had survived so much and overcome tremendous odds only to die at the hands of Draco Malfoy. She was disgusted with herself. Stephanie felt the tears flow down her cheeks, not at the pain, but at the disappointment she held in herself.

“Say it.” Draco said with a hint of amusement in his voice. Stephanie looked up at him and knew that she must have been a sight to see, pathetic in her own right. He repeated himself. “Say it.”

“Master.” She whispered, barely moving her lips. Stephanie knew that she was at the mercy of this boy. She couldn’t believe she was giving in; she was so much stronger than that. Be she didn’t want to die. She just hoped that Harry wouldn’t be too disappointed in her when he found out what she had done.

“What?” Draco said, coming forward with a huge smile on his face. “I couldn’t hear you.”

“You are my master.” Stephanie forced herself to say the words she never wanted to say again. But she couldn’t die. She couldn’t die; she just couldn’t.

Times may have been rough lately, but she had never wanted to survive more than at that moment. She needed to survive just to defy Draco.

“Good.” He smiled again and waved at Pansy. She strolled over to Stephanie as slowly as she could and finally knelt down beside her.

Stephanie watched as the wound closed itself and the blood stopped flowing. The pain from her injury was gone, though her weakness still remained. Pansy stood with a scowl and returned to her post, but Stephanie couldn’t relax.

“Now that we have agreed on your position, girl, let us get down to business.” Stephanie gasped in surprise when Draco leaned down and pulled her to her feet by the ponytail that dangled on the back of her head. She had a random thought about how she would never wear her hair up again, and she smiled at her own little diversion from the current situation.

Draco didn’t notice her weak smile as he dragged her quickly to what appeared to be a floating butterfly, though her legs felt as though they were on fire with each step she was forced to take.

“Smile for your brother, Stephanie.” Draco said viciously, and then he dug his wand into her throat.

Her eyes suddenly went wide in embarrassment. She snapped her head towards Draco, hoping that she had heard him wrong. But he was smiling profusely; he knew exactly what was going through her mind. “I am fairly certain that your brother heard you tell me where your loyalties lie and which side you truly serve.”

He threw her to the ground and Stephanie landed with a loud thud. All of her energy drained and all she could do was lay there and listen to Draco’s voice as he spoke to the floating butterfly that must have been serving as some sort of camera.

Harry had seen her; he had heard her call Draco her master. Her brother would not fault her, Stephanie knew that much, but it was something she never wanted the famous Harry Potter to hear coming from her lips. And she didn’t care about the others knowing about it, as she knew they would be by his side. She was just afraid Harry would do something drastic in an attempt to protect her.

“My family was unfairly persecuted with fabricated allegations. I want my father and mother released from Azkaban immediately.” Draco spoke and Stephanie knew that even if Harry convinced Kingsley to release Lucius and Narcissa Malfoy from prison, Draco would kill her anyway. “I suggest you do this quickly if you want to see her alive again.”

“No.” Stephanie whispered and Draco turned around, clearly amused by her courage to speak.

“What?” He demanded authoritatively.

She remained silent at his stare, so he walked over to her, kneeled at her side, and pulled her ponytail so her head was level with his. “What did you say?” He hissed in her face.

“I said no.” Stephanie gasped as he pulled on her hair even harder. Again he yanked her to her feet and drug her useless legs towards the butterfly.

He smirked at her. “Potter, your sister seems to have something to say.”

He pulled her hair back so that she was looking directly at the butterfly, her only link to the outside world. “Don’t come looking for me. And don’t release Lucius and Narcissa.”

It took all her energy to speak as she was still recovering from her blood loss, but her mind was clearer than it had ever been. She absolutely did not want the Malfoys to be free just so that she could be spared. Draco had a point to prove and she would not escape it without a wand. She was going to die, but she would never beg Draco for her life and she would never put Harry in harm’s way.

She looked with pleading eyes towards the butterfly. “Leave me here. Please, just once, do as I ask.”

Again he pushed her to the ground and he turned back towards the butterfly. “Release my parents or she dies!”

He then motioned for Pansy to open the door, which she did without a sound. And Stephanie watched the two leave her alone in her enclosure. Stephanie breathed in relief and lay there for a long while, just thinking about how she would soon be able to join her mum and dad, Fred, Sirius, Severus, Dumbledore, and Dobby. She smiled.

*~*~*~*

“Ha ha!” Ron laughed while pointing at Harry. Harry smiled at his friend as he conceded that Ron had finally beaten him at exploding snaps. “I got you!”

“Yeah, but only because he’s a little distracted at the moment.” Hermione pointed out. Ron looked at her with disappointed puppy eyes.

“Do you always have to ruin my fun?” He folded his arms and pouted. Ginny had to laugh at her brother because he really could be a baby at times.

“You only bring it on yourself.” Ginny added with a raised eyebrow.

“You do make it easy.” Harry commented. Ginny looked at him and smiled.

They were still at the Burrow, watching Draco hold Stephanie captive. Neville had wanted to go after her, and for a short period of time Ginny did too, but Kingsley had ordered them to stay.

Stephanie had also made her wishes known by instructing them not to look for her, though Stephanie had not said anything about the Aurors searching for her. Ginny knew better than to disobey Stephanie, so they stayed where they were.

They had been watching for approximately three hours and Stephanie had barely moved. When Draco had left her alone, Stephanie had laid in that one spot for close to forty-five minutes. The camera, or whatever was capturing the image, floated closer to her, and they could all see the smile painted on her face as she tried to rest.

It had been weird to see her smile in that situation, but Ginny knew that Stephanie was alright. They had all seen Draco force Stephanie to call him master, but Ginny was secretly glad she had given in. Draco would have killed her if she hadn’t. And Ginny also knew that if Stephanie had realized her friends could see what was happening, that she probably never would have saved her life that way. But Stephanie was clearly comforted by the fact that her brother and friends could see her.

Now, Stephanie was in a sitting position, staring out beyond what they could see, and she was still smiling. Every so often, she would stare directly at them and say a few simple words: “For me. Go on with your life and let me be at peace.” And then she would return her gaze off into the distance.

That was why they weren’t crying for her, they weren’t waiting for a miracle to happen. After Kingsley had left, they had decided, together, to stay at the Burrow just to provide her with the support she needed. They could go out and look for her, but Stephanie didn’t want that. And they didn’t know what Draco had up his sleeve; he was desperate and could do anything. No. They decided to stay put and kept busy by playing cards.

Just as Hermione began to deal the cards for another round, the door opened. Harry shot up quickly and Ginny cocked her head hopefully.

“What has my son done now?” Ginny’s heart dropped into her stomach. Lucius Malfoy was there, at her house.

They seriously weren’t going to let him go, were they? Harry wouldn’t allow it. But even she knew that if Kingsley wanted it, Harry couldn’t stop it from happening.

“Are you sure this is a good idea, Kingsley?” Ginny saw Professor McGonagall as she came into view. She was keeping a watchful eye on Lucius as he was escorted into the living room. Several Aurors followed behind and kept their wands raised in his direction.

He looked much different than the last time she had seen him at the hospital. He was now very thin and had shadows under his eyes. His hands and legs were shackled together by a spell that would not allow the man to run away.

“Afraid, are we, Minerva?” Lucius smirked. His voice croaked and sounded raw. Ginny realized that this was probably the first time he had spoken to anyone since his trial.

McGonagall merely returned his smile. “Of course not, Lucius.”

“What is he doing here?” Harry and Neville looked at each other as they spoke in unison. Neville had also stood and was now at Harry’s side. Ginny just sat there and watched.

“We need to find her and Lucius may be able to help us.” Kingsley answered calmly, looking Harry directly in the eyes.

“What has that girl gotten herself into now?” Lucius looked bored, but Ginny could tell that he was curious.

“She has a name.” Hermione interjected. “Call her by her name.”

“I’m sure she does.” Lucius rolled his eyes and turned to Kingsley. “Why have I been brought to this filthy,” he paused with a disgusted look on his face to look the house up and down, “residence?”

Ron jumped out of his seat and lunged for Lucius, knocking the man off his feet. Several hands rushed to pull Ron off the prisoner, but Ginny just sat there. He may have repented for his treatment of Stephanie, but he was still a vile excuse for a human being.

After the commotion had settled down and Ron was restrained, Kingsley turned to Lucius and spoke. “Draco has taken Stephanie hostage and has asked for your and Narcissa’s freedom in exchange for Stephanie’s safe release. However, we cannot allow that. What we need from you is to know where he is.” Kingsley finished by gesturing to the floating image above the fireplace where Stephanie sat, hugging her knees, and staring into the wilderness. She was still smiling.

“I will not assist you in capturing my only son.” Lucius snarled at Kingsley, the playful tone and expression disappearing almost immediately. “What could there possibly be in this for me if I did decide to help you?”

“You owe her.” Neville said quietly and Lucius laughed obnoxiously.

“I owe her nothing. She has her life and her freedom though I no longer have mine.” He responded coolly.

“Due to your own choices.” Harry answered and Lucius looked at him in surprise.

“Please.” Hermione asked innocently. “He is going to kill her.”

Lucius looked at her in amused disbelief. It was like he thought her to be incredibly naïve. “You do realize, little mudblood, that he is probably going to kill her anyway.”

“Then you need to help us, if only to spare the life of your child.” Hermione responded with a soft tone.

Lucius looked away for a moment and appeared to be deep in thought. He watched Stephanie on the screen for awhile and then turned back towards them.

“Fine. I will help you.” He spoke very slowly and Ginny exhaled. She hadn’t even realized that she had been holding her breath. “If he is thinking at all, he will be in a country that does not allow British authorities to enter. But as to his whereabouts, I am not sure of. The scenery does not look familiar.”

“What about the device he is using to keep her in?” Kingsley prodded.

“This is called a Portable Quarantine Bubble. It is a device for the main purpose of what you are seeing now, keeping an eye on prisoners.” Lucius explained without emotion. “Only those that know the password spell may release those inside. There is only one man that I know of who has made them, you could try meeting with him. His name is Karl Frankewicz and he lives just outside Newcastle.

Kingsley turned to a couple of Aurors who left with a nod. Lucius then turned towards Harry and spoke with surprising earnest. “This has nothing to do with the girl,” Lucius paused and looked at Hermione, who was silently scolding him, “Stephanie.” He corrected himself, now allowing himself.

“My son is purely doing this deed to gain my attention and approval. Please do not harm him for his own stupidity.” Lucius risked a moment of weakness to ask for the safety of his child.

“He would not have done this, then, if you would have shown him love and admiration as a boy!” Mrs. Weasley shrieked, making Ginny jump in surprise.

“Do not tell me how to raise my child, Molly.” He spat in response.

“I will say whatever I wish, Lucius.” Ginny’s mum just glared at Lucius, who stared back unblinkingly.

Neither spoke until Kingsley announced that it was time to return Lucius to Azkaban. When they were almost out the door, Lucius turned back and asked, “Tell me one thing. Why is she smiling?”

“I honestly don’t know.” Harry responded with a smile of his own as Lucius turned and was escorted back to Azkaban by Kingsley and four other Aurors.

*~*~*~*

“Daddy! Daddy!” She tugged on her father’s robes while looking up towards him. “What is everyone staring at? Who is that? What is that boy doing to her?”

“In a moment, pumpkin.” Her father looked down at her with a scold. “Daddy’s talking right now.”

Abby silenced immediately. She knew better than to interrupt her father when he was talking with one of his friends. And she wanted to get closer to see what everyone was looking at, but she didn’t want to lose her father the crowd. Instead, she grabbed hold of his hand and snuck in front of him where there was a gap in the crowd. She looked into the air and watched.

She and her father had been in Knockturn Alley that afternoon because her father had needed to do some shopping. Abby always hated going there because many of the people there frightened her. She always held her father’s hand when he would take her to that dreadful place. But when he forced her to come along, he would usually take her for ice cream in Diagon Alley as a reward for being a good girl.

But they hadn’t gotten to the ice cream store yet; her father had run into an old friend and was catching up with him. She didn’t care, though, because she was intrigued by what everyone was watching. Abby had been to Diagon Alley a thousand times before but had never seen anything like that.

“What is so amusing, you pathetic girl?” Boomed the voice of the blonde haired boy that was displayed on the screen. He was hovering over a red-headed girl, but that girl didn’t look afraid.

Abby couldn’t help but think that she would be afraid; that boy looked scary, and she knew that would have clung to her father for her life if she met him in Knockturn Alley. She was interested in why this girl wasn’t scared; quite opposite than that, the girl seemed happy. She was smiling.

The boy raised his arm and slapped the girl hard across the face. Abby gasped and turned around, hugging herself to her father’s legs. Why had that boy slapped the girl? Abby could still hear him talking, though she didn’t want to watch any longer. She didn’t even want her ice cream anymore; Abby just wanted to leave Diagon Alley and go home. A tear rolled down her cheek as she thought about the girl on the screen.

“The world fears the great Stephanie Potter.” The boy spat and Abby flung back around. That was Stephanie Potter? She didn’t look so scary!

Her father had always told her that Stephanie Potter was no good and that she would some day get what was coming to her. But Abby couldn’t believe that the girl had done anything bad in her life; she looked so innocent. It was something about her eyes and Abby couldn’t take her own eyes off Stephanie Potter’s. The boy continued speaking to the girl.

“But I will show them how weak you really are; you can and will be defeated.” The boy smirked at the girl, her own smile unwavering. He patted her cheek and then stood up and walked away. When he was at the door, he turned back around to the girl and smiled a large grin. He seemed so proud of himself. “You are going to die, Stephanie Potter. I don’t see why you seem to be so pleased with the fact that you are going to lose your final battle and end up begging me for your life, dying very publicly and in embarrassment. Father will finally be proud and the world will learn to fear the name Malfoy.”

The boy turned and left. Abby squeezed her father’s hand, hoping that he would realize that she wanted to go home. When he said his name, Abby had gotten chills down her back. Was he a Malfoy? She had once overheard her father speaking to a friend one evening after it had happened: someone named Malfoy had been there that night. Malfoys were not good wizards.

“Yes, Jason. But does Draco have the courage and skills needed to complete the deed?” The man her father was talking to asked. “He was too scared to even attempt to kill Dumbledore; what is different now?”

“Let’s just hope so, Frank.” Her father shook his head at the man. “I am not fond of the boy, but Potter needs to be punished for her crimes. At least someone is making her pay for what she has done.”

“Some say she was a prisoner of You-Know-Who’s.” Frank spoke softly as his eyes darted throughout the crowd. Abby wondered why he looked so nervous when he talked to her father. “Prisoner or no, she betrayed him. It was more her fault than her brother’s that You-Know-Who was defeated.”

“Not here, Frank.” Her father reprimanded in a hushed tone. Then he looked down to Abby and saw that she was listening to their conversation. He smiled at her and patted her on the head. “Shall we go get that ice cream now, pumpkin?”

She nodded her head, though she wasn’t really in the mood for the treat anymore. Her father seemed to dislike the girl she had seen up in the air, but Abby couldn’t help but feel sorry for her. There was something that drew her towards feeling compassionate for the girl they called Stephanie Potter.

Her father said his goodbyes to the man he had been talking to and then squeezed her hand. He began to lead her towards the familiar ice cream store, but Abby stopped in her tracks. When her father looked at her, Abby asked the question that was on her mind.

“Daddy, why did that boy hit that girl?” Abby asked. She knew that her eyes were wide in concern for the girl she had never met, but it didn’t bother her.

Her father kneeled down on the ground so that he was eye-level with her. He took her other hand and squeezed them both. “Pumpkin, this is what happens when a person hurts another person. She has hurt a lot of people, Abby.”

“Is he going to kill her?” Abby could feel the tears coming to her eyes. She wanted to be strong; she didn’t want to cry in front of her father. But she didn’t want this girl to die, either.

“Hopefully.” Her father said under his breath; he must have thought that she couldn’t hear him. Abby looked away for a moment and he let go of one of her hands, placing it on her chin. He gently pulled her chin so that she was looking him in the eyes again. “Abby, you are only eleven years old. You don’t need to worry about things like this.”

He wiped the tears from her cheek, stood up, and pulled her across the busy street. “Let’s get that ice cream I promised you.” He finalized the conversation with a smile.

Abby tried to clear her mind from what she had seen, but she couldn’t make herself forget. She didn’t want that girl to die; she was scared that something horrible would happen. And Abby was afraid that she would never learn of the girl’s fate. She knew better than to ever bring this up to her father again, let alone ask him about the girl he despised. She made a mental note to ask someone at Hogwarts when the school year began in a few weeks.

Abby was going to be a first-year student at Hogwarts. She was a little nervous about leaving home, but she was excited to get away. After evil had come into her life, Abby’s father had become too protective. She couldn’t leave the house without her father or one of his friends accompanying her. Her father was always gone on business trips. All Abby knew was that he owned a business that trained dragons, so she constantly had bodyguards around when he was at work. But at Hogwarts she could be free of her father’s protection. Abby could even make some friends. She smiled at that idea and thoughts of the girl disappeared from her mind.


So here is that chapter! I absolutely loved it! And I introduced a new character: Abby Seabold. What is her role? I guess you'll just have to wait and see!! I have a crazy busy weekend up ahead of me (the rodeo is in town and there are lots of festivities surrounding that) so I won't even have time to think about the story until next week. I am hoping to get chapter four posted by next Wednesday. In the meantime, please feel free to leave me some comments (and motivation to write more quickly!)! Thank you to those that have already taken the time to leave your thoughts! I appreciate them all!!!!

Chapter Four: A Captive's Visitors

They had only been at the Burrow for less than twenty-four hours but it felt like an eternity to him. However, it was much different this time than any of the others before because he could now watch what was happening to his sister, thanks to the arrogant workings of Draco Malfoy. In the many years that Stephanie had been with Lord Voldemort, he had always been asked to just sit at Hogwarts and wonder if she was alright. But he always had faith that she would be okay because she had Professor Snape to look out for her. Harry never fully trusted Snape until it was too late, but he had managed to convince himself that Snape would look out for Stephanie. And Harry had been right; Snape had done all he could for his sister. But he was no longer alive to protect her against Draco Malfoy.

Instead, Stephanie was all alone in a small enclosure with the entire wizard community watching her every move. He was worried about her, but Stephanie’s smile comforted him. Harry felt awkward that Stephanie was the one to comfort him in that stressful time, but it was also nice to see his sister smile sincerely for the first time in a very long time. He could now see that she had been pretending to be happy the entire time she had been at Grimmauld Place.

They had remained at the Burrow, but they had not given up on her; they were merely obeying Stephanie’s request for them not to go out and look for her. Stephanie meant more to all of them than Harry and Ron’s careers as Aurors, so it was not Kingsley’s command that kept them at the burrow. Stephanie had directly and clearly asked them to let her be. She was always the first one willing to sacrifice herself and Harry believed that she would defeat Draco when the time came; she just had to.

The night before, Draco had gotten frustrated with Stephanie’s constant smiling and he had told her that she was going to lose in battle. Harry and his friends had talked about and analyzed the comment deeply and they had come to the conclusion that Draco was planning to give her a wand at some point so that he could defeat her in front of the world. And they all knew that no matter how weak she was, Stephanie would always be much more powerful than Draco. It was just a matter of her confidence to do so.

And her smile completely intrigued them all. It wasn’t a fake smile like he had seen many times in the past few weeks. She was genuinely happy and he couldn’t understand how that could be. She was trapped, held hostage by her long-time nemesis, and had not yet been given any food or water. Yet, there didn’t appear to be an ounce of fear in her body; she was content with her situation. He hoped she didn’t believe that she deserved to be there. More importantly, he hoped that she hadn’t given up hope that she would be rescued. Harry was certain that Kingsley and Martin Webber would find her soon.

“It’s here! It’s here!” Hermione gushed, running through the door that lead from the kitchen. She was waving a piece of paper in her hand as she rushed into the living room where Harry was cuddling in Ginny’s arms. He quickly sat up straight, letting go of his girlfriend.

“What does it say?” He asked with anticipation. Harry had been nervous about what it would say and how it would portray Stephanie, but he was excited to see if the writer had changed her ways.

“Read it out loud.” Neville instructed and Hermione nodded her head. She placed the morning’s edition of the Daily Prophet on the coffee table and they all gathered around it. There were two pictures on the front cover: one was a picture of Harry speaking at the memorial service and the other was of Stephanie in her captivity.

Hermione sat on the floor in front of the table and began reading the article so they could all hear it:

Potter Speaks Out About His Sister’s Innocence

By Rita Skeeter

The Battle of Hogwarts memorial service was one that will be talked about for years to come. However, in the middle of the ceremony, attention was cunningly redirected from the deceased and placed upon the known murderer, Stephanie Potter.

As is widely known, Minister Shacklebolt recently granted the Death Eater immunity for her crimes, and at the time, his act greatly disturbed the country’s citizens. Instead of being given a fair trial with her peers, the girl was to receive no opportunity of being judged for her crimes. Many were outraged by the actions of their new Minister of Magic and his lack of direction and authority as a leader.

To make things worse, the Minister granted Stephanie Potter with an Order of Merlin, First Class for her actions prior to and during the war. But Harry Potter maintains his claim that Stephanie is innocent. The real question here is: How can she be innocent when there were so many witnesses to her acts of destruction, torture, and murder?

During an outburst at the memorial service, Potter claimed that his sister had been held captive by Lucius Malfoy’s, a convicted Death Eater, in his home for many years. Potter stated that Stephanie was forced to learn Dark Arts and was trained by Lord Voldemort himself to murder innocent people. Contrary to his previous statements and more importantly, Potter admitted that his sister willingly committed many of these crimes. Shouldn’t this statement alone be cause enough to try her for her crimes?

If she is innocent, as Potter claims, is it not appropriate for her peers to decide? Is it not unfair to this country and does this decision not undermine the justice system when the Minister, and a close friend of the accused, denies the people’s demands for justice?

It is now clear why Stephanie Potter was absent during the memorial service and was unable to defend herself against such claims, but it seems clear that Draco Malfoy and Stephanie Potter, and who knows how many other uncaptured Death Eaters, are working together. Minister Shacklebolt has mobilized the majority of the country’s resources for locating the girl, leaving Britain unable to defend itself. It shouldn’t be a matter of if a second wave of attacks occurs; it should be a matter of when and where the attack will commence.

My questions to the readers now are these: Do you believe that Stephanie Potter is innocent of her crimes? Potter claimed that Stephanie committed many of those murders so that she could survive. But what makes Stephanie Potter more important and special than those that died?

Many are calling for the Wizengamot to take appropriate actions in reprimanding the Minister for his neglect of the country’s safety. Only time will tell if the voices of the common citizens of Britain will be heard.

“That wench!” Ginny cried out when Hermione had finished reading Rita Skeeter’s article on the memorial service that had occurred the day before.

“I had hoped that she would change.” Hermione crumpled up the paper and threw it forcefully into the unlit fireplace. Harry agreed; that article was better off destroyed than kept as a remembrance.

“It’s alright.” He said, shaking is head in disbelief. “We knew that this was coming. We were prepared for it.”

“But she twisted your words around!” Ginny responded. “You did say that Stephanie committed some crimes willingly, but not in that context!”

“I warned her.” Hermione added, lifting her finger into the air in a scolding fashion. “She should know better. Maybe I think it is time to have a chat with Kingsley about Rita’s Animagus abilities.”

“No.” Harry looked at Hermione. She turned her head and looked at him in surprise. Before he had seen all of those memories Stephanie had to endure, he would certainly have enjoyed watching Rita squirm with another round of an inability to write or being punished for failing to report herself as an Animagi. But he had changed after watching his sister suffer for so long. He understood why Stephanie didn’t want anyone else to suffer and why she always sacrificed herself to protect others. Harry didn’t want revenge and he couldn’t bring himself to blackmail Rita Skeeter again. “She is never going to change. Just let her be.”

“What is wrong with you, Harry?” Ron asked, eyeing his friend suspiciously. “Did you even listen to Hermione when she read the article? She slandered Stephanie!”

“Yeah, I did.” Harry responded with a pleasant smile. “Let’s just say that Stephanie has had a better influence on me than I have been on her.”

“She has had worse articles written about her.” Neville agreed with him and Harry nodded in his friend’s direction.

“Exactly.” Harry commented. “We can’t stop what people write or say. The Wizengamot has already cleared Stephanie of all charges. They are more informed than the public about what she has been through. Kingsley is not going to be impeached and Stephanie is not going to be sent to prison. The rest doesn’t matter.”

“How did you get so rational?” Hermione joked and Harry just smiled again. He didn’t know when it had happened, exactly, but he could feel the changes within himself.

“Forget that.” Ron slapped him on the shoulder playfully. “When did you get so mature, mate? It’s like I don’t even know you anymore.”

“I think it’s cute.” Ginny said and leaned over to kiss him quickly on the lips. His cheeks burned with embarrassment as his friends laughed at his expense.

“So, Hermione.” Neville laughed, changing the subject. Harry was grateful that Neville had taken the attention off him. “Where were you this morning? One moment you were here and the next you were gone.”

“I just needed to run to Hogwarts for a few minutes.” Hermione said. “I had to talk to Professor McGonagall about something.”

“Hermione, just lay off it.” Ron sighed, rolling his eyes, and Harry looked at him curiously. “You are going to do fine on your exams. I am sure she is busy enough without you pestering her every five minutes.”

She shot Ron a warning glance and Harry was just relieved that he wasn’t on the receiving end of that look. He felt sorry for his friend who still had to learn how to hold his tongue.

“I didn’t even mention the exams, Ronald. She did.” Hermione shook her head angrily. “If you must know, I wanted to see if I could help her with anything. I feel so useless just sitting here and I wanted to do something for her.”

“Oh.” Ron said sheepishly. He lowered his head and looked at the coffee table.

“How is she doing, anyway?” Ginny asked. “I haven’t seen her too much, except for a little bit yesterday afternoon and then last night. I imagine she’s going crazy with everything that’s going on.”

Hermione’s mood lightened, but she still looked serious. “She’s busy preparing for the placement exams, O.W.L.S., and N.E.W.T.S. It is going to be tough work scoring all of the exams, sending out letters, and arranging for schedules based on the scores. She only has a week after the exams before the semester starts.”

“Geesh.” Neville whistled. “That would drive anyone bonkers.”

“And she hasn’t found someone to teach Defense Against the Dark Arts, yet.” Hermione added.

“What about Nikki Fullbright?” Harry suggested. “She’s the best Auror that Kingsley has and I’m sure she would be a decent teacher.”

“Kingsley has so few Aurors left that he doesn’t want to spare any of them.” Hermione shook her head. “It’s the curse of the position. No one wants to take it.”

“But it should be broken now that Voldemort is gone.” Ginny said.

“That doesn’t matter.” Hermione responded. “No one wants to risk that it’s still there, though I don’t believe it was ever real. It was most likely just pure bad luck.”

“Someone will come along.” Harry said optimistically. “Dumbledore was always good at finding someone to take the position and I’m sure that McGonagall can find someone.”

“It’s not just that.” Hermione added. “A few of the other professors agreed to come back just for the year. Professor McGonagall isn’t even sure that Professor Sprout will last the first semester. She got injured pretty badly during the battle and just doesn’t want to teach anymore.”

“She must be stressed.” Ginny said and Harry nodded. There must be something he could do for her.

“Did she say if there was anything you could do?” Harry asked, hoping that he could help in some way, too. “I mean, when you asked her?”

“No.” Hermione said in defeat. “She told me to go home and study. She said that she has hired some assistants for the summer that are helping her until the school term starts. But I think I’ll go back to her in a few days and see what I can do.”

“Hopefully Stephanie will be back with us by then and we can all pitch in and help.” Harry said. He leaned back on the couch and returned his attention to the floating image of his sister. She hadn’t slept all night; in fact, she had barely moved from her position against the wall of the bubble. She looked peaceful as she rested her head on her knees and stared off into the wilderness. That pleasant smile was still on her face.

*~*~*~*

He paced in his office and stared out his window, which had a perfect view of the screen displaying Stephanie’s captivity. He had received word that small crowds had gathered before each of the images; there were five in all.

Kingsley decided not to let the prisoners of Azkaban watch the screen that that had been posted outside of the prison. He placed a silencing spell on the prison so that the Death Eaters inside could not hear and a black cover over the image so those with windows could not see. It was degrading enough for Stephanie that the entire wizarding community had access to watch her suffering, so he would not allow her enemies the same leisure.

He jumped when the intercom buzzer interrupted his thoughts, even though he had been expecting it. “Yes, Madeline?” He asked.

“Martin Webber is here to see you, Minister.” The cheerful voice of his secretary announced.

Kingsley took a deep breath, sat down in his chair, and answered. “Send him in.”

Kingsley was awaiting an update on the Auror’s progress of locating Stephanie. He had sent two senior Aurors, Kristin and Mathew LaMonaco, to question Karl Frankewicz about the Portable Quarantine Bubble, but they had had little luck in obtaining any useful information.

The man had no recollection of Draco Malfoy or where he was headed. Pansy Parkinson had been the one to purchase the item and then she erased his memory. Though his Aurors could recover that much of the man’s memory, the rest had been properly destroyed. That had been another dead end.

“Is there news?” He asked wearily as Martin entered his office. His friend nodded his head.

“My sources tell me that Draco boasted of going to South America with the girl. He was seen purchasing groceries the very morning that Stephanie was kidnapped.” Martin explained as Kingsley listened intently. “I need your permission to send as many Aurors as possible to that location.”

Kingsley looked him up and down. He didn’t like the idea of sending away so many Aurors, but they needed to find the girl before Draco murdered her in front of the whole world.

“Is this a credible source, Martin?” He inquired.

“The best one I have at my disposal, Minister.” Martin responded.

Kingsley reluctantly picked up his quill and signed the piece of parchment his friend had given him. He was going to authorize the use of the Aurors that Martin Webber requested.

“Very well.” He instructed. “Take as many as you need. But make sure to bring her home safely.”

Martin nodded and turned to leave the Minister’s office without another word. Kingsley turned in his chair to look out at the magical projection of Stephanie Potter as she hugged her knees and smiled to the distance.

*~*~*~*

If it hadn’t been for the sun and the moon, Stephanie would have lost all track of time. But she had seen the moon three times since she had been placed in that bubble and held hostage by Draco Malfoy. And her time there wasn’t as bad as it would have been for the others because she had been a captive of different sorts for most of her life. She knew what it was like to spend many lonely hours alone. Stephanie just took the time to relax and did some much needed thinking.

She even attempted to do some of the physical therapy exercises that the Healers at St. Mungo’s had instructed her to do each day in order to regain her strength, but all of her muscles hurt something fierce. She could barely stand because of the injury she had sustained to her legs on her first day there.

Draco had left her pretty much alone through most of that time. She could see him and Pansy off in the distance; they were always on the lookout for people searching for them. She was pretty sure they had put up some spells to deter muggles and hide them from view of other wizards. Aurors had ways of detecting these spells, so they weren’t foolproof, but Stephanie knew that Draco had chosen this location because the odds that someone finding them would be minimal. And she had a sneaking suspicion that he was getting help from someone, though no one else ever came near their campsite.

Stephanie was doing her best to defy Draco. She was afraid at the beginning but that first night when Draco told her that she was going to get to fight him, Stephanie knew she would have a chance to fight for her life, and she knew that she would fight to the death. This gave her hope that all wasn’t lost. Her only concern at that point was how she was going to defeat Draco without killing him because she would rather die than commit another murder, even if it was Draco Malfoy.

He came in twice a day and tried to get her to tell Harry to release his parents, but she remained silent each time that he entered. She was going to do nothing to help him succeed in humiliating her and freeing his parents. He would then go to the butterfly camera and tell Harry and her friends that they needed to release Lucius and Narcissa otherwise she would die. He was getting angrier and more frustrated with each passing day, and Stephanie was highly amused.

What bothered him the most, however, was the fact that she never stopped smiling. It drove him absolutely mad. And that is exactly why she did it. She was fighting Draco with one simple action because it was the only thing she could do at that moment. Even though she was probably going to die, Stephanie was happy, and she refused to hide that fact.

She was happy because she would soon be able to be with the one man that she loved, the person who had taken care of her for so many years, her best friend, her mentor, and the parents she had never known. As much as she wanted to live, it was a relieving feeling to know that she would never again have to suffer. Harry would be alright without her; Stephanie knew that they all would be.

And it wasn’t as though she was giving up on life, she just understood that it was finally her time to go. She was going to keep on fighting as long as she could, but there was only so much she could do in her weakened and fatigued state. If Kingsley or the Aurors did happen to stumble across her, Stephanie knew that Draco would have devised some sort of way for him to transport her away or to kill her in front of them. As incompetent as he was sometimes, Draco was not a complete imbecile. He was his father’s son, after all.

During her time in the enclosure, Stephanie did a lot of thinking about these issues. She had had nothing to eat or drink the entire time she had been there and she knew there wasn’t much time left for her. Because of the summer heat, Stephanie was severely dehydrated and had started to hallucinate. She knew she was only imagining these things, but she enjoyed the company they gave her. It gave her entertainment and kept her busy.

She had spent a little time playing with a black, scraggy dog, a male deer, and a werewolf. Stephanie knew deep down in her heart that she was imagining the Animagus forms of her father, Sirius, and Remus Lupin, but she didn’t care. She got to play fetch with a dog and pet a deer! For some reason her mind refused to show her father and his friends in their human forms, so she had not been able to dialogue with them.

And she laughed at how amusing it must have looked to Harry and her friends when they saw her playing fetch with an imaginary dog and an invisible ball. They must have thought she was going bonkers. But it was amusing and Stephanie had to laugh at herself. Deep down, she thanked Draco for providing her no nourishments. Had she been given food and water, she probably would not have been able to converse with the three animals.

But nothing had appeared to her in quite awhile, and so Stephanie lay down on the hard ground and attempted to get some rest. She had started to move as little as possible because she knew the more energy she utilized meant the shorter her life would be. Draco must have known that she was near death, and she wondered why he was waiting so long to finish her off.

After what Stephanie thought was only a few moments of rest, she heard a foot shuffling on the ground. She ignored it because she figured it was just Draco coming back to harass her. She heard the sound again and opened her eyes. It wasn't Draco and Stephanie knew she had to be hallucinating again. He looked so real, yet she understood that his actual presence was impossible.She quickly sat up and tried to stand but she lost her balance and fell down. She scraped her bare knee on the rocks and it started to bleed, but Stephanie ignored it as she stared straight ahead of her.

“You’re dead.” She whispered, the tears coming to her eyes. Stephanie didn’t want to cry, especially not when Draco could notice her at any moment. Stephanie didn’t want to show Harry a moment of weakness, either; she needed him to know that she was strong enough to endure this alone. But she couldn’t help herself and she let the tears flow freely. “What are you doing here?”

“You do realize that I am only an image in your head and that I am not really here?” Fred Weasley smiled back at her and she nodded. He walked closer to her and took a seat next to her shaking body. She reached out her hand to rub his shoulder, to feel the touch of his skin. But her hand went right through his body and he smiled weakly at her. “As I am only a mere hallucination, you are not able to touch me.”

“What are you doing here?” She asked again, her words were becoming more difficult to form. She almost forgot where she was; Stephanie only had eyes for Fred, the love of her life.

“I am here to be with you, Stephanie.” He winked at her and Stephanie smiled through her tears. “I wanted to support you.”

“I miss you so much.” Stephanie spoke softly, trying to fully understand what was going on. “It hurts more than I thought was ever possible.”

“It wasn’t your fault that I died, you know.” He looked at her with compassion in his eyes; his smile had disappeared at the formation of her tears. “I know you wanted it to be you, but it was just my time to go. And I’m glad it was me instead of you. I just want you to be happy for once.”

“I’m not sure that I can be happy.” Stephanie responded, reaching up to wipe the tears from her eyes. The butterfly flew closer and Stephanie just let it buzz by her head. She knew that Harry was probably thinking she had lost her mind, but she didn’t care. She was finally with Fred again, and soon she would be with him forever. “Not without you.”

“I know it’s hard, Stephanie.” Fred reached out and stroked her arm, though his hand disappeared when it made contact with her skin. Even though she could not feel his touch, she felt a chill go down her spine as if he were really sitting there next to her. And for some reason, Stephanie honestly thought that Fred was speaking through her imagination. “But you will be happy again, I promise.”

“How?” She asked, looking him deep in the eyes. They sparkled with more life and happiness than she remembered. He had gone to a wonderful place and Stephanie wanted nothing more than to join him. But she didn’t say so. “I loved you.”

“And I love you still. But I don’t want my death to hinder you from being happy.” Fred spoke more honestly and with more heart than she had ever heard him before, even more than when she had poured her heart and soul to him at Shell Cottage, the home of his brother, Bill. “There are people out there who love you and care about you. You need to keep going for them, if not for yourself.”

“I want to.” Stephanie whispered. “But I just don’t see a future for myself.”

Fred smiled at her. “One of your close friends cares about you more than you know. I could always see it in his eyes and it always bothered me that I was the person that won your heart while he had to watch with his own heart breaking. I know that you care for him as well. I want you both to be happy.”

“Who?” Stephanie asked. She was completely puzzled. What did he mean that one of her friends cared about her more than she knew? “Are you saying this person loves me?”

“And has for a very long time.” Fred smiled a big grin, but she also saw tears in his eyes. “You need to gain the confidence to realize that you do deserve happiness and love. You are not a bad person, Stephanie. You can love and be loved. Let him do so because I know that he will take good care of you. He will never let you go.”

“Who is it?” She asked. Who in the world could it be? It obviously wasn’t Harry. Ron was desperately in love with Hermione. And it couldn’t be Neville. They had been good friends for a long time, but she didn’t think that he could ever love her. Could it be George? That would be a little weird, but it could be. Did Fred want her to spend more time with his brother? She was too puzzled beyond words.

“That is not important right now, Stephanie.” Fred winked at her in amusement. “You will figure it out in time when you are ready. But right now, there’s someone who wants to talk to you.”

She nodded, too frustrated and exhausted to fight with him. Stephanie just wanted to enjoy the little time she had with Fred. He returned her nod and suddenly Albus Dumbledore, Severus Snape, and Sirius Black appeared inside her enclosure.


Here is chapter four! I hope that it was to your liking and I apologize for the horrible cliff hanger! I had originally placed all of Steph's POV in this chapter, but I had to add Kingsley's conversation with Martin Webber somewhere. And that was the only place it fit! But I have a good chuck of the next chapter written (because of that fact) and I promise to post it sometime this weekend, probably on Sunday! So, please leave feedback and tell me what you think!

Chapter Five: Stephanie Fights Back

“Stephanie, we are running out of time.” Professor Dumbledore stepped forward, leaving Sirius and Severus in the background. “You must keep on fighting. Do not give up and you can survive this.”

“I haven’t given up.” Stephanie sat up a little straighter, trying to make herself appear more confident than she felt. This man had seen her at her worst and had trained her to be her best. She didn’t want to disappoint him.

“You are starting to succumb to the fact that you may not make it out of this alive.” Dumbledore smiled at her knowingly through his moon-shaped spectacles. His long, white beard flowed in the breeze even though there was none. “You sit here and smile, though I must admit it is working, merely to frustrate the young Malfoy. You must do more than that if you want to have a chance at defeating him.”

“What more can I do?” Stephanie asked curiously. She thought she had no options, but she must have been wrong. “I have no wand and I can barely stand, let alone muster the strength to battle him.

“Fight.” That was all he said. She didn’t know how to respond to that, so she looked at Fred for help. Fred merely shrugged his shoulders; he didn’t know either. Dumbledore turned and slowly walked back to her godfather and protector. “We must go now, Stephanie. Draco is sure to come back in a moment.”

“Thank you.” Stephanie replied weakly, though they hadn’t helped all that much. She turned to Fred and reached for him, but he had already gotten up and was walking towards Dumbledore.

“Tell George that I will haunt him if he leaves Lee in charge of the shop again.” Fred said, wagging his finger at her, and she couldn’t help but laugh.

“Do you have to go, too?” She asked sadly. Stephanie had just been reunited with him, she didn’t want to have to say goodbye so soon.

“We’ll be together again one day, Stephanie.” Fred waved at her. “I love you.”

And as quickly as he had appeared, Fred disappeared. There was no sound, no smoke. He was merely gone. She gasped for breath as her tears came even stronger. She waved her hand, moving only her fingers, and whispered, “I love you, too.”

“Stephanie.” Severus said her name strongly and she lifted her head to look at him. “You need to be stronger than this. How many times have I told you that?”

“Don’t scold the girl, Snivellus.” Sirius reprimanded. “She’s scared.”

“I will do as I wish, Black.” Severus scowled at her godfather. “She always has been too quick to show her emotions. It’s a wonder and miracle that she survived this long. Draco is beatable and to do so, she must be stronger than this.”

“Don’t you dare-” Sirius lunged for Severus and Stephanie knew what was going to happen.

“Stop!” She shouted, raising her arms in their direction. They both paused and just stared at her for a moment. “Please, you guys. Don’t. I will try, Severus.”

“You must.” Severus ordered and she nodded. His tone softened and he gave her a rare encouraging gesture. “Remember the spell you used on that dog in the woods behind Malfoy Manor.”

Stephanie knew the spell that he was talking about immediately. It was one of her creations, though she had never meant to invent it. She was just beginning to learn magic and the spell just sort of happened. It had been then that she knew she could create spells. And she had not used it since then; she didn’t want the world to know that it existed. It was too dangerous of a tool, for either good or bad wizards. She wasn’t even sure that she could repeat its outcome. But she didn’t dare voice this doubt to her mentor.

“Thank you, Severus.” Stephanie nodded. He bowed to her and then disappeared. She was left alone with Sirius and Dumbledore.

“Before we go, Stephanie, I wanted to tell you that your parents and I are so proud of you.” Sirius smiled and she couldn’t help but return his smile. She had never gotten the chance to meet this man, but he had been very helpful while she was alone under the Dark Lord’s care. “We can’t wait to see you again, but we hope that it is not too soon.”

“I’ll try.” Stephanie responded. She wanted to see her parents so badly, but she knew that they didn’t want her life to end prematurely. She had to fight to make them even more proud of her.

“You’ll do just fine.” Sirius winked at her and then he disappeared. She was feeling much better now and her tears were slowing down. She looked at Dumbledore expectantly.

But he didn’t say anything. Instead, he just nodded at her and then disappeared. And like that, all of her support was gone. But before she could even process anything that had just happened, Draco burst into the bubble and stormed over to her.

“Are you ready to convince your brother to save your life yet?” He noticed her tear streaked face and laughed at her misery. “You are breaking, that is too bad for you.”

Stephanie refused to say anything, though she looked him straight in the eye. There was so much hatred in those eyes that she shuddered. Stephanie understood how one could be controlled by hatred and she was happy that she had had Harry and the others to provide her with the grounding she needed so that she didn’t lose herself within that deadly emotion.

Draco waved his wand and a table appeared just feet away from her. He gestured towards Pansy, who came into the enclosure and then shut the door behind her. She sat down at the table as a huge pile of food appeared. The two sat down and began eating in front of her, randomly commenting about how great the food was.

Her mouth began to water intensely at the wonderful smells, despite her severe dehydration. She willed herself not to watch, but she couldn’t help it. Her stomach rumbled loudly and Draco just laughed at the sound. They drug this on for a very long time and finally it was over. The table and food disappeared and Pansy left the enclosure. When Draco was near the door, he turned towards Stephanie.

“Tell him to release my parents.” He instructed without a smile and then left her alone. Stephanie couldn’t handle it anymore. Her talk with Fred and Dumbledore had given her a new energy that she didn’t know she had. She stood and pounded on the elastic bubble wall.

“YOU ARE A COWARD, DRACO MALFOY!” She bellowed as loud as she could, wondering if he could even hear her. And she knew that he had because he stopped dead in his tracks. He turned around and glared at her. She knew that she had infuriated him by calling him a coward, so she did it again. “Coward!”

He started storming towards the door of the enclosure and Stephanie gulped down some of the saliva that had deposited itself in her mouth. What had she done? She started yelling at herself. He scowled at her as he threw open the door. Stephanie was a little worried about his anger but was pleased that she had been able to get to him. She silently thanked Fred for the courage and Professor Dumbledore for the encouragement that she needed to stand up for herself once and for all.

*~*~*~*

He stood in the entryway of the living room without making a sound. For some reason, he just felt the need to be unheard. All he wanted to do at that moment was to watch the picture of Stephanie in silence. She was curled up in a ball in her entrapment and appeared to be unsuccessfully attempting to sleep.

It was the first time since that first day that he had made an appearance at his home. His mother and father, Percy, Bill, and Charlie had spent their days combing through the South American countryside for any sign of Stephanie, Draco, or Pansy while Ron and Ginny had spent their time keeping watch over the girl on the screen. He, on the other hand, had done absolutely nothing for Stephanie Potter.

As he stood there watching her, he felt a horrible pang of guilt. Lee had just stopped in to visit with him at the store and made an argument for him go home. His closest friend had been kind enough to yell at him for working so much instead of helping his family. George had honestly been happy to leave the store for awhile, so he left Lee in charge so that he could return to the Burrow to see if there was anything he could do.

George knew it was ridiculous, but he felt it was his fault that Stephanie had been kidnapped by Draco Malfoy. He had been a member of the Order of the Phoenix; he had even gone on several highly dangerous missions. He should have been able to protect her. And yet, he did not question why Stephanie was without her bodyguard. He should have told her to stay inside where he could have kept an eye on her.

But the street had been deserted and he thought that she would be safe. He should have done more. Stephanie was his brother’s girlfriend and he should have done all he could to protect her.

George lifted his head as Stephanie’s body started to move and thought that if she made it out of this situation alive, that he would never again fail his brother; he would do what he could to protect Stephanie and to ensure her safety.

George returned his attention to the image of Stephanie that was floating above the fireplace. She looked surprised at something, but he couldn’t see what she was looking at. She attempted to stand, but fell down because of her lack of strength. By instinct, he reached out an arm to help her, but it obviously did no good. George saw her lips move, but he didn’t hear what she said. He could see her body start to shake as a tear rolled down her cheek.

“What are you doing here?” Stephanie whispered a little louder and he knew immediately, without a doubt, who she was talking to.

He grabbed hold of the door frame as his own body began to tremble and tears welled up in his eyes.

“Who is she talking to?” Ginny asked.

“Do you see anyone in that direction? I can’t see.” Hermione craned her neck to look for the impossible, but George knew that none of them would be able to see what Stephanie was looking at.

“Is she going mad?” Ron asked, crinkling his eyebrows in thought. He leaned forward interestedly, placing his elbows on his knees. “There’s no one there!”

“I think she’s talking to…” Harry said incredulously, unable to finish his sentence. George knew that Harry was having a hard time believing that it was true.

“Fred.” George responded, breaking the silence. A couple of the others jumped at his voice as he slowly made his way to the couch and then leaned against its back.

“But he’s dead!” He could see that Ginny didn’t believe him and she looked to Hermione for support.

“He can’t possibly be there. She must be hallucinating.” Hermione rationalized, but George knew differently. Hermione always tried to be the sensible one, but she was wrong. Fred Weasley was there with Stephanie Potter, even though none of them could see him. “It’s not possible.”

For some reason, George was certain that Fred really was there with Stephanie. The thought comforted him at once. “He’s there.” George responded to Hermione’s unbelieving ears with a smile.

Hermione opened her mouth to argue, but must have thought better of it. Instead of retorting, she turned her head back towards the screen and sat in silence as Stephanie talked to someone that Hermione couldn’t see.

“She’s dying.” Neville finally whispered. “I have heard that people see visions when they are close to death. I think we are watching her actively die.”

George took a deep breath as the realization hit them all. Neville was right. She hadn’t had food or water for almost four days and it was a miracle that she had survived that long in the summer heat.

“Are we sure this isn’t just a cruel joke that Malfoy is playing to torture her?” Ron looked at each of them hopefully.

Nobody said a word. George hoped that was what was happening, but he knew better. Malfoy hadn’t made an appearance in hours. It couldn’t be a spell devised by him. George knew that Fred had come to take her away.

He clutched the couch for support as they watched her interact with people they could not see, people George was sure were dead, and then he glanced towards Harry who looked absolutely devastated. His face had gone pale and tears flowed silently down his cheeks. George knew this had to be hard on Harry; George had not witnessed his own brother’s death, but he knew what it was like to lose a twin.

George walked over to him and placed a hand on his friend’s shoulder. “Look at her, Harry. She is so happy.” He smiled sympathetically.

Even though Stephanie’s face was now tear-streaked and dirty and she shuddered with longing for Fred, Stephanie’s eyes indeed looked happy. One could even describe her expression as joyful.

Harry looked at him with gratitude for the supportive and understanding gesture. “She is, isn’t she? She looks happy for the first time in a long time.” He, too, knew the significance of Stephanie’s display of emotions.

A few moments later they watched in silence as Draco and Pansy tormented her even more with a huge feast. Stephanie watched them with yearning though George could tell that she didn’t want to. Finally, Draco packed up his things and left Stephanie to rot in her prison.

But something snapped inside of Stephanie and George watched as she suddenly came to life. When only moments before she had been unable to do so, Stephanie stood and pounded on the exterior wall of the bubble. She took a deep breath of air and then shouted out to Malfoy, “You are a coward, Draco Malfoy!”

George could see Malfoy stop in his tracks and look at Stephanie with pure hatred. Stephanie tested the limits and shouted again. “Coward!”

“What is she doing?” Hermione shrieked as she clutched onto Ron. George had leaned forward even more and Harry was on the edge of his seat.

Harry grinned excitedly. “She’s fighting back.”

With that statement, George knew immediately that Fred had not been there to take her home. Fred had appeared to her so that she would have the courage and strength to survive!

“She’s going to get herself killed!” Neville exclaimed as they watched Draco storm back into the bubble to confront Stephanie. “He is going to kill her.”

“No.” Ginny smiled in true understanding. “He is going to let her fight.”

“How dare you call me a coward!” Draco hissed at Stephanie as he pulled out his wand. George was impressed that she didn’t even flinch.

“I will call you what you are.” Stephanie responded forcefully, refusing to be intimidated by her captor.

George waved his wand and a bowl of popcorn floated in from the kitchen. Ginny gave him a nasty look as he began to eat the tasty treat, and then he offered the bowl around to the others. Only Ron grabbed a handful and he shrugged his shoulders.

Draco was too stunned by her outburst to respond, so Stephanie continued. “You want to show the world how tough you are? You want to make your father love you and you want the world to know you are not a joke, as so many people believe you to be? And you plan to do so by beating me, someone you have considered inferior to you for as long as you can remember?

“And yet to do so, you weaken me by denying me food and water! Tell me, Draco. How does that make you look powerful? It doesn’t. It makes you look like a coward.” Stephanie maintained her balance by holding onto the wall of the bubble but she did not falter in her stern expression.

George knew that Stephanie had never spoken to Draco like that before and must have been shaking inside with terror, but her exterior showed none of what she must have been feeling. Malfoy, on the other hand, was taken aback. His face didn’t even display anger because he was too stunned to know what to do.

Just then, Pansy came running into the bubble to see what the commotion was about and Draco merely held up his hand to stop her.

“But Draco-” She began, but Draco quickly turned in her direction and gave her an angry glare, interrupting her intrusion immediately.

“SHUT UP, PANSY! Get out of here.” He yelled at her and she paused for a moment, unsure of what to do. “Just do as you are told for once, you idiot!”

Pansy scurried away with her face in her hands, and this distraction seemed to have allowed Draco to come to his senses. He stepped towards Stephanie and stretched his arm out so that his wand was even closer to her.

“Why you insolent…” He muttered through clenched teeth, but Stephanie stopped him. Her voice was much softer this time.

“This is not who you are, Draco. I know about the letter.” She spoke almost compassionately. George couldn’t believe that she could talk to Malfoy like that; it was almost as though she cared about him.

Draco paused and looked confused. “What letter?”

“You were going to warn Harry that the Dark Lord would be sending me to Diagon Alley, but you never sent the letter.” Stephanie said calmly, not letting go of the wall.

Draco scowled in her direction, walking even closer to her. But Stephanie still did not flinch at his threat.

“You went through my things? How dare you! I am going to kill you!” He threatened, but Stephanie remained unwavering in her calmness.

“It was meant to be a trap. You wanted Harry to go and try to rescue me. You hoped that he would be killed in the process.” Stephanie explained. “But you didn’t send it.”

“The Dark Lord would have killed me, too, if I had.” Draco whispered. His face had gone more pale than normal. “You didn’t show it to the Dark Lord. Why?”

“Instead, I asked him to spare your life after you failed on the tower. He was going to kill you and your father for your failure.” Stephanie said.

Draco scanned her up and down. He made a step forward and George closed his eyes for a second. Ginny dug herself into Harry and Hermione clutched onto Ron. They were all prepared for Draco to attack her.

But instead of Cursing her, a plate of food and a bowl of water appeared on the ground at Stephanie’s feet. Draco gestured towards the food with his wand.

“Eat.” He commanded. “Tomorrow I shall prove myself against you, the most feared girl in Britain.”

With that, Draco turned and walked outside the bubble, locking Stephanie inside. She sighed in relief, the color draining from her cheeks immediately, and she collapsed to the ground. The confrontation had taken all of her energy.

“We should tell Kingsley.” Hermione said and Ron nodded his head. “He’ll want to know about this.”

“I’ll go.” Ron volunteered.

Neville stood and offered to go along. When the two had left, Harry looked up to the screen and stared at Stephanie with tremendous sadness. He was quiet for a long time and George didn’t want to disturb him.

“She is going to be alright.” Harry let out his breath and spoke aloud, more to convince himself than anything else. “She is going to be alright.”

And George knew that she would be. Fred was watching over and protecting her. George would have normally doubted his brother’s ability to save Stephanie Potter, but if he could come back from the dead and give her the energy, strength, determination, and courage to stand up to her captor, then he would be able to do anything. George knew that Stephanie would be alright.


So here is that chapter. Sorry it's a lot shorter than most of my others, but it had to be that way. If I were to have added another POV, I felt that it would have been too much information. But I did include George's POV, which I've been excited to show you guys! Please leave me some feedback and let me know what you think! The next chapter will be posted probably towards the end of the week (probably Thursday or Friday). Thank you for bearing with me!

Chapter Six: Messages and Goodbyes

“So what do you think he’s going to do to her?” Ron asked him as they made their way down the streets of London towards the Ministry of Magic.

“Hmm?” He asked. Neville hadn’t been paying attention to a single word that Ron had been saying. Instead, his mind was on a conversation that Stephanie had had a few moments before with Fred Weasley; at least that’s who George believed Stephanie was talking to.

Neville honestly didn’t know what to believe. Could Fred really have been there with her? He doubted it, but then he had believed Harry when he said that Dumbledore came to him during the Battle of Hogwarts at Kings Cross Station. But Harry also hadn’t been severely dehydrated and nearly starved to death. Regardless of its actuality, there was a short conversation that disturbed him greatly and he knew that Stephanie would forever remember it whether or not she survived this.

Are you saying this person loves me? That is what she had said. Her subconscious, or Fred, was telling her that someone loved her. And it broke his heart that she didn’t think that someone could love her; she kept asking Fred who it was. Stephanie couldn’t see that it was him who had loved her since the first moment he saw her picture in the Daily Prophet.

Neville remembered the day perfectly, as if it had happened just yesterday. He had been eating breakfast with Hermione, Ron, and Harry during his third year. They had always been much nicer to him than many of his other classmates, but he never would have thought they would ever be as close friends as they had become. He knew it had been Stephanie that brought (and kept) them all together.

There was something in Stephanie’s eyes that drew her to him. While Hermione had read the newspaper article out loud, he stared at the picture of Stephanie that took up almost half the page. There had been pain in those eyes, pain beyond anything that he had ever known. But along with that pain, and he couldn’t explain it because he had never been able to read another person’s eyes, there was kindness. He had known immediately that she wasn’t a willing participant in the attack at the Quidditch World Cup.

All he wanted, and all he had ever wanted, was to look into Stephanie’s eyes and tell her that he loved her. But she didn’t know that he loved her and he probably would never have that opportunity he so longed for. And it hurt him deeply, but he also wanted to see her happy. If she was going to be with another person, then he would have to live with that. Neville didn’t want to risk losing her friendship by telling her something she should be able to see by herself.

“So what do you think he’s going to do to her?” Ron repeated himself, sounding a little agitated. “What is wrong with you, mate?”

“Sorry, Ron.” Neville turned his head towards his friend as they walked up the steps that lead to the entrance to the Ministry of Magic. “I was just thinking.”

“About her.” Ron replied with a knowing smile. “Why do you do that to yourself? You just need to tell her and get it out in the open.”

“Oh, like you told Hermione all those years?” Neville retorted. Everyone seemed to be an expert on the subject, but they didn’t know what it was like. No one understood why he couldn’t tell Stephanie that he loved her. It was too complicated.

Ron didn’t say anything. Instead, he looked straight ahead and they were finally inside the Ministry of Magic.

“Hi Ron, Neville.” One of the Aurors at the security checkpoint nodded to them. Neville couldn’t believe how often they were recognized since the Battle of Hogwarts had happened. Everyone knew he was the one person to stand up to Lord Voldemort, or Tom Riddle, and cut off the head of the snake, Nagini. It was nice to be recognized for his accomplishments for once, instead of being in the shadows. But it was also a little awkward. “What can I do for you today?”

“Hey, Seth.” Ron shook the man’s hand. Neville didn’t recognize the man so he took a moment to place the Auror in his mind.

Seth was young, Neville guessed about twenty-three or twenty-four. He was shorter than the average Auror, but he was built pretty well. Neville smiled at the thought that if this man had been at Hogwarts, the girls would have gone crazy with his boyish looks. He rolled his eyes.

“We need to see Kingsley.” Ron told the Auror matter-of-factly.

“He’s in his office.” Seth responded, pointing down the hall. “You know the way, right?”

Ron nodded and he and Neville started walking towards the Minister’s office. They weren’t in any hurry because Draco had said that he would let Stephanie fight the next day. Neville knew Draco wouldn’t touch her until then.

“He’s going to play with her a little.” Neville broke the silence and Ron looked at him questioningly. “Have a little fun first.”

“What?” He asked, clearly confused at what Neville was talking about.

“You asked me what Draco was going to do with her.” Neville explained, continuing the conversation from a few moments before.

“Oh.” Ron said simply. He was quiet for awhile so Neville continued.

“He was raised to hate her and he has been waiting for this moment for a long time. He’s not going to waste this opportunity by killing her immediately.” Neville answered numbly. He didn’t want to think about what Draco was going to do, but he had to be prepared. No matter what, he was going to watch. He needed to know exactly what that monster did to her. “But if he is stupid enough to give her a wand, then she’ll have a chance.”

“He’s got to give her her wand.” Ron said. “He wants to defeat her. How can he do that without giving her a wand?”

“He knows that she can handle a wand, even if she’s we-” Neville cut himself off. He was going to say even if she’s weak. How could he do that? One of Stephanie’s fears was that people would perceive her as weak. And she was far from that. He shook his head and continued. “Even if she’s not her strongest. We just have to hope that he gives her that wand.”

“I never thought of that.” Ron responded.

Neville smiled at Madeline Summers, Kingsley’s assistant, as they approached her desk. She was a plump, but happy, woman. “We’re here to see the Minister.”

“Of course.” She responded with a bright smile. She pushed a button on her desk and spoke pleasantly. “Minister, there are two young boys here to see you.”

“Who is it?” Kingsley’s deep voice boomed into the office.

“Neville Longbottom and Ron Weasley.” Ron nodded at Madeline. Neville had never had the pleasure of meeting this woman, but now he had a face to the name. Kingsley talked about her all the time.

She repeated their names and Kingsley told her to let them enter. Ron opened the door and they entered the grand office of the new Minister of Magic. Kingsley was sitting at his desk with papers scattered about. There were bags under his eyes as if he hadn’t slept in weeks.

“What can I do for you boys?” He asked, sitting back in his chair. Neville took a seat in front of the Minister’s desk. He had to admit to himself that it was weird to be on a first name basis with the Minister of Magic.

“It’s going to happen tomorrow, Kingsley.” He spoke sincerely and to the point. Neville quickly told him the story of what had happened that afternoon, though he probably already knew. Neville could see that Kingsley had a perfect view of the image of Stephanie from the window in his office.

“I thought it might be him.” Kingsley said somberly, referring to Fred. “Unfortunately, I don’t think we are any closer to finding her.”

He stood up and began pacing behind his desk. Neville just watched as Kingsley thought about their next step. “I have utilized all of my available Aurors. We have the best spells and trackers in the world. I have the whole defense of the wizarding community out looking for her. How could it be so hard to find three little teenagers?”

Neville didn’t say anything. How was he supposed to respond to that? Kingsley had assigned so many people to go in search of Stephanie and they hadn’t even found a morsel of evidence of where she could be. Martin Webber had told them that his sources informed him that Draco was in South America, but no one had found her yet.

“I think mum and dad should be home to see her.” Ron finally said, breaking the tension-filled silence. “I think she would want mum at home.”

Kingsley just looked at them for a moment. He finally nodded his agreement. “I’ll send for your family this afternoon and they’ll be home later this evening. I will not call off the search until we find her.”

“Thank you.” Ron responded, standing up and preparing to leave. Neville nodded towards Kingsley and then followed Ron towards the door.

“Hold on.” Kingsley said as they were about to open the door. “Do you think that Stephanie was really talking to them? I mean, do you think that they were really there?”

Neville was taken by surprise at the question; he had never imagined that this man would ask their advice about something like that. But he knew that Kingsley had been close to Albus Dumbledore and that he needed reassurance that the Headmaster was alright just as much as they did. He was the one that answered Kingsley’s question.

“Yes, I do.” He replied. And he really did. Neville believed that Fred, Professor Dumbledore, Sirius Black, and Professor Snape had been there for her. He really did believe that.

*~*~*~*

Stephanie stared at the floating butterfly that had recorded her every move for the past four days. She finally took the time to look at and appreciate its intricate beauty. And she was amazed that Draco was capable of creating anything like it. She couldn’t tell where the recording device was located, but its design mesmerized her and negated that concern.

It was rather large and very unique, the entire body was bright yellow, and each wing had a perfect black circle that would separate it from others that were of the same breed. Stephanie realized that the butterfly was probably a spell created for the sole purpose of displaying her image to Harry and her fiends, but none of it really mattered. It was just so beautiful.

Stephanie knew that in a few hours, all of this would finally be over. She would either defeat Draco and be free or she would die fighting for her life. Either way, she knew that she would be happy and be surrounded by people who loved her. So, as she sat there, hugging her knees to her chest, Stephanie stared at the butterfly and smiled with an open heart.

Stephanie had been eager to eat the food and drink the water that Draco had finally supplied her with. She hadn’t been able to eat as much as she had hoped, but it had done wonders for her energy level. She had noticed that the water Draco provided was in a bowl, not a glass, signifying that she was supposed to drink it like an animal or a pet. But she didn’t care. She lifted the bowl to her lips and gulped down the warm liquid as fast as she could. It felt amazingly smooth as it touched her chapped lips and moistened her parched throat. And she was pleased to see that when it emptied, the bowl refilled itself.

But now she was full and no longer in the hallucination stage of dehydration. Stephanie knew that she had needed the nourishment desperately, but she missed the companionship the hallucinations had provided. She wanted to see Fred again, but knew she would never get that chance again until she died.

And she knew that Professor Dumbledore, Fred, Sirius, and Severus had been right; Stephanie couldn’t give up hope that she would defeat Draco Malfoy. She also knew that with the help of her spell, she could defeat him even in her condition. But did she dare attempt such a dangerous spell? If she used it, others could probably learn it, and all Aurors in the world would be in danger of immediate defeat.

Death Eaters would kill for this spell and she didn’t want to be responsible for that. Stephanie didn’t think she could bring herself to use it, but she also understood that she wouldn’t make a final decision until the time came.

Stephanie looked out beyond her enclosure and noticed the moon was high in the sky and the stars were twinkling brightly. It was her fourth night in captivity and she suddenly got the odd sensation that Sirius was winking at her. With that feeling as a large motivator, Stephanie took a deep breath and decided to speak out. She didn’t know what the next day would hold and she needed to say her goodbyes before it was too late. She didn’t want anyone blaming themselves for her death.

She doubted that Harry would still be awake, but she hoped that someone was watching and could give him the message. The smile disappeared from her face as she prepared to speak.

“Harry.” She said softly but with enough volume that he would be able to hear her. She didn’t want to startle him or her friends if they were watching. And she paused for a few moments to give him or anyone else time to listen. She wasn’t only talking to her brother; this was her chance to address the entire country. Stephanie knew that Harry would let the world know what she had said.

“I want to apologize for all the pain I have caused you over the years. When I asked Dumbledore not to tell you about me, I thought I was protecting you. And again when I stayed behind, I wanted to do all I could to keep you from danger. But I know you worried a lot on my account and I am so sorry for that.

“And then I ditched Nikki so that I could relieve you all from my own suffering. I thought I could take care of myself, but I guess I was wrong.” Stephanie chuckled to herself, trying to sound lighthearted even though her heart felt like it was breaking. “And now I can see how much I have hurt you. I never meant for you to watch me die, Harry.

“When I was first brought here by Draco, I was determined to let whatever happened take its course. But I now know that I have to fight.” She spoke, thinking of the one word that Dumbledore had said to her. She knew now that she would never give up. “Know that I will die trying to save my life. I have not given up hope. I want to make you proud, Harry.

“But also know that I had fully prepared my mind and soul to die at the final battle against Lord V-V-, the Dark Lord.” Stephanie tried to speak the name of her master for the first time since her conditioning, but it had been too ingrained into her habits to do so. She couldn’t bring herself to say his name. “If I don’t make it now, that’s alright, too. Just know that I will be happy with whatever happens and I will always be watching over you.

“So, get married to Ginny, have lots of kids, and make your life a good one. I know that you deserve it! And I am sure you will make Mrs. Weasley the proudest grandmother in the world if you name one of your kids after her!” Stephanie winked at the butterfly. “I just want you to know that whatever happens, I love you.”

Stephanie paused. There was so much more that she wanted to say and she didn’t know where to start, so she decided to begin at the very top. “Kingsley, I just wanted to let you know that I don’t blame you for the decision you made. You were right when you said that I was not ready to be an Auror. There’s just too much I need to learn. I thought I knew all I needed to know, but just look at me! I can’t even defend myself against Draco Malfoy. Maybe one day I will be ready, but I know that I am not quite there yet.

“Please be easy on Draco. None of this is really his fault. He is only a victim of his raising and he does not know any better than this. It was Lucius Malfoy, his father, that taught him to hate so deeply. He knows nothing of what the real world is like.

“Professor McGonagall, I want you to have Severus’ things. He left a will stating that if I died, he wanted Hogwarts to take ownership. And if I don’t survive this, I know that you will take good care of his property.” Stephanie hadn’t been to Severus’ house yet, but she had hoped to see where the man had lived and to make it respectable. She pictured it to be in a state of disrepair because it was the house of a bachelor, after all. For the past few weeks she had thought a lot about her realization that she knew very little of the man who had protected her for so long.

“Molly, I hope it’s alright that I call you that. I know that you gave Harry permission to do so. I loved your son and he did more for me than you could ever think was possible. Fred rescued me from myself and allowed me to begin the healing process. Thank you for giving both of us the opportunity to love. I want you to know that he is happy, though he misses you, and Professor Dumbledore is keeping a watchful eye on him so he doesn’t get into too much trouble.

“George.” Stephanie couldn’t help but smile with this relay of information. She was sure that George would laugh, though she wasn’t sure that George had ever left Lee Jordan in charge of Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes. “Fred wanted me to tell you that if you leave the store with Lee in charge again, he will come back and haunt you for eternity.

“Hermione, Ginny, and Ron. Thank you so much for all you have done for me. Now it is your turn to go out and live your life. Don’t stay hidden indoors and mourn for me any longer. Ginny, I hope that you make it big as a professional Quidditch player. I would love to watch you play some day. And good luck with your final year at Hogwarts.

“Hermione, I know you will do great things with magical creatures’ rights at the Ministry of Magic. You did so well with the Elf Liberation Front and I am positive that is what you are meant to do in life. Just keep fighting all who oppose you and you will succeed.

“And Ron, look out for Harry. We all know how he likes to get into trouble.” She joked with a small smile. “All jokes aside, make sure to always listen to Hermione. She is and always will be right. Remember this and you will do just fine.

“Nikki. I know that Kingsley had to convince you to take the job of protecting me. You never wanted it and it hurt you to be around me. And he told me that he showed you my memory of what happened that day. I couldn’t kill your baby girl. I am so sorry that the Death Eaters—we, we—destroyed your family.” Stephanie swallowed hard as she prepared to admit something she had never told anyone before, not even Neville during their correspondences. “Mackenzie still comes to me in my dreams. I watch the scene unfold every day. I am so sorry for what I have done to you and your family. I know that doesn’t mean a lot, but it’s all I have to offer you.

“Finally, Neville. You are always willing to drop whatever you are doing for me. Thank you. You are the best friend I will ever have and I hope that we can share more good times to come. I have thought about that night you came to see me in the hospital a few days after I woke up. And I have been thinking about what you said.

“Neville, you were right to be concerned that I would change. Because I have changed and I am worried that it is for the worse. I can’t describe it, but I am not, and never will be again, the person I was. I just hope that doesn’t affect our friendship. Now, forget about me and go back to Germany.” Stephanie paused and lifted a finger towards the butterfly. She knew exactly what Neville was going to say. “Don’t look at me like that! I know you and you probably left the minute you received my letter even though I distinctly instructed you not to. Go, find a girl who loves you, and be happy.

“Goodbye.” She finished with a wave but she didn’t turn away from the butterfly. She just stayed there until Draco approached later that morning, long after the sun had risen, smiling at the world her farewell.

*~*~*~*

There was a knock on the door and no one moved. Everyone was thinking about what had just happened and the intimate conversation Stephanie had just had with each of them.

“For goodness sake,” Mrs. Weasley said, exasperated, and got up to answer the door. “No one get up and get the door. I’ll get it.”

“She’s planning for the future, but she thinks she is going to die.” Ron said, scratching his head. He looked confused and Hermione had to chuckle at the sight. “It’s a little contradictory.”

“Stephanie is going to fight and she doesn’t know the outcome.” Hermione responded softly. “She doesn’t want to die without saying goodbye. Wouldn’t it have been nice for Fred to say goodbye to you?”

“I guess.” Ron muttered, still looking up at the screen above. Stephanie was staring at them and she was smiling. Hermione was impressed with her friend’s perseverance; she never could have just sat there and smiled all day in that situation.

“You know, Lee sent me word a little while ago.” George spoke to break the tension and Hermione turned her attention towards him. “He and Cho were messing around in the shop and an Exploding Button, well, kind of exploded. It destroyed the back room.”

“Didn’t Stephanie tell you-” Ginny leaned forward with a surprised expression. Hermione just smiled disbelievingly.

“That Fred asked her to tell me not to leave Lee in charge of the shop again.” George said with a smile. “Yeah.”

“Were you watching, Molly?” Kingsley’s voice broke through their conversation as he walked into the living room where everyone was gathered: Mr. and Mrs. Weasley, Bill, Fleur, Charlie, Percy, George, Ginny, Ron, Harry, Neville, and Hermione. Kinsley was accompanied by Nikki Fullbright and Professor McGonagall.

“Of course, Kingsley.” Mrs. Weasley responded. Kingsley and Nikki stood in the doorway while McGonagall took a seat in the chair next to the entryway.

“I should have accepted her to the Auror Training program with you, Harry.” Kingsley spoke softly as he looked at Harry.

“No, you were right. She’s not even close to being ready for that.” Harry stood, but Kingsley gestured for him to take a seat.

“I was wrong, Harry.” Kingsley admitted. “She has the skills to do us a great service. I didn’t think she was emotionally ready, that she would just want to go out and capture Death Eaters that had hurt her. But that’s not what she wants. She’s a more appropriate candidate than most that start the program.”

“Well, she’ll be happy to hear that.” Hermione responded and Kingsley nodded authoritatively in her direction.

“But that’s not why I’ve come to see you, tonight.” Kingsley said soberly. He looked at Harry as he spoke and Hermione’s stomach dropped. The news he brought couldn’t be good. “I have called off the search for your sister.”

“You can’t do that!” Ginny stood up in protest.

But Harry ignored her. He stared straight ahead and eyed Kingsley suspiciously. “Why?” He asked.

“She isn’t in South America, that I’m sure.” Kingsley responded. “Martin was given false information. Stephanie could be anywhere and I cannot have all of my Aurors scouring the entire world for her. As much as I regret doing so, we will have to turn our focus onto finding Draco after the events take place tomorrow. There is nothing more I can do, Harry.”

“You can’t give up on her.” Hermione argued compassionately. “You can’t stop looking for her. You just can’t.”

“You promised that you’d keep looking!” Ron said, bringing up the promise that Kingsley had given Ron and Neville the night before.

“She never wanted us looking for her in the first place.” Professor McGonagall pointed out. “Kingsley has asked for my counsel on the situation and I have to agree. We need to focus our attention on protecting the wizarding community.”

“What about Stephanie?” Neville asked. “What about protecting her after all she has done for you?”

“It’s okay, you guys.” Harry said, turning around to face his friends. Hermione looked at him in concern. Had he given up on Stephanie, too?

“But, Harry.” Ginny looked at him, but Harry held up his hand.

He turned back towards Kingsley. “It hurts, Kingsley. I won’t lie about that. But I understand your decision, and I know that it is a difficult one for you to make. Stephanie is going to be alright, I feel it in my gut. But if you do this, just promise me one thing.”

“What is it, Harry?” Kingsley cocked his head to one side and looked at Harry interestedly.

“When you catch Malfoy, I want a few minutes alone with him.” Harry said with his eyes narrowed. Hermione could tell that he was holding in his frustration and anger as best he could. He had to keep his composure for her, for Stephanie. He had to show her that he trusted her.

“We’ll see what I can arrange, but I can’t promise that I can allow that.” Kingsley smiled and Harry sighed. “I have to get back to the Ministry now. I really am sorry, Harry.”

“I understand.” Harry responded as Kingsley turned to leave.

Hermione turned her attention back to the screen as they watched Stephanie. She remained there, smiling at them all, and Hermione wondered if it was going to be the last night that Stephanie would ever see.

They all stayed there, Nikki and McGonagall included, and reminisced a little. Each had their own little vignette about Stephanie and it was a nice way to pass the time. Harry told how he and his sister met, Hermione told the story of how the two of them had been introduced, and McGonagall told of Stephanie’s studies with Professor Snape. And finally, after hours of storytelling, they were interrupted when Draco’s voice could be heard on the screen; he had finally come for her.


Here it is much quicker than I promised. I realized that I am in for a pretty busy week: I'm out of town Wednesday and Thursday and I work/have plans Friday/night. And I wanted to get this up for you guys. Sorry if it's a little cheesy, but I honestly think, as far as writing goes, that this is one of the best chapters to date. I promise that the next chapter will include Stephanie's duel with Draco and I don't anticipate that it'll be split in two! I'll try to post it sometime this weekend! Have a great week and keep the feedback coming! (Oh, and don't forget to place a vote in my poll!)

Chapter Seven: Perdo Infestus

He strutted into her enclosure and Stephanie immediately knew it was time. Draco looked smug as he walked nearer; there was a look of satisfaction painted onto his face. His wand hung loosely at his side as he slowly made his way towards her. Stephanie snuck a glance at the floating butterfly and flashed a bright smile.

“Here we go.” She mouthed.

Stephanie stood as best as she could to greet the boy who wished to kill her. She looked up at him and gave him a silent bow. He merely smirked in her direction, clearly believing that her gesture was one of finally recognizing her place in society.

Quite contrary to that, Stephanie bowed because it was the courteous thing to do. If she was going to die in battle, she wanted to show her brother that she had the courage to do what most wouldn’t in that situation.

Instead of approaching her, though, Draco walked around the perimeter of the bubble two times, waving his wand, and muttering under his breath. She just eyed him curiously, wondering what kind of defensive magic he could be putting in place so she could not harm him. Finally, he finished his incantation and made his way to the center where Stephanie was standing without any support.

Without a word, he grabbed her ponytail and wrapped the arm holding his wand tightly around her body. His cologne entranced her for some reason. She had smelled it many times before, but she couldn’t help but think about how good he smelled now. Maybe it was the fact that she was prepared to die and her body was now utilizing its heightened senses. Stephanie breathed in deeply to smell Draco as he flicked his wand, and then they were gone.

Before Stephanie could even react, Draco released his tight grip and threw her to the ground where she landed with a grunt. Stephanie quickly turned over, though she remained on the ground, to look at Draco. It was always a bad idea to have your back turned to an enemy.

But as she did so, Stephanie realized she now recognized the scenery outside the protective bubble. At her expression, Draco began laughing uncontrollably. Stephanie watched as several surprised Aurors ran into the home that stood directly in front of her and, just moments later, she saw a blur of people running out to see the commotion.

She immediately ran to the wall and flung herself against it when she saw one person in particular. “Harry!” She screamed in his direction. Stephanie knew that Draco was amused by her reaction, but she didn’t care. She missed her brother.

Draco had transported them to the Burrow! Each of her friends and the Aurors were shooting spells at the bubble, but nothing was working. Harry came up to her and shouted so that she could hear. “Don’t worry, Stephanie! We are going to get you out of there.”

Draco’s laughter erupted once again and she returned her attention towards her captor. “They can’t save you.” He told her and Stephanie believed him. But he didn’t realize that their presence would only make her stronger and more determined to continue fighting until the end.

But that was also why he had cast that spell before they left; he had made sure the Aurors couldn’t break the barrier. He had created a strong protection force so that they would not be disturbed.

“What do you want, Draco?” She asked, though she knew full well that he wanted nothing more than to see her dead. She was only stalling; maybe Kinglsey could break through the barrier somehow.

“I want you to die, Stephanie Potter.” The smile was gone now and he pointed his wand loosely in her direction. “I thought your brother would appreciate a front row seat.”

“I’m going to kill you, Malfoy!” Harry pounded on the wall of the enclosure.

“Draco, let the girl go.” Stephanie heard the calm voice of Kingsley Shacklebolt instruct the boy.

Draco looked out at the crowd and smiled. “That is enough from you.” He then waved his wand and all the outside noise silenced.

Stephanie looked out and could see people’s lips moving, but she couldn’t hear them speak. She turned back to face him defiantly, though she didn’t have her wand.

“You should do as he says, Draco. I will be happy whether I live or die, but you won’t. They will find you. And you will be sent to Azkaban like your parents.” She tried to convince him to let her go, though she doubted that it would work. Stephanie didn’t want to have to hurt him; she was afraid of what she could do when her back was against a wall.

“Who says they will find me?” Draco smirked. He was so conceited to believe that no one could find the young eighteen year old wizard.

Stephanie returned his menacing glare. “The Aurors might not, but you would be lucky if they did find you. I’ve asked him not to, but I’m sure that Harry would never rest until he found you. And I am positive that he won’t be as lenient as the Aurors.”

Draco’s smile disappeared at her mention of Harry. “Your brother can’t touch me.”

“We’ll see.” Stephanie replied simply.

“Look at them!” Draco screamed, pointing towards the crowd that had gathered outside the bubble. Stephanie took a moment to look at them. They were all still, with the exception of a few Aurors who were still trying to break the barrier, and watching the interaction take place. Stephanie felt comforted by having them there, so she did not flinch at his sudden change in temperament. “Just standing there watching you. They can’t help you. And once again, Potter stands by while you do your fighting. He wouldn’t help you if he could. You are all alone, Stephanie Potter.”

Stephanie couldn’t help but burst out laughing at that comment. She knew that she was anything but alone. Draco had no understanding of the empowerment he had given her by bringing her to the Burrow for their final battle; he had no understanding of what the power of friendship could do.

When she was able to catch her breath, Stephanie stood up straight and looked him dead in the eye. “Harry didn’t come to my rescue every time I was in danger because I told him not to, not because he didn’t care.”

“You know, we aren’t all that different, you and me.” Draco had an amused expression on his face, but Stephanie wasn’t going to let him affect her. He was beginning to make her angry and she wouldn’t let him get away with taunting her any longer. “We were both forced to join the Death Eaters, though I still exclaim the name of the Dark Lord. I am proud to be a Death Eater, and am one of the few that remain free, I might add.

“I was there and I know what you have done. You have been placed on a pedestal by your cowardly brother, but I know the truth. You are nothing but a murderer, Stephanie. We were both left alone to take care of ourselves. But the power has shifted and I have it all now. The only reason the others did not kill you the moment they were freed from Azkaban was because you had the Dark Lord’s protection. But he isn’t here now, so it is me that controls whether you live or die.”

Stephanie stormed forward so that she was in Draco’s face. He may hold the power to kill her at any moment, but she would no longer bow down and let him speak to her like that. For almost seventeen years, she had to endure his superiority. But not any more, not even before her last breath.

“Don’t you dare compare yourself to me.” Stephanie spat in his face. He looked a little surprised, but more amused than anything. “All you have done for your entire life is condemn those that may be a little different than you. We may have that one thing in common, but I am nothing like you. I was forced to do those things and I pay for it every single day of my life.”

“Let me ask you something, then.” Draco responded more softly this time. “If you didn’t enjoy what you were doing, why did you do it? You murdered children. You murdered their friends.”

He pointed towards the people outside and smirked. Then he continued. “You didn’t have to do what the Dark Lord ordered. You could have died. Just. Like. The rest.”

Stephanie took a step back for a moment. He was right. She didn’t have to do what she had done. There had always been that choice. But a little voice in the back of her head told her differently. She looked out to her friends and gave them a quick smile. She only saw Harry and she realized that it was all because of him. She turned her head back towards Draco.

“You think I did all of that for myself?” Stephanie sputtered, so frustrated that she could barely get the words out. She lifted her arms and shrugged her shoulders, pointing her fingers at her chest. “You think I did all of that so that I would be kept alive?”

“Of course.” Draco smirked and Stephanie was really getting sick of his smugness. He needed to be put in his place.

She laughed, but it was more of a laugh when you couldn’t believe what someone just said, not one of amusement. “I did nothing for myself. None of it.

“It was all for him.” Stephanie emphasized and pointed outside, towards Harry. “I knew that he was the key to the Dark Lord’s defeat and I had to keep him alive at all costs. My staying alive ensured Harry’s survival. I did what I had to do for him, not for me.”

“No one is that selfless.” Draco cackled, obviously not believing her. “Besides, why would you do something like that when they don’t care enough to try and save you?”

Stephanie relaxed her arms and smiled. She looked at him compassionately and with feeling. Poor Draco, she thought. Poor, poor Draco.

“Love.” She said simply.

“Love doesn’t exist.” He spat back at her. Stephanie’s breathing slowed down as she felt sorry for this boy.

“That is because you know nothing of it, Draco.” Stephanie responded kindly. “Your father may have pleaded for your life when I was in the hospital, but it was all for show. He does not love you and he never has. You really had no chance at all, and for that I pity you. I always have.”

“I don’t need your pity.” Draco scowled. But instead of retorting, he just flicked his wand in her direction. “Enough of your useless chatter, girl. Now, shall we begin?”

“Whenever you are ready.” She responded coolly, holding her head up high. Her hands were shaking slightly, but her tranquility surprised her.

“You are going to die here, today, little girl.” Draco reached into his robes slowly and all she could do was watch. “It is only fair to give you a means to defend yourself.”

He pulled out a wand—her wand—from his robes and dropped it at his feet. She just stood there, staring at it, because she didn’t know what else to do.

“Pick it up!” He demanded, thrusting his wand in her direction. Stephanie nodded and took a couple of steps and then bent down to pick up her wand from the ground.

Just as her fingers made contact with the piece of wood, she felt a heavy blow to her cheek and heard her bones crack at the impact. She went flying as Draco’s foot made contact with her head. She heard her wand hit the wall and fall to the ground across the small bubble. Draco’s laughter echoed off the walls as she lay face down on the ground. She felt the taste of blood in her mouth.

Stephanie wouldn’t allow herself to get frustrated. She couldn’t let him win that way. Stephanie forced herself to turn over, but when she attempted to stand, Draco’s lips began to move. Almost immediately, she collapsed to the ground as the Cruciatus Curse coursed through her body. His Curse was much stronger than she remembered; he must have been practicing during his time in hiding. He had much improved and what had once felt like pins prodding her limbs now felt like swords stabbing her entire body.

She tried to clench her jaw, but the pain was too strong for her to remain silent. She screamed as the Curse continued. All that ran through her mind was that she was happy Harry couldn’t hear her. But she knew that she couldn’t focus on him. She had to concentrate! She had to defeat Draco.

Finally, the Curse lifted and she was able to breathe again. But she didn’t have a moment to recover. She screamed again as small circular burns erupted over her body. It was like he was stabbing her with something scalding hot. And each time he flicked his wand, another burn would appear. One pain added onto the others and she couldn’t hold in her tears any longer. But she refused to beg Draco to stop because she knew it would only make things worse.

“How can anyone say you are stronger than me?” He asked tauntingly. “You had your chance at your wand, precious girl.”

He continued to laugh at her as he twisted his wand arm. She squeezed her eyes shut as her left leg began the same motion as his wand. She tried to resist but her leg kept moving at an agonizingly slow pace. She tried not to scream as her leg cracked at the twisting force, but it hurt terribly.

He stopped, but didn’t allow her time to rest. She was struggling to stay strong; she was fighting even to remain conscious. And it was looking very grim for her survival.

And suddenly she felt herself being lifted into the air and then slammed into the wall. She crumpled to the ground at the force. The impact had blown the air out of her lungs and she struggled to breathe. As she tried to catch her breath, spots blurred her vision.

Stephanie could feel that he was near her, hovering over her body, as she tried to figure out how she was going to survive. But suddenly, as she tried to force her body to move, Stephanie felt something at the very edge of her fingers. It was her wand! Draco had unwittingly given her access to her wand.

Stephanie wrapped her fingers around it slowly and waited silently. Draco’s laughter died down as she could feel him getting closer. He knelt down over her body and grabbed her ponytail. Draco lifted her head so that she could see the people outside. They all appeared to be frozen as they watched the battle unfold and as they watched her fighting for her life.

As she looked at each of them, Stephanie got the sudden feeling that she was not alone. Beyond Harry, Ginny, Hermione, Ron, Neville, Kingsley, McGonagall, Molly, Arthur, Percy, Bill, George, Nikki, and many others that she didn’t recognize, Stephanie could see the proud, smiling faces of her parents, Fred, Dumbledore, Sirius, Severus, and even Remus Lupin and his wife. There were others there, too, that she didn’t know. Stephanie smiled out at them all despite her pain and tears.

She heard Draco lean closer and then felt his hot breath on her ear. “I have a secret to tell you before I have mercy on you and let you die.” Stephanie said nothing as he pulled her head up even higher. “I. Killed. Fred. Weasley.”

Stephanie didn’t know what came over her. A sudden burst of energy and passion engulfed her body and she quickly raised her wand as she heard Draco begin to joyfully sing his final spell. “Avada Kedav-”

But he was cut short as Stephanie’s own silent spell sent him flying. She quickly pushed herself to her feet and limped over to him, trying to ignore the pain in her left leg. There was no time to think or say anything. He merely eyed her with more hatred than she had ever seen. And she knew that it was time. She had to use the spell or else she would be killed. So, she raised her wand and cast the spell silently in her mind. Perdo infestus!

And immediately, the hatred was gone and Draco dropped his wand, looking at her oddly. “W-w-what did you do to me?” He asked weakly and a little frightened. “I feel peaceful.”

Stephanie smiled at him because her spell had actually worked. It was quite brilliant, really, and she was proud of herself. “A little spell of my own, Draco.” She responded sadly. She was sad that she had been forced to use that horrible spell.

Then she kicked his wand out of reach and caused ropes to escape from her wand and restrain him so that he was no longer a threat.

As soon as she did that, the hatred clouded his eyes again and he began struggling against the ropes. “Let me go, you brat!” He demanded.

Stephanie refused to acknowledge his aggression. Instead, she raised her wand again and spoke her spell so that he would know what was coming. “Legilimens.” It was a spell she had never used but had seen performed many times before.

But nothing happened. Through his struggling, Draco smirked in her direction. “You are not the only one who was taught Occlumency. Bless Aunt Bella!”

But Stephanie knew that she could break him. After a short debate, she decided to utilize a skill that Severus had taught her long ago: the skill of quick succession. The Dark Lord had used this spell on her the night she helped Neville and Ginny escape from Malfoy Manor, only he had multiple people Curse her as he performed Legilimency. And though she momentarily had the urge to Curse Draco, she quickly decided against it.

Instead, Stephanie smiled and Draco immediately burst into a fit of giggles. Then she cast Legilimency and entered Draco’s mind.

She saw many memories that she would rather not have seen as she looked for the information she needed. After a few, she watched as a short, fat man that she had never seen before help Draco plot points in a wooded area. They appeared to be discussing something important; Draco had a look of deep concentration rooted onto his face. And she suddenly realized that the location was where she had been held. So he had had someone helping him! And suddenly she was no longer in Draco’s mind.

She was back in the enclosure with Draco smirking at her even though he was tightly bound and obviously defeated. Stephanie knew that she didn’t have the energy to keep playing this game so she had to focus even harder; she didn’t have much time. Once again, she cast the tickling jinx on Draco and she entered his mind. She was there a long time this time; she saw him longing for his father’s attention, his watching Harry with envy, and even his passion for Pansy Parkinson. She didn’t think she would ever find what she needed, but finally, she found what she was looking for and she left Draco’s ugly mind.

“Find what you wanted?” He sneered.

“Lonely.” She said sympathetically, shaking her head. “Very lonely and sad.”

Stephanie circled her wand above her head and muttered the password that would free her forever. “Pansy Parkinson.”

With that, all of the energy drained from her body and she collapsed to the ground. She could hear voices calling her name and shouting orders as they rushed closer and all she could think about was how lucky she was to have friends and family who cared about her and how lonely Draco’s life must have been.

“Shut down the feeds!” She heard a male voice call out, but she didn’t really care who it was. All that mattered was that it was over.

“Get him out of here!” A woman’s voice shrieked. “Get him away from her!”

And immediately, Stephanie felt someone lift her head. She slowly opened her eyes and saw Harry as he knelt down next to her. He lifted her head and placed it on his knees. She smiled up at him as he began stroking her forehead.

“You did it, Stephanie.” He whispered, leaning closer to her. “You are going to be alright. You’re safe now.”

She only had one thought in her mind at that moment, and it wasn’t relief that she was finally safe. It wasn’t about the friends that had sacrificed so much for her. And it wasn’t about the boy who had just tried to kill her.

She looked deep into her brother’s eyes and smiled softly. “Mum and dad are proud of me.” She whispered coarsely. It didn’t seem like that comment was too important, but she knew that it was true.

Harry smiled down at her and nodded. “Yes they are.” And she saw that tears had come to his eyes at her declaration. “Yes we are.”

*~*~*~*~*

Harry waited in anticipation. A few moments before, it looked like Stephanie was going to lose her life. She was thoroughly beaten, but by insurmountable odds, Stephanie had gotten her hand on her wand and was now hovering over Draco Malfoy’s restrained body.

And it didn’t appear like Stephanie knew that they could hear every word she was saying. She clearly couldn’t hear them, but they could all hear what was going on inside the enclosure. Harry had never been more proud of his sister than at the moment just before their duel had begun.

Stephanie had stood up to Draco for the second time in two days. She not only stood up against Draco, but she also defended herself. And she did a great job of doing so. Malfoy had even been rendered speechless at one point. Harry hated the fact that she claimed to have committed all those murders because of him, but he was glad she had done so. Had she not done as she was told, Stephanie would have been dead a long time ago. And she was alive now; that was all that mattered.

And somehow, Harry wasn’t sure if he could remember it if he tried, Stephanie had overpowered Malfoy in a matter of seconds. He was watching her attempt at performing Legilimency on Malfoy, though he wasn’t sure why. And instead of Cursing him as he had done to her, Stephanie merely cast a tickling jinx to distract him and allow her into his mind.

“What is she doing?” Harry asked no one in particular.

“I think she’s trying to retrieve the password.” Kingsley responded and Harry nodded. Of course she was. Even though she was clearly exhausted and had almost gotten defeated, Stephanie was still of sound mind enough to try to find a way out of her enclosure. Harry wondered if he could ever be more proud of his sister than at that moment.

And the instant the bubble disappeared, Harry ran to her side. He threw himself to the ground and hugged her head; she had collapsed after she muttered the spell to release the defenses of the bubble.

“You did it, Stephanie.” He whispered, leaning in to touch her. He had to make sure that she was really alive because it all felt like a dream. “You are going to be alright. You’re safe now.”

He heard the sounds all around him and couldn’t help but watch out of the corner of his eye. Kingsley ordered someone to take down the feeds and Harry saw a flash as Nikki blast the butterfly to bits. There was nothing left of it to flutter to the ground.

Molly Weasley also demanded that someone take Malfoy away and Kristin and her husband Mathew were more than happy to oblige. They pulled him up by the shoulders, one on each side, and disappeared immediately. There was a miserable smirk plastered on his face as he was taken away. Harry refused to acknowledge his presence and looked back towards Stephanie.

He was happy that his friends were keeping their distance. It was time for those two to be together alone for a moment before she got bombarded with people. Harry smiled at her; she looked so much like their mother at that moment that it took his breath away.

“Mum and dad are proud of me.” She whispered coarsely. Harry felt the tears come to his eyes at her comment. It was an interesting choice of words after what had just happened and he wondered how she knew that. But it didn’t even matter because he knew that they were proud of her.

Harry smiled down at her and nodded. “Yes they are.” He said as a tear rolled down his cheek. He repeated himself to make sure that she understood how proud everyone was of her. “Yes we are.”

“Stephanie, how are you doing?” Harry looked up a moment later and saw that Kingsley Shacklebolt had come and was now kneeling next to them. McGonagall was next to him and Molly Weasley stood behind them. She was trying to be subtle, but Harry could tell that she was trying to inch closer to see how Stephanie was doing.

He gestured for Molly to come over and she heaved a heavy sigh of relief. She smiled at him her gratitude and he just nodded.

“I’m, I’m okay.” It seemed to be a struggle for her to get out those few words. “I want to go home.”

“Shh.” Harry said, stroking her forehead. It was drenched in sweat from the pain she had just endured. “Take it easy.”

“We have to get you to St. Mungo’s, Stephanie.” McGonagall said softly, taking his sister’s hand. Harry saw his professor squeeze Stephanie’s hand in a supportive gesture.

“No!” Stephanie lifted her head up in protest and grimaced at the action.

“We’ll take care of you there.” Kingsley said, completely oblivious to the reason behind her objection. “You will be well protected.”

“I want to go home.” Stephanie whispered, repeating her original request. “I’m fine. I’ll be fine. It’s just a scratch, I’m not hurt bad.”

“Honey, we just want to have the Healers look you over.” Molly said softly. “You’ve taken quite a beating and we want to make sure that you are okay.”

“Harry, please.” Stephanie looked him deep in the eyes and begged him to just let her go home. “Please.”

“Please go, Stephanie.” Harry pleaded with his sister. “For me, please let them take you to St. Mungo’s.”

Stephanie looked at him for a moment and then relaxed her head. She sighed in exasperation and then agreed. “Fine.”

“Thank you.” Harry smiled at her and she closed her eyes. It almost looked like she was too exhausted to feel pain, but Harry knew that she was hurting. But she would never show them that because she was so stubborn. She was just like him.

“We’ll take her by Ministry car.” Kingsley was explaining to McGonagall, Molly, and Arthur. “I think she’s stable enough so we don’t have to risk hurting her even more by going through the Floo Network or by Apparition. I want to move her leg as little as possible.”

“Don’t leave me, Harry.” Stephanie whispered suddenly and Harry took the hand that McGonagall had released.

“I won’t leave you. I promise.” Harry responded by squeezing her hand. She smiled even though her eyes were closed and Harry knew that he would keep his promise. He would not leave her side until it was physically impossible for him to stay. Harry didn’t let go of her hand as Kingsley and a few others moved her onto a stretcher and prepared to take her to St. Mungo’s.


Okay, so here it is. I hoped you liked the battle between Draco and Stephanie. However, I have great news for me and bad news for you guys. I was offered a new job in Minnesota, which I have accepted. That means I will be spending the next 30+ days packing, moving, getting settled, and everything else that goes along with moving. So I probably won't have a whole lot of time to write until I get everything settled (I start my new job August 25th..so it's a ways out)...But I will do everything I can to update at least once a week.

Chapter Eight: Explanations, Betrayals, and Surprises

“I can’t believe he had the audacity to bring you to the Burrow.” Hermione was saying even though Stephanie wasn’t really listening. “Malfoy was just showing off by doing that.”

Stephanie just nodded her head. She really didn’t feel up to talking about her time in captivity, but she didn’t want to say anything about it. It was nice to have her friends in her room and she enjoyed the company after almost five days in solitary confinement.

She couldn’t remember the day before too well, either. Stephanie knew that she had defeated Draco Malfoy and freed herself, but she didn’t remember how she got to St. Mungo’s or what they did to her once she arrived. She pretty much fell asleep once Harry put her on the stretcher and she slept all through the night. It felt good to be able to relax.

Her legs were still sore but were no longer broken. Healers and Healer Aides kept coming in to make her drink different potions. They told her that the potions would rehydrate her and make her stronger. They also said the potions would help heal her wounds and burns and allow her to sleep. But she didn’t care about that. All she wanted was to go home.

What she had been uncomfortable with, though, was the fact that there were at least four Aurors standing outside her room at any given time. In addition, Harry, Hermione, Ginny Ron, and Neville were refusing to leave her room. Since she had been awake, no one else had come to see her.

“Kingsley said they were questioning him in Azkaban.” Harry added with a little excitement. “And hopefully torturing him for information.”

“Don’t say that.” Stephanie responded simply, shaking her head. “I don’t want that.”

“But I do.” Harry told her honestly. Stephanie didn’t answer him because she knew that he could feel however he wanted. As much as she despised Draco Malfoy, she didn’t want him to be injured; he didn’t know any better than how he was raised. But she couldn’t change how others felt, either.

Just then there was a knock on the door and Kingsley stuck his head inside. “May I come in?” He asked her.

“Of course.” Stephanie tried to sit up a little, but a stabbing pain coursed through her side and she grimaced. When the pain subsided, she looked towards the Minister again. “When am I getting out of here?”

She asked the question hopefully. It felt like she had just gotten out of the hospital and all she wanted was to go home and sleep in her own bed.

Kingsley smiled at her knowingly as he sat down in the empty chair he had just conjured. “I believe that Healer Sorenson is working on your discharge papers at this very moment.”

Stephanie sighed in relief and muttered, “Good.”

“But first, I need to talk to you.” Kingsley leaned forward and placed his arms on her bed. She was grateful that he didn’t ask her friends to leave because she would have told them to stay. “Tell me about the spell you used against Draco.”

“No.” Stephanie answered flatly. It was a question that she had been expecting and she knew that she couldn’t tell them about the spell. No one must ever know how to complete it—it would be too dangerous. Kingsley nodded his head encouragingly and she shook hers forcefully. “I can’t.”

“Why not?” Ginny asked quietly.

Stephanie looked straight at Harry and thought for a moment. She closed her eyes and swallowed. She whispered her reply as she imagined what would happen if people learned how to use the spell. “I don’t want anyone else to get hurt.”

“But it didn’t appear to hurt Malfoy.” Hermione pointed out and Stephanie looked at her friend sadly. As much as she hated Draco Malfoy, Stephanie didn’t want to see him or anyone else injured by a spell of her creation.

“No, it didn’t.” She replied with a sigh. Stephanie knew that it wasn’t worth her energy to argue with them. They would continue asking about it until she gave in. She would just need to tell them the truth and hope that they didn’t want to learn the spell. “The spell doesn’t harm the person; it’s what can happen afterwards that I’m afraid of.

“What do you mean, Stephanie?” Kingsley asked.

“I think I was thirteen because it had happened soon after I met Harry. I had just started to learn magic and my wand was in a holster around my leg. I remember that because it itched like crazy.” Stephanie began by describing what had led up to the spell’s creation. “Draco was home for the holidays and he was mad about something.”

“What was he angry about?” Harry asked and Stephanie knew that he feared that he had done something unwittingly to anger Draco and caused her to be punished.

“Did you do something wrong?” Neville leaned forward and asked. He was sitting in the background with Ron and Ginny. Hermione, Harry, and Kingsley were at Stephanie’s bedside.

Stephanie shook her head. “No. Honestly, he was always angry about something or another and he always enjoyed taking it out on me. And Harry-”

She pointed a finger at Harry with a smile on her face. “Don’t even think for one minute that it was your fault. You know that I really enjoyed when you taunted him. Draco always took everything you did or said to him to heart even though he rarely let you see that.”

“But-” Harry began but Stephanie stopped him. She lifted her arm and placed her hand on top of his. He turned his hand around and squeezed hers.

“Anyway.” Stephanie continued with her story. “Well, he set this large dog after me.”

Stephanie shuddered as she remembered how scared she was of that dog. “I don’t know where he got it or why it was so angry, but he ordered it to get me. It was huge, much bigger than I was at the time.” She gestured with her arms to show just how large the dog was.

“Drool flowed from its mouth as it growled towards me. All I could do was run and I remember hearing only the dog’s barking and Draco’s hysterical laughter.” She had to pause to catch her breath. She was reliving the story as she was telling it. “I stumbled to the ground somewhere in the woods and I could hear the dog getting closer and closer. So, I reached for my wand, though I had no idea what to do with it.

“Then, suddenly, these words just popped into my head and I just screamed them at the top of my lungs. The dog was lunging at me as the spell hit him and I was shocked at what happened next. The dog looked at me as it fell to the ground, and then it just trotted away like it had forgotten what it was doing.

“I stood, dusted myself off, put my wand back in its holster, and ran back to Malfoy Manor. Once I got to where Draco was standing, I could hear the dog howling again. My spell had only lasted a few seconds, but it saved my life. And I swore to myself that I would never share this spell with anyone or use it ever again. Only Severus knew about it because of our Occlumency lessons.” Stephanie finished.

“I don’t understand.” Harry squeezed her hand as he spoke.

“It can save lives.” Kingsley broke in. “Aurors could use it as a defensive spell. What is wrong with it? Why is it so bad?”

Stephanie hadn’t seen it at first, either, so she understood their confusion. But she had soon realized the true impact of the spell. “You really don’t see it?” She asked.

Everyone in the room shook their heads, telling her that none of them realized how dangerous the spell truly was. “Draco didn’t understand, either. The spell causes one to lose all of their aggression. They no longer have the desire to continue fighting. But I have only gotten it to last for a matter of seconds.”

“I still don’t understand why that’s a bad thing.” Ron spoke up after a few seconds of silence. The others nodded their agreement, even Hermione.

“Because it renders the opponent defenseless.” Stephanie explained calmly and it appeared that her friends were starting to understand. “Draco was defeated the moment I cast the spell. Death Eaters would torture and kill for the incantation to that spell and Aurors would be in immediate danger if even one person learned it.”

“I want you to teach it to me.” Kingsley requested. “It would be a great assistance to our Aurors to learn such a powerful spell.”

“I can’t.” Stephanie said and Kingsley looked like he was going to argue, but there was a knock on the door. A strange, but familiar looking man stuck his head inside the room.

“Is this a bad time?” The man asked, looking at Kingsley. Stephanie noticed that this man didn’t even glance in her direction, which she thought was odd. She hadn’t been in public too much, but she had noticed that people tended to stare at her and cross the street to get away from her.

“Of course not. Come in, Martin.” Kingsley gestured for the man to enter. “What did you learn?”

“As you know, last evening, we took the boy to Azkaban and questioned him for hours.” The stranger explained, looking only at Kingsley. “Draco was surprisingly helpful. He told us exactly where to find his girlfriend and we picked her up this afternoon. She was staying in a motel in a small town in South Korea, where they had obviously been keeping Ms. Potter.”

“Pansy.” Harry mouthed to Stephanie, though she hadn’t needed him to tell her that. She should have been ecstatic that the girl had been apprehended, but she wasn’t. Maybe it was because she was too exhausted, but Stephanie felt nothing towards the girl.

“She is on her way to Azkaban as we speak.” Martin spoke to Kingsley, still not taking his eyes off of the Minister. Stephanie noticed that the man wouldn’t even look at her brother. Something didn’t seem right about him; she felt like she had seen him before, but she just couldn’t place him. Stephanie could tell by the color of his robes that he was an Auror, so she figured that she had seen him somewhere in that capacity.

“Good job, Martin.” Kingsley said and the man bowed. “I will be there later to question him myself.”

Martin nodded and then backed silently out of the room. As the door shut behind him, Stephanie suddenly realized where she had seen that man before. She gasped and quickly brought her hands up to her mouth. She was speechless. What was that man doing in her hospital room? And why was Kingsley so friendly with him?

“What?” Harry asked her with a worried expression, standing up quickly.

But Stephanie ignored him. Instead, she turned her body towards Kingsley. He had so many answers to provide her. Kingsley couldn’t be working with this man, could he? “What was he doing here?” She demanded forcefully.

“What do you mean?” Kingsley asked, clearly confused by her outburst.

“Stephanie,” Harry explained for the Minister. “Martin Webber is the head Auror for the task force on apprehending Death Eaters.”

“But he helped Draco!” Stephanie exclaimed, pointing towards the door.

“No.” Kingsley responded by shaking his head. “That is impossible. I have known Martin for years. He would never betray me like that.”

“How do you know that, Stephanie? Did you see him there?” Hermione asked. Stephanie wasn’t sure if her friend believed her or not.

“When I had to use Legilimency on Draco to get out of that bubble.” Stephanie was so flustered that she was having difficulty making her words comprehensible. “I saw him in one of Draco’s memories. He helped Draco figure out where to place the bubble.”

Kingsley looked at her and studied her expression for a minute. She knew that he must be thinking about the situation in his mind. He was debating whether he should trust her or his co-worker? Finally, he stood and stuck his head outside the door.

“I need to speak with Martin again, Pat.” Kingsley said to one of the Aurors providing security outside of her hospital room door. “Please bring him back to me immediately. And use force if it is necessary.”

He walked back to his chair at her bedside and he continued to look at her doubtfully. “Are you sure of what you saw, Stephanie? You were pretty exhausted.”

“Of course I know what I saw.” Stephanie sighed. She wasn’t going to fight with him, so she lay back on her pillow and waited in silence until Pat, a Junior Auror, returned with Martin Webber in tow.

“You wanted to see me, Minister?” Martin responded and Stephanie noticed that he still would not acknowledge her presence.

“Yes, I did, Martin.” Kingsley turned to face the Auror, but he did not stand. His face looked serious and determined. “Who told you to look for Stephanie in South America?”

Martin looked taken aback and was unsure of how to answer. Stephanie knew that he was surprised by the question, but she didn’t feel sorry for him. “You know I can’t tell you that. They will stop coming to me with useful information. He was just mistaken—he thought he was giving accurate information.”

“Are you telling me that you did not intentionally provide false information to keep us from finding Stephanie?” Kingsley began the interrogation and Stephanie could only watch as the man lied to them.

“W-What?” Martin asked. “Of course I didn’t do that!”

“Don’t you dare lie!” Stephanie exclaimed. She wouldn’t let this man she had never met make her look like a fool. She knew what she saw, and she had seen this man helping Draco keep her captive. “I saw you working with him. You were helping Draco!”

“Stephanie!” Harry whispered coarsely. “Calm down.”

“LOOK AT ME!” Stephanie screamed so loud that even she jumped at her voice’s force. She was shaking with anger at the fact that no one seemed to believe her. Martin finally looked at her and Stephanie softened her voice to an almost whisper. “Tell them. Please.”

Martin stared at her for a second and then fell to his knees. Tears flowed from his eyes as his back heaved up and down. The fattest man that Stephanie had ever seen was crying so hard that his squeals could probably be heard down the hall.

“You mean, it’s true?” Kingsley asked disbelievingly. “How could you do that, Martin? How could you help Draco Malfoy kidnap Stephanie?”

Martin paused his sobbing and looked up towards Kingsley. He couldn’t even speak to his boss and Kingsley had to prod the man to explain himself. Finally, he turned to Stephanie and spoke. His voice was high-pitched and saddened.

“I’m sorry, Ms. Potter.” The man apologized to her and Stephanie was disgusted, but she also wanted to hear why he had done it. “But I owed a lot of money to horrible, horrible wizards. Draco promised to pay my debts and provide me enough money to live comfortably for the rest of my life if I helped him. They were going to kill me if I didn’t agree to this—I needed the money desperately. I had to do it.”

“But why didn’t you come to me?” Kingsley asked, completely dumbfounded. Stephanie knew how hard it was to learn that a person you once thought of as an ally was really an enemy. “I could have helped you.”

“I-I-I couldn’t. I’m sorry, Kingsley.” Martin stuttered. He then turned back towards Stephanie. “I’m sorry, Stephanie.”

But Stephanie couldn’t say anything. This was a grown man who had made his own decisions and mistakes. And he had put her life in danger to protect his own. She knew how one could do that, because she had done that very thing, but his actions still upset her greatly. He had been an Auror, he had sworn to Kingsley that he would protect her. She couldn’t even look at him, so she looked towards her brother.

Suddenly there was a knock on the door. Nikki Fullbright opened the door slowly and came in. “I’m sorry to disturb you guys, but he’s here, Minister. We really shouldn’t keep him in the hallway because people could see.”

“Thanks, Nikki.” Kingsley stood and nodded in Nikki’s direction. “Can you please take Martin to Azkaban? Begin his arraignment and I will be there shortly.”

“What?” Nikki asked, taken by surprise. She looked from Kingsley to the Auror that was still kneeling on the floor with tears flowing from his eyes “You want me to arrest him?”

“I’ll explain later.” Kingsley said simply and Nikki escorted Martin outside the room. Both Aurors left without another word and Stephanie was honestly glad to see the man go. How was she supposed to trust any of the other Aurors after that? If Kingsley didn’t know who was working against the Ministry, how could any of them be safe?

“Who’s here?” Harry asked Kingsley and Stephanie looked at the Minister expectantly.

Kingsley opened his mouth to answer as the door opened once again. She didn’t listen to a word Kingsley was saying. Were they not going to let her rest at all? Why were they testing her so much? Hadn’t she proven to them all that she was capable of taking care of herself?

She instantly reached for her wand, which was placed on the nightstand next to her bed. Stephanie pointed it directly towards the man that had entered and was standing, without shackles, next to her bed. There were four Aurors pointing their wands in his direction, but she couldn’t believe their nerve to bring him there!

Harry stood up again in protest. “Kingsley. Get him out of here!”

“How nice it is to see you again, Potter.” Lucius Malfoy smiled at her brother. “Put down your wand you stupid girl. We all know you won’t hurt me.”

“Don’t test me, Lucius.” Stephanie hissed with disgust. She turned to Kingsley with anger in her voice and on her face. The blood was rushing to her cheeks and they burned with frustration. “What is he doing here?”

“Yesterday, Draco told Martin, though he probably already knew the story, how he tracked you down to Diagon Alley and the Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes.” Kingsley explained calmly, though Stephanie was breathing heavily and refusing to lower her wand. “We know that he was using your Malfoy Crest to summon you and trace you so that he could get you alone. In fact, he had been hiding out in front of Grimmauld Place for days waiting for you to leave.”

“So?” Stephanie asked. She turned to glare at Lucius, who was just standing there with an awful grin on his face. He was enjoying every minute that he was standing there instead of being in his cell in Azkaban. She wished that he would rot there instead of being taken out on her account. It was the third time that he had been given the leisure of seeing daylight because of her.

“He has agreed to remove the Crest from your forearm.” Kingsley informed her and Stephanie didn’t understand. Why would Lucius do that for her?

“How do we know that he won’t curse her or something?” Neville stood up and inched closer to her bedside. “You are going to trust him with a wand?”

“He won’t.” That was all Kingsley would say. He raised his arm and forced her to lower hers. She eyed him reluctantly and then stretched out her left arm, the one that bore both the Dark Mark and the Malfoy Family Crest.

“Fine.” She whispered, still refusing to take her eyes off the man that had made her life miserable for so many years.

Kingsley nodded towards one of the Aurors who reached into his robes and provided Lucius Malfoy with the wand that would give him power over Stephanie once again.

She wasn’t nervous that he would harm her; she knew that Kingsley wouldn’t allow anything to happen to her. She was just upset by the fact that Lucius was given a wand. He had given up that right the moment he joined the Dark Lord’s forces.

He raised his hand slowly and placed the wand to her skin. She closed her eyes and prepared for a stinging or burning sensation, but she didn’t feel anything. When the wand lifted, she opened her eyes and looked down at her arm. The crest was still there; he hadn’t removed it.

“It didn’t work.” Stephanie said, looking up towards Lucius again. “It’s still there.”

“It is always going to be there.” Lucius said snidely. “It’s a tattoo, it can’t be removed. However, it is no longer activated, meaning that it will never bother you again. It is just like the Dark Mark—it is present, but completely useless.”

“Thank you.” Stephanie eyed him suspiciously, but thanked him anyway. He had done her a nice thing, a favor. It had to be the first kind gesture he had ever made towards her and it intrigued her greatly. Why was he doing that for her?

Lucius nodded and turned back towards the Aurors. Without a word, one of the Aurors took the wand from Lucius while another cast a spell that placed the prisoner in the shackles that would keep him from escaping. And just as they were almost completely out the door of her hospital room, Lucius turned back around and faced her.

“Thank you, Stephanie.” Lucius said it quietly, but it was the most sincere tone that Stephanie had ever heard him speak. It was almost as though he hadn’t tortured and humiliated her for most of her life. “But you were wrong. I do love my son.”

With that, Lucius turned and left the hospital room. It was the last time that Stephanie would ever see the man who had been her captor for many, many years, she finally felt a sense of satisfaction. She had survived his reign over her; she had won against him and his family. Life was finally going to be good for her.

“Why did he thank me?” Stephanie asked, looking around the room.

“We’ll explain later.” Hermione said with a smile and Stephanie nodded. The last few minutes had completely exhausted her and she just wanted to go home and rest.

“I was just thinking about something while Lucius was here.” Neville spoke, breaking the silence after a few moments. “Didn’t Harry get in trouble for blowing up his aunt before our third year? Why didn’t Malfoy ever get in trouble for using magic against you?”

“I can answer that one.” Kingsley responded solemnly. “Lucius both bribed and threatened the Hogwarts Governors. He had complete control over the decisions they made and the Governors chose to ignore Draco’s infractions.”

“That weasel!” Hermione shrieked.

“Look. It’s Malfoy.” Harry said with a frown. “What do you expect?”

“That is true.” Hermione responded.

They talked for awhile and a few minutes later, Healer Sorenson finally made an appearance in her room. He was holding a clipboard and had a smile on his face. “Are you ready to get out of here?”

“Yes!” Stephanie responded exasperatedly. She had been ready since before Draco had locked her in that bubble. All she wanted was her own bed for a nice night’s sleep. She wanted to sleep a dreamless sleep and think happy thoughts for awhile. She didn’t want to have to worry about anything.

“I will discharge you if you promise that you won’t come back here for awhile.” Healer Sorenson smiled at her and she couldn’t help but return his gesture.

“I don’t plan on ever coming back here, Healer.” Stephanie replied with a grin. She pulled herself up with a grunt and moved her legs over the edge of the bed.

“Then you are free to leave whenever you would like.” He said, handing her a stack of discharge papers.

He waved his wand and a wheelchair appeared at her bedside. Harry and Neville walked over to her side and helped lift her into the chair. She didn’t want to waste any time getting out of the hospital. It wasn’t that she didn’t like the Healers, it was just that she wanted to go home and forget about what had just happened to her. Kingsley wheeled her out into the hallway and started in the direction of the back entrance.

“Where are we going?” She asked him.

“We are taking you out the back entrance. There is a large crowd gathered in front and we want to make sure that we can protect you.” Kingsley informed her matter-of-factly.

“No.” Stephanie demanded, looking towards the Minister of Magic. “I want to go out the front entrance. I don’t want any Aurors or protection any longer. All I want is to walk out the front door with the people I love, with my friends.”

“What about the people who still want to hurt you?” Kingsley asked. “After all you have done for us and after all you’ve gone through. I don’t want to lose you.”

“Harry is still hated among the same group of wizards that wants to hurt me.” Stephanie pointed out, looking towards her brother for support. “And he’s not protected. I don’t want to be afraid anymore. I won’t hide any more. If they want to come after me, then I am ready for them. But I also want to start living my life, the life that I have been denied for seventeen years.”

“Very well.” Kingsley frowned at her and turned toward the Aurors that stood behind them. “You heard her. You can return to headquarters.”

They obliged and Kingsley wheeled her toward the elevators. All of her friends rode in silence down the elevators and towards the front door. Then Kingsley stopped and she pushed herself out of the chair. Harry and Neville tried to help her, but she brushed them away. She was going to walk out of that hospital even if it killed her. And she was surprised when Hermione and Ginny opened the door.

The crowd outside began applauding as she slowly and unsteadily walked towards them.


There's that chapter. Wow..As of Tuesday, I didn't think I'd be able to get one up this week. But I worked really hard for you guys and I am really proud of it! It is so full of information and drama...I love it! And I am so excited for the next chapter...I'll try to get it posted by the middle of next week. Thanks for sticking with me!

Chapter Nine(a): An Unexpected Proposition

“Can you believe how strong she is?” Hermione asked as they walked down the street of Diagon Alley. They were out shopping for Harry and Stephanie’s birthday party and for Stephanie’s presents.

“I can.” Harry smiled as he looked into a store window. Hermione could see his reflection as he looked at the objects inside. “I just can’t believe she wanted the party so soon. I offered to push it back a few days, but she said she just wanted to move on.”

“Well, you can’t blame her.” Ginny added. She was holding Harry’s hand as they shopped.

“How is she doing, anyway?” Neville asked, trying to look as though he wasn’t completely interested in the answer.

Harry turned his head over his shoulder and looked at Neville. “She’s up and walking around much more than before. Believe it or not, but I think Malfoy really helped her. And Kreacher seems to have found a liking to her. He is always trying to wait on her.”

“That’s odd. Kreacher doesn’t like anybody.” Ron replied.

Hermione felt her face turn into a scold. “You should really free him, Harry. He did fight against the Death Eaters, after all.”

“You know he doesn’t want that.” Harry rolled his eyes. “You know, I showed Stephanie the Daily Prophet article this morning, but she wouldn’t even look at it.”

“Do you blame her?” Hermione responded. “After all the newspaper has done to her? What I can’t believe is that Rita actually apologized to her yesterday.”

Rita Skeeter came up to Stephanie as she walked out of the hospital and had actually apologized for all of the slander. Hermione had gotten the impression that the journalist had been pressured into it, but that didn’t really matter. It was the fact that she acknowledged she was in the wrong that was amazing.

“I didn’t see it this morning.” Neville admitted. “What did it say?”

Hermione walked to the next store, grabbed a copy of that morning’s Daily Prophet, and she lifted it so Neville could read the headline: Stephanie Potter Bares her Soul: The Truth is Revealed.

The article talked about Stephanie’s goodbye messages to her friends, it described her confrontations with Draco, and it explained that Stephanie could have hurt, Cursed, or even killed Draco, but she did not. It was very well written and described Stephanie’s actions and beliefs with the most accuracy, though Rita never mentioned the inconsistencies between this story and her previous renditions of Stephanie’s life. It was the last sentence, though, that Hermione had choked up at. She read it aloud so her friends could hear it again. “Stephanie Potter truly is a modern day hero.”

“The world finally knows.” Ginny smiled as she looked at the picture of Stephanie that had been taken as she walked out of St. Mungo’s.

“Why wouldn’t she read this?” Ron asked.

“I think it’s all too much for her.” Harry responded by putting the paper back where Hermione had gotten it from. “She will eventually. I kept a copy for her.”

“That’s not it at all.” Neville replied. He was so dead serious when he spoke that Hermione got a little worried. “It’s the attention. You know how she hates to be the center of attention. We are all lucky that she even agreed to the birthday party.”

Neville smiled at his last comment and Hermione couldn’t help but laugh. He was absolutely right. Stephanie felt so awkward in crowds and hated having all attention on her. That stemmed from always having negative attention and focus drawn on her to humiliate and degrade her into submission. How had they ever been able to convince Stephanie to agree to have a special birthday party, her first birthday party? Hermione realized that she would probably never know the answer to that question.

She listened as her friends turned their discussion to what they were going to buy that day. She looked off into the busy street and realized how lucky she was.

*~*~*~*

Stephanie jumped as she heard a crash upstairs. By instinct, she reached into her pocket and pulled out her wand. Then she got up from the couch where she had been reading and made her way towards the stairs.

It was the first time that she had ever been left alone. There had been times when the Dark Lord would send her on missions by herself, but she had always known that she was being followed. The Dark Lord had never truly trusted that she could handle things on her own.

The day before, she had told Kingsley that she didn’t want Aurors protecting her any longer, and she had really meant it. She was tired of hiding from this person or that. People would always come after her and she didn’t want to fear that. She wanted to be free from everything just like her friends were. But it was weird having no one else around.

Her friends had needed to run some errands for the next day’s party and she didn’t feel up to joining them. It was actually her birthday that day, but she didn’t mind waiting one day to celebrate. She had never been able to celebrate her birthday before; the closest she had come was when the Dark Lord allowed her to learn Apparition, it was his version of a gift, although it served his needs more than hers.

But the house made strange noises and it freaked her out more than she thought it would. For goodness’ sake, she hadn’t even been afraid of death, but she was scared to be alone? What is wrong with me? Stephanie asked herself while shaking her head in disgust.

So, she slowly ascended the stairs towards the origin of the noise. Stephanie first peered into Harry’s room, or Sirius’ old bedroom, and saw nothing out of its place. Or, at least, the room was no messier than how Harry normally kept it. Stephanie had been raised to keep clean quarters, so this trait about her brother completely bothered her. She shut the door and then she went into a couple of the extra bedrooms, and they, too, were undisturbed.

Finally, she reached her bedroom door, Regulus’ old bedroom, and slowly opened it. “Kreacher!” She called out when she saw the mess.

Her bedroom was torn apart and feathers from her pillows were still fluttering in the air. Books were strewn about with pages scattered all over. Her once full water glass lay in pieces on the ground and water seeped into her socks, soaking her feet. She bent down to pick up the books as Kreacher suddenly appeared.

“Are you okay, Miss?” Kreacher asked. He had grown fond of her ever since she had allowed him to keep the portrait of Mrs. Black. He may have grumbled about serving half-bloods and mud-bloods, but he was always pleased to do as she asked. When he noticed the mess, he looked up to her with concern. “What happened here, Miss?”

“Were you just up here, Kreacher?” She looked at him hopefully, sinking down to the floor. Because she was on her knees, Stephanie was eye level with him and she noticed that he looked scared. Was he afraid for her?

“No, Miss.” Kreacher bent down to help her. “Kreacher was outside in the garden.”

“I need to clean this up.” Stephanie began to mop the glass up with her pillow case. But all it was doing was pushing the water and glass around. She was shaking so badly that she could barely concentrate. Who had been in here? She thought to herself. And another sudden thought occurred to her and she began frantically searching about.

“What is it, Miss?” Kreacher asked, opening his eyes very large. It reminded Stephanie of how Dobby used to react when he would realize that she had been inujred.

“My photo album. The one Harry gave me for Christmas! It’s gone!” She was starting to panic because it was the only link she had ever recieved to her parents. It was all she had of them. She needed that photo album!

Just then the doorbell rang and she jumped again. She continued to push through glass, books, paper, and water as she tried to find the photo album. The bell rang again and Kreacher spoke calmly to her. “Kreacher will clean this up and look for the book. The Misstress should answer the door.” And she nodded at him.

She lifted herself from the floor and dusted herself off. Then she looked towards the house elf. “Kreacher, please don’t tell anyone about this. Not even Harry.”

“Of course, Miss.” Kreacher nodded and then began cleaning up the mess in her bedroom. Stephanie didn’t want any of her friends to worry about her; she needed to prove to them that she didn’t need Auror protection.

She must have been a sight to see as her pants were all covered in water and feathers stuck in her hair. She clutched her wand as she descended the stairs and made her way to the front door. Stephanie was surprised to see someone she trusted when she opened it.

“Professor!” She gasped as she opened the door.


So here is that chapter. It is Part One of a two part chapter...Sorry! It's all I've had time to write and I wanted to post what I had because it'll probably be at least a week (maybe more) before I can post another. I know there's not too much to it, but feel free to let me know what you think! I will post as soon as I can! I promise!

Chapter Nine(b): An Unexpected Proposition

Minerva sucked in her breath in surprise at seeing Stephanie Potter’s disheveled state, and then she looked the girl up and down. Her long red hair hung down around her shoulders and she was soaking wet from head to toe. There were feathers sticking to her clothes and out of her hair. She had her wand pointed fiercely in Minerva’s direction and she appeared to be trembling.

“Professor!” Stephanie Potter cried out and lowered her wand. It looked like Stephanie sighed in relief, though Minerva couldn’t tell for sure. She eyed the girl suspiciously and with a high level of concern.

She had been so busy with getting Hogwarts ready for the upcoming school year that she hadn’t visited the girl for a long time. In fact, she hadn’t even made it to the hospital before Stephanie was discharged. She had been relieved, and quite impressed, to watch the girl succeed in defeating the insufferable Draco Malfoy, but there were other things that demanded her attention. And today she had a perfect reason to visit the girl, even though she never needed an excuse to do so. Minerva cared deeply for Stephanie Potter.

She had been nervous to hear that Kingsley was going to allow Lucius Malfoy a wand in Stephanie’s presence. It would not have been unlike the Death Eater to use the wand to hurt Stephanie further than she already was, but Kingsley had assured her that Lucius would not harm the young Potter. Minerva trusted her good friend and advisor’s judgment. Kingsley had apparently assured Lucius that Draco would not spend his entire life behind prison walls. If he removed the crest’s powers from Stephanie’s arm, Draco would eventually have the chance to be released from prison, and the possibility would remain for Lucius and Narcissa to have grandchildren. Lucius did not want the family name to die with his son.

But Minerva could not be at the hospital for her. In addition to working on the student placement exams, she had also been trying unsuccessfully to identify a person to take the open Defense Against the Dark Arts position. No one wanted the position because of rumors that the position, and those that took it, was cursed. It was true, for many years, no past professor had been able to hold the position for longer than one year. The previous year it had been Amycus Carrow. A newly convicted Death Eater, he was now serving a life term in Azkaban. The year before that, Severus Snape had held the position. He was murdered by his own master over the possession of a notorious and powerful wand.

Delores Umbridge was still working for the Minitsry, but in a much lesser position. She had been taken by the Centaurs at the end of her teaching year. Alastor Moody had been impersonated during his year as the Defense Against the Dark Arts professor and Remus Lupin had been silently pressured to resign because of his werewolf status. One of Gilderoy Lockhart’s spells backfired on him and he lost his mind, though Minerva couldn’t say that she felt sorry for or missed him, and Quirinus Quirrell suffered an untimely death because of the protection Harry’s mother placed upon him when she died trying to save him. The list went on further than she could remember, with each professor lasting no longer than a year. But she hoped to change that. Hermione Granger had made a wonderful suggestion as to who should be placed in the position and she knew that it was the right place for the person to be.

“Are you all right, dear?” She asked, stepping forward into the entryway of Grimmauld Place.

“Oh, yes.” Stephanie took a deep breath and tried to dust off the legs of her jeans, though it didn’t appear to do any good. “It was just an exploding button that George left upstairs.”

“What will we do with that boy?” She asked. Minerva smiled even though she didn’t completely believe that Stephanie was telling the truth. Stephanie’s refusal to confide in her didn’t really matter, though. For fear of what others might be perceived as weakness, Stephanie kept things close to her heart. “May I come in?”

“Of course, Professor.” Stephanie moved a little so that she could walk in. “Can I get you some tea?”

“That would be wonderful.” She spoke softly as she watched Stephanie slowly hobble towards the kitchen. She took a seat in the living room and waited a few minutes until the girl returned with the tea. Minerva gracefully took a cup from the young girl.

“Thank you.” She said before taking a sip as the girl took a seat in the chair across from her. Minerva noticed that Stephanie was now dry and no longer had feathers in her hair. She smiled. “Happy birthday.”

“Thank you, Professor.” Minerva looked at Stephanie as the girl took a sip of her own tea and she couldn’t help but notice that the cup was shaking slightly.

“Please.” Minerva was a little hesitant to ask what was wrong since Stephanie hadn’t provided that information already, but something was clearly bothering her. “Call me Minerva.”

Stephanie nodded and Minerva took the silent moment to look the girl over once again. Something had definitely given her a fright but she knew that Stephanie would never admit what it was. She had demanded that she didn’t want Auror protection any longer and Minerva knew the girl well enough to know that she would never admit to needing help. Minerva made a mental note to ask Kingsley to keep a watchful eye over the young girl.

“I spoke with Mr. Longbottom last evening and he told me of his plans to go shopping with your brother today.” Minerva began. “I was glad to hear that because I’ve wanted to speak with you privately.”

“Harry argued against leaving me alone, but I convinced him that I’d be alright.” Stephanie smiled at the thought. “He can’t be around all the time. He won’t always be there to protect me.”

“Well, we all know that he wants to be. But let me get to the point of my visit, Stephanie.” Minerva sat up straight and placed her tea cup down on the coffee table. Stephanie mimicked her movements and leaned forward in interest. “I don’t know how much Harry and Hermione have told you about my struggles in finding staff for this upcoming school year.”

“Hermione told me that you were a little stressed, but she didn’t say much more than that.” Stephanie responded softly and Minerva saw her cheeks flush red with embarrassment. “They were more interested in talking about me when we were at the hospital and I sent everyone home last night. There really hasn’t been much time to talk about anything.”

“I understand.” She smiled. “You’ve been through a lot and I’m sure they understand that you need some space.”

“Yeah.” Stephanie said simply, nodding her head. Minerva could tell that she didn’t believe that and she obviously felt guilty for asking her friends to leave her.

“Well,” Minerva continued. “There is a favor I need to ask of you, and you must know that I would not ask this of you unless I really thought that you could handle it. And you are in no way obliged to accept this proposition.”

Stephanie narrowed her eyes at Minerva suspiciously. “You have done so much for me, Pro—Minerva, and I would do anything for you. But what could I possibly do to help you at Hogwarts?”

She smiled through her glasses at Stephanie Potter. The girl had been through and conquered so much, and she still believed that she was both useless and worthless. It was Stephanie’s humility that had convinced Minerva that she was the perfect person for the position.

“Honestly, Stephanie, I had never thought of you as a candidate for this position until Miss Granger came to see me a few days ago.” Minerva explained with deep rooted sincerity. She had felt horrible for not even thinking about this person, who, in all actuality, was the most qualified candidate that she knew. “But I confided my concerns to Miss Granger and she offered your name to me. I would be most grateful and honored if you would accept to be Hogwarts’ new Defense Against the Dark Arts professor.”

Stephanie leaned back in her chair and just stared at Minerva for a few minutes. Minerva was prepared to let Stephanie sit there and think about what she had just asked because she understood that Stephanie would not be prepared to answer such a request immediately. Stephanie’s first thought would be that she was incapable of such responsibility.

“Why me?” Stephanie finally whispered, cocking her head slightly.

“You have more practical experience than anyone I know. You have one-on-one experience defending yourself against Dark Wizards and casting the three Unforgivable Curses.” Minerva explained patiently.

“What about an Auror?” Stephanie asked disbelievingly, tugging on the sleeve of her shirt. It was too hot of a day to be wearing that kind of attire and Minerva wondered how Stephanie wasn’t roasting in the turtleneck. “Wouldn’t one of them be better? I mean, Nikki would make a much better professor than me. They have education and know what they are doing. I have never even gone to school. I wouldn’t know where to begin.”

“There aren’t enough Aurors to allow one the time to teach at our school.” She understood and had prepared herself for Stephanie’s doubt. “And, quite frankly, I don’t think any of them are as qualified as you are. None of the Aurors, not even the most senior ones, have as much experience as you do.

“As much as people would like to disagree, there is still a high level of danger from Dark Wizards and Death Eaters.” Minerva explained a fear that had been in the back of her mind since the day Lord Voldemort had been defeated. “I want my students to be prepared for the worst and I know that you can make sure that happens.”

“I don’t know.” Stephanie said slowly, running her fingers through her hair. “What about the parents and Governors? People are afraid of me and I’m positive that none of the parents would allow me to teach their children.”

Once again, Minerva smiled comfortingly at Stephanie’s concerns. “You don’t have to worry about that. I have already gone to the Governors and they have accepted you as a professor at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry. As for the parents, have you not seen this morning’s edition of the Daily Prophet?”

Stephanie shook her head. “No. Harry showed me the headline, but I wouldn’t let him read it to me. I don’t care what that paper says about me; I don’t want to know. For too long, I had to read that paper every morning and show the Dark Lord what that miserable journalist wrote about me. I refuse to read it anymore.”

Minerva chuckled at the girl’s strong determination. She could understand why Stephanie was boycotting the newspaper because there had not been one positive word written about her in approximately four years. Why should she waste her time reading that worthless garbage?

“Things have changed, Stephanie.” She waved her wand and a copy of the Daily Prophet appeared on the coffee table. “You actions during your confinement in that bubble convinced the wizarding community that you are not the horrible person the Daily Prophet, and Rita Skeeter, claimed. That is why they applauded you as you exited St. Mungo’s yesterday. Rita Skeeter, herself, called you a ‘modern day hero.’”

“I am no hero.” Stephanie muttered under her breath. She took the article and read through it slowly. When she was done, she put it down and looked at Minerva doubtfully. “Do you really think that I can do this?”

“I know you can, otherwise I wouldn’t ask.” Minerva answered confidently. And it was true. She would never set anyone up to fail. Stephanie would probably prove to be the best Defense Against the Dark Arts professor that Hogwarts has ever seen.

“But I don’t have any experience working with kids.” Stephanie argued. Minerva could tell that she was trying to find any excuse to decline the offer. “And you know that I’m not the best at relating to people.”

Minerva hid a knowing smile. Stephanie’s sociability wasn’t at the level that it should have been, only because of the abuse she had sustained as a child; but Stephanie Potter was much more developed than she thought she was.

“I do not like to talk negatively about my coworkers,” She spoke hesitantly, but she had to convince Stephanie that she was more than capable of doing this job. “But you would do much better at connecting with the students than some of the professors I have worked with.”

To be perfectly honest, she was speaking about Severus Snape even though Minerva would never admit that to Stephanie. The man was good at his job; he had taught the students that wanted to learn from him amazing things about potions. But he disliked the students so much that he made most of their lives very difficult. Minerva knew that most of Stephanie’s students would admire and respect her as a teacher, and not only those in her House.

Stephanie seemed to understand because she nodded at Minerva’s explanation, and Minerva was relieved that Stephanie didn’t ask her to divulge any more information. The girl had had enough dealings with Severus to understand and she was more mature than she realized—too grown up, in fact, to ask Minerva questions that she would most certainly decline to discuss further.

“What about the kids my age?” Stephanie asked. “Won’t they resent being taught by someone their age or just a year or two older than them? It would be awkward teaching Ginny, for instance.”

“It may be an adjustment for them, and you.” She had thought of that and knew that Stephanie would bring up that point, so she had had her response prepared well ahead of time. The Governors, in fact, had also had this very concern. “But they will be required to show you the same respect they are asked to show any other professor. And I am positive that most of the students will be excited to sit in a class with the famous Stephanie Potter teaching them.”

Stephanie blushed again and looked away. Minerva knew that Stephanie was getting close to accepting the offer; Stephanie tended to look away from the person she was speaking to when she was thinking hard. If Stephanie declined the position, Minerva was out of options. There was no one else that was willing to teach Defense Against the Dark Arts. So, she spoke again.

“Stephanie. You may not realize this, but you are a highly skilled witch.” Minerva spoke softly but authoritatively. Stephanie looked at her with doubt in her eyes. “You have created spells that are very inventive; you have cast the most difficult spells; you have withstood the most painful tortures; and you have fought, and defeated, the most dangerous witches and wizards Britain has ever seen. You would be a wonderful asset for the school to possess, and you would be developing these children into the most talented witches and wizards in centuries. You just need to find the confidence within yourself to realize your capabilities.”

Stephanie looked at her for quite awhile and didn’t say anything. She opened her mouth to speak and then shut it, as though she thought better of it. Minerva had to get going, so she finally asked the question that was burning in her heart.

“Would you be willing to do this, Stephanie?” Minerva asked softly. “Those children need you. I need you.”

Stephanie took a deep breath and shook her head. “I honestly don’t know, Minerva. Can I think about it?”

She let out a disappointed sigh. She had been hoping to get an answer out of the girl that morning, but she understood that this was a difficult decision. Because there was no other option for a teacher in this position, Minerva had to oblige.

“Of course” She responded, standing up. “But I also want you to know that I spoke with Neville Longbottom last evening. Pomona Sprout has not been faring too well these past few months. As a precaution, I decided that it was necessary to procure a substitute in case she needs to take some time off. I have offered Mr. Longbottom this position, and he has accepted.”

“He didn’t tell me that!” Stephanie replied. “He is going to be teaching Herbology?”

“Only when Professor Sprout is unable to do so.” Minerva clarified. “He has requested that this information be kept quite for the time being.”

In the previous weeks, she had debated whether to offer him the position of substituting for Professor Sprout in case she needed to take some vacation time. Neville had always been such a good student of Herbology that the choice had been an easy one. And the fact that he had completed an internship, albeit a short one, with Timothy Shinehart, the renowned Herbologist, made him an even more qualified candidate.

Neville wasn’t the most experienced professor that had been offered such a position, but he was eager enough to do the job. And it would be nice for Stephanie to have a friendly face to help her through the adjustment of having the responsibilities that Minerva was asking her to carry.

“Can I let you know tomorrow?” Stephanie said and Minerva knew there was no point in pushing the issue any further. The girl, only eighteen years old, needed to think over her options and realize that she was capable of teaching those youngsters.

“Of course.” Minerva turned and Stephanie walked her towards the front door. “I can’t make it to your party tomorrow night, so please send me an owl with your response. You would do wonderful work, Stephanie. You just have to trust yourself.”

And with that, Minerva left 12 Grimmauld Place, the former headquarters of the Order of the Phoenix. She didn’t think that Stephanie would accept the position, but she remained hopeful. Maybe she would accept because Neville had also been offered a teaching position, even though it was an intermittent one. Minerva thought that it was highly unlikely, but she had tried. Now she had to go back to her office at Hogwarts and try to figure out who else could possibly take the post of Defense Against the Dark Arts.


There is the latest chapter. I worked very hard to get it finished before I go out of town for the next couple of days and was fully prepared to post it yesterday morning. Then I accidentally deleted it when I was attempting "Copy/Paste." Good thing I had printed off a copy to edit!! Wow..But, here it is. And I hope you like it! I have started the next chapter, and I must say that it is one of my favorites so far, if not my favorite. I will do my best to try to get it up by Tuesday or Wednesday. Have a great weekend everyone!

Chapter Ten: The Birthday Party

“You look uncomfortable.” A voice spoke to her and she looked up from the plastic cup that she had been staring at intensely. She saw George Weasley smiling down at her. “Do you mind if I join you?”

“I am.” She sighed more loudly than she had intended. It had already been a long day and the party was just getting started. “I don’t know anyone here and people are trying to appear as though they aren’t staring, but I can see that they are. Who are all these people, anyway?”

George plopped down in the seat next to her and looked around the room. She looked at him as he did so, wishing that he had been Fred. It was hurting less with each day, but she still felt that pang of longing each time she saw George’s flaming red hair and freckles. It was like she was looking at Fred, but she knew that she wasn’t and never would again. He had made that abundantly clear a few days before. But George was making an effort to make things easier and she appreciated his kindness.

“I saw you and Harry talking with a few people, didn’t he introduce you?” George asked.

“Yeah.” Stephanie admitted with a hint of a smile. “But I have no idea who he was introducing me to. They all came to see him, not me.”

“Well, I came to see you.” George’s smile made her melt. In an awkward way, his flirtation made her feel more at ease in his presence. And she knew that he was only teasing, George would never take advantage of her.

“I’m sure you did.” Stephanie laughed lightly, lifting her glass so that she could swirl the contents inside once again.

“You know, I had an interesting conversation with McGonagall yesterday.” Stephanie looked at him curiously. She was sure that McGonagall wouldn’t have told him about the offer she had made. He just smiled broadly in her direction and then winked. “Something about exploding buttons.”

Stephanie let out her breath and laughed. “Oh, yeah. I’m sorry about that. I hope she didn’t give you too much grief.”

“That’s not a problem.” He said with a laugh. “I am here to take the blame whenever you need me.”

“Thanks, but I shouldn’t need to do that too often.” She rolled her eyes at George and then became silent. Then her tone turned solemn “But seriously, who are all these people?”

“Most of the people here used to be Order members or classmates of Harry’s.” George leaned forward and his expression turned serious. He pointed towards a group of people who looked to be about their age. “Do you see the one in the middle?”

Stephanie nodded and he continued. “That is Oliver Wood. He used to be Harry’s and my Quidditch Captain. He was strict as hell, but he sure knew what he was doing. Oliver plays for Puddlemere United now.”

He moved his arm to point out others, though Stephanie wasn’t sure exactly who he was pointing to. “That is Seamus Finnigan. He was one of Harry’s roommates. Him and the guy standing next to him are best friends. That’s Dean Thomas, there. I think Seamus brought his brother, who I believe is set to start Hogwarts this year.

“Over there are some people who worked with Kingsley and McGonagall with the Order.” He continued and Stephanie tried to get every word. She wanted to know who all the people were. It was nice to be in a room full of people that didn’t want to kill her for once, or at least she thought that no one there wanted her dead. She hoped that was the case. “And that-

He paused and winked in the direction of a tall and skinny female that looked to be about Stephanie’s age. “Is Angelina Johnson. Excuse me.”

With that, he got up from his seat and made his way towards the person he had just pointed out. Stephanie watched him strut comfortably towards Angelina and she smiled. The name sounded familiar, but she wasn’t sure where she had heard it before. The girl looked athletic, but she wasn’t too outstandingly pretty. Stephanie eyed George with curiosity as he talked to the girl, who laughed at something he said.

She sighed again and began looking around the room. Hermione and Ron were in a corner of the living room talking with a few people who looked like they could be schoolmates from Hogwarts. Stephanie recognized the one girl as Luna Lovegood—Hermione had once pointed her out in the crowd. The blonde had been helpful during the battle the night that Dumbledore had been killed, the night that Stephanie had almost murdered her own brother.

Harry was busy talking with some of the Order members that had come to visit. Mrs. Weasley was busy bustling about the Burrow making sure that everyone had what they needed and was replenishing the refreshment trays. Charlie Weasley was talking with his brother, Percy, and a couple of Aurors that had decided to show to wish Harry a happy birthday. She felt so out of place that she wished that she hadn’t agreed to the party in the first place. All she wanted was to go up to her bedroom and curl up with her comforter. It would have been nice.

“Happy birthday.” Stephanie heard a whisper in her ear and she turned around and smiled. “Can I talk to you for a second?”

Neville had snuck up behind her and she was impressed by how well he had cleaned up. He was dressed in what appeared to be new dress robes and his hair was slicked back with styling gel. For the first time, she couldn’t help but realize how handsome he was. “Of course, Neville.”

“Not here.” He responded after she gestured towards the seat that George had just vacated. “Can we go somewhere private?”

Stephanie nodded curiously. She stood and gently touched his shoulder. He smiled at her as she did so and she couldn’t help but blush. What was wrong with her? Neville was her best friend! She was just lonely, that’s why Neville made her heart flutter like that. That’s all it could be. She told herself as he followed her up the stairs towards Ginny’s bedroom.

She knocked on the door and when no one answered, Stephanie opened it and walked inside. It was a room she had been in before, but she was now uncomfortably aware of the pictures of Ginny and Harry that were on the bedside table. She looked at them for a moment and then sat on Ginny’s neatly made bed. Neville sat down next to her.

“I heard that you had a fight with Hermione this morning?” Neville asked softly. “She seems pretty upset by it.”

“I overreacted, but it wasn’t my fault.” Stephanie said. She loved Neville to death. He was her best friend, but she didn’t want to tell him quite yet why she had blown up at Hermione.

Stephanie had been angry with Hermione for telling Professor McGongall that she would be perfect for the Defense Against the Dark Arts position. She didn’t believe that nor was she sure that she even wanted to do it. But she felt bad for her outburst and she knew that she had hurt Hermione’s feelings. It was just really hard to say sorry when you weren’t in the wrong. Stephanie had too much experience in that, always having to apologize to Lucius, Draco, or the Dark Lord for something or other, but it was different with her friends. She knew that Hermione was just trying to help, but it wasn’t any of her business, either.

“I’m sure you two will sort things out.” Neville responded, not pressuring her to reveal anything more than that. She smiled softly at him in gratitude. He always knew how to make her feel better, so she reached over and squeezed his hand.

“Thank you.” She whispered, looking into his eyes. They were full of compassion for her and she knew that he cared for her deeply.

“I wanted to give you your birthday present.” Neville said, reaching into his robes. She knew exactly what he was about to give her when she saw the tiny little box. Without being asked, Stephanie reached over and grabbed it from his hands. He just chuckled at her enthusiasm.

“The locket!” Stephanie ripped open the wrapping paper and flung it onto Ginny’s bed. She pulled out the beautiful locket that Neville had first given her after she had awoken from the Dark Lord’s induced coma. She held it up so that she could see it better. “I love it!”

He leaned over her and placed the necklace around her neck. She shivered from his touch and looked down at the ground. Honestly. She scolded herself. What is wrong with me? It’s Neville for crying out loud! Your best friend!

“I added myself back into the rotation of pictures.” Neville explained once the locket hung loosely around her neck. “It goes, your mum and dad, Harry, Fred, me, Sirius, Dumbledore, McGonagall, Hermione, Ginny, and Ron.”

“I love it, Neville.” Stephanie lifted the locket and looked down at it. “You don’t know how much this means to me. Thank you.”

“There’s more.” Neville smiled again and she couldn’t help but blush again. He made her desire to crawl into bed and disappear vanish with the twinkle of mysteriousness in his eyes.

“Oh Neville.” Stephanie responded to him seriously. “You have already done enough. I don’t need any more than this.”

She fingered the locket with one hand and reached for Neville’s hand with her other one. He allowed her to hold his hand as she looked into his eyes. “Even though I know that I’m not, sometimes I feel so alone. It’s hard to be in a crowd when you’ve been forced into things that I have. This is going to remind me that I’m not alone, not now and never again. Thank you.”

“You aren’t alone, Stephanie.” Neville leaned forward and placed his forehead on hers. She could feel his hot breath on her cheek. It was something that Fred used to do and Stephanie sat back, suddenly ashamed of her behavior. What am I doing? “We all care about you and we will never leave you. I just want you to be able to share things with me, or any of us. Friends are there so that we don’t have to go through things alone. Please let us in, Stephanie.”

Stephanie dropped Neville’s hand and stood up. She walked towards Ginny’s closet and scolded herself. How could she forget about Fred so easily? It was her hormones, it had to be. It was the first time she had seen Neville dressed up and she was lonely. She had seen Fred in George that evening and she didn’t want to be alone. But now she did. How could she do that to Fred?

“I can’t.” Stephanie whispered, not daring to look at Neville.

“Why not?” Neville responded. She heard the bedsprings squeak as he stood, and she knew that he was walking towards her. But she didn’t turn to look at him.

“You wouldn’t understand.” Stephanie hugged her shoulders, still not allowing herself to look at Neville. He stood right behind her now. “No one can understand.”

“Let me understand.” Neville leaned over and whispered in her ear. He wrapped his arms around her chest. “I want to try.”

Stephanie whirled around and looked him deep in the eye. Tears had come to her eyes and she was furious with him for forcing the issue. How dare he ask her to reveal something so personal?

“Well, you can’t.” Stephanie snapped at him and she immediately felt guilty. He was just trying to help her. Why couldn’t she control her emotions? All he wanted was to see her happy. “Just leave me alone.”

He looked at her for a few minutes. Stephanie felt horrible because he looked so sad. But she was angry, not at him, but at the world. “Fine.” He said in a defeated tone and he turned to leave.

She watched him walk towards the door and slowly open it, and then he turned around and looked at her with tears rolling down his cheeks. “You can’t keep shutting people out. It will eat you up inside.”

Stephanie didn’t say anything and so he turned and left, shutting the door behind him. She sank to the floor and let the tears flow from her eyes uncontrollably. “I know.” She whispered to herself, knowing that she was going to lose her friends if she couldn’t learn to share with them. But they could never find out what was going on in her mind. Stephanie hugged her knees and cried because she was disappointed in herself.

She was sure that she had been there for close to an hour before there was a knock at the door and she heard her brother call her name. Stephanie wiped the tears and called for Harry to enter.

“Ginny said she saw you and Neville come up here awhile ago, and then Neville went home.” Harry said poking his head through the door. When he saw her bright red face, he came rushing over to her. “What’s wrong?”

“I’m just being an idiot.” Stephanie tried to smile, but couldn’t quite pull it off. She knew that she was, but for some reason she couldn’t stop herself. Maybe she was intentionally driving away her closest friends, she wasn’t sure.

“What did Neville do to you?” Harry rubbed her shoulders and she shook her head. “Did he hit you?”

“No, it wasn’t even like that, Harry.” Stephanie looked at her brother. “I’ll be okay, I swear.”

“Well, is there anything I can do to cheer you up?” He asked the question sympathetically, but she knew that he was just trying to help, just like the rest of her friends. She knew that she had to accept their help, but it was something that she had never allowed herself to do before. She wasn’t a weak person. “This is supposed to be a celebration.”

“With your friends.” Stephanie pointed out. “When I agreed to this party, I just thought it would be a small gathering. Harry, I don’t know anyone here and everyone that is here just stares. I am so uncomfortable.”

Harry smiled at her. “I know how you feel. I don’t know most of the people here and Kingsley has had me schmoozing with more people than I care to count. I’d rather be somewhere else, too.”

“But at least you have friends here.” Stephanie pointed out. “What about your schoolmates from Hogwarts?”

“You have friends here, too.” Harry responded slowly, thinking about what she was saying.

“Yeah, but so do they. I don’t want to be a burden by clinging to everyone.” Stephanie admitted. It was one of the first feelings that she had disclosed to anyone other than Fred, including her brother. And it surprisingly felt good.

Harry seemed to realize the significance of that moment, because he stood up and reached out his hand. “Come on.” He instructed.

She stared at it hesitantly. Stephanie really didn’t feel like going back to that party. It was too weird for her and her thoughts immediately went to the Welcome Home party that the Dark Lord threw for the escaped prisoners of Azkaban, the night that Bellatrix Lestrange had come into her life. No, she wouldn’t go back.

“Come on.” Harry repeated, moving his arm a little. “Kingsley wants to talk to you and I know this will cheer you up!”

Again, she hesitated because she really didn’t want to go. But Harry had her intrigued as to why Kingsley would want to speak with her. He had been to the hospital to visit her, but she hadn’t seen him since she requested that her Auror detail be removed.

“So you really aren’t enjoying yourself?” Harry asked to break the silence as they walked down the stairs and towards the kitchen, at least that’s where Stephanie thought that was where Harry was leading her.

“I hate crowds.” Stephanie said simply. It was true and she had been uncomfortable that night for a long time before Neville came along.

“I’m sorry to put you through that. I didn’t realize that it was too soon.” Harry looked at her when they reached the bottom of the stairs.

“It’s not your fault.” Stephanie tried to fake it, but she could tell that Harry could see right through her. He smiled feebly at her attempt. “I agreed to it, and to be honest, I was kind of looking forward to it. But it’s just too awkward and reminiscent of what I had to endure with the Dark Lord.”

Harry just nodded at her and opened the kitchen door. Kingsley stood there, leaning against one of the counters in the small room. He smiled when he saw her.

“Happy birthday, Stephanie.” He said, reaching out his hand. She took it and they shook for a few seconds.

“Thank you, Minister.” Stephanie smiled at him. She was hurting, but she knew that she couldn’t take it out on her friends. It would be too difficult to lose any of them, and she knew that she would if she continued behaving the way she had been. But her emotions were running wild. For her entire life, she had been unable to express her emotions in any form and they were all coming out at once and in the most inopportune times. She needed to learn how to control herself better.

“Stephanie, I haven’t had a chance to really sit down and talk with you about what happened.” Kingsley Shacklebolt began in his deep voice and Stephanie started to get nervous. Was she going to be in trouble for tricking Nikki away from her post? Her thoughts must have shown on her face because Kingsley began to chuckle. “No, neither you nor Nikki is in any sort of trouble. You are an adult and you have the right to make your own decisions.”

Stephanie unconsciously let out a sigh of relief. Harry must have seen her nervousness because he inched closer to her and rubbed the back of her shoulders. She took a deep breath and looked at Kingsley as bravely as she could.

“What can I do for you, then?” Stephanie asked.

“You did an excellent job of escaping Draco without causing him any harm. It was very impressive and it showed me how capable you really are.” Kingsley explained slowly. “And I realize the mistake I made by not allowing you to join the Aurors. I would be honored if you could join my team. There is so much that you can teach the Aurors that are already in practice, and it would help if we could utilize that spell of yours.”

Stephanie looked at him for a few minutes, trying to figure out if he was serious or not. But she realized that Kingsley would never joke about something like that. He was honestly offering her a position as an Auror, the job that she had wanted to do since she was very young. For most of her life, she had wanted to catch Dark Wizards just like the Malfoy family. And her wish was finally coming true, but was that was she really wanted now? Stephanie wasn’t so sure.

She took a deep breath and looked over to her brother. He was smiling profusely—Stephanie was sure that he and Kingsley had discussed this prior to her joining them. He looked so proud of her, how could she tell him that she might not want to join the force after all?

“Umm.” She said uncomfortably and she started fidgeting with the sleeve of her shirt. “I don’t know how to say this.”

“Don’t you want to be an Auror?” Harry looked at her suspiciously. “Hermione said that you once told her that you really wanted to be an Auror. She even promised to make sure that happened for you.”

“Well.” Stephanie hesitated, not wanting to disappoint her brother or Kingsley. “Professor McGon—Minerva.”

“I keep forgetting to call her that.” She giggled nervously. “Minerva came to visit me yesterday while you were out shopping. She offered me the position of Defense Against the Dark Arts, and I accepted this morning.”

“Really?” Harry’s face lit up. His reaction wasn’t what she was expecting; he appeared happy for the decision that she had made. “That is awesome!”

She turned to Kingsley uncomfortably. “I’m sorry, Kingsley. But I just realized that you were right, I don’t want to be an Auror. I have spent my entire life living amongst and fighting against Dark Wizards and I just can’t do it anymore. Minerva gave me the opportunity to teach others to do what I cannot, and I could not turn it down.”

Kingsley smiled at her knowingly and she couldn’t help but return his gesture. “It’s alright, Stephanie. We are sorry to lose you, but it is my own fault. I had my chance.”

“I hadn’t gotten you anything for your birthday yet, Stephanie.” Harry’s smile was so large that it covered his entire face. “You are the most difficult person to shop for, you know. Anyway, I know what I can give you now. Let me go get it.”

He turned to leave and Stephanie stopped him. “Get my gift, too. It’s on top of the dresser in my room.”

He nodded and then left her and Kingsley alone in the kitchen of the Burrow. Kingsley spoke with amused undertone. “She is sneaky, really sneaky.”

“What?” Stephanie asked, turning her attention back towards her friend.

“I told her the day you escaped from the bubble that I was going to ask you to become an Auror.” Kingsley had a grin on his face. “She just got to you before I had the chance. I think she owes me one.”

“But, Kingsley.” Stephanie responded. “I have been thinking about this all night. And I didn’t know that you were going to offer me this position so soon, but I knew that you would at some point. Do you think it would be possible if I could be available to consult with you?”

“What do you mean?” Kingsley asked for clarification, cocking his head slightly in interest.

“Well, you want the spell that I used on Draco to be available to you and I refuse to teach it to anyone, not even Harry.” Stephanie explained. “If there is a case where you think my knowledge of the Death Eaters and Dark Magic would be useful, I could definitely make myself available. I just don’t want to do it full time.”

“That would be great if you could do that, Stephanie.” Kingsley nodded his head in thought. “I just need to think about how it would be feasible. Sometimes we have to just get up and go and that’s what we normally use the pendants for, like the one you used to have. But they don’t work on you anymore because of the spell that Voldemort placed on you. We can’t seem to figure out how to get rid of it. Let me think about it.”

“I have also been thinking about what happened with Martin Webber.” Stephanie said slowly, not wanting to offend the Minister of Magic. “I think I could help you sort through your staff and make sure there aren’t any Dark Lord supporters hidden among them.”

“That sounds good.” Kingsley again nodded in agreement. “I would really appreciate that.”

Just then, Harry came back into the room and Kingsley shook her hand in salutation. Stephanie explained to Harry the proposition she had given to Kingsley and he looked absolutely pleased, though a little nervous.

She knew that he would rather she stay at Hogwarts, since that would have to be the safest place for her to be. But she didn’t base her decision on that, nor did she want to. She wanted to do something that she would enjoy regardless of the danger level; Stephanie refused to be afraid of what could happen any longer.

“Here, open mine first.” Harry said, giving her a loosely wrapped gift. It was flat and kind of rectangular. She smiled at her brother, who had apparently just wrapped this gift as an afterthought. “Sorry for the wrapping.”

She looked down at it and tore open the gift that had been wrapped in the Daily Prophet. But when she opened it, she didn’t know what it was. She looked up towards Harry and had to laugh at the silly grin plastered on his face.

“It’s the Marauder’s Map.” Harry explained excitedly. “It tells you everyone who is at Hogwarts and where they are. It also shows all the hidden passages.”

And he showed her how to use it, even though it didn’t work because they weren’t on the school grounds. She figured that would come in useful some day for some reason. It would be kind of fun to catch students out of bed late at night. She looked up to Harry and smiled. “Thank you.”

He took the box that had been neatly wrapped and placed on her dresser. Harry tore into it excitedly and smiled. When he realized what was inside the box, he looked up to her slowly. It was a gift that she had heard about in a passing conversation and she knew that it would mean a lot to Harry.

“Is this…” He trailed off, lifting one of the small mirrors out of the box. She had purposely gotten ones that could fit inside their pockets.

“I think that Sirius and dad had a couple of these.” Stephanie responded to Harry’s ogling of the mirror. “I know how much you worry about me and I know that this will make it easier when I am at Hogwarts and you are at the Auror training facility.”

“They were just like these.” Harry fingered the design on the mirror. “How did you get these? You haven’t left the house.”

She smiled mischievously at her brother. “I asked Ginny to pick them up.”

“Of course you did.” Harry laughed. “Thank you. I love them.”

And with that, Stephanie knew that she had made the right decision. She would be able to teach the students at Hogwarts and she would be able to help Kingsley when he needed it. Her life was going to matter and she was going to make an impact on society. Maybe she could do something good in the world, after all.


So, I was going to wait to post this chapter, but I couldn't! It is absolutely one of my favorites to date. Her emotion with Neville is so raw and she knows that she shouldn't react that way. I hope my explanations are okay and everyone understands why she got so upset. Please leave your feedback and let me know your thoughts! The next chapter probably won't be posted until next week sometime, but we'll see how much work I get done this week. I hope everyone has a good week!

Chapter Eleven: A Healing Embrace

“I have half a mind to pull Abby from that school!” Abby heard the voice of her father downstairs and the slam of the front door shortly afterwards. She didn’t know that he was going to be home so soon! She got up from her bed and left her coloring book and crayons lying there. Silently, she opened her door and crept to the foot of the stairs so she could hear what her father was saying. The thought that he might keep her at home and away from Hogwarts terrified her.

Listening quietly to her father’s conversations was something that she did frequently these days and she knew better than to make a sound. Her father would punish her severely if he knew that she was listening. Abby knew that her father loved her; he was just so protective of her. But she didn’t mind most of the time, she was all he had, after all. And as his daughter, it was her responsibility to watch over him and make sure he was alright.

“What do you mean, Jason?” She could hear Jeff Blaiser, the head of security at the Seabold Estates, talking softly downstairs. He was trying to keep her father calm. Her father and Jeffrey had gone to school together at Hogwarts and they were very close friends. After her mother and brother died, Jeffrey had sworn to her father that he would help keep them both safe.

“They have that wench teaching Defense Against the Dark Arts this year!” Her father was clearly upset, she could tell by the tone of his voice. He always got out of breath when he was angry, and she could picture his bright red face even though she couldn’t see him. She didn’t have to wonder too long about who her father was talking about.

“Calm down, Jason.” Jeffrey spoke with a hush to his voice. “We don’t want her to overhear us. You don’t want to upset Abby. Now, who are you talking about?”

“Stephanie Potter.” She barely heard her father mutter the name of the girl she was supposed to hate, although she refused to believe that it was warranted. Abby had only seen Stephanie Potter one time and that was when she was being held captive by a Malfoy boy. She didn’t think she would hear about what happened to the girl until she went to school, but now she knew that Stephanie Potter was alive. And she was going to be teaching Abby! Abby knew that she should hate the girl, but she hadn’t seemed so bad when Abby had seen her on the screen in Diagon Alley. “She is even worse than Lucius Malfoy, and I do not want her teaching my daughter.

“I should send her to Durmstrang like I’ve wanted to do since the day she was born, but I can’t. Hogwarts is nothing but trouble and I hated every minute that we were there, Jeff.” Abby could barely hear her father’s voice now, so she leaned forward and strained to listen without making a sound. “Durmstrang can provide a much better education, but Katherine so desperately wanted the children to attend Hogwarts. That’s where she was most happy How can I deny that, Jeffrey? How could I do that to my wife?”

“Abby will be fine at Hogwarts.” Jeffrey reassured her father. Abby hadn’t realized that she was holding her breath in anticipation, so she released it slowly. She didn’t want to go to Durmstrang, she wanted to go to Hogwarts like her mother. Please daddy, don’t make me go to Durmstrang. She pleaded in her head as she continued listening to the conversation. “Daniel is a fourth year and you know that he’ll keep an eye on her.”

Abby liked Daniel, or D, as she liked to call him. He was four years older than her, but he had really been there for her. When her mother and brother were killed, Daniel had taken her under his wing and been like a brother to her. When her father had secluded her away from her friends, D had been there. He was always trying to protect her even though she didn’t need his help. He was the one who told her all about Hogwarts; he was in Slytherin, the house her father wanted her to be sorted into, and he was on the Quidditch team. He knew everything there was to know about Hogwarts and so she wasn’t scared to start school there in a few weeks. In fact, she couldn’t wait to see him again.

“I still don’t like it.” Her father muttered, and then he changed the subject abruptly, his voice softening. “Where is she?”

“She’s upstairs in her room.” Jeffrey informed him and she knew that was her cue. She could hear the shuffling of feet downstairs as her father made his way towards her room.

Abby rushed back into her room and jumped onto her bed, grabbing a crayon as quickly as she could. She made herself appear as though she had been sitting on her bed the entire time her father had been downstairs.

She knew her father could pull her from the school at any moment, but she didn’t want that. It was important that she be a grown up for her father and be on her best behavior. Abby had to prove to her father that she would be alright at school—he was so protective of her sometimes. She wouldn’t let him take away her chance at making friends; it was so lonely being locked in her house all the time. The only people she had to hang out with anymore since her mother died were D and her security guards. She needed to go to Hogwarts.

Just then, her door opened and her father poked his head in. She looked up at him and smiled as though everything was alright. “Hi daddy.”

*~*~*~*

“Do you ever feel like breaking down? Do you ever feel out of place? Like somehow you just don't belong and no one understands you. Do you ever wanna runaway? Do you lock yourself in your room with the radio turned up so loud that no one hears you screaming?”

He stood in the shadows just out of sight and he watched her painfully. He wanted to cry at the sight of her, but he forced the tears back. Harry told him that she would be there and his friend had been right. There she was, out in the open backyard sanding what appeared to be a black bookcase. He wondered why she was working so hard when she could use magic to complete the task much more quickly and in the safety that Professor Snape’s home could provide.

His stomach churned with yearning as he watched her sing out loud. Her voice would probably make others cringe even though she was singing quietly, but it was beautiful to him. Her voice shook as she concentrated heavily on her task of removing the paint that stained the wood. Sweat poured down her face and drenched the sweatshirt she was wearing in the hot and humid August heat. Her long red hair hung down over her shoulders and gently touched the bookcase. It was a job that should have required her hair to be pulled back, but he was glad it wasn’t. She looked so beautiful to him, like an angel.

Stephanie was dancing and singing along so passionately to music that related to her so deeply. He watched her use the small piece of sandpaper as a microphone and it broke Neville’s heart to hear her utter those words that she was most likely feeling at the very core of her soul.

“No one ever lied straight to your face. No one ever stabbed you in the back. You might think I'm happy, but I'm not gonna be okay. Everybody always gave you what you wanted, never had to work it was always there. You don't know what it's like, what it's like.”

That’s right. He honestly didn’t know what it was like for her. Neville thought that he had known and he truly wanted to understand, but she was in too much pain and she was too fearful of losing her friends to share with them. He didn’t know how to help her; Neville could feel her drifting away from him and he was terrified at the possibility of losing her forever.

He also knew she was singing to Draco. He had had life so easy when she had been tormented. But Draco had done the impossible while he had imprisoned her for nearly a week. Draco had given Stephanie the opportunity and the courage to heal, he had given her a new lease on life. Of course she was still angry at the world and unable to express the emotions she needed to, but she was alive and starting to live her life.

Stephanie had begun to heal even though she couldn’t see it herself. It was her resilience that drew him to her. Stephanie Potter was the most stubborn girl he had ever encountered. She continued to fight the world even though there was no need; she had this strong desire and need to prove how strong she was.

Many times in her short life, Stephanie had been on the brink of exhaustion, near crumbling, and close to being broken. But no matter how close she came, Stephanie never succumbed to that fate. She was stronger than she thought she was, and even though she was singing about how she would not be alright, Neville knew that she would be. Stephanie was going to realize that she was worthy of love.

And Neville knew she was starting to become the person she once was, the person she had been before Lord Voldemort changed her. He was starting to see flickers of the old Stephanie, the Stephanie he had fallen in love with.

He hadn’t spoken to her since the night of her birthday party and each day had passed by so slowly. Neville knew she wasn’t angry at him, but he still knew better than to push her harder than she was ready to go. It had been Harry who told him she was starting to smile again, she was starting to go into public and speak with those who came up to her. She had begun to hold her head up high instead of sinking into the shadows. Even though she hadn’t spoken to him since their fight, she had come out of her shell. Neville was proud of the person she was becoming. And ironically, it was all because of Draco Malfoy.

“To be hurt, to feel lost, to be left out in the dark. To be kicked when you're down, to feel like you've been pushed around, to be on the edge of breaking down and no one's there to save you. No you don't know what it's like. Welcome to my life.”

She almost whispered the last verse. I am here to save you. Neville refused to take his eyes off her. She was so beautiful that it took his breath away. And it hurt him tremendously to watch her suffer. Please, let me take care of you. He silently pleaded with her.

He longed to wrap his arms around her and tell her that everything was going to be okay, to tell her that he would never let her hurt again. Neville knew she longed to be held; she just wouldn’t let anyone near enough to do so. And he had been close the night of her party; he had wrapped her in his arms, but she hadn’t been ready for that. Neville yearned to tell her that he loved her, but he didn’t want to push her away. He didn’t want to lose her and he knew that he would—she would fight him because she did not believe she deserved to be loved. He just hoped that the time would come when he could disclose to her his true feelings before he lost her like he had to Fred. He knew that if it happened again, he would lose her forever.

I can’t do this. He thought, shaking his head. He knew that he couldn’t go talk to Stephanie because she had asked him to leave her alone. She hadn’t tried to seek him out; she obviously didn’t want to talk to him. And it hadn’t been like he had been hard to find. He had spent the last two weeks locked away at the Burrow with Ginny, Hermione, Ron, and Harry studying for that morning’s N.E.W.T.S. and helping Ginny study for her seventh year placement exams. It had been Hermione who kept them all hostage, but Stephanie had known where they were.

And his courage melted away with the sadness in Stephanie’s voice. He knew that letting her have her space was the best thing he could do for her. And hopefully, though he didn’t want anything to happen to his favorite professor, he would get to spend some time with her at Hogwarts this year. Maybe he could be there for her at the one location she was truly safe. He would do what he could for her, even if it was in the background, because he loved her and he just wanted her to be happy. Neville would wait forever if that was what it would take. He would make sure that she never lost him.

He turned to leave as quietly as he had come, but his foot must have stepped on a hidden twig because he heard a snap and immediately saw a light out of the corner of his eye. Neville only had time to duck out of the way of the spell before it hit the tree he was standing against.

“Coward!” Stephanie yelled, looking in his direction. He was certain she couldn’t see him, but she definitely knew he was there. “I am right here! If you want me, come and get me.”

He slowly stood and didn’t dare dust off his pants. Instead, he raised his hands in the air and walked towards the girl that he loved with all his heart, and seeing her in pain broke it into many irreparable pieces. “Stephanie, it’s me.” He said as calmly as he could even though he was shaking something fierce. She really would curse him into oblivion, and he hoped that she wasn’t still angry with him.

“Neville?” She crinkled her eyebrows and lowered her wand. “What are you doing in the bushes?”

“I just wanted to-” He paused, unsure of how to tell her that he was there to see her, that he missed her. He turned around to leave. “I’m sorry, I’ll leave.”

“No, don’t.” Stephanie reached out her arm and he turned back around. “I’ve been wanting to talk with you. I know you were busy with studying for your exams and I didn’t want to distract you. I’ve wanted to talk with Hermione too, to apologize for my behavior, but I didn’t want to impose.”

Neville took a moment to look at her. There was regret in her eyes, but she truly looked happy to see him. He sighed in relief and then walked closer to her. “How have you been, Stephanie?”

She smiled innocently and lifted her head tall, and then she shifted her body and began walking towards the stoop that led to the backdoor of the cottage. That was where she sat down and Neville took a seat next to her.

“You know, I didn’t want to read that newspaper article that Rita Skeeter published on my birthday.” He prepared for her to look away, but she didn’t. Instead, she looked straight at him as she told her story. “But McGonagall—Minerva. Minerva. Minerva. I can’t get used to calling her that, but I had better get used to it.”

She giggled and Neville smiled. It was great to see a smile on her face; it made her look so peaceful and happy. He encouraged her. “I don’t think I can ever call her Minerva. It’s just weird after she’s been my teacher for so long, but she did ask me to do so too.”

Stephanie nodded and was quiet for a moment, then she finally continued with her story. She spoke softly, as though it was a memory that made her happy. He hoped that it truly did make her happy because he knew she deserved it.

“She made me read it. That article gave me the courage to go outside and explore. I don’t why I went there or where it even is.” Stephanie finally took her gaze away from Neville and looked off into the woods. She pulled her knees up to her chest and hugged them tightly. “Dedrick, Sarah, Kieran, and I went there once. Things were different back then, you know. They walked into the stores and just took whatever they wanted and they Cursed whoever got in their way. They enjoyed it and I feel so horrible now because so did I. I was forced to, you know?”

She looked towards him looking for understanding and he didn’t know what to say to her. It was the first time she had mentioned her time with Kieran and what she was telling him hadn’t been something he had seen of her memories. All he could do was take his hand and place it on her knee, rubbing it gently. After a few minutes of silence, she looked away again and continued.

“I don’t know why I went back, but I just had this strong urge to. And you and Harry and the others were busy studying, so I decided to go.” She closed her eyes for a moment and he squeezed her knee, showing that he supported her. “Anyway, I was standing in the street, just looking into a store window and not really realizing what I was looking at, when I felt a tug on my sweatshirt.

“I looked down and there was the cutest little girl I had ever seen, she had to have been about four or five.” Stephanie opened her eyes and he could see that they were moist and a small tear fell as she spoke again. His friend didn’t wipe away the tear; she just let it roll down her cheek. “She just looked up at me with her big blue eyes and whispered, almost as if she were afraid: ‘Are you Stephanie Potter?'

“I didn’t know what to say, so I just nodded. When I looked up I could see her mother rushing towards us. Her mother told her to leave me be, but the little girl just looked defiantly at her mother. She told her mom: ‘But its Stephanie Potter, mommy!’ And before her mom could do anything, the girl leapt towards me and wrapped me in a tight embrace. Neville, this little girl I have never met just walked up to me and gave me hug. I don’t know what it was about that hug, I can’t even explain it to myself or make sense out of it in my own mind, but I just burst into tears in the middle of the street. People were staring at me like I was crazy. Through my tears, I just knelt down so that my eyes were looking into hers and I thanked her. She just smiled and I saw that she was missing some baby teeth. Do you know what she told me?”

Stephanie looked up at him and smiled. Neville responded with a shake of his head and a high level of curiosity. “What did she say?”

“She told me that everyone deserves a hug.” Stephanie squeezed herself harder. “And I don’t know what it did, but that little girl had a profound effect on me. It felt so good to be touched, to be held like that. I had never realized how much I needed and longed for a kind touch like that.”

Neville took his cue and wrapped his arms around her and squeezed her tightly. She responded by laying her head on his shoulder, and they stayed in that position for a long time. When she was ready and without moving, Stephanie whispered so that Neville could barely hear her.

“I’m so sorry for how I behaved, Neville.” She sounded so sad that his heart felt like it was shattering. He looked down at her and saw she was playing with the locket he had given her and knew it was a huge comfort to her. “I was just so angry. It was too soon for me to be placed in the spotlight like that and I should have realized that. But I shouldn’t have reacted to you the way I did, I shouldn’t have taken my frustration out on you. I know you were just trying to help.”

“You can yell at me all you want.” Neville responded with a nervous laugh. He wanted her to know that he forgave her and could never be mad at her for any reason. “Stephanie, you can’t get rid of me, or any of us for that matter, so easily. We know things won’t be easy for you right away, and we are here for you.”

He wanted to tell her that she just needed to start sharing with them, otherwise they were helpless to help her. But he restrained himself, knowing that she would get angry again. He wanted to be there for her and for him to do that, he had to be in her good graces. He just hoped that she would learn that lesson in time.

“I am sorry, though.” She muttered, snuggling into his arms. They were quiet for a few minutes until Neville couldn’t stand the uncomfortable silence anymore.

“What was that you were listening to?” He asked her, curiosity getting the better of him.

She pulled a small, square, blue something out of her pocket that was attached to what appeared to be a long, white string. She smiled at the question. “Do you like it? Arthur got it for me for my birthday, though he made me promise not to tell Molly. It’s a muggle invention; amazing creatures, those muggles. They call it an mp3 player, though I don’t know where they get that silly name. I mean, it holds more than three songs. This thing would have come in handy before, making my chores go much more quickly”

“That song that you were singing, you really don’t believe those lyrics, do you?” Neville had to ask. He rubbed her shoulder as she lifted her head to look at him. “You don’t really feel that way.”

“I do sometimes.” Stephanie responded sincerely and he respected that she was being so honest with him. “But, you know, it’s songs like that that give me a release. The muggles truly got something right with their music. I can relate to what they’re saying and it makes me feel less alone. And don’t tell me I’m not alone. I know I’m not, but sometimes it’s just hard to convince myself of that because none of you have experienced what I have.”

“You’re right, your experiences are truly yours alone.” Neville was honored that she was finally opening up to him. That time alone really gave her some perspective and allowed her to see that she could share without losing anything of herself. “And it may hurt sometimes, but we can help you sort through your struggles. We do care about you, Stephanie, no matter what you have done in the past.”

“I know.” Stephanie tried to smile and he rubbed her shoulder again. “It’s just so hard sometimes. For a long time I didn’t have control over anything and I feel like this is something that I can control.”

She remained silent for along time and he kept quiet, trying to figure out what was going through her head. He just squeezed tightly; terrified that he would never get this chance to hold her again. They were having an intimate moment that he never wanted to end. Nothing could happen to them there, Stephanie was safe in his arms, and he wanted it to stay that way forever.

Stephanie took a deep breath, which he felt as her body moved with her lungs. “Neville, you are my best friend. Thank you for sticking with me even though I haven’t been the easiest person to get along with lately.”

“You are my best friend, too.” He said softly, leaning his head closer towards hers. As he did so, he inhaled and smelled her hair and couldn’t help but sigh in satisfaction. She smelled just like lilies. “I will never leave you, Stephanie. You have to understand that. Nothing you ever do can drive me away. I will make sure that you are safe.”

“Why didn’t you tell me about the offer to teach at Hogwarts?” She asked gently, almost hesitantly.

Neville had known that she would eventually ask that question. There was one very simple reason why he hadn’t told anyone that Minerva McGonagall, the headmistress of Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry, had offered him the substitute teaching position of Herbology. “I didn’t want to take attention away from you. You accomplished so much and deserved to be praised. I didn’t want to spoil that for you.”

Stephanie sat up and pulled herself from his arms. He felt like his heart was being ripped out of his chest at the motion; he had wanted to keep her in his arms for eternity. Instead, she reached for his hand and squeezed it with both of hers. “You wouldn’t have spoiled anything for me, Neville. I care about you and I want you to be happy. Don’t ever keep anything like this from me ever again, promise?”

“I promise.” Neville responded. He knew better than to cross Stephanie Potter, she was dangerous when people didn’t listen to her. And then he smiled. “When do you have to be at Hogwarts?”

“Minerva said the teachers are required to be at Hogwarts the morning the students arrive, but she wants me there two days in advance since I’ve never officially been there. Yeah, I’ve been there, but I’ve never had the opportunity to explore. She wants to run through teaching materials and give me a tour and stuff.” Stephanie let go of his hand and stood, dusting off the seat of her pants. “That’s why I’ve been trying to clean up Severus’ house a little to make it more respectable. Do you know that every piece of furniture in this house is painted black?”

Neville laughed heartily. “To tell you the truth, I do believe that. But my question is, why don’t you do it the easy way?” He showed her what he meant with a flick of his wrist, symbolizing a wand.

Stephanie nodded her head in understanding. “I know this is weird because of why I wasn’t allowed to do things by magic, but I was taught to do things by muggle means, ironic as it is since the Malfoy family despised all things muggle related. But I worked hard to do my chores and it gave me a sense of accomplishment. And because of that, I don’t like to use magic unless it is completely necessary. I like being proud of what I can do.”

“That makes perfect sense.” Neville nodded his head. “That looks like hard work, though.”

“It is.” Stephanie smiled and dug out her wand from the pocket of her sweatshirt. Then she waved it in the direction of the bookcase and it disappeared. “But that is much easier than carrying it back inside.”

Neville rolled his eyes and smiled at Stephanie. She brushed her fingers through her hair and placed her mp3 player back into her pocket. Then she looked at Neville and he somehow felt the need to hold still. She looked like she was deep in thought and he didn’t want to disturb that.

“Neville.” She lifted her head and then extended her hand, shaking her head. “Never mind.”

“No.” Neville said forcefully. He was not going to let her get away with that so easily. “What is it?”

“Well.” Stephanie said, playing in the dirt with her sandal. “There has been something that I’ve been meaning to do, and, well, I just don’t want to do it alone. I was wondering if you’d come with me.”

“Of course I will.” Neville smiled at her hesitation. “There’s nothing I wouldn’t do for you, silly.”

She blushed at his comment and he brushed it off as embarrassment. He just wondered what she would be afraid of doing alone. She began to walk inside the small house and then she grabbed his hand. It was his turn for his cheeks to burn.

“By the way,” she said as she led him inside. “What did you come here for?”

“I wanted to share my good news with you.” Neville said proudly, beaming at his accomplishment. He had almost forgotten the reason he had come to see his best friend, his true love. “I was afraid you didn’t want to see me, but I wanted to share my great news with my best mate.”

“Well?” She asked, opening her eyes wide.

“I passed my N.E.W.T.S.” He was positively glowing. “But you can’t tell anyone, not even Harry. McGonagall wanted to score mine right away because if I didn’t pass she would have to find a replacement substitute professor.”

“That is amazing, Neville.” She leaned over and embraced him tightly. He took in the scent of her hair again and almost melted right there where he stood. She was bursting with pride. “I am so proud of you; you definitely deserve it after all of your hard work.”

“So, where are we going?” Neville asked and Stephanie took his hand again. She walked him towards the fireplace in the living room.

“The house has been seized by the Ministry, so I have spoken to Kingsley and he has granted me permission to enter only once.” Stephanie spoke as she pulled him into the fireplace and took a handful of Floo Powder. She looked away from him and towards the far wall across from them as she clearly identified their destination. “Lestrange Manor.”


A/N: The song that Stephanie sings is "Welcome to My Life" by Simple Plan. It is not my own creation. I know that this was not written when this story actually takes place, but it was something that I think fits and describes her emotional turmoil.

There is this chapter. I got it up sooner than I thought. And I will work very hard to get one more chapter posted before I officially move (which is next weekend) because I will go one week without access to internet. Please let me know what you think either by vote at the top or by leaving feedback. I appreciate all that you can spare!

Chapter Twelve(a): Lestrange Manor

Stephanie squeezed Neville’s hand as she calmly stated the location she wanted to visit. “Lestrange Manor.” She closed her eyes for the short moment it would take to transport them to the home where she had been a captive in during the reign of her master, the Dark Lord.

Neville had come to visit her while she was working on fixing up Severus’ house to make it more resident-friendly, and she allowed herself to share a small part of herself with him. It felt good, and she had been glad to see him, but she knew there was too much she couldn’t tell him. Her mind was screaming at her to tell him why she was so happy to see him there that day, but she just couldn’t do it. She couldn’t bring herself to tell Neville how scared she really was. She couldn’t let him think any less of her; she needed him then more than ever before.

The reason she had been listening to the music that Arthur Weasley had given her for her birthday wasn’t because she needed to release some of her frustrations or because it gave her something to do, though that’s what she had told Neville. It was the fact that she was terrified to be alone. Each time she bent her head to focus on her sanding, she could have sworn that she heard a noise of some sort like a branch snapping nearby or the ruffle of leaves overhead.

She had called out several times without expecting an answer, so she wasn’t surprised when no one responded. And she knew that Neville wouldn’t have hidden from her if she had called out to him. Someone was watching her, she was certain of it. But she couldn’t tell Neville because he would tell Harry and Kingsley and they would demand that she be placed under Auror protection again.

The Dark Lord had never allowed her out of his sight without a Death Eater accompanying or following her to make sure that she didn’t try to escape or betray him. And when she finally did escape, Order members and Aurors kept constant watch over her safety. Stephanie was tired of being surrounded by people and she just wanted to be herself, to live her life. She just wanted to be normal.

She had spent the last two weeks helping Kingsley. While her friends and brother were studying for their very important exams, Stephanie had been busy cleaning out the Ministry as best she could. There had been five people in all that she recognized from the Dark Lord’s service. They hadn’t been Death Eaters, but they had assisted him of their own free will while he was running the Ministry during his short-lived reign; they had been supportive during his uprising. The newly appointed minister told her that he was indebted to her, but she couldn’t risk having him learn that she was still in danger. "No," she told herself despite her fears. No one must ever know. She needed to protect them from what she knew. It was her problem and she would handle it on her own.

Her thoughts were disturbed by Neville, who whispered in awe and hatred at the same time. “So this is where Bellatrix lived.” The woman’s name came out as a snarl.

She looked at him with a sudden wave of remorse as they exited the fireplace. This was the home of the person he despised most in this world: Bellatrix Lestrange. The woman had tortured his parents into insanity and refused to kill them, letting them live their meager existence in St. Mungo’s. For the first time since she had known Neville Longbottom, he terrified her. His eyes went cold and dark as he scanned the living room for any trace of the woman. She thought that she could hear a quiet growl resting at the back of his throat.

He squeezed her hand without realizing his strength; she winced as he crushed her fingers, but she didn’t allow herself to make a sound. Instead, she slowly reached inside her sweatshirt and brought out her wand, bringing it to her side. She wasn’t preparing to harm Neville, she was preparing to defend herself. Stephanie didn’t think he would hurt her, but she had to be prepared. She had seen that very look in the eyes of many Death Eaters every time they looked at her; it was pure, lustful hatred.

He must have sensed her action or noticed the perspiration that had formed on her palm because, as quickly as his expression had changed, the hatred disappeared, and he dropped her hand. Even though she wanted to rub it, she didn’t want Neville to know that he had hurt her. He would never forgive himself for doing so.

Neville just looked at her, pursing his lips quietly. “I’m sorry, I just hate her so much!” He marched over to the mantle that was close by and grabbed a portrait of Bellatrix Lestrange. It was one that had been taken when she was younger, maybe when she was still a student at Hogwarts. She looked smug and confident, like she didn’t have a care in the world. Stephanie wished she could feel that way.

And she cringed as Neville threw the portrait to the ground, the glass shattering into tiny pieces. She turned her gaze to Neville’s eyes and apologized. “I am so sorry, Neville. I didn’t even realize that you might not want to come here. I know what she did to your parents. It was too selfish of me. We can go if you want.”

“No.” She turned to head back to the fireplace, but he stood still. Neville pulled her back to his side and his expression softened even more. “She’s dead and Rodolphus is in prison. And, besides, I thought you said that Kingsley gave you permission to come here only once. We don’t want to waste that, do we?”

“Are you sure?” She asked doubtfully. Being there was something she had to do for herself and she knew at that moment that she should have come alone. It was unfair of her to expect that much of her best friend—she would just have to come back at a later time. Kingsley would understand; he had to let her come back.

“Positive.” He smiled and Stephanie almost lost her balance. His honest smile looked good. Why on earth was she feeling attraction towards Neville? He was her best friend! And she had Fred to think about. But Fred gave me permission, she told herself. No. Not for Neville. There is someone who loves me. But, oh, Fred. What is wrong with me? “Now what did we come here for?”

She looked around the living room. It was strange to be back in this place where, and it seemed to be ages ago, the Dark Lord had held her captive. She had been manipulated and deceived there, she had been miserable, while, at other times, she had been strangely happy. She had yearned for the approval of someone she could never impress; she had done horrible things to earn her master’s trust. There were two reasons she needed to visit Lestrange Manor, and one of them, at least that was her hope, was upstairs on the floor of her old bedroom.

But she didn’t feel up to going there right away. First, she needed to look around and remember, committing it all to her memory. She must never forget what had happened to her here, what she had to endure to shape who she had become. If she wanted to heal, she could never forget. And she took her time, tracing her fingers on the mantle, on the pictures on the mantle, tracing the walls and the furniture.

This room was where she had been introduced to Bellatrix Lestrange; they had held Dark Arts training sessions in this room—she had first used the Cruciatus Curse in that very corner on the defenseless Draco Malfoy. And she had been forced to commit the horrible spell on the boy only because he hadn’t yet been given the privilege of bearing the Dark Mark. It was that horrible marking, the same one she had burned onto her left forearm and she always kept hidden from wandering eyes, that had made it impossible for her to protect herself against the Death Eaters that had tortured her.

She walked around the room in silence, reliving her horrible memories. But she did not cry; this had been a place where she could never show her emotions, she forced herself to remain strong. And Neville must have sensed the reason she had brought him, for moral support, because he walked over to her and grabbed hold of her hand once again. She was relieved that he held it more gently this time. Out of respect, he remained silent as she continued.

After she was finished in the living room, she entered the dining room and the attached kitchen. The table was where she had had her first official meeting with the Dark Lord. He had been so kind to her at first when she had been so frightened of him. He demanded that she eat everything given to her in order to keep up her strength. Countless meetings had been held exactly where she stood now, where she remained mostly silent while merely looking down at the table. She traced her fingers along the chair that had been her own for her entire stay at the Manor. She sighed as she remembered how alone she had felt there.

In the kitchen, Stephanie sank to her knees without letting go of Neville’s hand. He followed her to the floor without saying a word and she could feel his eyes boring into her head. She knew he must be wondering what was going through her mind. This was the exact spot where she had almost killed Draco one day; she had lost her temper and attacked him. It had been Severus who rescued both of the children, because if she had completed the deed, she surely would have been sentenced to death.

She wasn’t sure how long she stayed in that position, but she finally dusted off the front of her pant legs with her free hand and continued outside through the back door of the Manor. She could only allow herself to remain there for a few minutes, remembering the induction ceremonies that had been held there. She had been forced to endure the Cruciatus Curse for five minutes; she had killed Marcus Flint. Tears were starting to come to her eyes, but she blinked them back. NO! She screamed at herself. She could not allow herself to get emotional in this home. It was unacceptable.

She squeezed Neville’s hand as he walked by her side back into the Manor. She silently walked into the living room and ascended the stairs. There was only one room that she was interested in and she had to prepare herself to enter its domain. The door was closed and she took a breath as her hand grabbed the doorknob. She opened the door effortlessly and was surprised by the scene in front of her. Her bedroom was exactly as she had left it.

Walking into the room, Stephanie felt like she was returning to a time when she was alone in the world, to a time when she was an evil person, a Death Eater. She traced the books on the bookshelf as she walked by, they were all there. A shiver went through her spine as a sudden memory of the books’ contents flashed through her mind; they were not as much books as torture lessons. No one should ever be subjected to what was described in great and meticulous detail in those books.

Then she closed her eyes in preparation for what she had to do next. This was one of the two reasons she had returned to Lestrange Manor, but would it still be there? She took a deep breath, turned her body back towards the door, and slowly opened her eyes.

It was. She wondered if no one had ever come into the room after she vacated it. Maybe the Dark Lord told them not to, but she didn’t really care why no one had touched the book. All that mattered was that it was there. She tried to drop Neville’s hand, but he refused to oblige, so she pulled him to the opposite corner of the room and near the door.

Stephanie picked up the diary and hugged it to her chest, letting out the breath she had been holding in anticipation, and smiled broadly. Just looking at the diary released the all of the tension from her shoulders. “This is why I needed to come here.”

“But didn’t Ron make you a copy of the diary?” Neville asked, clearly confused. Stephanie nodded in response. “Or I could have given you mine.”

“Yeah, but this is my diary.” Stephanie breathed and hugged it even tighter. Neville seemed to understand only slightly and she took the time to look at him. He looked uncomfortable and she hoped it was only in being inside Lestrange Manor and had nothing to do with her.

He answered her unasked question by squeezing her hand and speaking to her in a forcedly polite tone. “Can we leave now?”

“I just have to do one other thing.” Stephanie responded hesitantly. She had accomplished her first reason for wishing to return to the Manor and she didn’t feel like she could leave without completing the second. “But you can stay by the door if you want to.”

“No.” He responded authoritatively, sticking out his chest. She had to hide her amusement in his bravado. “I am coming with you. But what if he’s here?”

Stephanie had been afraid of that, too, but she doubted that he would come back to the Manor. It had been seized by the Ministry and had been closed off for months. The Aurors would be able to find him too easily if he returned.

“Rabastan wouldn’t come back here.” Stephanie tried to convince herself more than Neville. “It’s too dangerous for him here.”

“But he might try to find you.” Neville almost whispered and Stephanie responded by leading him out of her bedroom and towards the stairs.

She wasn’t sure if he would come looking for her at all, but she was sure that he wouldn’t expect her to return to the Manor. And she wasn’t sure who had been following her lately, first at Sirius’ house and then at Severus’, but Stephanie was fairly certain that no one was in the Manor with them at that moment.

She reached the living room and walked to the second doorway that had been in her way that afternoon. Pausing at the door, she could feel Neville’s body getting tense. She was about to ask him if he wanted to change his mind and stay there, but he squeezed her hand and signaled that she should continue. Stephanie took a deep breath and prepared for what she had to do. Stephanie had to conquer her demons.

Stephanie descended the stairs slowly and deliberately with Neville following close behind. She could feel his breath on her neck even though it had noticeably slowed. Stephanie realized that her breath was coming in shallow spurts as well. Her stomach churned as she descended the stairs and was returned to a place that had frequently occupied many of her nightmares in the recent past.

She walked down the narrow hallway and made her way towards the cell that had been the Dark Lord’s favorite way to punish her. She cringed as she heard the crunch of a cockroach beneath her feet. It was much colder than she remembered and she felt goose bumps form on her skin. Neville squeezed even harder and she realized that he was no longer breathing. She was leading him into the room where she had been tortured merely for the Dark Lord’s enjoyment.

Finally they reached the cell and she was surprised that the door opened so easily--it hadn’t been locked when she had last left it. That thought seemed so foreign to her; the fact that the barred cell door remained unlocked. She forced Neville with a pathetic, pleading glare to release his grip and she entered the small room alone as she had done several times before.

She knelt on the dirty floor and touched its cold, hard surface. It felt different somehow, though Stephanie wasn’t sure why. She looked up to the tiny window at the top of the cell, the only source of light in the entire room, and smiled. Suddenly, she realized why the room felt so completely different. It was a relieving revelation; a weight lifted off her shoulders immediately.

Stephanie looked to Neville and showed him her smile. He just looked at her curiously, his expression full of concern. “Are you okay, Stephanie?” He asked and she nodded. Of course she was alright. After all of her lies and half-truths, she was finally able be completely honest with him.

“I survived, Neville.” She smiled at him, realizing the truth for the first time. “No matter what they did to me, no matter how much I hurt, none of it matters. I survived this.” She waved her hand around the cell and gestured towards the sky, her smile never faltering. “I survived all of it.”

Her voice came out in more of a laugh and Neville looked unsure of how to react. She knew that he must be wondering if she had lost her mind, if she had gone crazy, but she knew that she was saner than ever before. “Neville, they can’t destroy that. I am going to be alright.”

And he breathed out in relief, seeming to believe that this little excursion had been beneficial. His arm reached out for her hand and she took it, ready to leave the Lestrange Manor behind her forever. But when they had ascended the stairs and she started towards the fireplace, Neville hesitated. She looked at him questioningly.

“Let’s go out the front.” It was more of a demand than a question and Stephanie eyed him suspiciously. Why doesn’t he want to use the Floo Network? She asked herself.

“We can’t. If we go out the front, we won’t be able to get back in.” Stephanie responded slowly. “And I think there’s spells protecting the doors against intruders. Kingsley didn’t want Rabastan coming back here.”

“Stephanie.” He said her name stubbornly and she could see that the hatred was back in his eyes. She instinctively reached for her wand as a shiver went through her spine. “Let me do this.”

Stephanie was more afraid for Neville than she was for herself, so she nodded and opened the front door. It opened easily, though Stephanie surmised that the spells were probably in place to keep people out, not to keep people inside the Manor. Stephanie walked towards the front gate, but Neville hadn’t followed her the entire way. She hadn’t even realized that he had let go of her hand. Instead, he had stopped at the foot of the stairs just outside the front door; she noticed that there was a satisfied expression on his face as he raised his wand.

“Neville.” Stephanie hissed in his direction, but she was too late.

After she realized what he was about to do and before she could stop him, Neville bellowed an incantation with all his might towards Lestrange Manor. “EXPULSO!”

She had seen the damage this spell could do; she had seen the walls of Azkaban crumble as if it were merely a cheesecake being divided. So, what happened next didn’t surprise her. Lestrange Manor collapsed into a terrible dust pile that made her eyes burn. And, like that, her teenage home, a prison in its own right, but still her home, was gone. It was then that she could no longer force the tears back and they rolled freely down her cheeks.

Neville turned towards her calmly and strangely at peace. “Let’s go.”

This new side of her best friend terrified her, but she didn’t say anything. It had been her fault that he had even stepped foot in the home of his mortal enemy, the woman he had wanted to kill himself but had been denied because Mrs. Weasley beat him to it. Though she had never admitted it to him, Stephanie was glad he hadn’t been the one to murder Bellatrix Lestrange. Murder changes people in ways she knew all too well, but she had stirred up the terrible memories within him by bringing him there. His behavior was all her fault. Stephanie closed her eyes with one last thought as she followed Neville out into the street so he could take her back to 12 Grimmauld Place.

Why do I always end up hurting the ones I love?


Oh my goodness. Has it already been almost two weeks since I last posted? I apologize greatly, I honestly didn't intend for it to go that long. But, I encountered somewhat of a pleasant....distraction. I think Lauren will understand where I'm coming from (and I wholeheartedly thank you, Lauren!!) But I haven't been able to focus too well on the story (or sleep too well, for that matter ). But, no worries. I have 3/4 of one book left to read and then my focus will return to Stephanie and the Unknown Potter.

DW: You were completely 100% on the money about the destruction of the Manor. I wanted to applaud your comment because I had already written that part before you left your feedback and I couldn't tell you anything!

So, I regret that the next chapter won't be posted for at least another week. I won't have internet (or TV) until next Friday and I'm going out of town next weekend. (This weekend is the big move/starting of the new job). But I should have plenty of time to focus on writing. So I'll post as quickly as I can. Thank you all for sticking with me (and especially those that leave me feedback so often!! I appreciate you guys so much!!!) Hope you all have a great weekend!

Chapter Twelve(b): Lestrange Manor

She was wrong, dead wrong. He shook his head, looking at her gravely. They had returned from Lestrange Manor a little less than two weeks ago, but she still took the blame for its destruction. Kingsley had approached her about it and, though he didn’t seem to believe her, he accepted her story that the Lestranges or the Dark Lord must have put a curse on the home, causing it to self destruct. But that wasn’t what had happened at all—No, Neville had lost his temper. It was merely that simple.

And though they never once mentioned what happened inside that home, in fact, they had rarely talked at all during the past two weeks, he could see the fear and pain in Stephanie’s eyes. No one even talked to him at the graduation ceremony where he, Hermione, Ron, and Harry received their diplomas. Ginny had only looked at him sympathetically when he walked across the stage. It was enough to break his heart, but it hadn’t. Stephanie’s avoidance of him was what was ripping his heart to shreds.

Stephanie thought that he had destroyed the house because of his hatred for Bellatrix Lestrange. And she was afraid for him because of the strength of that emotion. But that wasn’t true; Bellatrix was dead and that was all that mattered to him. His parents were not going to get better, a fact that he had surprisingly come to terms with quite awhile ago.

No. He destroyed the Manor because that was where Stephanie had been tortured. He couldn’t stand to see her in so much pain as she walked around that house, touching every single thing that she could find, and remembering what had happened to her. It almost looked as though Stephanie held a fondness for that place of residence.

Neville knew only a miniscule amount of what had happened to her at that house, but he knew enough to realize that she shouldn’t have gone back there. She should have asked him to go in her place to retrieve the diary she so desperately wanted, but she hadn’t. And as hard as it was for him to go there, he would have gone. He would have done, and would do in the future, anything for Stephanie Potter. Neville loved her so much that his heart ached inside.

But Stephanie had forced herself to go back there and relive her worst memories. Why did she work so hard to seek out terrible pain? he had asked himself many times in the past two lonely weeks. It cut a deep hole inside his chest to see her in that much pain.

But he had to admit that it had been helpful for her in the end. Stephanie had honestly been cheerful since then as she prepared to leave her home and friends to teach Defense Against the Dark Arts at Hogwarts. He was at a small gathering as the friends dispersed for the semester: Hermione was starting her job at the Ministry of Magic, a position that Kingsley created specifically for her, on Monday; Ron and Harry were off to Auror training on Tuesday; and Stephanie had to go to Hogwarts that day, Saturday. Classes for her and Ginny would start on Wednesday, while Neville sat home and twiddled his thumbs waiting for an owl from Professor McGonagall stating that he was needed.

“Stephanie.” He had tried to get her attention subtly, but she was deliberately avoiding his glances. After a moment’s hesitation, she looked at him and he sighed in relief. So, she wasn’t completely ignoring him. “Can I talk to you?”

She narrowed her eyes at him and thought for a moment. Neville could see the tightness form in her lips. After a few seconds she nodded and stood, reaching for the wand that was on the coffee table in front of her. Neville flinched at the action and he was positive that he was not the only person in the room to notice Stephanie’s very deliberate response. He didn’t take a moment to look around, but he was sure that Hermione and Ginny would have reacted in some way; Stephanie was sure to have told them why she was angry with him. He, on the other hand, didn’t know why she was so furious, but he did intend to figure it out.

“Is that really a good idea, Stephanie?” Neville didn’t even realize that George had stood and was now standing protectively next to her.

“What do you mean?” Neville couldn’t stop himself as he took a step forward. Since when did George become so protective of her, anyway? “It’s not like I’m going to hurt her!”

“We don’t know that.” George had an angry look in his eye. Since the day at Lestrange Manor, everyone had treated him respectably enough, but he had noticed a division. He had even stopped hanging out at the Black residence because of it. But he couldn’t figure out why no one would just talk to him about what he had done.

“I would never hurt her and you know it.” Neville shoved his finger into George’s chest and he felt himself being restrained. Ron was pulling him backwards. “Let me go!”

“It’s alright, really.” Stephanie’s soft voice broke through the tension filled room. “Let him go, Ron.”

Ron eyed her suspiciously and finally let him go. What was wrong with everyone? They should all know that he would never hurt her; he loved her way too much for that. Without another word, Stephanie ascended the stairs towards her bedroom and Neville could do nothing but follow in silence.

Once inside the room, Neville couldn’t keep his anxiety to himself. Before either one of them could even sit down, he burst out in rapid speech so that even he could barely understand himself. “I am so sorry for whatever I did to you. Why are you so mad at me?”

Stephanie sighed and put her wand in her back pocket, but still kept it easily accessible. She took a moment to think while Neville held his breath. “You really scared me at Lestrange Manor, Neville.”

“What?” Neville furrowed his brow and almost collapsed from her words. He had scared her? His breath barely came out in a whisper. “How?”

“I thought you were going to hurt someone. Your eyes filled with the same hate that I’ve seen in Death Eaters countless times.” Her voice was soft, but it didn’t tremble with fear. It didn’t sound like she was afraid of him now.

“I would never hurt you, Stephanie. You need to understand that.” Neville whispered, so angry at himself for losing his control like that. “I was just so angry.”

“And I should have thought about you before I asked you to go there.” Stephanie sat on the bed and motioned for him to sit down next to her. Neville could tell that she was angry with him and the way she kept her voice so calm unnerved him. “I have been very selfish lately, and for that I apologize. I wasn’t afraid that you would hurt me, but I did think you might try something stupid, which you did.”

“I am so sorry, Stephanie.” Neville felt remorse deep within himself. If he truly loved her, could he really hurt her like that?

“I am not angry with you because you lost your temper.” She spoke more hoarsely now. “You destroyed my home, Neville. I know you hated her, but I don’t understand how you could do that.”

Neville wasn’t expecting that and he wasn’t completely sure that he had heard her correctly. “Your home?”

“I spent so much time there and I wasn’t even treated as a servant like I had been with the Malfoys. I may have been a captive, but it, especially the bedroom, was a place where I could be alone. I could be me. It was the closest thing to a home I’ve ever had and you just destroyed it out of pure hatred. It hurt, Neville.” Stephanie was being honest with him, though he could tell that she was struggling with that. He felt so horrible for hurting her, how could he ever make it up to her?

And then what she was saying finally sunk in. She thought that he had destroyed the Manor because of his hatred for Bellatrix. He wanted to smile, but he couldn’t. She looked too upset by his actions and he didn’t want to cause any more damage than was already done.

“I didn’t cast that spell because of what Bellatrix did to my parents.” Neville spoke honestly and reached for her hand, but she didn’t move. She eyed him curiously and he decided it was safe to continue. “I destroyed that manor because of what she did to you. Seeing your face as you walked around, Stephanie, it hurt me. You looked like you were suffering so much and, I don’t know, I kind of lost control. It just got me so mad to see how much they hurt you.”

“They were horrible memories and it was hard being there, but those memories are all I have.” Stephanie took a deep breath and fidgeted with the long sleeve of her shirt. “When I was working with the Dark Lord, I had a purpose and something to focus on. Now that it’s all over, I’m having trouble adjusting. It's memories like that that keep me going and you killed that opportunity I had, without even asking me.”

“I’m so sorry, Stephanie.” Neville said again, hoping that she believed him. He squeezed her hand, but she didn’t acknowledge his action. “What can I do to make it right?”

“I don’t know.” Stephanie whispered, shaking her head sadly. “I just don’t know.”

“We have a stronger friendship than that; you can’t let this ruin what we have! There has to be something I can do to make it right!” He was begging her, but he could see right through her eyes. There was nothing that he could do—he had destroyed something that was important to her and she wasn’t able to forget that so easily.

Stephanie just shook her head, but she didn’t speak. Neville knew the conversation was over and that it was time for him to leave. He didn’t understand why she needed that Manor to get over what had happened to her, but he knew that he had messed up. He got up and slowly made his way down the stairs. His friends couldn’t even look at him as he made his way towards the door and he knew that was because Stephanie had been the link. Would he lose them, too, because he had lost his temper? He could bear that. What he couldn’t bear was losing Stephanie. She was his entire world. Neville closed the door behind him and disappeared into the afternoon sun without any idea of where to go.


I know this was short, but it was the second "half" of the previously posted chapter. I am so sorry about its length, but the next chapter should be posted on Monday. It is a good one, I promise. And we'll be meeting lots of new characters, including "D". There is a substantial Abby POV, in addition to a Stephanie POV. We will meet Slytherins and Gryffindors that are very important to the story. So, stay tuned...!

Chapter Thirteen: The Sorting

She bounced up and down on the balls of her feet in anticipation. For weeks now she had been terrified that her father wouldn’t allow her to attend Hogwarts this year. But there she was, standing directly in front of the large and beautiful steam engine that would take her away, that would allow her to finally make friends. She felt like she was in a fairy tale that would have an incredibly happy ending.

But tears came to her eyes, spoiling her excitement, when she looked up at her father. What was he going to do without her? Who was going to take care of him when she was away?

He smiled down at her as he lifted a cage. “This is for you, honey.” He said softly, kneeling to the ground so he could be closer to her. “I want you to write me everyday.”

She looked at the owl in awe and with wide eyes. It was the largest owl she had ever seen. Its brown feathers were sprinkled with white dots and she thought she saw it smile at her as she took in its beauty.

“Thanks daddy!” She exclaimed, jumping into his arms. “I’ll write to you all the time. I promise!”

He embraced her tightly and then placed her back down on the ground. Her father looked her in the eyes and nodded to himself. Then he brought himself back down to her level and then reached into the pocket of his robes.

“You are so grown up, honey!” Her father spoke hesitantly, but she could tell that he was beaming with pride. But when he thought that she wasn’t looking, his eyes darted in every direction, looking for something, though he never seemed to find what he was looking for. Jeffrey was down the platform saying goodbye to D, but her father had other guards keeping watch over them. “You look so much like your mother. I want to give you something.”

“What is it, daddy?” Abby tried to appear interested, but she was getting antsy to board the train. What if it left without her? Would her father personally take her to Hogwarts or just make her go home? He could always change his mind at the very last moment, something that he had done several times before, so she just wanted to get on that train.

Jason pulled out a necklace that she recognized immediately. It was a heart shaped locket on a shimmering silver chain. The heart had intricate twirling designs along the outside. She placed the locket in her hands and turned it around to look at the back; it was engraved: Our love is eternal.

“I gave it to your mother on our first anniversary and she never took it off.” He smiled at her and she could feel the tears coming to her eyes again. “I want you to take it and think of her whenever you’re scared or lonely. I love you, honey.”

“I love you too, daddy!” Abby hugged her father again, this time saddened by the fact that she had to leave her father all alone. How was he going to take care of himself without her? He depended on her to be strong, so she must be strong now. She blinked back her tears and let go of him.

“Abby, let’s go.” She heard the familiar drawl of her best and only friend. “You can sit with us.”

“Thanks, D.” Abby called out and skipped towards Daniel. As she boarded the train, she refused to look back at her father. If she took even one short moment to look at him, she was certain that she would break into tears. And if she was going to make friends, hopefully with the Slytherins, she couldn’t be a blubbering idiot. She needed to be strong for herself as much as for her father.

Daniel led her inside the train and Abby couldn’t help but admire her surroundings. There were students running excitedly all over the place; but Daniel kept his pace quick, so she didn’t have too much time to look around. She didn’t want to lose him in the crowd. As they passed compartments, she couldn’t help but notice they were all pretty full.

She tried to scrunch around a group of students that were standing in the hallway, but she wasn’t able to fit through the small gap. Her bag fell to the ground and all of her books flew out as she bumped into a girl who looked to be about her age with short, black hair that was pulled into tiny ponytails all over her head.

“I’m so sorry.” The girl responded to her as she knelt down to help Abby with her books. “It’s crazy here, isn’t it? I’m so nervous; it’s my first year at Hogwarts.”

Abby couldn’t help but smile at the girl to show her that there were no hard feelings. She shuffled a book into her other hand as she extended her right. “That’s not a problem. I’m a first year, too. I’m Abby.”

“Lauren.” The girl smiled back at her and helped place the last book into her book bag. Then she burst into such rapid and excited speech that Abby couldn’t help but giggle quietly. “I’m really hoping to get sorted into Hufflepuff. That’s where both of my parents were. They actually met here at Hogwarts, it’s an amazingly sweet story, really. My older sister is a prefect in Hufflepuff, so I really can’t see why I’d be placed anywhere else. So what Hou-”

“ABBY!” Daniel bellowed in her direction and she jumped at his impatience. She looked up and saw that he was already halfway down the length of the train—Abby surmised that he must have been heading towards the rear of the train because of his pace. “I promised your dad that I’d look after you, now get over here now!”

Abby sighed as Lauren placed a hand on her arm. Lauren spoke in a soft whisper. “What’s his problem?”

“I’m sorry,” was all that Abby could think of to say. It was definitely rude of D to make that command of her, but he was only looking out for her. He was the only friend she had and she couldn’t afford to lose him. He had been so important to her that she couldn’t even think about asking him to be nicer to her. At any moment Daniel could go back to her father and convince him to pull her from the school, and that wouldn’t help anyone.

When she reached Daniel in the aisle, he grabbed her arm forcefully and pushed her in front of him. “Ouch, D. You’re hurting me.” She whispered to him, trying not to make a scene. But she could tell that a few people were already staring at their interaction.

“I’m only doing what’s best for you, Abby.” He murmured quietly in her ear as he opened a compartment door and then pushed her inside. Abby hurried to steady herself before she landed on the ground at the feet of the four other students that were already in the compartment. She took a seat without a word as she glared at Daniel for his outburst.

“What are you, Daniel? A babysitter, now?” A tall and lanky, freckle-faced, boy taunted her friend.

“It seems we all are, if you remember the discussion we had the other day.” Daniel hissed at the boy and Abby couldn’t help but wonder what he was talking about. She looked at D with curiosity, but he ignored her altogether. “Don’t you dare forget our arrangement.”

“This is Abby Seabold. Her father was very important to You-Know-Who. I promised her dad that I’d make sure she got connected to the right group of people.” D continued as if the previous interaction hadn’t occurred. He rolled his eyes at his friends and spoke as if his sentence truly mattered.

Abby really hadn’t known too much about He-Who-Must-Not-Be-Named’s involvement with her father, but she knew that the man was the reason evil had come into her life. Death Eaters had started making regular appearances at her house shortly after her mother and brother had died, but her father never told her why. She suspected that D knew what was going on, but he brushed her off every time she asked him. He changed the subject by pointing out the students that were in their compartment, though she knew that she would never remember who they were. “Abby, this is Tom Johnson, Mark Campbell, Corey Fletcher, Rachel Sorenson, Craig Miller, and Fred McAdams. Tom and Rachel are fifth year prefects and Corey is the Slytherin Quidditch captain.”

“Hi.” It was awkward because she didn’t know what else to say, but they all responded by staring at her like she had the plague or something. None of them appeared to be as friendly as Lauren had been just moments before.

Abby suddenly realized why her father had asked D to look after her. He wanted to control as much of her life as he could, even though he couldn’t be with her at Hogwarts. That’s why he had decided to let her attend Hogwarts instead of Durmstrang, that’s why he hadn’t resisted her leaving so easily on the platform. She was going to be a prisoner in Hogwarts just like she had been a prisoner in her own home.

But there had to be a way around D’s watchful eye. He couldn’t keep tabs on her all the time—maybe she would make some friends that D and her father would approve of. It would be so dreadful if she didn’t, but it wouldn’t be the end of the world. At least she could socialize at Hogwarts, unlike at home.

“Did you see Amber Zacharias on the train?” Corey was saying, though Abby tried to block out their conversation.

“I can’t believe she had the nerve to show her face around here after what happened last year.” Rachel hissed. “I mean, she definitely is not her brother—that goody-two-shoes. At least Joshua was spying on that filthy nerd herd, but she was honestly friends with them. How disgusting.”

“What House do you think she’ll be sorted into?” Daniel asked with a snide edge to his voice. Abby definitely didn’t like the side of him that had appeared in front of his friends. Where was the kind, brotherly friend she had always known?

“Hopefully not Slytherin.” Fred spoke through his teeth. “Though after what her brother did last year, I’m not sure any House would welcome her. She deserves to be in Gryffindor, that’s for sure! They’ll eat her alive!”

“That would be hilarious to watch.” Craig cackled and the rest of the compartment laughed in agreement. “Can you just picture what that Weasley girl would do to her?”

“I heard that Joshua tried to kill her and would have, too, if that stupid Potter girl hadn’t shown up.” Rachel spoke in a superior tone that made Abby’s stomach turn.

“Oh, you’re only upset because you had a crush on him.” Corey taunted and Rachel silently glared at him.

“And Weasley killed him.” Rachel muttered under her breath, clenching her fists tightly into a ball.

“Don’t worry, Rach. She will get what’s coming to her.” Craig responded, rubbing Rachel on the back of her shoulders.

But Abby couldn’t participate in the conversation that D and the others were having. Their comments unsettled and disturbed her beyond words. Instead, she stared out across the compartment and watched through the window as the scenery rolled by. She closed her eyes and silently chanted her only wish at the moment, hoping that would be enough to make it true. If she could make this one thing happen, then she could certainly guarantee that she’d be able to stay at Hogwarts. Slytherin. Slytherin. Slytherin. Slytherin. Slytherin. Please, please, please, let me be placed in Slytherin.

*~*~*~*

She stared out into the quickly filling Great Hall. She had been at Hogwarts for 3 ½ days and already it felt like an eternity. The closer she got to the moment those students arrived at the school, the more certain she became that she wouldn’t be able to do it. So many thoughts plagued her mind and she just knew that she had made a wrong decision by accepting the Defense Against the Dark Arts position.

What if the students hate me? What if I can’t do this? How can I teach Ginny when she knows more than me? How will the children of Death Eaters treat me? Will I be able to look them in the eye knowing what I know about them and their families? Know about their secrets? What if one of my lessons hurts a student?

It had taken all she could to talk to George about these concerns. As she watched the students make their way to their respective House tables, Stephanie’s mind wandered to the night Neville had tried to apologize for destroying Lestrange Manor.

It wasn’t that she was upset at Neville; it was his actions that had hurt her. And how was he supposed to know how she was feeling? It was so hard for her to tell anyone what was going on inside her mind that she found it a wonder that anyone understood her at all. Yes. Neville did take a part of her when he blew up the only home she had been given any sort of freedom in. But what she was feeling towards Neville ran so much deeper than that.

He couldn’t have known that doing something so major for his own well-being would have influenced her to the degree it did. And she didn’t blame him, not one little bit. Stephanie knew that he cared about her deeply and he did what he had in order to protect her. When she put it into perspective like that, she couldn’t help but feel bad for the way she had treated him.

But her attraction for Neville was growing with each passing day and it honestly terrified her. She didn’t want to blush when he touched her and she didn’t want butterflies in her stomach when he spoke. She didn’t want to get breathless when she looked at his picture in the locket he had given her. But she did and it confused her to no other degree.

And she knew that these feelings were only coming out because she was lonely. As often as she was surrounded by people, Stephanie missed Fred and the company he provided her so much. Stephanie knew what loneliness could do—it had once attracted her to Kieran Hargrave. Even though she knew that Neville was not anything like Kieran, she didn’t want to make that same mistake again. She couldn’t hurt Neville more than was absolutely necessary.

At night after Harry was long asleep, Stephanie would take a walk outside and stare up at the stars and hope to catch a glimpse of Fred Weasley. She knew she would never get that chance, but it reassured her that he was still watching out for her. Then she would sneak back into her bedroom and cry herself to sleep. But she couldn’t tell anyone about that. So, she had to push Neville away before she could hurt him any further. He was innocent in this and she couldn’t damage him further.

But there was one person who could understand what she was going through. It wasn’t clear how much he had guessed, but he could see the pain in her eyes. The day she was to leave for Hogwarts, and after Neville had left, George pulled her aside, took her for a long walk, and embraced her for a long time.

“Didn’t I tell you to come and talk to me when you needed someone?” George scolded her in a way no one else could. There was a small smile on his face as he stuck his finger into her shoulder. “You look like you haven’t slept in weeks.”

She had tried to put on a brave smile as she had done with many others before. And she had been happier in those past couple weeks since her talk with Neville. If she couldn’t be happy with Neville, she told herself that she had to try to recover and immerse herself in other things that would be meaningful for her. Pretty much, she spent time making public appearances and completing volunteer work, but it had been surprisingly fulfilling and had allowed her time to forget about Neville Longbottom.

“I don’t know what you mean.” Stephanie lied and took a seat underneath a large whispering willow. The tree was beautiful as its long branches flowed in the breeze and the shade made her comfortable even though she wore long sleeves.

“Don’t give me that!” George demanded knowingly. He had a twinkle in his eye that reminded her of his brother. He sat down next to her and placed his arm around her shoulders. “I can read you better than Fred could. Now, what’s going on?”

Stephanie sighed as she looked George in the eye. He was going to get to the truth if it killed him, too. And she was so tired of pretending around everyone that she decided to go for it. “I miss him and I’m worried about Hogwarts.”

George didn’t take his eyes away from her as he studied her expression. Stephanie wanted to look away, but she couldn’t force herself to do so. His eyes were so entrancing that she couldn’t help but stare at him. There was a comforting tone to his eyes.

“Do you know how much he truly loved you?” George said softly, finally taking his eyes off her and looking towards the clouds. He continued without giving her a chance to interrupt. “I don’t know when he fell for you, but it was long before he met you in person. He didn’t tell me about that letter he sent you until Ron confronted him about it. I always made fun of him about it, but he felt drawn to you like you were meant to be with him or something.”

Stephanie sighed, not knowing how to respond. How was anyone supposed to respond to that? George was telling her that she and Fred were meant for each other, that they were soul mates. And her soul mate had been killed by her nemesis, Draco Malfoy, just months after they had gotten to know each other. Where was the fairness in that?

But it did reinforce her belief that her friends had to be kept at a distance. There were still too many people that were out to get her and she couldn’t allow another one of her friends to lose their life because of her. She had been selfish and stupid enough to let Fred die for her sins and she refused to let any one else suffer the fate that was supposed to be hers.

“And about Hogwarts.” George said, breaking into her thoughts. He waved his wand and a package the size of shoebox appeared on the ground in front of her. “I thought I’d give you something that won’t allow you to fail.”

Stephanie just looked at it curiously. That little tiny box was going to make sure that she did well at Hogwarts? She doubted it and she looked at George suspiciously. “What is it?” She asked slowly.

“Go ahead, open it.” George prodded, his face lighting up with excitement.

Stephanie carefully untied the bow and unwrapped the present, ends first and then working her way towards the middle. Once the paper was on the soft grass, Stephanie removed the cover and just stared. That was supposed to help her teach Defense Against the Dark Arts at Hogwarts? Is he kidding? Stephanie asked herself and looked back at George with suspicious eyes.

“Antidotes.” George said simply in response to her penetrating glare. She still didn’t understand what he was saying and he rolled his eyes. “To all of the Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes products.”

“Antidotes.” She repeated. “I’m sorry, George. But I don’t think I’ll be taking any of your products to get out of class.”

“No.” He laughed heartily at her, teasing her with his eyes. “For when your students attempt to get out of class.”

And that had caused her to break out in a giggling fit. George sure knew how make her feel better and she knew that he would be there for her when she needed it. They stayed there for a little while longer and then he walked her back to Black Manor. He told her that if she ever had a question about a product she found in class that he’d answer it immediately. If she confiscated products, he would take them and resell them as used items in his clearance section. And he left her with the promise that he’d write and be more careful to be there for her. She had smiled when he left her.

Then, just moments after George had left, Stephanie traveled by Floo Network to Minerva’s office. The trip itself was uneventful, though she wasn’t sure what she had expected. Maybe it would have been better if something had happened so that she could have gotten everything over with at once. A Death Eater, and she still didn’t know which one, was stalking her and she just wanted everything to be out in the open. He wouldn’t be able to reach her at Hogwarts, so she’d have to wait until probably Christmas until he could try something else. If she knew who it was, then there had to be something she could do to stop him or her. But she had arrived at Hogwarts without a problem.

On that first afternoon, Minerva had given her a tour of the school, including all of the student dormitories. She couldn’t help but imagine what her life would have been like if she had been allowed to attend when she was younger. If Lucius Malfoy had allowed her attendance, would she have been in Slytherin with Draco? If the Dark Lord hadn’t murdered her parents, would she have been in Gryffindor with her brother? Would she have been a good student like Hermione? Or would she have been a prankster with Fred and George? Would she have been a Quidditch player or prefect? Would people have even known her name? Would all of her friends still be her friends?

The only thing that she knew for sure was that if she had been allowed to attend Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry when she was younger, she would not have been the same person she was today. And as messed up as her mind was, she didn’t want anything different.

But it had been that morning, the day the students were scheduled to arrive, that Minerva had dropped a bombshell on her. They had spent all of Sunday and Monday creating her lessons for the first term. But, that morning, Minerva had given her her official first term schedule. Every day was booked solid. First through fourth years would have her for shorter periods two times a week while fifth through seventh years would have her for longer periods only once a week. She would have two sections of each year: Gryffindors/Slytherins and Ravenclaws/Hufflepuffs. The student groupings were always the same.

Each day she would have to supervise one study hall and on Fridays she would also have a teacher’s preparation period. It couldn’t have gotten any worse when she noticed who she would have to teach her first day. She remembered the conversation perfectly that she had had with Minerva that morning.

“Are you serious about this schedule?” Stephanie had argued forcefully. “I can’t do that!”

“It’s a typical staff schedule, Stephanie. I assure you.” Minerva had responded patiently, completely missing the point of Stephanie’s argument. “Each professor must lead the same amount of classes and be responsible for a certain amount of study periods. Some professors have more responsibilities and thus require less study hall periods.”

“No, not that.” Stephanie answered, shaking her head in disagreement. “You have me scheduled for both the first years and the seventh years in the same day.”

“You will do fine, Stephanie.” Minerva had said simply, closing the subject. But Stephanie didn’t think that it would be easy to teach the first years, who would be expecting her to be a great teacher, and the seventh years, who would probably resent her for being their age, all in the same day. That was one reason why her confidence level plummeted in those last few hours.

But what Minerva had requested next took all the energy out of her body and she doubted herself even more.

“Stephanie, it may be inappropriate to ask this of you since you haven’t even started teaching yet and you have no idea about how to handle these procedures, but, again, I would not ask unless it was an absolute necessity.” Minerva spoke slowly, eyeing her for any sign of response.

Stephanie merely nodded in anticipation for what Minerva was going to ask. What else could she do for the Headmistress of the school? How much would she be expected to do during her first year? How was she going to handle all this responsibility after having been trusted with none before?

“And there is no one else that is eligible to fill the position. Because of my duties as Headmistress, and because I have yet to fill the Deputy Headmaster or Headmistress position, I am unable to fulfill my previous obligations as Gryffindor Head of House.” Minerva explained and Stephanie was stunned. Was Minerva really asking what Stephanie thought she was asking? At Stephanie’s silence, Minerva continued. “Albus informed me that one of the first times you were here, he allowed you to place the Sorting Hat on your head. He informed me that had you attended Hogwarts when you were eleven years old, you would have been sorted into my Gryffindor House. That alone makes you the only eligible person to fill the position, seeing as none of the other professors that are currently employed at Hogwarts belong to that House.”

“But-” Stephanie tried to get out a rebuttal, but words escaped her. Not only was she being asked to teach the students, but Minerva was now asking her to take responsibility for them? She couldn’t breathe out of fear of what could happen if she was left to supervise so many students. How did she deserve all of the trust that Minerva was placing in her? How could she ever face her friend again if she disappointed the Headmistress? More importantly, what if she failed? “N-n-no. I can’t, Minerva. Please don’t ask that of me. Not right now.”

“Of course you would not be doing this alone, dear.” Minerva looked at her sympathetically. She looked at Stephanie with an encouraging smile. “I will be supervising you along the way. It’s just the mundane day-to-day tasks that I do not have time for, such as supervising detention and overseeing the Quidditch team. You won’t have to do too much with the Quidditch team, though, since I extended an offer for Ginevra Weasley to be this year’s captain. And of course she accepted the very same day.”

Stephanie was able to release her breath slowly. Minerva was going to help her and Ginny would be there for her. She could do this. Barely, but she should be able to handle it. Without a word, Stephanie nodded, accepting the responsibility, and Minerva responded with a sigh of relief. They had talked only a short time longer and then Minerva had left her alone to prepare for the students’ arrival.

“Shall we begin the sorting?” Minerva’s voice broke through her thoughts as the first years were ushered into the Great Hall.

Stephanie couldn’t help but smile at what she saw. There were more than she had expected, and over half of them looked absolutely terrified to be there. One in particular, a cute little girl with long brown hair and eyes bluer than the sky, looked completely giddy. It was refreshing to see such innocent excitement.

Minerva began the sorting with the older students who had not been sorted the previous year. Stephanie sat there absentmindedly, just looking out into the crowd of students. There were a few faces that she recognized at the Slytherin table, but the most comforting faces were located at the Gryffindor table. Ginny was there and she waved happily. It was nice to see her.

The last name of one of the older students caught Stephanie’s attention. “Zacharias, Amber.”

The girl looked like an absolute replica of Joshua Zacharias, but Stephanie hadn’t known that Josh had had a sister. Why hadn’t she known that? Maybe it was because she hadn’t really cared about the boy that had so desperately wanted to join the Death Eaters or about the father who had been a disgrace to all mankind. But certainly Ginny or Harry would have mentioned her along the way. Stephanie leaned forward in her chair, though she knew in the pit of her stomach which house this student would be placed in.

After the Sorting Hat talked to Amber for what seemed like hours, it finally blurted out the House name. “Slytherin!” Stephanie cocked her eyebrow in intrigue when no one cheered Amber’s placement, not even those of Slytherin.

Instead, the placement was received by murmurs of “traitor,” “serves her right,” and “right where she belongs.”

“Now for the first years.” Minerva ignored the comments as Amber slowly made her way towards the table of students that seemed to despise her. Stephanie was more interested in watching the reactions as these first years were sorted. The first was a little girl. “Graham, Lauren.”

Without a second’s hesitation, the sorting hat screamed “Gryffindor!” There was loud applause as Lauren made her way towards the Gryffindor table. Stephanie was nervous about getting even more students placed into her House, so she secretly hoped that no more students would be placed there. The fewer students there, the easier it would be for her to manage as Head of House.

“Finnigan, Matthew.” Minerva called after a few more students were sorted into their respective Houses. He, too, was placed in Gryffindor and Stephanie let out a disappointed sigh.

“McNitt, David,” was placed in Slytherin. Stephanie clapped as more and more students were placed in Slytherin, meaning that Professor Slughorn would have to have that many more students to supervise, and less for her to handle.

“Seabold, Abigail.” Minerva finally called after dwindling the group of students down to only a few youngsters. This caught Stephanie’s attention because the little girl that stepped forward was the same one that had appeared excited to be sorted, unlike her classmates who were terrified. Stephanie could tell, though it would not have been obvious to those farther away, that the girl was mouthing the words to the House that she wanted to be sorted into. Slytherin.

For the first time that evening, Stephanie hoped that the girl wouldn’t be sorted there, but would be placed into her own House instead. For some reason, Stephanie had a feeling that the girl would be a great asset to have within the Gryffindor House. There was just something about her spirit that drew Stephanie to automatically feel a fondness towards the young student.

“Slytherin!” The Sorting Hat blurted out and Stephanie let out her disappointed breath. An appropriate amount of applause erupted for the girl as she smiled and made her way to the table that she had wanted to sit at.

“Sienko, Samantha.” Minerva called and the Sorting Hat didn’t need to even think before it placed the girl in Slytherin.

Stephanie didn’t know how many students were normally sorted into each House, but she had a feeling that Slytherin got its unusual share of students this year. The table even had to extend itself to lend room for the new additions. Ravenclaw and Hufflepuff saw the fewest newcomers and Gryffindor received only a handful. Slytherin seemed to be bursting from the seams. Stephanie hoped that they wouldn’t be too much trouble for her in class as she prepared herself for Minerva’s speech that would occur after the Welcome Feast and would introduce her as the newest addition to the Hogwarts’ staff.


So this chapter is one whole page longer than my average chapters. I thought it could make up a little for the horribly short one I posted on Friday. This chapter is absolutely one of my favorites and I can't wait to hear your feedback on it. As I am creating characters that are 100% my own, things are getting a little more difficult to write. So with my now busy schedule, and the fact that more characters are coming into the story with each new sentence I write (or so it seems like it), I may be a little slower to post a chapter. My goal is at least once per week, but I don't honestly know how realistic that is. But, please, never give up on me. I love this story with all my heart and will see it through to the end!

I have started the next chapter and it explains a little of what is going on between Neville and the rest of the group (Ginny will have a POV of the Welcome Feast, I promise). So that should clarify where those relationships are, but I'm not sure when I'll get that posted. I'm hoping later on in the week or next weekend at the latest. Have a great day, everyone! And don't forget how much I love feedback and how it helps motivate me to write that much more quickly!

Chapter Fourteen: First Lessons

Ginny couldn’t help but watch Stephanie during the sorting ceremony, only taking short notice of those students being sorted, mostly into Slytherin. Stephanie looked so terrified, though Ginny could only tell because she knew her friend so well. It was the emotion in her eyes that gave her away.

Ginny knew that they had been unfair towards Neville, but he had lost his temper. It was something that Neville rarely did, and the spell would have been so complicated for the Neville she had known growing up, but each of the friends had repeated many times that none of them could lose their tempers in front of Stephanie. It was a pact that they had all agreed to—they had to do what they could to protect Stephanie because she had done so much for all of them, for the entire world. They had to be careful not to do anything to push her away.

Stephanie had been so close to leaving them because she thought she had been a burden, and Ginny knew that Stephanie could very easily come to that conclusion again. Every one of them loved Stephanie dearly, and none of them could live with themselves if Stephanie disappeared from their lives again.

It had been Harry who scolded them for their behavior towards Neville. That surprised her the most, though she should have thought better of the man she loved. And she did love Harry with all of her heart, so she knew how painful it had to be for Neville. He had always loved Stephanie, though he could never act on that love.

“Stephanie will come around.” Harry had reassured them quietly, his eyes had been deep in thought as he imagined the interaction that had caused a rift between Stephanie and Neville. “She’s just hurt and she doesn’t know how to handle all of her feelings. You have to realize that she was never allowed to express such emotions and so she’s probably on overload right now.”

“But he tore down Lestrange Manor!” Hermione breathed through her teeth. Ginny had remained silent, though she felt her patience with Neville waning, as well. He knew better than them all that they had to be very careful around Stephanie right now. She was delicate—her emotional state was something that could break with the slightest pressure. “In front of her, no less!”

“Do you blame him?” Harry had asked Hermione, but the question was directed towards them all.

Harry had been right; Ginny had contemplated his statements repeatedly over the past few days since Stephanie had left for Hogwarts. She couldn’t say that she wouldn’t have done the same thing if she had accompanied Stephanie to Lestrange Manor. And Ginny knew that it was Stephanie’s stubbornness that caused everyone to be so passionate around her. She had to give Neville credit for persisting, trying to break through Stephanie’s defenses. She had to make sure to apologize to Neville—he didn’t deserve to be ostracized by his friends.

And that’s what it had come down to. Stephanie had brought them all together, but she wasn’t the only reason they had all become such good friends. Neville had always been so shy and incapable of the easiest spells until Stephanie came into their lives. Stephanie had been the reason that he had been included, and she had to admit that Stephanie was the reason she had been included, in Harry, Ron, and Hermione’s trio. Through it all, they had become close friends, and a fight between two members shouldn’t have torn them all apart. It was unfair for everyone to side with Stephanie simply because she was the one that had been hurt. They should have been nicer to Neville. Ginny hated it when Harry was right.

Ginny was awoken from her thoughts of Neville by the last of the older students to be sorted. Amber Zacharias, she seethed, repeating the name in her head. She hunched forward in her seat and eyed the girl in the front of the Great Hall with pure hatred. Amber’s brother had been a spy—Ginny had trusted him with information regarding Dumbledore’s Army. And Ginny was certain that Amber had been involved. How could she not have been? Amber and Joshua had almost been inseparable. Ginny was surprised that Amber even decided to come back at all.

“Can you believe her?” A Hufflepuff sixth year leaned across the aisle and whispered to Ginny. “Hope she gets sorted into Slytherin, they should welcome her with open arms.”

Ginny just nodded, refusing to take her eyes off the traitor in front of her. The girl better keep her distance, Ginny thought to herself. If she comes anywhere near me, I’m not sure I can control my temper. I can’t touch her at Hogwarts, but maybe my wand would slip during an outing in Hogsmeade. And then Ginny felt guilty for her thoughts. She had hated Malfoy but had never attempted anything; Ginny had to swallow her disgust and just ignore the girl who had disappointed all of Dumbledore’s Army.

“Slytherin!” The sorting hat called and Ginny sighed in relief. Amber was not going to be in Gryffindor; she was going to be in the House that was home to all Dark Wizards. Exactly where she belongs.

That’s what people were whispering around her, but Ginny was surprised by the Slytherin table’s reaction. They actually booed her. Maybe Amber would get what she deserved, after all. The Slytherins were not accepting of her either, and Ginny couldn’t help but wonder why. Amber had done what none of the Slytherins could do—she had broken into the trust of Dumbledore’s Army and manipulated it to gain information and deep secrets. They should have welcomed her with open arms, but they didn’t. It was a very interesting concept and Ginny couldn’t help but smile.

And then it was time for the first years’ sorting. They all looked pretty much the same as they had the years before, mostly all terrified of being placed in the spotlight and worried about which House they would be sorted into. A few looked giddy to be there, but none of them stuck out for her.

A few of them were sorted into Gryffindor, but most of them had been sorted into Slytherin. Ginny thought this was odd, the number of new Slytherins this year was outstanding, but it couldn’t mean anything significant. There had to be years like that in the past, the Houses couldn’t be sorted evenly all the time.

And she had recognized a few students that were sorted throughout the ceremony. There had been one or two children of Death Eaters, but they had been sorted into Slytherin. Ginny made a mental note to keep a close eye on Stephanie because that would most certainly be hard on her. Stephanie was already worrying about teaching the ones whose parents she had helped to send to prison or even murder, but there was nothing that she could do about it. Ginny had to make sure Stephanie was handling the situation alright.

Ginny was excited to see that little Matty Finnigan, Seamus’ brother, was joining them at the Gryffindor table. She had met him at Stephanie and Harry’s birthday party and had promised Seamus to keep an eye out for him. Seamus told her Matty was getting pretty wicked on a broom and would be a killer on the Quidditch pitch in a few years. That was good news, since there basically was no team at that moment.

Most of the players had either graduated or died in the battle, and especially since they had gone a whole year without a team. It would definitely be a rebuilding year, that was for sure. Ginny told McGonagall that she couldn’t promise a winning team, but she would definitely do what she could to prepare fierce competition for the years to come. That meant she had to place younger members on the team—that wouldn’t be a problem, if there were any decent flyers among them.

And she was surprised when the feast appeared in front of her. Was she really so deep in thought that she had missed most of the sorting? Wow, time sure flied when you weren’t paying attention. She rolled her eyes as the boys nearby lunged toward the food like they had been stuck on a deserted island for years. Had they always acted like a pack of wild hyenas or was it just her? Had she been preoccupied by the goings on in the world to notice her peers’ behavior? Ronald had eaten like that most of the time, but Harry rarely had. He was used to waiting for meals.

She sighed and placed her elbow on the table, pushing away her plate of food. Her appetite disappeared at the thought of Harry James Potter. How was she going to last a whole year without him? It was going to be torture. And she couldn’t really spend too much time hanging out with Stephanie because she was a professor, it would be inappropriate. And the Slytherins would most likely put up a fight about that, saying that Stephanie favored her. Which is true, Ginny smiled at the thought. Stephanie would always prefer her to any Slytherin.

No one tried to attempt a conversation with her, and for that she was glad. She had a few friends that were still at Hogwarts, but most of them had graduated and moved on to better things. Most of Dumbledore’s Army had been composed of older students, though quite a few were younger than her. The group had developed a sort of bond, but Ginny wasn’t sure if it would evolve into a close-knit friendship since the danger was over.

People had already started staying within their own Houses and rarely conversed with students of other Houses. It was sad, really, but an ultimate reality. Each House was a natural rival with the other three, though some Houses rivaled a specific one more intimately. For instance, Slytherin and Gryffindor had a very heated rivalry while Hufflepuff and Ravenclaw had a more unspoken competitive rivalry, with one always trying to upstage the other.

Again, Ginny’s thoughts were interrupted by Professor McGonagall. This time, she was clanking her goblet, trying to gain the attention of the students of the Great Hall. Ginny turned in her seat, without having touching any of her dinner, and listened as Professor McGonagall gave her first speech as Headmistress of Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry.

“I’d like to welcome all of you to Hogwarts for this new school year.” McGonagall smiled into the crowd of students. “There are several announcements before I dismiss you to your dormitories with your prefects.

“First, I must encourage you all to stay out of the Forbidden Forest. Any student caught entering its perimeter will be placed in detention immediately. Second, your class schedules will be handed out during breakfast tomorrow morning.” She kept talking about rules that Ginny had heard six times before, so Ginny tried to tune out the Headmistress. Instead, she glared at the Slytherin table and its incredible size.

She wasn’t the only person refusing to listen to McGonagall, though. When she scanned the Slytherin table, Ginny noticed that Rachel Sorenson, a fifth year, was glaring at her with pure hatred. When she saw Ginny look at her, Rachel smirked with satisfaction and slid her finger across her throat. As she did so, she mouthed her words so that Ginny could read her lips across the Great Hall: Watch yourself, blood-traitor.

Ginny just smiled in response and looked away. She knew that Rachel didn’t like her, but it didn’t bother her, either. None of the Slytherins cared for her, and it would only get worse because she was Stephanie’s friend and the Quidditch captain. Rachel’s reaction was merely a scowl, which made Ginny grin even wider. Their interaction was interrupted when Ginny realized that McGonagall was introducing the newest professors.

“Finally, I’d like to introduce our newest Defense against the Dark Arts professor. Professor Stephanie Potter.” McGonagall gestured towards Stephanie and Stephanie grimaced in response. Ginny repressed a quiet giggle because she knew exactly what would be going through Stephanie’s mind. “Professor Potter will also be taking my place as Head of Gryffindor House. You are all very lucky to have such an experienced professor and I am sure that you will treat her with the respect she deserves.”

Ginny stood in respect and clapped for her friend, excited that Stephanie was finally getting some positive attention. Others around her did the same, though most of Slytherin House stayed in their seats. A few Slytherin members stood, but one in particular caught her attention.

It was one of the first years that had been sorted just prior to the Welcome Feast. What caught her attention wasn’t the little girl, necessarily, but the person she was sitting next to. Daniel Blaiser. Beater of Slytherin’s Quidditch team and friends with mostly the older students. He had never really spoken to her before, so she had no problems with him. He was only a fourth year, so Ginny hadn’t gotten to spend too much time with him. However, whenever he was with his friends, he turned into an absolute dictator. Ginny disliked him only because of that.

The way he grabbed onto the girl’s wrist and pulled her back into her seat unnerved Ginny. Daniel whispered something into the girl’s ear and then turned his attention back towards the front of the Hall. The girl, however, stared curiously at the boy. It was like she was utterly confused by what he had said. Ginny couldn’t help but wonder what the relation could be because they didn’t look anything alike. As far as she knew, Daniel Blaiser didn’t have any siblings, but that didn’t really mean much. Ginny brushed it off because the girl didn’t seem too perturbed by the situation.

“Now it is time to return to your dormitories. I must ask that the first years follow their prefects. Your belongings have already been taken to your respective Houses.” McGonagall was instructing, but Ginny wasn’t really listening. She had other plans rather than immediately returning to her dormitory. Instead of heading towards the door, she started making her way towards the front of the Great Hall.

“Ginny!” Stephanie smiled in relief when she saw Ginny. She rose from her seat at the teacher’s table and walked briskly towards Ginny.

“Hey there, professor!” Ginny teased, emphasizing the last word. Stephanie just rolled her eyes in response. “How was orientation?”

“It was good.” Stephanie responded wearily. “But I feel a little overwhelmed. I mean there’s just so much information and I have so many responsibilities.”

“Don’t worry, you’ll do just fine.” Ginny patted her friend on the shoulder. “And if you need any help keeping those Slytherins in line, just let me know. I’d be more than willing to help!”

“I’m not sure I can allow that, but I’ll definitely keep you in mind.” Stephanie responded only half-seriously. She looked relieved to have Ginny’s support.

“Hey, did you hear that Neville’s going to be here all next week?” Ginny asked slyly. She knew that Stephanie would have heard, but she wanted to get a feel for how her friend was feeling about the whole Neville situation.

“Of course I did.” Stephanie rolled her eyes, not letting Ginny get away with asking the question. “I’m just trying to keep my distance.”

“You know he feels so bad for what happened.” Ginny tried to convince Stephanie about what Harry had told her, Ron, Hermione, and George. Maybe if she could plant the seed, it would make up for how she had treated Neville in the past few weeks. “I would probably have done the same thing. You really shouldn’t blame him—he was only trying to help you.”

“I know.” Stephanie responded with a far-off look on her face. She was deep in thought after what Ginny had just said, and Ginny wondered what Stephanie could have been thinking about. Just as she was about to ask, Stephanie returned her attention back towards her and gave her very clear instructions. “You really should get going, Ginny. As your Head of House, I really don’t want you to be the first person I take points from.”

Ginny nodded and turned towards the doors to the Great Hall. Before she could exit, Stephanie called her name and she turned around. “Thank you, Ginny. For everything.”

She waved at her friend, and now professor, and turned towards the doors to the Great Hall. Ginny knew that it would be a long year without Harry, and she would miss Hermione so much, but she also had a feeling in her gut that the school year would be far from uninteresting. She just wondered what trouble would find its way towards Hogwarts this year.

*~*~*~*

She sat in her desk fidgeting nervously with the sleeve of her Hogwarts robes. Her Slytherin robes had appeared in her closet overnight, and Abby couldn’t have been more pleased. Even though she didn’t like a lot of the people in her House, mostly the older students, she had no complaints about her younger peers.

“What do you think she’s like?” David whispered in her ear. There were three students at a table, she was sitting in the middle with David on her one side and Sammy on her other side. They were seated on the Slytherin side of the classroom—there was an obvious division between the Houses.

But Abby hadn’t been worried about what their Professor would be like. Instead, she was taking careful inventory of the people in her Defense Against the Dark Arts class. There were clearly more Slytherin students, probably three Slytherin to every one Gryffindor. But only one of those Gryffindor students stood out to her.

She had been the student that had greeted her on the train. Abby cocked her head to the side as she thought about the student, who she knew would have meshed well with her. But Abby couldn’t even risk talking to the girl, even to apologize for what had happened on the train, because the older Slytherin students, Daniel’s friends, had threatened to only leave her side for classes. She had been walked to class by Corey and Craig and she was sure that someone would be there to escort her to her second class. Abby wondered if there was any way to evade their constant presence. Probably not, she thought as she shook her head.

David poked her and she looked at him. Abby had met him the night before at the Welcome Feast and they had instantly bonded. He had noticed how Daniel had pulled her to her seat when she had risen to give Stephanie Potter a standing ovation. That hadn’t really bothered her, but what Daniel whispered in her ear afterwards sure did.

“She will kill you the first chance she gets.” Daniel had said, though Abby didn’t believe that for a second. Why would Professor Potter want to kill her? She had looked at Daniel like he was crazy, but he refused to tell her anything else.

And then she had gotten a few precious moments away from her guards’ watchful eye when the first years had to follow the prefects to their dormitories, though Rachel and Tom had been there. They had other priorities than keeping watch over her.

“What is up with you, Abby?” Sammy nudged her, trying to get her attention. Abby’s head jerked to the only roommate that she found any similarities with.

“Sorry.” Abby mumbled. She turned her head quickly towards David. “What did you say?”

“What do you think Professor Potter is going to be like?” He rolled his eyes at having to repeat the question for what must have been the third time.

“Mum says that You-Know-Who,” Sammy cupped her hand around her mouth and whispered the name to them so that no one could overhear her, “trained her himself. She says Potter is very, very good.”

“I don’t know.” Abby turned her attention towards the back of the room when the Professor entered through the door and quickly made her way towards the front. “Daddy says she’s worse than Lucius Malfoy, but I don’t know. I saw her when she was on that screen-thing in Diagon Alley and I didn’t see that.”

“I bet she’s tougher on us Slytherins.” David shrugged his shoulders. “I mean, all her friends were in Gryffindor and she’s Head of House there. I bet she hates us right off the bat.”

“I don’t think she’s like that.” Abby didn’t take her eyes off the teacher at the front of the classroom. Professor Potter was almost to her desk when she turned around and addressed the class, so Abby’s classmates didn’t have a chance to respond to her.

“Welcome to 1st year Defense Against the Dark Arts.” Professor Potter spoke in a soft voice. Abby couldn’t help but notice how confident her professor looked—Abby sat straight in her chair and paid very close attention. She was not at all afraid of being in the presence of this woman. “Before we start things off, I’d like to run through the class roster quickly to make sure that I get to learn who each of you are.”

The professor turned around and walked towards her desk to grab the class list, but her face went completely white when she looked down at the table. She took a deep breath and then moved a book that had been placed on top of her papers and she grabbed the piece of parchment with the class list printed on it.

“Are you okay?” Lauren asked from the Gryffindor side of the table. Professor Potter looked up at her in surprise—she must have been surprised to see that her students had noticed her reaction.

“Of course I am, but thank you.” Potter smiled at her and then stepped forward with the class list. Abby couldn’t help but notice that the parchment shook as she read the names.

“What do you think scared her like that?” David whispered in her ear and Abby just waved a hand back at him. They would have to talk about that later because Abby wanted to keep a close eye on her professor.

The professor made it through the roster fairly quickly and Abby was impressed by how many of the students’ names that she remembered throughout the class period.

“I am pleased that you guys are first years because that means that you are in no way behind in your defensive skills.” Professor Potter began her instruction and Abby couldn’t help but listen intently, scribbling notes chaotically. “But I must warn you that I will be highly demanding of you during your lessons. What I am going to teach you this year will be beyond what most first years can accomplish. It is not that I wish you to fail, it’s just that there are things that I believe every student should know. And I will not rest until you are capable of defending yourself should an occasion arise where it would be necessary to do so.”

“But, Professor!” The boy sitting next to Lauren jumped up and down in his seat, raising his hand high in the air.

“Yes Matthew?” Professor Potter gestured in his direction.

“Matty, please, Professor.” The boy corrected and the professor just nodded in response. He continued without being asked. “But if You-Know-Who is gone and most of the Death Eaters have been arrested, where is the danger?”

Potter smiled at Matty’s question, but Abby was relieved to hear that someone had asked it. What was there to be afraid of now that evil was gone?

“Thank you for bringing that up, Matty.” Professor Potter responded kindly. “But even if the Dark Lord has been destroyed, and even if all of the Death Eaters were arrested, there will always be Dark Wizards out there. There is nothing we can do about that, and that is why the Aurors continue to patrol and keep us safe. But the truth is, and if I am scaring anyone, please let me know because that is not my intention, there are still Death Eaters out there. Who knows what they are going to do?”

“But aren’t you one of them?” David spoke out without even raising his hand. “Shouldn’t you be able to tell what they are planning?”

Potter tugged on the sleeve of her shirt and nodded in David’s direction. “Was. No, I am not a Death Eater nor did I choose to be a part of that organization. That was something forced upon me because of my circumstances. Even though I have spent significant time with most of the higher-level members of the Dark Lord’s inner-circle, I cannot even begin to fathom where they are hiding or what they are planning. Some of them, I know, will stay hidden. But others will seek vengeance, whether it be on me or someone else who has wronged them in some way.

“My job is to make sure that you all are safe. So, within the next couple of weeks, I will make sure that each one of you can produce a protective shield.” Abby was surprised by the motherly tone that Professor Potter had taken towards her students. “If any of you feel like you are struggling with this material, I want you to come to me immediately. I will make myself available to you to assist with what you need to know.”

“What about those of us in Slytherin?” A girl behind Abby asked quietly, as though she were too shy to speak any louder.

“What about Slytherin, Maisie?” Potter asked with a confused expression on her face. Abby turned to look at the girl who had asked the question.

“Daddy says that you don’t like Slytherins.” The girl responded in a voice no louder than a whisper.

Abby felt a nudge in her arm and she looked up to David who mouthed so she could see: Told you so.

“That is ludicrous.” Potter almost snorted, but she had a deep frown on her face. “I may dislike some people who have been in Slytherin, but that is all. You are all my students, and therefore, I fear for your safety. We have all been given an opportunity, here. Whichever House you are in does not matter. Did you know that the Sorting Hat wanted to place me in Slytherin? It also had a difficult time deciphering between Hufflepuff and Ravenclaw.”

There were quiet murmurs across the classroom, but Abby merely leaned forward in interest. Her professor continued. “Yeah. I never went to school here at Hogwarts, but I was given the privilege of wearing the Sorting Hat, and I wanted desperately to fit in with my brother. I begged it to place me in Gryffindor. But that doesn’t mean that any one House is better than the other. The Hat merely places us where our characteristics are dominant.

“Before it sorted me, the Hat told me something that I think is important for you all to know: you need not worry; it is not the House that turns wizards evil. It is the individual that turns wizards evil; we all make choices and those choices drive who we become.

“And a close friend reiterated that statement when I was at my worst: We all have choices. It’s how we handle those choices that define who we are. So, you see, I don’t see anything wrong with being in Slytherin. In fact, I admire many people who are in your House, Maisie, because your House is home to many of the most powerful witches and wizards in the world. Many of those witches and wizards merely made bad choices, defining who they are.

“But with the destruction of so many powerful and Dark Wizards, we have been given an opportunity to dispel so many stereotypes. I am excited to see what you first years do with this newfound responsibility.” Professor Potter finished and let the students think about what she had just said.

Abby leaned back in her chair as she let out a deep breath. Her father had been in Slytherin, had he made bad choices? Was he a bad person? Sure, he was controlling of her, but that was because her mother and brother had been murdered. Her father merely wanted her to be safe, that was all. He loved her. And she couldn’t bring herself to believe that he was a bad wizard. But she couldn’t think of anything else as the lesson continued.


So, I apologize if I talked this chapter up too much and people are disappointed. But I absolutely love it! I wanted the first year's POV to be in Stephanie's POV, but then I realized I needed it to be in Abby's POV. I think it comes across much better. And we are starting to get to know some of her friends. I am so excited!! The next chapter, I am anticipating at least, should be posted sometime mid-week next week. Hope everyone has a great weekend!

Chapter Fifteen: Undeserving Trust

“Where do you think she is?” Abby whispered across the table to Sammy and David. They were all sitting in the Great Hall for lunch, but Professor Potter was no where to be seen.

David shrugged as though the question wasn’t all that important. “Why does it matter?”

“Did you see her face?” Sammy giggled nervously. “She was scared of something. She’s the Defense Against the Dark Arts professor, what could she possibly have to be afraid of?”

“Plenty.” Abby murmured as Daniel sat down next to her while Corey and Rachel sat on her other side. Rachel and Corey ignored her as they started conversation with Tom and Fred, who were already there waiting for them.

Tom and Fred had escorted her from her last class to the Great Hall for lunch. It was highly embarrassing because the other students were noticing the older Slytherins' constant presence and people were shying away from her. She could hear quiet accusations as her peers discussed the possibility of why she demanded the attention of the older students. What made things worse was the fact that they thought she had asked for this, but she hadn’t. David seemed to sense her anguish.

“Why don’t you guys just leave her alone?” He said this as bravely as possible. Abby could see her friend clutch his wand tightly under the table, so she hoped that he would not be so stupid as to try to use it. Doing so would merely amuse the others and not cause them to leave her side.

Daniel raised his eyebrow towards David as his lips curved into an agonizingly painful grin. His voice came out in a scowl that chilled Abby from head to toe. “You better be careful, McNitt, about what you say. You are lucky that we allow you into her presence.”

“D.” Abby whispered, afraid that he would take away her only chance at making friends. She had only met her friends mere hours before—they hadn’t even been at Hogwarts for twenty-four hours yet—and she was terrified that they would be scared away by Daniel’s dominance. To be honest, that frightened her more than D’s unexpected behavior. She begged him to let her have this one opportunity. “Please.”

Daniel’s eyes turned toward Abby and she saw the fire of anger that burned within them. She felt his painful grasp on her knee, but he didn’t speak to her. Instead, he turned his attention towards Sammy. Her friend recoiled in her seat in fear from Daniel’s glare. There was an amused tone about him that frightened Abby even more than usual. She couldn’t speak, she could only watch in horror.

“And, you, Samantha Sienko, better be very, very careful.” Daniel spoke quietly through his teeth and Abby could tell that Sammy had no idea what he was talking about. There were tears in her large, brown eyes as Daniel just glared at her. Abby started to shake in anger at what Daniel was doing, his fierce grip still plastered to her knee.

“Is there a problem, here?” The voice came from behind her and everyone jerked their attention towards the sound. Abby didn’t recognize the red-headed girl, but Rachel sure did.

“If there was, Weasley, it would be no business of yours.” Rachel spoke through gritted teeth and stood so that she was face to face with the girl who had interrupted them.

“It is my business if you are threatening first years, Sorenson.” The girl Rachel had called Weasley was not backing down. Abby looked between the two nervously.

“Who says we were threatening anyone?” Corey stood and reached for the wand that was in his back pocket. Abby knew he would not do anything in front of so many witnesses, but it made her nervous to watch the exchange.

“And what do Slytherin affairs matter to a Gryffindor, Weasley?” Daniel looked amused by the girl’s intrusion, but he did not take his hand off of Abby’s knee. Abby could feel the pain that he was causing her, but she refused to acknowledge it. She knew there would be a bruise later, but it did not matter. He could not see her falter; he could not see her weak or else he would use it against her.

“They don’t, Blaiser, unless you threaten other students. Then you make it my business.” She replied coolly, almost as though she weren’t afraid of the Slytherin students that appeared to be ganging up on her.

And then Abby saw why the Weasley girl was not afraid. A group of students had begun to form behind her, providing her with the support she needed to be so confrontational. Other Slytherin students had crowded around them, showing their willingness and excitement to provide Abby’s protectors any needed back up enforcements. It was then that Abby wondered where all the teachers were. Abby had noticed Potter’s absence, but she had neglected to notice the others’ as well. There was not one single professor in the Great Hall.

And then Abby realized this whole situation was because of her. There was going to be a fight and it would be all because of her. She knew she couldn’t stop it from happening, so she did the only thing she could think of. Abby stood; the sound of her chair scraping across the cement floor caused everyone to stop their bickering and to watch her silently.

“Where do you think you are going?” Daniel hissed, releasing his grip from her knee, but leaning forward and grabbing her arm.

But Abby wasn’t afraid of him in front of so many eyewitnesses. He was making the scene, she was merely ending it. There was no fear in her at that moment, so she didn’t even need to take a deep breath to prepare for what she would pay for later.

“I am going to class, Daniel.” She said more calmly than she felt. She turned quickly to her friends that looked amazed at her boldness. “Are you coming?”

They just sat there, too stunned to move. Abby wasn’t sure if they stayed in place because of fear for what the older students would do to them later. She was certain that they now felt they needed permission to speak with her or even be around her. So, Abby walked the length of the Great Hall alone, with all eyes on her, and left the room in a stunned silence.

She hadn’t thought that he would dare follow her, but he did. She was surprised by the force of his blow as he pushed her into a broom closet and then locked the door behind them.

“What was that?” Daniel kept his voice low, but he was breathing through his nose, trying to calm himself down. She opened her mouth to speak, but he squeezed her shoulder to silence her. “Don’t you ever disrespect me like that again, do you hear me?”

Again, she opened her mouth to say something even though she didn’t know what she could say. But he stopped her before any words could form in her head. “After all we are sacrificing to keep you safe, you walk out of the Great Hall without any protection. You are being stupid and I will not tolerate your insolence.”

Abby was stunned. Out of everything that she had expected him to say, she never thought that he would say something like that. He did not say: After all I am sacrificing. No. He said: After all we are sacrificing. Abby couldn’t be sure, but she thought he was talking about his Slytherin friends. Why would they sacrifice anything for her?

“What do you mean?” Abby had to concentrate harder than she ever had before to keep her voice even, to make it appear as though she didn’t care what he was talking about. “There is no danger at Hogwarts.”

“Oh how naïve you are, Abigail.” Daniel let out an absurd laugh that sent chills through her spine. She hated when he did that, but she also knew that he was angry with her. Only when he was scared for her or when he was angry with her did he use her full first name. He knew how she hated her name, but she didn’t say a word. “There are dangers around us all at Hogwarts right now. It was your father’s wish to keep you safe, and I will give my life to make sure that happens.”

“I can take care of myself, D.” Her voice was weak. She was losing her persistence. What was he talking about?

“You are so breakable, Abby.” Daniel released her shoulders and traced the length of her cheek with his warm finger. “You do not even know the kind of dangers that are still present, even after You-Know-Who’s downfall.”

“Tell me, then.” Abby was taking advantage of this private, intimate moment that they were having. He was starting to act like the Daniel she had known before, the Daniel who had been like a brother to her, the Daniel who had cared for her.

His voice softened to an almost whisper and Abby felt like crying, but she kept her composure. She would not allow him to see how his behavior affected her. She had to stay strong so that he would not run to her father and have her taken from the school. “Your father wished you to remain innocent of the terrors that haunt your past, Abby. I cannot, nor do I wish to, allow you to be privy to that information. You will learn in good time the danger that you are in, even here at Hogwarts, but it will not be I, not now, that discloses that to you.”

“I will find out.” Abby was determined to learn all she could about why her father would want her to be constantly surrounded by security detail, even at the safest place in the world.

His eyes looked very sad at her stubbornness. “I have no doubt that you will. But please promise me one thing, Abigail, do not evade the protection my friends can provide. They are the best we can offer you here and they have promised me to do all they can to ensure your safety. If you continue to be so stubborn, they will grow tired of what I have asked, and they will no longer provide you with their protection. I do not wish that to happen because I care for you. You are so special to me and I could no bear to lose you.”

Abby wanted to slap him, to curse him, or even to run away screaming. But the tone of his voice cast her into an unsure reality. She had no reason to trust Daniel after the way he had treated her in the past twenty-four hours, but she felt a pull to do so. Her unconscious was telling her to trust Daniel Blaiser, that he knew more about her circumstances than she ever would.

“Alright.” She sighed in defeat, looking towards the ground. “I will allow them to accompany me to classes and I will do so quietly. But I am not happy about it.”

Abby could hear his quiet chuckle, and then she felt his fingers on her chin as they pulled her head upward so that he could look into her eyes. “We have to follow you everywhere inside this castle, Abby. There is no place inside this castle that you are safe, especially when Stephanie Potter is here. You must also promise to keep your distance from her when you can. Never be alone with her, Abby.”

This was something that Abby would not budge on. She felt her face turn into a scowl and she saw his do the same. She grabbed his hand and pulled it from her face as she argued with her brother, her best friend. “That I cannot promise. You do not understand, and neither do I, but she is no danger to me.”

“You are wrong. You do not know the traumas that haunt your past, Abby. She will most certainly harm you when given the chance.” Daniel spoke to her honestly and he begged her to believe him with his eyes, but she wouldn’t accept that Stephanie Potter wanted her dead.

“You can keep me from making friends, Daniel Blaiser, and you can sentence me to be surrounded by security detail for eternity, but you cannot make me believe that Professor Potter would harm anyone.” Abby spoke as defiantly as she could muster, though she knew her resolve wouldn’t last long.

“You don’t know what she is capable of, Abby.” D looked defeated and that put a smile on Abby’s face. He looked even more disappointed by her display of emotions. “But I will not let her harm you, Abby. As long as I am here, you will be safe.”

“I trust you, D.” Abby said with compassion. It was true. She shouldn’t have trusted Daniel, but she didn’t feel like she had a choice. Who else could she trust? She had no one else. “But you have to be nicer to me, and my friends. I will do as you say, but only if you stop treating me like a child.”

“Then stop acting like one.” His retort was quick and it stung, but Abby wasn’t going to let him see her reaction. He looked at his watch and swore under his breath. “We are late for class. Come on, I will escort you.”

“I don’t need you to-” She was going to say that he didn’t need to take her to class, that she could take care of herself, but she stopped herself when she saw the angry glare that he gave her. They had just had that conversation and he would not hear of her walking through the castle halls alone. Abby needed to find out what secret he was hiding—she had to find out why she was in so much danger at Hogwarts, when the entire world knew that it was the safest place to be. Daniel grabbed her hand gently and led her to her next class of the day.

*~*~*~*

Stephanie paced back and forth between classes. The seventh year Hufflepuffs and Ravenclaws had just been dismissed and she was waiting for the Slytherins and the Gryffindors to saunter into the classroom for her final class of the day. And each time she turned to face her desk, her eyes wandered onto the book that she had placed on the far corner of her neat and tidy desk.

Curiosity finally got the better of her, and she knew it would be important to take advantage of the quiet classroom, so she decided to look at it. Maybe there would be a clue as to how it had gotten there. She knew her first inclination was an impossibility, but there was no other explanation.

She took a deep breath as she prepared for what she knew would be a terrifying experience. She pulled the book closer as she took a seat at her desk; she could feel her fingers start to shake slightly from an unexplainable fear. She should not be afraid. This was not a threat on her life, but merely a reminder that someone was watching her. How they got into Hogwarts was what terrified her. She was not safe in the one place that should have protected her.

Tears came to her eyes as she opened the photo album that had disappeared from her bedroom on her birthday. She remembered the day clearly: she had made Kreacher promise not to tell anyone what had happened. And he had not. Kreacher, the house-elf that worshipped her, kept his promise, though he had been unable to procure the photo album for her.

Inside the front cover, she had expected an inscription. She had expected her stalker to identify himself, to voice a threat, or to do something. That was what she longed for. For her own peace of mind, she desperately wished that he would do something to end her relentless fear. She couldn’t go to her friends or family because they would insist on Auror protection. Kingsley would rip her from Hogwarts, where she had promised to keep her students safe, and take her into hiding.

And she had promised to keep her students safe. Could she reasonably do that knowing that the person who was keeping watch over her could easily slip past Hogwarts’ defenses and place something in her very classroom undetected? Was she vain enough to believe that she was the only one capable enough to keep her students, all of her students, safe from those who wished to harm her?

Would her students be placed in danger and attempt to save her if the time came down to it? She had been ashamed of herself during her first class, when she had first noticed the photo album, when her students had noticed how deeply the book’s presence affected her. Her first years were special, she could already see that much.

She told them that they had an opportunity to change the perceptions of how things should be. Was she selfish enough to stay behind to see if they could rise to the challenge? Or should she pack her bags and leave her students behind? They would certainly be safer without her at Hogwarts. And they most certainly would not be left unprotected. She could ensure that Minerva knew of the danger she had caused by coming to Hogwarts; Minerva would make sure there were additional security precautions placed so the students remained safe, even if her stalker decided to come looking for her again.

But she knew she could not leave Hogwarts. Stephanie felt her stomach lurch in pain as she realized just how much she needed the school. She had already made a connection with her students—they needed her. More importantly than that, she needed them. She needed the normalcy their thoughts and problems provided. She needed the innocence that emanated from their spirits. Stephanie knew she could not survive outside the walls of Hogwarts because she had tasted the opportunity she had been given. Stephanie tossed the photo album into her bottom drawer as though that would hide the fear she held, not for herself but for the safety of the students she was placing at risk for remaining as their Defense Against the Dark Arts professor.

Only one thought provided her any form of solace. Neville Longbottom. She knew that it was the most horrible thought she had ever had, but she had seen death too many times than to think what she had during the students’ lunch period.

It had been during the lunch hour that Minerva had gathered all of the school’s professors into her office. Professor Sprout had passed away that morning, whether it had been from heartbreak or illness, no one was sure. Stephanie hadn’t known Pomona Sprout and she hadn’t felt bad for the end of this woman’s life. Instead, she was relieved. And that relief frightened her. How could she be such a horrible person as to be happy that someone had passed away?

But it was through this woman’s passing that would bring Neville Longbottom to her permanently. Neville would be offered the permanent position as Herbology professor, that was a given. And Stephanie knew she couldn’t act on her relief to have Neville so close—she had to keep him at a distance. He would be in so much more danger than her students. With this person stalking her, Neville would be in so much danger that Stephanie knew she might lose him. So, she had to push him away, even if it hurt both of them so much. This was something she had to endure and conquer alone.

She also knew that Neville’s presence meant she would constantly be observed. Between him and Ginny, there would always be an eye on her. It was her way of asking for help without voicing her concerns. Ginny and Neville were both so worried about her, but she couldn’t tell them what was happening. They would tell Harry, who in turn would inform Kingsley. And then she would lose the freedom she so desperately needed. No. It would be better for her to keep her friends uninformed. That would keep them all safe from harm. It was her duty to protect those who she held dear, and that would be a full-time job. Her friends, her family, and her students. They were what mattered most. She was inconsequential to their safety.

For comfort, Stephanie fingered the coin that was in her pocket. It gave her reassurance that she was not alone, even though it felt that way. Kingsley had given it to her just a few days before she left for Hogwarts; Hermione had kindly reminded him of how Dumbledore’s Army used to communicate. He would use the coin to notify her of the Aurors’ need for her assistance. It had yet to go off and she secretly hoped that it wouldn’t. Could she really be trusted to control her emotions when confronted with Death Eaters that plagued her mind?

Who was stalking her? She knew it had to be someone she had spent quite a deal of time with. Yaxley was in prison, but Dedrick, Rabastan, the Carrow siblings, and Antonin Dolohov, not to mention countless others, still remained free. Was it only one of them that was tormenting her or was it a number of them? And that thought brought a repeated question to her mind. How did they get into Hogwarts undetected? She had to find out before anyone was injured.

Would they be open to my surrender if it meant that no one else was harmed? Stephanie asked herself, though she doubted it. They would all be excited with the hunt; they would be disappointed if she gave up so easily. So then, that was what she must do. She had to hand herself over. But then what would they do? They would certainly torture her beyond belief if she did that—she would have ruined their fun. But that would be an easy price to pay if it meant the survival of her friends, family, and students. But how could she find them to do it?

Stephanie’s thoughts were disturbed by a quiet cough in the front row of the classroom. She looked up in surprise to see that the classroom was full of seventh year students—Ginny had been the one to gain her attention. Her friend looked terrified by what she saw on Stephanie’s face, and Stephanie was horrified that her students had caught her crying. She quickly wiped the tears away and attempted to pretend that nothing had happened.

Instead, she grabbed her roster and ran down the list of names. Stephanie hadn’t looked at it prior to the beginning of the class period, so she was surprised to see the names of several students she knew, besides Ginny Weasley of course.

“Bulstrode, Millicent?” She asked it as a question, surprised to see that a person in Draco’s year had returned to Hogwarts.

“What?” The girl hissed in Stephanie’s direction and Stephanie was taken aback.

“Nothing.” Stephanie said quietly and continued down the list.

“Goyle, Gregory.” Stephanie didn’t ask it as a question this time, but she felt like it. And she immediately knew why these students had returned to Hogwarts. They had failed their placement exams, and yet were determined to graduate.

“Traitor.” She heard Goyle mutter under his breath, but she chose to ignore the comment, just as she chose to ignore Millicent’s tone.

Down the list of students, Stephanie recognized yet another returning student’s name. “Nott, Theodore.”

“Whatever.” The student muttered and Stephanie frowned. This was going to be the most challenging class she had that day; to think that she had feared the first years more.

After attendance was completed, Stephanie started the speech she had given to the other seventh year class, though this room took it completely differently than she had expected.

“So, I guess I am here to prepare you students for your upcoming N.E.W.T.S. exams.” Stephanie said quietly, suddenly very unsure of herself. “We will start the school year with review items so that I can assess where your abilities lie and then we will continue onto more difficult material. I want you all to be prepared for what you will face once you leave the walls of Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry and I will do what I can to make sure you succeed. It will be a personal failure if I cannot help you students defend yourself against the worst that is out there.”

“You are already a failure.” Millicent snorted and there was a ripple of laughter throughout the classroom. Stephanie didn’t turn to look at the Gryffindor side of the room, but she sensed that they were not laughing. Instead, she had eyes merely on Millicent.

“You are right.” Stephanie said simply, not willing to divulge further. It was Ginny who stood up in protest and Stephanie should not have expected anything else from her close friend.

“You are not.” Ginny said in Stephanie’s direction and then turned towards Millicent. “How dare you-”

But Stephanie interrupted her. She could not allow behavior like this to occur in her classroom. It had been something that Minerva had warned and assisted in preparing her for, though she could never have been ready for the situation now that it had actually arrived.

“Sit down Ginny.” Stephanie commanded gently without taking her eyes off Millicent. “There are many things that I have done in my life that I consider failure, Millicent.”

Millicent cringed at being addressed by the professor and it had been Gregory Goyle to respond. “How dare you have the nerve to speak to her! Draco should have taken you out when he had the chance.”

Again, Stephanie sensed Ginny’s reaction but she spoke before her friend could. “But he didn’t, Goyle. You and I have spent enough time together and I know that you did not like him. You merely followed him around like a sad puppy because you were afraid. The difference between you and me is that I was never afraid of Draco Malfoy. That alone makes me capable of teaching you how to defend yourself.”

“I can defend myself and I don’t need you.” Goyle stood in defiance and Stephanie merely nodded in his direction. His outburst was expected but disappointing. She did not want to lose any student, even if it was Gregory Goyle.

“Then, if that is how you feel, I must ask you to leave my classroom. I cannot allow such disruptions to occur when there are students who would like to learn.” Stephanie spoke softly, trying to remain calm. This part was the most difficult, but Minerva had assured her it was the right thing to do. She watched as Goyle stormed out of the classroom, slamming the door behind him. “And I grant the same permission to the rest of the class for those who do not wish to remain in this classroom.”

Stephanie was not surprised when Millicent Bulstrode, Theodore Nott, and a few of the other students got up and left the classroom. She slowly walked to her desk and marked the names on her roster to indicate the students who had chosen to drop her class. Minerva would make sure they were placed in other classes.

The rest of the class period went smoothly and very similarly to the others before it. None of the other classes she had had that day included students leaving the room, but that didn’t really matter. She knew that the seventh years would hold more of a grudge, though what she had seen in passing was that some of the fourth, fifth, and sixth years held resentment towards her. She hoped things would get better, but she couldn’t expect them to. A very dangerous reputation preceded her and these students had parents that were very persuasive, especially the children whose parents were Death Eaters. Only time would tell.

At the bell, the classroom cleared fairly quickly. Only Ginny Weasley remained behind and Stephanie tried to avoid her friend by leaving the room immediately. But Ginny wouldn’t have any of that and she closed the door before Stephanie could escape.

“You didn’t have to take their abuse, Stephanie.” Ginny eyed her with concern and Stephanie tried to reassure her friend with a smile.

“I didn’t, Ginny. Didn’t you see me ask them to leave?” Stephanie reminded her.

“That’s not what I meant.” Ginny frowned at her deeply, but Stephanie wasn’t going to budge. She knew that she deserved what she received from those students, and it wasn’t unexpected that the students who had behaved that way had been friends of Draco Malfoy. Ginny must have realized that Stephanie refused to discuss the topic further, because she changed the subject. “What was wrong before class?”

“I was just looking through my photo album.” Stephanie told her friend nonchalantly. It wasn’t like she was lying to Ginny, because that had been exactly what she was doing. It just wasn’t the complete truth, either.

Ginny eyed her suspiciously—she didn’t believe that was all. And she shouldn’t believe it. Stephanie knew that Ginny was very brilliant and she would betray her friend to think anything less than that.

“No.” Stephanie sighed, deciding on a half-truth. “I was thinking of Fred and what he was like at Hogwarts.”

“Oh.” Ginny sighed in what Stephanie hoped was only relief. She shrugged her shoulders and leaned forward to embrace Stephanie tightly. “Are you going to be alright?”

“I will.” Stephanie smiled meekly and pulled away. “Thanks.”

“No problem.” Ginny returned her smile. “I hear that Neville is joining the staff full-time. I mean, I feel bad for Professor Sprout, but it’s a good thing for Neville.”

Ginny was hinting for her to give Neville a break. But Stephanie knew that she couldn’t do that. Ginny’s safety, Neville’s safety, and the students’ safety depended on Stephanie’s ability to stay away from Neville. Putting him in danger put them all in harm’s way and she could not allow that to happen.

Stephanie merely shrugged her shoulders as though the information didn’t matter to her, despite the fact that it was more important than anything else in the world. “Yeah.” She said simply and walked with Ginny out into the hallway. Ginny grabbed hold of her hand and squeezed it tightly. Stephanie smiled because Ginny was providing her with more support than she could ever imagine possible.


So, I am so excited with this chapter. I know I told you all that I'd post sometime towards the middle of the week, but I couldn't keep this from you that long. I wrote it this morning and I am very, very proud of it. Please let me know what you think!!! I can't wait to hear your thoughts on what is going on! Anyway, I am not sure when the next chapter will be up. There is a good possibility that it could be posted towards the middle of the week, but I'm not sure. Anyway, have a great weekend!

Chapter Sixteen: Dining Room Conversations

“Hey Matty.” Ginny plopped her bag full of the day’s books and sat down next to the first year. He looked surprised to see that she was talking to him and she couldn’t help but smile at his discomfort. Oh, how she remembered how flustered she got when the older students spoke to her, especially Harry. There had been more than one occasion when she had spilled some sort of liquid down the front of her school robes because of nervousness.

“Hi Ginny.” He sat up straighter and looked up into her eyes.

“How was your first day of school?” She asked the question with interest. It had certainly been an eventful day for her.

First, the whole incident with the Slytherins had happened at lunch. There was something strange going on between Daniel Blaiser, his friends, and a few of the first years. She had looked over to their table coincidentally and saw the terrified look on one of the younger girl’s faces and she couldn’t help but go investigate. And they hadn’t told her much, but that hadn’t been unexpected.

But there certainly was something going on between Daniel and the first year she had learned was Abby Seabold. The only thing Ginny knew about the Seabold family was that Abby’s father, Jason, ran the same dragon training facility that Charlie worked for. There had been some suspicions that Mr. Seabold had supplied Lord Voldemort with dragons, but nothing could be proven. It was no surprise that his daughter had been sorted into Slytherin.

So, Ginny was skeptical of both Daniel and Abby, but something about the girl was different. The way the older students followed Abby around all the time was just odd, almost like they were trying to protect her from something. It didn’t really bother Ginny, except for the fact that the older students were using their authority to terrify the younger ones. That was not something she could sit by and idly watch, and that was why she felt the strong need to intervene.

The support she received from so many people from the other Houses was incredible. She hadn’t even asked for them to back her up, but they had. It really made her realize that maybe Dumbledore’s Army still stood for something, even if they weren’t fighting against anything specific. Through it all, they still felt a strong bond. That had definitely reassured Ginny to a strong degree.

And then her last class of the day had been Defense Against the Dark Arts with Stephanie. That had been interesting to say the least. When she had entered the classroom, Stephanie was lost in thought and had tears rolling down her cheek. She wanted desperately to go and see what was wrong, but she knew better than to draw attention to her friend. It had gone on long enough, though, so Ginny had cleared her throat to get Stephanie’s attention.

The second-seventh year Slytherins were so horrible to Stephanie, too, and it made Ginny cringe. How could Stephanie think that she is a failure? Look at all she has accomplished. She is incredible. Ginny had told herself over and over again. Stephanie had such little confidence that it made Ginny sad at times. Hopefully the teaching position at Hogwarts would allow Stephanie to show herself that she was worthy and capable. But the Slytherins didn’t help anything, that was for sure.

“Long.” Matty answered her and looked across the table towards another first year that Ginny recognized as Lauren Graham. Her sister was a prefect in Hufflepuff and Ginny really liked her. She had been a member of Dumbledore’s Army the year before and had really helped them out quite a bit. “I don’t know how I’m ever going to find my way back to any of my classes.”

“It’ll get easier with time.” Ginny chuckled, thinking back to how many times she had gotten lost on the moving staircases in the dormitories. “Believe me. You’ll learn which staircases remain still.”

“I hope so.” Lauren joined in the conversation.

“Hey, Matty.” Ginny hadn’t wanted to come straight to this topic, but she also didn’t want to miss the opportunity, either. He looked at her expectantly. “I heard something strange happened to Steph-Professor Potter-in your Defense Against the Dark Arts class today.”

No one was taking it too seriously, but Ginny had heard a rumor that Stephanie had gotten a little freaked out during her first class of the day. She had only heard bits and pieces of the information, but that information mixed in with what had happened before her own Defense Against the Dark Arts class just gave Ginny cause to worry about what was going on with her good friend.

“Yeah, it was really weird.” Lauren spoke instead of Matty. Ginny looked across the table at the girl, whose eyes were so big with excitement that she could barely contain herself. “She went to get the class list on her desk, but she saw something and went all white. She started to shake, but she wouldn’t tell us what happened. I asked her, but she just went on with class.”

“So you don’t know what it was?” Ginny inquired. It was weird, but she was certain that Stephanie wouldn’t tell her what was going on. Neville was going to be arriving sometime this week and she had to make sure to talk to him about. Maybe he could talk to Stephanie.

She wanted to write a letter to Harry and ask him about it, but Ginny knew that doing so would cause him unnecessary worry. If she could uncover Stephanie’s secret without involving Harry, Hermione, or Ron, it would make the situation so much better. She had to at least try before she involved Harry. Who knew what he would do to ensure Stephanie’s safety.

And Ginny was positive that Stephanie was safe at Hogwarts. There were just too many people around and security precautions in place for someone to even attempt to sneak in. She and Neville would just have to keep a close eye on Stephanie Potter.

“No.” Matty responded and Lauren shook her head.

“But she is such a good teacher!” Lauren started bouncing in her chair excitedly. “I like how she treated us like grown ups!”

Ginny smiled at Lauren’s enthusiasm. Of course Stephanie would treat the first years like the older children; Stephanie was certain that danger was still out there, and Ginny didn’t entirely disagree, and she was determined to make sure that she prepared the students for whatever could happen. Ginny respected Stephanie so much that way.

“So, Matty.” Ginny decided to lighten the mood a little before she left the first years to head back to her dormitory to try and start some of the homework that was already piling up. “How’s your brother doing?”

“He’s good.” Matty smiled up at her again. He had such a shy smile that was so adorable. Ginny couldn’t help but notice the similarities between Matty and Seamus, they looked so much alike. “He gave me some hints about what to do.”

“He tells me that you are quite the flier.” Ginny said interestedly.

Matty looked down at his plate of food as blood rushed to his cheeks. He was embarrassed and Ginny suppressed a giggle. “Nah.”

“Maybe some day you’ll have to show me.” Ginny encouraged him lightly. “I’d love to see what he was bragging about.”

“We’ll see.” He whispered softly without looking up from his dinner plate.

“Oh, you must show me!” Lauren encouraged him excitedly. There was an energy to her that exhausted Ginny from just listening to her. At the same time, it was refreshing to see such enthusiasm from a fellow classmate. This year was definitely going to be an interesting one.

To spare Matty any more embarrassment, Ginny patted the young boy on the back and grabbed her back pack and headed for the Gryffindor common room. She had so much to do and she had promised Harry that she would write to him that night. Her eyes rolled as she thought about how worried he would get if he didn’t receive a letter from her promptly. He’d probably come barging into the school and demand to see her. It also made her feel a sense of comfort to know that he loved her so much to drop everything for her.

Just then, Ginny heard Professor McGonagall’s voice ring throughout the Great Hall. “What is going on here? Go back to your dormitories, immediately. Prefects!”

Ginny quickly turned her attention to the Slytherin table where McGonagall was grabbing Abby Seabold by the robes and eyeing another first year and Daniel Blaiser with anger and frustration. Another confrontation between those three. What is going on in Slytherin this year?

She watched as McGonagall lead the three Slytherin students out of the Great Hall, and then there was no more to be seen. Other students started whispering excitedly as they headed back to their dormitories, but Ginny only shook her head sadly—her thoughts could not be distracted.

One year. She thought. That’s all she had to endure without him and then they could be together forever. Her breath came out as a sigh as she ascended the stairs. One year.

*~*~*~*

“Hey guys.” Abby said with a fake smile on her face and false enthusiasm. She was determined not to let D down. Even though she was completely miserable, she had to show him that she was capable of following a simple order.

A few of Daniel’s friends merely looked up at her suspiciously, but no one spoke to her. Abby knew that they didn’t like her and were staying nearby only as a favor to Daniel, or else they were being well compensated for their time. Their reasons didn’t matter. All she knew was that her father thought that she was in extreme danger at Hogwarts, but was clearly safer at the school than at home with him. She deduced that much because otherwise he would have kept her at home.

“What happened to you after lunch, Abby?” David whispered into her ear, but it did not escape the notice of either Sammy or Daniel. Daniel glared at her silently from across the table as though he were instructing her to keep quiet about their discussion in the broom closet. Abby didn’t know how much she could trust David yet and she knew that she wouldn’t tell him, at least not right away. She would need help finding out why Daniel was so scared for her life, though. Maybe Sammy could help with that.

Nighttime was the only time she would ever have alone and away from the scrutinizing eye of her guard. That was when she had to share with Sammy, hopefully without her other roommates gaining knowledge of what she had to plan for. She couldn’t do it alone, that was for sure.

Instead of responding, she looked down at her plate of food and just started pushing it around. She wasn’t hungry in the least; she had way too much on her mind to think about nourishing her body. But David wouldn’t accept her silence.

“Did he hurt you?” David didn’t bother to keep his voice low this time—he knew Daniel would hear him and he didn’t care. That brought Abby’s head snapping upward so she could look at her friend. He looked concerned for her as he clutched his wand next to his own untouched plate of food.

“Of course not, David.” Abby laughed it off as though the thought were absurd. But she knew that Daniel could hurt her at any moment if he wanted to. She also knew that Daniel would do whatever he could to make sure that she followed his instructions exactly, even isolating her from the rest of the school. Abby could not allow that.

“Then what happened?” David hissed, but he was no longer looking at Abby. He was glaring at Daniel, whose angry stare had disappeared. Now, Daniel looked obviously amused. Rachel was snickering next to Daniel.

“Nothing happened, David.” Abby tried to sound as confident as she could in her answer. Lying had become second nature to her because she always had to assure her father that she was alright, especially since she had lost her mother.

“I don’t believe you.” David said quietly, looking at her. There was so much pleading in his eyes that caused Abby to feel bad for him. He cared about her and there was nothing she could do to ease his concern because she didn’t even know what she could do for herself.

“Really, David.” Abby begged him with her eyes to drop the subject. She couldn’t come out and say that she would tell him later, because she wasn’t sure she would. And Daniel would be so upset if she told anyone, though she had to tell Sammy. It was the only way that she could find out the information she so desperately needed. “I just needed some time to think things over. The tension was really freaking me out.”

But David didn’t believe her and she didn’t blame him. Her voice was too full of a tone pleading him to drop the subject. She felt the eyes of all of Slytherin on her as Daniel sat next to her nonchalantly, leaning back in his chair with his arms crossed against his chest. He was amused by David’s concern. Abby was so angry with Daniel at that moment for putting her in this situation that she almost turned around and smacked him. But she knew that wouldn’t do any good, Daniel would just seclude her.

Instead of addressing her again, David stood and leaned across the table towards Daniel, pushing his wand in Daniel’s shoulder. “If you hurt her, so help m-”

“Or what?” Daniel stood, pushing his chair back so quickly that it fell backwards. His eyes were laughing, but his features were angry. Abby stood, trying to place her hands between them, trying to calm them both down. “You’ll turn me into a toad? Because that’s all you’re capable of, if even that.”

“Daniel, don’t.” Abby whispered, but neither boy took notice of her.

“Oh, I can do more harm than that.” David said through clenched teeth. Through it all, Abby was impressed that he could keep so calm with so many older students around.

Just then, students began dispersing quickly. “What is going on here?” It was the Headmistress. “Go back to your dormitories, immediately. Prefects!”

Abby turned to leave, but McGonagall caught hold of her robes and kept her in place. “Seabold, Blaiser, and McNitt. My office, now!”

“But professor!” Abby tried to argue, but the Headmistress wasn’t having any of it. She pulled Abby towards the door of the Great Hall as Daniel and David followed silently behind them.

The walk to the Headmistress’ office seemed to take forever as she was being pulled along by the professor. And once inside, McGonagall instructed them all to take a seat. She sat in an old looking chair across from the Headmistress’ desk while Daniel and David sat next to each other on the couch.

“I will not tolerate threats and fighting in my school.” McGonagall looked at them sternly through her glasses. Abby shrank back a little in her chair, but didn’t say anything. “I am ashamed of you Daniel. I honestly expected better from you, an older student no less.”

“I’m sorry, professor.” Daniel looked at McGonagall directly, his eyes wide. But Abby could tell there was no honesty in his words, just seething hatred for the boy sitting next to him.

“What was this about?” Abby wasn’t surprised that McGonagall wouldn’t look at anyone but Daniel, but she wished that she could tell McGonagall her side of the story. If she got in trouble, her father might take her home.

“It was just a misunderstanding.” Daniel said smoothly.

“A misunderstanding.” McGonagall repeated the words and Abby knew that she didn’t believe them one tiny bit. “Then am I wrong to assume that a situation like this will not happen again?”

“No you are not, Professor.” Daniel responded and McGonagall nodded.

For the first time, she turned her attention to the first years in the room. Abby sat up straighter and David just looked at the Headmistress without any emotion. It was time that they were going to be punished, probably with detention.

“Is that what happened, Abby? David?” McGongall asked authoritatively and Abby couldn’t help but respect the woman. There was a world of knowledge in her eyes.

“Yes ma’am.” David whispered.

“Yes professor.” Abby responded softly.

“Then there is nothing more to discuss, here.” McGonagall sat back in her chair and crossed her arms against her chest. “If a scene like this occurs again, I will be forced to place you into detention and send a letter to your parents. However, I am taking fifty points each from Slytherin for your behavior.”

“But professor!” Abby sat forward. She had tried to stop the confrontation. What if she got caught in the middle again and the Headmistress sent a letter to her father? He would pull her from that school immediately.

“That is my final decision, Miss Seabold.” McGonagall responded sharply. “Now return to your dormitories with the rest of your classmates.”

“Yes, professor.” Daniel was the only one to speak as they stood and left the Headmistress’ office.

Slowly, and without words, they made their way towards the Slytherin common room. Abby hung her head in disappointment at both her best friend and her new friend.

“I’m sorry, Abby.” Daniel leaned over and whispered into her ear as he tried to take hold of her hand.

But she pushed him away. At that moment she was disgusted with both of them. “Don’t.” She hissed without looking at either of them. There was nothing she could do to make them understand that it was crucial for her that they get along. So, instead, she was going to ignore them both. They needed to realize that she needed both of them. She needed her friends now more than ever.

*~*~*~*

Dear George,

I know that I promised to write you and I don’t know what to say, honestly. The students all acted as expected, though I have only had the first and seventh years.

The first years were excited to have me. I was bluntly honest with them and told them that I would be very demanding of them, but that I would also be there if they needed help. I really want them to understand that there are still dangers even though the Dark Lord is no longer a threat. People have seemed to gain a false sense of security, but with so many Death Eaters running free, no one is safe. No one at all.

The seventh years were alright. Most of them understood that they have to live with me as their professor. Ginny has done a good job on spreading the word that I’m not this horrible monster, and I think the Daily Prophet article helped with that, too (which surprises me because we all know what Rita Skeeter is like). It was the Slytherins that walked out on me.

I don’t feel too bad about that. Gregory Goyle, Theodore Nott, and Millicent Bulstrode were the ones that caused the most disturbance. None of them were actually Death Eaters, but they were all close to Draco. Teddy Nott was the only one that was even close to being a Death Eater—his father really pressured him to join, but the Dark Lord refused to let him participate in anything significant.

I also recognize several names and I know that a lot of the students believe what their parents have said. There is this Abigail Seabold that I just can’t figure out. She seems so eager to learn, but also a little frightened at the same time. I don’t know what her father has said about me. I can’t expect that he likes me, though I never actually met him. It was Lucius that had all of his dealings with him. From what I heard, Lucius had been ordered to kill Jason Seabold’s wife and children. I don’t know how Abigail survived, but she did. There was a lot of hate between Jason and many of the Death Eaters, but I don’t know the whole story. So, I don’t know how the girl is reacting to me. I’m interested to see how she develops.

Then, there’s another first year that surprises me. Her name is Samantha Sienko and I believe that her father is Peter Sienko. Sienko was arrested the night of the final battle, and he was the one that was trying to attack Draco. He was the one that I had to attack so that he didn’t kill Draco that night. I wonder what she thinks about me…

It’s just little things like that that have me so worried. I had moments throughout the day where I was so scared that I could barely breathe. Some of the students walked in on me when I was in tears, and others saw me start to shake. How am I supposed to gain their trust if I can’t even pull myself together? I should have listened to my gut when McGonagall offered me this position. I am definitely the wrong person to teach these kids.

There are times when I just want to curl up at home and do nothing. Sometimes I even wonder why I’m still alive, though I know that there has to be a purpose. There is this deep hole in my stomach that makes me feel so empty sometimes.

Please don’t hate me, but I don’t know who else to go to. I couldn’t bear to lose you as a friend, George. Sometimes I feel like you are the only person in the world who can truly understand even a tiny portion of what I’m going through. But I’ve been feeling attraction towards one individual specifically. I feel like I’m betraying Fred by even thinking about another man that way. I know that he just wants me to be happy, but is it right for me to feel that way so soon? What if I put this person in danger because I’m selfish enough to tell him? And I don’t know if I could bear him telling me that he didn’t feel the same way. I know I don’t deserve happiness after all I’ve done, but it’s just so hard sometimes. It’s a strong yearning for me to feel some sort of compassion.

Am I completely crazy? I’m sorry for unloading all of this on you, but I don’t know what else to do. And I have to end this letter before I lose the courage to actually send it. Please don’t be angry about what I told you…I just need someone right now and there’s just no one else.

I can’t turn to Neville for the obvious reasons. Hermione would just tell me that everything is alright and that I deserve to be happy. I’ve never been all that close with Ron, and we both know how Harry would react. And my being a professor has now muddled my relationship with Ginny—I mean, what can I share with her now? I don’t want her to be put in an awkward position with the other students. And I know that you will be honest with me. I’m so sorry.

Regards,

Stephanie Potter

Stephanie quickly folded the piece of parchment, placed it in an envelope, scribbled George Weasley on the front, and put it in the mouth of the owl that was going to deliver the letter.

She hadn’t been completely honest with George about what caused her fears, but he would get the gist of it, anyway. And he would be honest with her instead of telling her what she needed to hear. He would tell her how it was, that she was crazy for yearning for Neville’s affection, that she was rational in her belief that she didn’t deserve to be happy. She trusted George’s judgment and looked forward to hearing what he had to say.

He would make things better for her. She sighed as the owl disappeared into the darkness and knew that her opportunity to stop herself from sending that letter had gone along with the owl. She turned around and headed back towards her sleeping quarters; there was so much that she had to do to prepare for her second day of classes. She had the first years again and the fifth years. It would be another interesting day, that was for sure. And Neville would be arriving in the early morning, so she had to prepare a plan for avoiding him at all costs.


So here is this latest chapter. I want to thank everyone so much for keeping with me and leaving me such wonderful feedback!! I'm not sure when the next chapter will be posted, but I'm guessing sometime this weekend or early next week. So keep checking back!! And I hope everyone has a wonderful weekend!

Chapter Seventeen: Realizations and Uprisings

Not too much had happened for him in the last couple of days. He had honestly used his free time with his grandmother and visiting his parents. Neville knew that his grandmother wouldn’t last forever and he had neglected to spend very much time with her lately.

And he had confessed his feelings for Stephanie to her. In response, she had just looked at him sympathetically and patted his shoulders. There was nothing she could have said to make him feel better, but at least she now understood why his mind was so far away. He knew that she understood, it just hurt her to see him in so much pain.

His parents had been the same as they always were, though there were times he could swear his mother recognized him. And he knew this was just wishful thinking because a change would never be possible, but it was nice to at least think that it could happen. The older he grew, the more he wished he could do something to make them better. When he was younger, Neville had been ashamed that his parents were locked away in St. Mungo’s because they had lost their minds. But now, he was ashamed of his behavior. Now, he was so proud of them because they had sacrificed themselves for the Order of the Phoenix.

After he had witnessed Stephanie’s memory of meeting Bellatrix, Rabastan, and Rodolphus Lestrange, he realized that there had been a more specific reason they had come looking for his parents. Stephanie had later told him they had been looking for him.

She didn’t want to tell him, and she begged him not to make her tell him, but he had insisted. He had found out the truth that Lord Voldemort had wanted him dead along with Harry Potter, but Voldemort had chosen to mark Harry as his equal. Though they had given up on finding Neville, he was proud that his parents had protected him similarly to how Lily had protected Harry and Stephanie.

But his parents had suffered so much more than Lily and James Potter. They had simply died at the hands of the Killing Curse while both of his parents were tortured for hours and hours. The thought always brought tears to his eyes, and he knew that he would do the same. He would do the same for the children he had yet to have but wanted desperately; he would do the same for his grandmother; he would do the same for Stephanie; and he would do the same for any of his friends. He would do whatever it took because that was what his parents had done. They were heroes and he wanted desperately to make them proud.

But that time was long over. He had gotten word the day before that Professor Sprout had passed away and that he would be taking over full-time as Professor of Herbology. Honestly, he was really nervous, but he knew that he could handle it. He wouldn’t have been put in that position if McGonagall hadn’t thought that he could do it. Also, he found out that he would be co-heading Gryffindor with Stephanie. That thought alone made him smile.

McGonagall told him how much Stephanie was terrified of the position she held, and now that Neville was going to be there, McGonagall wouldn’t have to assist in the running of Gryffindor. McGonagall hoped Stephanie would be relieved, though Neville knew better. Stephanie would be angry that she and Neville would have to work so closely. But maybe the opportunity would allow him to redeem himself in her eyes somehow. It was at least something that he had to try.

And so he had arrived at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry that morning. His morning classes had been canceled so he wouldn’t be rushed, but he had held his afternoon classes. They hadn’t gone as badly as he had expected and it felt surprisingly good to be back at his alma mater.

The last time he had been inside the school had been devastating. It was the final battle and so many of his friends had lost their lives. Before that, he had led a revolution of students to defy the Death Eaters who had taken over the school. The students he formed friendships with during the days of Dumbledore’s Army still remembered and respected him greatly. So many students had come up to him that afternoon and wished him luck or told him how excited they were to have him back at Hogwarts that he felt such overwhelming gratitude to McGonagall for allowing him the experience to teach here. It had been a wonderful reception.

Now he was in his room unpacking the few things he had had time to pack and it was still weird to be housed in teacher’s quarters. He figured he would be able to go back to his grandmother’s house some weekend to retrieve more of his things, especially if he was going to be staying there long-term.

It was a little awkward because the room he had been given had been Snape’s quarters. Remnants still remained of his existence, though Neville didn’t mind those. It was the dark and dreariness of the quarters that bothered him and he knew he would have to do some major renovations to make it more his style, to make it more comfortable for him.

He was disturbed from his thoughts by a knock on the door. Who could that be? He wondered to himself and walked over to answer it. A large smile flashed across his face as a familiar red-headed teenager jumped into his arms.

“Neville!” Ginny exclaimed once she pulled herself from his embrace. “It’s so good to see you! How was the move?”

“It went alright.” He spoke hesitantly. As happy as he was to see her, barely anyone inside his circle of friends had spoken to him in a long time; in fact, only one person had been in contact with him since his fight with Stephanie. Regardless of his surprise, he gestured for Ginny to enter his quarters, though he wasn’t sure how McGonagall would react to his being alone with a student. But it was Ginny, they had shared so much. He couldn’t just ignore that. “Come on in.”

She glided into his room and took a moment to take it all in. Finally, without touching anything or saying a word, she took a seat on his bed. It was the only place to sit that wasn’t completely covered with meaningless clutter. Finally, she looked at him with wide eyes.

He turned to shut the door and then leaned against it nonchalantly; at least he tried to convey that feeling towards Ginny.

“I’m sorry, Neville. For everything.” Her voice was soft and full of remorseful caring. He couldn’t help but realize that she was being honest with him. He made his way towards her as she continued. “We shouldn’t have shunned you like that. It’s just that Stephanie was so hurt and it tore us all apart. But your conflict shouldn’t have become ours. Harry yelled at us for it.”

“I know.” Neville shook his head, rubbing Ginny’s shoulders. “Harry’s written me some letters trying to convince me that Stephanie will come around. He knows how much I care about her and he just wants her to be happy.”

“And we didn’t make it any better.” Ginny’s voice was somber. “I’m sorry, Neville.”

He tried to smile in reassurance, but he just couldn’t pull it off. But he did understand why his friends had reacted the way they had. If it was someone else that had hurt Stephanie like that, he probably would have isolated them as well. Stephanie was special that way; she captured the full affection of those around her. What is it about her, that everyone was willing to sacrifice themselves for her?

Neville knew the answer to his own question. She was so special, so full of wonderment, and she brought out the best in everyone around her. Look at what she had done to Ron while the Slytherins had been giving him a hard time about the Quidditch team or what she had done for him. Before Stephanie came along, he couldn’t even remember the simple password to his dormitory. But then Stephanie came into his life and had immediately increased his self-confidence. Even Ginny and Hermione had changed for the better once they got to know Stephanie Potter. The power Stephanie held over them all emanated from her in waves. It was incredible.

“I know.” Neville didn’t want to say something generic, such as Don't worry about it or It’s alright. Because that wasn’t true. Even though he understood, he was still hurt by his friends’ betrayal. Ginny was right, it was his and Stephanie’s conflict, not theirs. He thought that he had meant more to them than that, but he had been wrong. Oh, how he had been wrong. And that hurt almost as much as Stephanie’s anger with him.

He didn’t want to talk about this any longer. There was a rift between him and Ginny and he knew that she could feel it as well. Hopefully it would be repaired with time, but right now it was ever present in his bedroom. He dropped his arm from Ginny’s shoulder and hoped she would leave him alone to his thoughts. There was so much he needed to contemplate.

But she didn’t leave. Instead, she turned in his direction and reached for his hand. By instinct, he allowed her to hold his hand. She looked at him, her eyes still wide, but with a concern that hadn’t been there moments before.

“I know that I don’t deserve it, Neville.” Ginny’s voice became louder, as though she were fighting for something more than their friendship. He became on full alert with her change in demeanor. “But I have a favor to ask.”

Neville nodded and he listened as she explained about the strange way Stephanie had reacted during the first years’ class and then how she, and the rest of her class, had walked in on Stephanie in tears. He didn’t know what to make of it but he did realize that Ginny was going to ask him to talk to Stephanie about what was going on.

“She won’t listen to me and I know it’s a stretch, but maybe she’ll talk to you.” Ginny pleaded with heavy concern. “I can’t tell Harry. You know how he’ll react and that isn’t what she needs right now.”

“You know that she won’t.” Neville said simply and he knew that it was the truth. The way that Ginny let out her breath told him that Ginny knew that fact as well, but she had to at least make an attempt.

“I know.” Ginny was resigned and it bothered Neville to see her that way. He wasn’t sure he had ever seen Ginny in that manner, not knowing how to proceed. She was always determined to do something to make things right, no matter the cost and no matter how difficult. There had always been something, but now Ginny had nothing. It disheartened him.

But her next statement hit him hard and his mind turned to the worst. “There’s more.” Neville didn’t want to think about what more Ginny could tell him—his mind immediately went to Stephanie. What more could she be going through?

However, Ginny didn’t give him much time to imagine what was happening. She continued softly, as though she didn’t want to be overheard. Her eyes swept towards the door as she continued. “There’s something weird going on with the Slytherins. There’s just so many of them this year. Almost all of the first years, and even more of those that had started last year, were sorted there.

“And Daniel Blaiser has this weird control over a lot of them. He and his friends follow this first year, Abby Seabold, around like they are protecting her from something. They never let her out of their sight, and if someone comes near her, they aim for attack. It’s just so strange and I’ve never seen anything like it.” Ginny paused as she remembered something that had happened in the past few days while Neville had been absent.

“And they watch her friends like hawks, though David and Samantha, I have noticed, are at least allowed to wander the castle alone. Abby hasn’t gone anywhere without someone at her side.” Ginny took a deep breath. “It’s just weird. I’m afraid they are planning something. What if they are going to try to hurt Stephanie?”

Whatever Neville had been expecting to hear from Ginny, he definitely hadn’t been expecting to hear that. So many Slytherins in one year. How could that be? Are they making up for something? It felt strange, that so many students would be sorted into Slytherin in the same year that Stephanie began teaching there. There had to be so many people wanting to get to her, especially those related to Death Eaters. Could Stephanie really be in so much danger?

Of course she could. They were talking about Stephanie Potter. She was a danger magnet, though she was more than capable of protecting herself. So many people held dangerous grudges against her and he had been foolish to think they couldn’t get to her at Hogwarts. But certainly she would tell someone about any concerns she had. And then something hit Neville like he had been punched in the gut.

“Someone’s threatening her.” Neville whispered, thinking about the story that Ginny had just finished explaining. She had seen something on her desk that frightened her. It had to be it, there was no other explanation.

“But wouldn’t she tell someone?” Ginny asked disbelievingly, though he could see the realization on her face as well. “Stephanie knows how much we care about her. She knows that she can trust us.”

“She wouldn’t tell us if she was trying to protect us.” Neville said simply. It was true and they both knew it. She had done the same thing so many times before. She was trying to hide how scared she really was. The question was, what could they do for her now that they knew?

“Who do you think it is?” Ginny was racking her brain, trying to picture each of the students at Hogwarts. It had to be a student because they were the only ones with access to Stephanie’s office. An outsider would be in too much danger if he or she stepped foot within the grounds of Hogwarts.

“I don’t know, but I intend to find out.” Neville replied solemnly but determinedly. He would do whatever he could to ensure that Stephanie was safe; she deserved that much from him.

Suddenly, Ginny gasped as something came into her mind. He squeezed her hand, the feeling of their disappearing friendship minimized with their shared concern for Stephanie’s safety, and looked at her as the same name popped into his head.

They both said it at the same time, knowing that there could be no one else. He had the run of the school at that particular time. He had control of so many students it was even ridiculous to think about. He would most definitely have some personal grudge against Stephanie for some reason. And he had the means, stubbornness, and cocky demeanor to think that he could take on Stephanie Potter and survive.

“Daniel Blaiser.” They said in unison.

“I’ll have Dumbledore’s Army watch over him.” Ginny placed her hands on her knees, letting go of Neville’s hand, and stood.

“Do you think we should tell McGonagall?” Neville asked curiously. She could help them protect Stephanie.

“No.” Ginny said, shaking her head. “Not until we are completely sure that we are right. It would look horrible, but I know we’re right. It has to be him.”

“It has to be.” Neville repeated as Ginny turned and left his sleeping quarters. He remembered Daniel and knew that the boy could be highly manipulative. He would definitely have to keep a closer eye on Daniel and his followers. Stephanie was more important to him than his own life—Neville would kill Daniel if he tried to lay one finger on Stephanie. He didn’t care about the consequences, just that Stephanie was well protected.

*~*~*~*

She sighed in contentment. The past few weeks had been a blur and she had rarely seen Ronald due to their differing schedules, but now she was at the Burrow cuddled in his arms. It couldn’t get any better than that.

He responded to her by caressing her shoulder and she closed her eyes at his touch. Ron and Harry had been so busy with Auror training that they had barely even had time to write to her. But his lack in communication didn’t bother her as much as she thought it would because she had spent all of her free time at the Ministry learning every aspect of her job. It was an adrenaline rush that she had not experienced since her school days and Hermione had forgotten how much she missed it.

It was her job to ensure that magical creatures were being treated fairly and humanely. It was so amazing the things she had seen in just the short few weeks she had been employed with the Ministry of Magic. There were people out there that treated magical creatures so horribly, but she knew that she was going to make a difference. She could do it and she would do it; it was something that called to her during her fifth year at Hogwarts when she started the Elf Liberation Front and it was something she would do until the day she died. It was meant to be.

“Stephanie wrote to George awhile back.” Ron broke the silence, playing with a stray strand of her hair. She looked up into his eyes with roving curiosity.

But what confused her was that they hadn’t even been talking about Stephanie. In fact, they hadn’t been talking about anything; they had just been sitting in each other’s embrace enjoying the small amount of time they had together. She didn’t want to ruin that perfect moment by talking about Stephanie, but she couldn’t help herself. She was curious, and a little upset that Stephanie hadn’t written to her. They all still had their diaries, and now Stephanie had hers back, but there hadn’t been one single entry. It had been Ginny who had written to tell her that everything was going well at Hogwarts and that Stephanie was stepping into her teaching role very professionally. But the fact remained that Stephanie had written to George of all people. Why?

The fact didn’t elude her that Stephanie and George had gotten pretty close in the past few months. She couldn’t help but wonder how they found the strength to be around each other so much, but each had given the other the strength they needed to move forward. And it was nice that Stephanie had such a good confidante, something Hermione had once been. It hurt that Stephanie didn’t feel the same way towards her any longer. She desperately missed the relationship they used to have, but Hermione had seen so many friendships falter and evolve with time. Will Stephanie ever trust me like that again? Hermione’s mind tormented her as she waited for Ron to elaborate.

“Sorry.” He murmured when he saw the look in her eyes. Ron just squeezed her tighter and kissed the top of her head. He understood completely what she was thinking. “They just understand each other, Hermione. It’s nothing against you. You know that Stephanie still loves you.”

“What did she say?” Hermione asked, hoping it wasn’t something that she could have helped her friend with.

“I don’t know.” She felt him shrug his shoulders. “He wouldn’t say. Except that Goyle, Nott, and Bulstrode walked out on her first class. Serves them right, if you ask me. They don’t deserve to be taught by her.”

“Yeah. Ginny said she held her own against them.” Hermione sighed. “I’m worried about her, though. Something just doesn’t feel right.”

“She’s safe at Hogwarts, Hermione.” Ron tried to reassure her, but nothing he said could comfort her enough to get that nagging feeling out of her stomach. “McGonagall, Neville, and Ginny are watching out for her. And her students love her. Nothing is going to happen to her.”

“I know that.” Hermione didn’t want to look him in the eye. She knew that he was right, but something felt so wrong. “I know that she’s safe. She just tends to get inside her head and hurts herself from the inside out.”

Ron finally understood her meaning and he started rubbing her shoulder again. Then he started kissing the side of her face and moving down towards her neck. She shivered in excitement at his touch. Then, he pulled back and whispered in her ear, and this calmed her more than she had expected it to. “Like I said, Neville and Ginny are watching out for her. She’s fine, Hermione.”

“You’re right.” Hermione agreed and then allowed herself to giggle as his mouth began nibbling on her ear. Her voice came out in a whisper as she said his name as though she were saying it for the first time. “I’ve missed you, Ronald.”

She could tell that he was about to respond seductively when there was a knock on the door. Hermione swore under her breath at the distraction. The house was supposed to be completely empty all day and she only had a few precious hours before Ron had to be back at the Auror Training Facility.

Hermione reluctantly moved to get up when Ron pulled her backwards and into his lap once again. She gave him a scolding look, but he just looked at her pleadingly. “Please.” That was all he said and she couldn’t resist him. She sighed and lay back in his arms feeling the full force of safety in his embrace.

Ron raised his arm and reached for the wand that was sitting on the floor next to him. She wasn’t sure if it was her wand or his, but it didn’t really matter either way. And she knew what he was going to do before the spell even left his lips. The door caved in and she heard familiar laughter floating into the Burrow from the outside.

“Always have a flare for the dramatic, don’t we Ron?” Harry’s laughter was contagious and Hermione couldn’t help but smile. She felt Ron’s chest rise and fall with his own laughter.

“Why get up when this wand will do?” He smirked, dropping the wand to the floor.

Hermione lifted her head to look at her boyfriend sternly even though she couldn’t get the smile off her face. She tried to fake it, though she knew it wasn’t going to work. “You know your mother is going to kill you for ruining her door.”

“Worth it.” Ron replied and he squeezed her tighter.

“Ronald Weasley.” A deep voice scolded him and Hermione knew immediately who it was. She smiled even more broadly as Ron jerked in his seat. “I am disappointed in you.”

Ron tried to stand up in respect of the man who had just entered, but Kingsley Shacklebolt just laughed heartily, and gestured for him to stay seated. He was just kidding.

“Hey Harry, Kingsley.” Hermione reached over and grabbed for Ron’s hand, which he took hungrily. He played with her fingers as they sat there in each other’s arms.

“What’s going on?” Ron turned serious as Harry and Kingsley took a seat nearby so that they could look at Hermione and Ron. Hermione’s smile faded immediately as she saw her friends’ appearance turn solemn.

“There has been some activity with a few of the missing Death Eaters.” Kingsley responded, getting to the point immediately. Hermione swallowed hard as what he was telling them hit home. “Are you aware of what Dedrick Hargrave’s role was within Lord Voldemort’s organization?”

“He was a leader.” Ron tightened his grip on Hermione and she was thankful that she was in his arms. Disbelief ran right through her. Wasn’t the danger supposed to be over? “He was in charge of the Hogsmeade group.”

“What about early on as Voldemort was gaining power?” Kingsley prodded, trying to give them information. “Why did Voldemort find him so useful at the beginning? It was the reason he and his brother were allowed to join the Death Eaters so young.”

“His power to manipulate.” Hermione whispered, realizing what Kingsley was about to tell them. She could tell by Ron’s posture and Harry’s confused look that neither of them understood what Kingsley was getting at, so she continued. “Don’t you remember what Stephanie told us? He was able to recruit people and creatures that even Voldemort couldn’t convince to join their side. He convinced the giants. There were others, many others, that joined Lord Voldemort because of Dedrick’s manipulation.”

“Exactly.” Kingsley nodded gravely in her direction.

“But what does that mean?” Harry asked, though Hermione could tell that he was finally coming around. He was just too afraid to realize the information’s full implications. In fact, Hermione wished that she didn’t know what Kingsley was about to tell them.

“Dedrick is recruiting a small army.” Kingsley shook his head, looking only at Harry. “I say small because I’m not sure how many people have joined him yet. What is worse is the fact that they are joining him of their own free will. Even more, we have proof that Amycus and Alecto Carrow along with Antonin Dolohov have joined him. They are gaining strength and numbers each day.”

“How do you know this?” She asked, wanting to be sure that he was right. All she wanted was for this to be a dream, just a bad dream, but she knew that it wasn’t. She wouldn’t wake from this nightmare.

“There have been many sightings, Hermione.” Kingsley responded and finally took his eyes off Harry. “There have also been killings. They are being ruthless. They are killing all of those that refuse Dedrick.”

“But it hasn’t been in the papers.” Ron was trying very hard not to believe what Kingsley was telling them. Hermione just wished that she had the same determination.

“The Ministry has been covering up the murders as best as we can manage, though I’m not sure how much longer we can hold out. The less publicity this gets, the safer the public will be.” Kingsley’s tone was somber and sad, but also a little frightened. There was more he wasn’t telling them; there had to be a reason he was telling them this information.

“What do they want?” Harry asked, leaning forward in his chair. His knuckles were white from exertion as he clenched and unclenched his fists. Hermione looked at him sadly, and then turned her attention in anticipation towards Kingsley.

“We don’t know what Alecto, Amycus, or Antonin are after.” Kingsley spoke very deliberately, planning every word carefully. “However, we are certain of what Dedrick wants.”

He hesitated and an image played itself in Hermione’s mind. It was a memory she had seen in Stephanie’s hospital room as her close friend replayed her worst experiences. Stephanie had used Kieran and led him to his death and Hermione knew that Dedrick still blamed Stephanie for that. Dedrick was out for Stephanie’s blood. But all that would come out of her mouth was one word. One terrifying word. “Revenge.”

Harry stood at that moment in anger. He pulled his wand from his pocket and stormed towards the door. Kingsley was in front of the exit in a flash, restraining Harry from leaving.

“You will not go after him, Harry.” Kingsley demanded and Harry eyed the Minister with hatred. Hermione stood and rushed forward with Ron following close behind. “She is safe at Hogwarts.”

“We need to tell McGonagall.” Harry looked defeated at Kingsley’s request, but he knew that his friend was right.

“I’ve already consulted with her and we have decided it would be best not to inform Stephanie of these new developments. She needs time and they can’t get to her there. We have set up Aurors at the perimeter so that none of the students or professors will know that they are there.” Kingsley’s voice rang with concern for Harry and Stephanie along with the authority that he demanded as Minister of Magic. Hermione reached for Ron’s hand as she began to tremble.

“Why can’t she just be left alone? After all she has gone through and they are still coming after her?” Harry spoke quickly and Hermione knew that he was fighting his desire to go hunting for Dedrick Hargrave. “She wouldn’t hurt them and they know it.”

“Precisely.” Kingsley responded as though it were obvious. “In their eyes, she has betrayed them. To make matters worse for Stephanie, she is training others to be able to fight them. From what Minerva has told me, Stephanie is making sure that even the first years could put up one hell of a fight if they were attacked. Dedrick is amused, but he wants her all the same.”

“So what do we do?” Hermione asked.

“We keep searching for them, hoping that we find them before they can get to her.” Kingsley informed the trio sympathetically. “She is safe at Hogwarts and when she leaves the castle’s protection, she must be guarded at all times.”

“She won’t like that.” Harry spoke with an odd smile on his face. Hermione knew what he was picturing. Stephanie would put up a fight when she found out that she was back under Auror protection.

“That’s why we can’t let her find out. The guards will be hidden. I want her to remain with an illusion of independence and safety, even though her life is in severe danger.” The Minister was honest in his plans—he would have Stephanie protected regardless of her wishes.

“There’s something else that I need to request from you two.” He was looking at Harry and Ron. Hermione saw both of her friends stiffen in acceptance.

“Anything.” Ron responded calmly.

“Whatever it takes.” Harry added and Ron nodded.

“You need to step up your training. This group of Death Eaters is getting even stronger with each person they recruit and I need you two to be at your best. You have fought these people before and I know that they can be defeated. And, if at all possible, I want it to happen without Stephanie. I can’t ask her to use her spell—she knows the danger it possesses and I refuse to put her in any more danger. She must be kept in the dark about these new developments.” Kingsley’s voice was sad and it hurt Hermione to keep something so important from her friend. But he was right. She deserved to have a moment of happiness and freedom from fear. That meant that they couldn’t even tell Neville or Ginny about what was going on. They had to fight from outside Hogwarts and they had to do it quickly. Whatever Dedrick had in store for Stephanie, Hermione was sure that he wouldn’t be patient in his desires. He would want to get to her as soon as possible.

And she could not allow that to happen.


As of this morning, I didn't think I'd have a chapter posted until the end of the week. And then I got really excited and my fingers couldn't stop typing. I love when that happens and it seems to happen more often lately. I did have trouble starting Neville's POV, but I really like how it turned out. And we got a glimpse as to what is happening outside of Hogwarts!! I hope you all liked it! And I'm not sure when I'll post the next chapter...probably not until towards the end of the week. But I'm still going strong!

Chapter Eighteen: Five Strong

Stephanie pulled out a piece of parchment from the pocket of her robes for what must have been the thousandth time. And since she was sitting in the middle of class, it probably wasn’t the best thing to do, but she couldn’t help herself.

After a few weeks of teaching Defense Against the Dark Arts, the determination of Stephanie’s least favorite class had surprised her. It wasn’t the seventh years as she had expected, but that was mostly because Ginny was there to give her the support she needed. No, the class that gave her the most trouble was always the fourth year Slytherins.

She didn’t know what their problem really was, but she did know that Daniel Blaiser was nothing but trouble. He rarely took his eyes off of her, but it wasn’t a yearning to learn that emanated from him. It was pure hatred. All he would do was glare at her and it was quite disconcerting. It reminded her too much of the time she had spent with the Death Eaters and she dreaded each class period she had with him. And to make things worse, because he and his friends were fourth years, she had him in class both on Monday afternoons and Friday mornings. It was pure torture to get through those two class periods.

The students were now in the middle of an exam about the different magical devices she had encountered throughout her time with the Death Eaters and she needed the support that the parchment could provide.

George had responded to her desperate cry for help almost immediately. At first, she had been angry with his response because she assumed he had just written what he thought she wanted to hear. But after she thought about it, she realized that he wouldn’t lie to her. He wouldn’t lie to her because of his love for Fred. And she took so much comfort in that one little fact. Stephanie had read the letter each night before she went to bed, and every time she felt only an ounce of anxiety or self doubt. George really helped her so much and she truly owed him a lot.

Dear, Sweet Stephanie,

Your letter really made me angry, you know that? I don’t care what you believe –you do NOT deserve any of the things that have ever happened to you. How many times do we have to tell you that?!? Those seventh years had no right to treat you the way they did and I don’t care if they are Slytherins or not. You are their professor and they need to treat you as such.

Fred and I always gave most of our professors a lot of trouble, especially Snape. Oh, and it was so much fun to harass Umbridge. But we never once treated any of them the way those Slytherins treated you. You had every right to be angry and you should have unleashed your fury. We all know those stupid imbeciles deserve it.

I know that you’re worried about a couple of the first year Slytherins. But don’t. Charlie works for Abby’s father, Jason, and there is definitely something off about him. But the fact that Abby is actually at Hogwarts has to be a sign for something. Just keep an eye on her and you’ll be fine.

And about that Sienko girl—I don’t know what to tell you about that one. Her dad wasn’t too well known among the Order, so I suspect that he had been a recent addition before he got arrested. That would explain his not knowing Malfoy.

You, Stephanie Potter, are the most ridiculous person I have ever met. How in the world could I ever hate you? What you are feeling is completely normal and there is no reason for you to be blaming yourself. Whether or not you believe that it really happened, Fred asked you—no, instructed you—to move on. He gave you permission, not that you needed it. He only wants you to be happy. And, personally, I believe you truly did see him when you were trapped in Malfoy’s bubble. He had known that I left the shop in Lee’s care, after all. Just know this, whatever you decide to do, I will be here for you. We understand each other, you and I.

Now, I’m curious as to who it could be…though I do have some ideas!! I want to talk with you about your anxiety because I think I have some products that could help. I know it’s almost two months away, but let’s meet at Hogsmeade the first weekend the students go. I’ll be there promoting my products anyway and then we can sit and have a nice chat over some firewhiskey.

Take care of yourself, Stephanie. I mean that. And please don’t keep telling yourself you don’t deserve to be happy. Of all the people I know, you deserve that more than anyone. And if I see that pathetic look in your eye in October, I will have to knock some sense into you!

Always remember that there are so many people around you that love you for the wonderful person that you are. Never doubt your abilities or yourself and you will succeed. You are powerful in more ways than you realize.

Most importantly, take care of yourself.

George

It really wasn’t all that harsh, but his written voice broke through her mind with unexpected clarity. He was upset by her doubt, her fears, and that bothered her. She didn’t like to cause problems for others around her, and it was terrible knowing that she was causing her friend so much pain. Stephanie had really attempted to gain control of her thought processes. If George was affected like that by just her words on a piece of parchment, how was she hurting Harry when they spoke through the mirrors or Ginny when her friend had to look at her every day? No. Stephanie thought again, shaking her head in the quiet room. I need to keep myself in check. No matter how much I don’t believe them and regardless of how much it hurts. It is necessary that I not allow them to see. I am doing this for them.

And that was how it had been for weeks now. The school year had already flown by incredibly fast—it was already mid-October and Stephanie couldn’t believe it. She was planning on attending Quidditch tryouts that weekend and then the first Hogsmeade trip for the students was scheduled for the following weekend. That was when she would have to face George for the first time since the letter and she was surprisingly nervous to see his reaction. She had not allowed Ginny, Neville—though she did her best to avoid the latter—Minerva, or her students to see the doubt and self-hatred that plagued her mind. Every day that passed put them all in so much more danger, but she was too selfish to leave. Even through her struggles, she was finally beginning to taste what it felt like to be happy. Hogwarts was almost beginning to feel like home. Almost.

And then a loud, piercing scream broke through her thoughts and she immediately jumped to her feet, which caused her chair to fall backwards and fall to the floor with a loud bang. Just as quickly, she pulled her wand out and aimed it throughout the classroom, trying to find the perpetrator.

What she found unsettled her. Amber Zacharias was lying on the floor, hugging her knees to her chest with tears running down her face. The Gryffindor students in the room stared at her with wide eyes, unsure of what to do. Most of the Slytherins reacted the same way, but the four students sitting directly behind the seat that Amber had just vacated caught her attention and she became irate, understanding immediately what had just happened.

“Mister Blaiser!” Stephanie bellowed, quickening her pace over to the boy that sat with the smuggest smile that even beat out Draco’s dreadful smirk. When she reached him, Stephanie grabbed his arm and pulled him to his feet.

“What, Professor?” Daniel asked her with mock shock, emphasizing the last word. “I didn’t do anything.”

“I don’t know what you did to her, but you are in trouble for this.” Stephanie said through gritted teeth. How dare he attempt such a bold move in front of a teacher? She had been aware of the tension between the rest of the Slytherins and Amber, but she obviously hadn’t realized how deep it ran. The poor girl had been isolated, treated like a leper. It had surprised her that even the Gryffindors would have nothing to do with the girl, but Stephanie never imagined that the girl would be attacked, in her classroom no less. It was absurd.

Then she turned to the other students. “You do not attack another student. McAdams, Cambpell, and Miller come with me.”

“You can’t prove we did anything.” Daniel responded calmly and Stephanie narrowed her eyes at him suspiciously. He was going to deny this, but it didn’t matter. She knew that he had cursed Amber. “Did you see any of us do anything? We were all working on our tests quietly and then she¬-” He paused just long enough to point in her direction with a glare and with a subtle hint of taunting in his voice. “Interrupted us so thoughtlessly. If you want to blame anyone, Amber’s the responsible one.”

Stephanie sighed and released his arm, but she didn’t take her eyes off him. Instead, she spoke so only he and his friends could hear her. “There are several ways to prove that you did this, Mr. Blaiser, however, they are all—regrettably¬—forbidden for use on students. But if this happens again, or if I have any suspicion that you are hurting or threatening another student, do not believe for one instant that I will hesitate. And then you will be out of this school quicker than you can say ‘Expulsion’. Do you understand me?”

Daniel’s expression did not falter, though Stephanie noticed that his three friends’ smiles disappeared rather quickly. She eyed him out of anger, not one bit disappointed in herself for threatening a student. If he went to Minerva, she would most certainly be reprimanded. But she didn’t care. Her only job at Hogwarts was to keep all of her students safe. And she would do that at all costs, even if it cost her the position she was beginning to become so attached to. She would not tolerate students harming other students, regardless of her ability to prove it.

“You wouldn’t.” Daniel’s voice was smooth and he didn’t bother to keep his voice down so the other students couldn’t hear. That’s what he wanted—he wanted them to hear their conversation, to prove to them that he was right about her. “You’re weak, professor. Pathetic, really. You have only hurt people when very few are watching, you would never do something so publicly.”

“Watch me.” Stephanie responded, not caring anymore who heard her. She had resigned to the fact that someone was going to turn her in to McGonagall, it was inevitable. After class, she would have to return to her room and start packing her things. She would be asked to leave that day, she knew it. She expected it. Her life at Hogwarts had been too good to be true. And she didn’t care anymore about the tests that the students had been taking. They were inconsequential. “Class dismissed.” She said with a wave of her hand and all of the students disappeared through the door. All except one.

Stephanie made her way over to Amber, who had remained on the floor, though she was no longer crying. She knelt down to the girl’s side and carefully placed some stray hair behind the girl’s ear.

“Are you alright?” Stephanie asked, concerned that Amber had been hurt in her own classroom. How could that have happened? Amber nodded and Stephanie continued questioning her. “Do you know what happened?”

“An image just flashed through my mind.” Amber whispered, trying to elude the topic. “Just a memory. I’m sorry, professor.”

“It’s not your fault, Miss Zacharias.” Stephanie responded softly, helping Amber to her feet. “Let’s get you to Madam Pomfrey.”

“I’m fine.” Amber’s voice was so quiet that Stephanie could barely hear it, but she couldn’t help but notice the hint of fear. Amber was afraid of something, and Stephanie was certain that it was Daniel Blaiser.

“I want to make sure.” Stephanie said with a gentle smile, trying to reassure Amber that everything was going to be alright. “I will make sure that he doesn’t hurt you again.”

And with that, Amber just nodded. Stephanie knew right then that even Amber knew that one of the four Slytherins had forced a painful memory into Amber’s mind, and whether that memory had once been a reality or had been a false implant like the ones the Dark Lord used to implant in her mind, Stephanie did not know. It didn’t matter who had actually cast the spell, they all were responsible. And she would not tolerate that in any form. All of her students would remain safe while she was at Hogwarts. All of them.

*~*~*~*

“We got it!” Lauren squealed quietly and rushed over to where Abby was sitting. Abby leaned forward excitedly as Lauren slammed an old copy of the Daily Prophet down on her Defense Against the Dark Arts table. “It’s good! Well, not good, but it explains everything. I mean can you really believe that they would be after you—YOU? As much as I despise him, Daniel has a reason to be so afraid for you. That doesn’t make his behavior acceptable, though. I have half a mind to-”

“Breathe, Lauren.” Sammy rolled her eyes at Abby and Abby couldn’t help but smile. It was nice to feel so normal after going so long without being allowed to have friends. They did make an unusual group, though. Who would have thought that three Slytherins and two Gryffindors would be so compatible with each other?

“And keep it down.” David demanded, but there was no edge to his voice. He just eyed Lauren with caution and then returned his attention to the newspaper and tried to read over Abby’s shoulder.

Abby couldn’t remember a time when she had been happier. It was so amazing to have friends that cared about her so deeply and would risk everything for her. They even helped her bypass Daniel’s posse by sneaking around for her. Daniel didn’t even have a clue, and for that she was glad. She didn’t want him to find out about her close ties to Gryffindor. He would tell her father for sure if he knew that two of her best friends were in the opposing House.

It all started the night Daniel told her that she needed to be protected—that was the night she decided she had to figure out what was going on. But she knew she couldn’t do it alone because Daniel would be watching very carefully. He could not find out what she was up to; she couldn’t risk being sent home to her father where she would be secluded until she turned seventeen and could run away. She loved her father, but she just couldn’t stand the solitude any longer, not after she had the taste of what true companionship was like.

She decided to bare her soul to Sammy. They had the room to themselves as her other roommates were taking their nightly showers. She took advantage of that time and told Samantha Sienko the story of what had happened in the broom closet with D.

“I need your help, Sammy.” She had pleaded with her friend. “I can handle D, he won’t hurt me. But I have to figure out what is going on.”

“Oh, this will be so exciting.” Sammy clapped her hands together with an enthusiasm Abby hadn’t expected. But she was right; it was definitely going to be great sneaking around and trying to find out the truth.

They devised a plan that involved questioning older students about what they knew. Abby knew they had to be very cautious in whom they talked to, and Sammy would have to do most of it alone, because they didn’t know who they could trust at that point. Their assignment for each other that night had been to devise a list of possible people to interview.

Abby hadn’t noticed David’s giddiness the next morning at breakfast, but he took the moment to confront them before their second Defense Against the Dark Arts class, seemingly unable to control himself any longer.

“So, what’s the plan?” He asked, barely able to sit still in his chair. “What are we going to do?”

Abby shot Sammy an angry glare. “You told him?” She hissed in her friend’s direction. She knew that David was trustworthy, and hated Daniel with a passion so he’d be willing to do anything to defy him, but the more people who knew her plan made it that much more possible that Daniel would learn about what she was up to. She shuddered at the thought of what he would do if he found out.

“He tore it out of me before breakfast.” Sammy shrugged her shoulders and rolled her eyes, and then she smiled at Abby playfully. “And anyway, you were going to tell him. You just didn’t know it yet.”

“Probably.” Abby breathed out as she realized that Sammy was right. After how David had defended her against Daniel, and she still hadn’t forgiven him, how could she keep such a huge secret from him when she needed all the help she could get? “Okay. So I think we need to talk to Luna Lovegood and Ginny Weasley. They are with Dumbledore’s Army and I think they will be able to help. And I don’t think Ginny would talk to Daniel or his friends.”

“No. She hates him.” Sammy agreed, shaking her head.

“I agree. She’d be a great place to start.” David wrote down Ginny’s name onto a small piece of parchment. “What about Professor Potter?”

“No.” Abby and Sammy responded in unison and then they both broke out into a fit of giggles.

“No professors.” Abby added and watched as Daniel wrote that down on his piece of parchment. She couldn’t help but laugh. “What is with that?”

“What? Oh. I want to make sure we don’t miss anything.” David smiled shyly at her and Abby just patted him on the back.

“What are you three up to?” Abby had looked up in shock, and then breathed in relief when she realized it wasn’t a teacher. It was only Lauren Graham, and standing next to her, as usual, was Matty Finnigan.

“Nothing.” Sammy said, looking away as David quickly folded the piece of parchment and put it in his pocket.

“It looks like you’re up to something.” Matty said with a huge smile on his face and then winked in Abby’s direction. She just glared at him curiously—they should have been more careful. It was definitely something to keep in mind in the future.

“No, we’re not.” Abby tried to sound innocent, but she wasn’t sure that it worked.

“Really? It sounds like you need information on something.” Lauren giggled and looked between the three of them. “Matty and I were wondering what you would need to know, and then we realized it might be kind of hard to escape your security detail.”

“It’s not like that, really.” Abby tried to sound confident, though that was exactly what it was like.

“That’s not what it looks like.” Matty’s smile never left his face, and he didn’t take his eyes off her. It almost made her blush, but not quite. However, she did like how he looked at her. It was quite intriguing.

“If you need information, my sister is quite useful. She’s a prefect in Hufflepuff, but I’m sure that she’d be willing to answer some of your questions.” Lauren was almost jumping up and down now with excitement.

“No, thank you.” David responded more sternly than Abby would have liked.

Lauren’s face dropped as she took in David’s expression. “Well, we just wanted to help…” Her voice trailed off and she turned to leave, but Abby felt an overwhelming sense of guilt.

“Wait.” Abby said somberly. “How do you know she has the information we need?”

“I don’t.” Lauren shrugged her shoulders plainly. It was an incredibly honest answer and Abby couldn’t help but wonder why Lauren wanted to help them so badly.

“How do we know your sister wouldn’t talk to Rachel or Tom? They’re prefects together, after all.” Sammy’s voice was suspicious, but Abby knew that she was starting to feel guilty over their responses towards the two Gryffindors, too.

“She’s part of Dumbledore’s Army. Haven’t you heard what they’re up to?” Matty whispered so that no one else in the room could hear. All five of them huddled their heads together so they were in a tight group.

“No.” Abby, David, and Sammy whispered together and Abby shook her head to signify that she had not heard anything. If something was going on, she was certain that Daniel and his friends didn’t know, either.

“Dumbledore’s Army is tailing Daniel. They think that he’s planning on attacking Professor Potter.” Matty whispered even lower and Abby gasped.

It was Sammy that stood upright and shrieked more loudly than she should have. “He wouldn’t! She’s a teacher!”

“Shh!” Lauren hissed at her as Abby pulled Sammy back into the huddle.

Abby wasn’t sure that that was true. He had told her that Professor Potter would hurt her whenever she got the chance. She hadn’t believed that then, and she didn’t believe it now, but she just wondered if Daniel would do anything, anything, to protect her. Would he risk his education for her?

He would.

“Wow.” David whispered, shaking his head in disbelief. Abby knew that he must be ecstatic because it meant that he wasn’t the only one who had suspicions about Daniel Blaiser. Abby just hoped Daniel wouldn’t do anything foolish and get himself hurt or worse, killed.

“So, are we in?” Matty asked, looking up to face Abby once again.

Abby didn’t need to look at Sammy or David for agreement, she could feel it emanating from both of them. Besides, it was her dilemma and her choice on who to include with this information. She nodded her head and stuck out her hand.

Four other hands landed on top of hers and Abby couldn’t help but smile. This was amazing and much more than she ever could have asked for.

“No one would ever believe this.” Lauren giggled excitedly. “Who would have thought that Gryffindors and Slytherins could get along? We have to be the first of our kind.”

“I imagine we are.” Abby nodded in agreement. “But for this to work, we can’t let anyone know about this. We need to keep our friendship from Daniel or else I am going to be sent home.”

“Then, we’ll be a secret alliance.” Matty whispered with a twinkle in his eye. “Five strong.”

“A secret alliance.” David whispered. “Too cool!”

And that was how their friendship had begun. It had been the second day of school and now it was already mid-October. Lauren’s sister, Karen, hadn’t been too helpful. But she had directed them towards Ginny Weasley, who had been more than helpful, as they had expected she would be.

From Ginny they had learned there had been rumors that Lord Voldemort had recruited Abby’s father to help him obtain dragons. It was never proven though, but was highly suspected. Ginny also believed that the Death Eaters involved held some grudge against Abby’s father, but there wasn’t much more that she knew. It appeared that Ginny was holding back a little, but they had expected some resistance because of Abby’s presence at Hogwarts. The interview had been conducted without Abby because of her security detail, but the information was helpful regardless of the amount they had received.

And then they hit a dead end until a couple of days ago when Matty had suggested that they try looking in the Daily Prophet for articles about her mother's and brother’s deaths. It had to be in there, right? She at least expected to find their obituaries, which her father had not allowed her to read.

Finally they found what they were looking for. To make things even better, her friends had found a whole article. The article was small and located in the back of the paper, and Abby couldn’t help but notice the date of the article was just days after the day Lord Voldemort was defeated. Her thoughts returned quickly to the article in front of her as she read aloud with only enough volume so that her friends could hear.

Death Eaters Vow Revenge on Local Businessman

Last evening local businessman Jason Seabold, owner of Seabold Dragons operated out of Romania, returned to his London office only to find that it had been broken into and vandalized. According to Ministry reports, Mr. Seabold first suspected teenage pranks, but realized the severity of the situation when he entered his personal office.

On the wall above his desk was written a message in blood. Whose blood the message was written has yet to be determined, but the Ministry suspects that the perpetrator may have used their own. They are testing it to identify a match to known Dark Wizards that could be responsible for the threat.

The threat was specific and lengthy and the Ministry is taking it very seriously. According to a Ministry Official who wishes to remain anonymous, the statement threatened Mr. Seabold’s only remaining child who is slated to begin Hogwarts in the fall: We are cleaning house of traitors, Jason. We will get her. We will kill that daughter of yours who was much too lucky the first time around.

The statement alluded to an attack on Mr. Seabold’s family that occurred three years ago when his wife and son were killed. Mr. Seabold had been in Romania at the time while his daughter had been at the home of a friend. He returned the following morning to find the Dark Mark above his home.

It was around this time that rumors surrounding Mr. Seabold’s involvement with the Death Eaters began to surface. Questions sarose about whether his involvement with Lord Voldemort got his family killed or whether they had killed his family to obtain his cooperation. Regardless of the answer, Mr. Seabold has been accused of supplying dragons to the Death Eaters for the purpose of assisting Lord Voldemort to gain strength and power.

What is the Ministry doing about these new threats? “Absolutely nothing,” was the only comment that Jason Seabold would supply regarding this article. The Ministry would not comment at this time.

The question posed to the readers is this: Should the Ministry utilize its limited resources to help protect suspected Death Eaters?

It was too much to bear. Abby leaned back in her chair and rubbed her head in her hands. Daniel was right. She was in danger. Professor Potter had been a Death Eater at one point—did she harbor ill-will towards Abby? Did she want Abby dead because she thought Abby’s father was a traitor? Abby didn’t think so, but how else would a Death Eater be able to get inside Hogwarts?

“We need to alert Dumbledore’s Army.” Matty whispered, staring at Abby with wide-eyed concern.

“No.” Abby whispered back, barely audible. “We tell no one. I can’t stand anyone else watching over me.”

“Then what do we do?” David asked, leaning over to look at the article again.

“We wait.” Abby said plainly. It was all they could do. She already had people watching her as much as was humanly possible. The only thing that they could do was be prepared. That’s why Professor Potter’s training would be essential. They needed to learn as much as possible from her. “We need tutoring. Professor Potter can help us, we just can’t tell her why.”

“Of course.” Lauren whispered, nodding her head.

“We’ll keep you safe, Abby.” Sammy nodded her head encouragingly. “We promise.”

“As long as we stick together.” Matty responded confidently. He stuck out his hand and waited for the others. “To the alliance.”

“Five strong.” They all whispered together as their hands touched, signifying the strength of their friendship. Just then, Professor Potter walked into the room and began the day’s lecture. Afterwards, all of them, without Abby, would have to speak with Professor Potter about tutoring. And then later they would have to figure out how to escape Abby’s guard so that she could attend the sessions as well.

Five strong. She whispered in her head happily. Abby found confidence and exuberance in the fact that she wouldn’t have to endure this alone. She had friends that loved and cared for her. They would do anything for each other. Their bond was unbreakable.


Sorry it took me so long to post! 6 days...wow! I am so sorry!! But I absolutely loved this chapter. And picture Lauren..all giddy, bouncing in her seat. That was similar to how I was writing that scene. Let me know what you thought! I hope it won't be so long before I post the next chapter, but I can't promise anything! And just fyi...feedback helps motivate me to write faster!

Chapter Nineteen: Isolation

“PROVE TO ME THAT YOU WANT THIS!” Ginny screamed into the air at the students who were trying out for her Quidditch team.

“How bad is it?” Stephanie leaned towards Neville and whispered so that none of the students could hear.

They were sitting near the front of the stands of the Quidditch pitch watching tryouts for the Gryffindor team and, though Stephanie had never even seen anyone practice the game, she had surmised that it was not going well.

Neville grimaced at her question and did not take his eyes off the players on the pitch. “It’s not off to a great start. See that ball? It’s called a quaffle, and it’s supposed to go through one of those rings at the other end of the field. But they have only gotten a few shots even close.”

He continued pointing towards the players on the field. “And there’s supposed to be a golden snitch, but no one appears to even be looking for it.”

“THERE’S THE SNITCH!” Ginny started screaming and Stephanie grimaced. They sure took this game seriously. But she shouldn’t have been surprised after so much talk of Quidditch through the diaries. “KEMPTHORNE! GET THE SNITCH!”

“Maybe with a little practice they’ll start looking better.” Stephanie sighed, trying to remain positive. She didn’t really care whether her team won, just that the players had fun while they played. No one else seemed to share her viewpoint, however.

Neville sighed beside her, obviously disagreeing with her hopeful comment, and she couldn’t help but smile at his reaction. As much as she had wanted to keep her distance from him, it was almost impossible. They had so many shared duties due to the fact they were both Head of Gryffindor House. Mostly, they spent their extra time sitting in detention with the trouble-makers. It appeared that Gryffindor was full of rule-breakers this year, but that didn’t bother her, either, because she got to know her students better.

But having to spend time with Neville also intensified her feelings towards him. It took all her energy to try to keep her eyes off him and she was surprised that he didn’t notice. How embarrassing would that be if he found out? She wasn’t sure she would survive if he rejected her. He would reject her; there was no doubt about that fact.

And he should reject her because she was nothing but a danger magnet. Someone was out to get her and it wasn’t safe for anyone to be around her, not even at Hogwarts. For some unknown reason, he was afraid for her. She couldn’t understand it, but several students had taken to following her around as she walked through the castle.

Stephanie found it more cute than annoying because of their innocence. What were those students supposed to do against a Death Eater like Rabastan Lestrange or Dedrick Hargrave? They wouldn’t be able to last five minutes against Antonin Dolohov or Alecto Carrow. She just hoped that if one of them decided to attack her at Hogwarts her students would be spared. But the Death Eaters wouldn’t spare anyone, she knew that. She would have to make a deal with them to keep the students safe.

A deal, then. She would make a deal with them to keep her students safe. And there was only one thing she had to offer that they would even think about accepting. And they would accept because it was the most dangerous spell they could possess. It would make them more powerful than any other wizard in the world. Perdo Infestus.

She doubted they would come for her at Hogwarts. They did threaten her there, but that was only because she was there. If she had been at the Burrow, they would have found a way to return her photo album there. No. She was almost certain they would lure her away from Hogwarts. They would want her alone so they would have time to make her suffer.

Dedrick would torture her for having Kieran murdered. It was her fault Kieran had died—she had manipulated him even better than she thought was possible. Kieran had just been too full of the lust that had driven him through life. That was his true downfall, but still it was Stephanie who led him there.

Rodolphus was in Azkaban and Bellatrix was dead. Neither result was directly her fault, but she had helped protect the people who had captured Rodolphus and used the Killing Curse on Bellatrix. Would Rabastan blame her? Of course he would.

And there were more, countless more that despised her. They had always distrusted her and most had seen right through her façade. When it came, her death would not be easy and painless. She would trade her friends’ lives for the spell the Death Eaters would want. It would be harmful for the Aurors, but they would find a way around it. There had to be a counter-spell to her curse. They would find it and defeat the Death Eaters in the end. The story had to have a happy ending, there was no other option.

“What are you doing here?” Ginny’s voice broke through her thoughts and echoed on the silent Quidditch pitch. “I’ll teach you what we do to spies and traitors around here, Zacharias!”

Stephanie hadn’t realized that tryouts had ended or that the field had emptied. She tried to find the source of the commotion and realized that Ginny was storming towards one of the younger Slytherin students. Amber Zacharias stood frozen in her spot. She was whispering something, but Stephanie couldn’t hear what it was.

She quickly raised her wand and put a shield between Amber and Ginny. Then she rushed, with Neville at her side, towards the students on the field. Ginny’s chest was rising quickly with each deep breath.

“Ginny, calm down!” Neville called as they got closer to the dispute.

“What are you doing here?” Ginny asked through clenched teeth as Stephanie and Neville approached them.

“I’m sorry, I’ll go.” Amber looked defeated and looked towards the ground. There was something about her that told Stephanie she hadn’t been spying on the Gryffindor Quidditch team.

“Wait.” Stephanie said to the girl, then released the shield that separated the two students. “What’s going on, Amber?”

“I’m sorry, Professor.” Amber spoke quietly and still refused to look at them. Ginny huffed angrily next to her and Stephanie turned to glare at her friend. “I just wanted to talk to Ginny.”

“And tell the Slytherin team what our players look like.” Ginny snapped and Stephanie couldn’t help but laugh at that ridiculous comment. “What’s so funny?”

“You do know who you’re talking to, don’t you?” Stephanie responded, but she turned her expression serious.

“I wouldn’t do that.” Amber’s voice hardened and she slowly raised her head. Stephanie couldn’t help but watch the change in her demeanor with awe. “I wanted to ask you for forgiveness. Ginny, I know what kind of person you are. Normally you are so compassionate and I know that you have every right to hate me. I wouldn’t come to you if I wasn’t desperate.”

Stephanie watched Ginny’s expression soften into one of curiosity. Amber noticed as well, so she continued with more confidence than she had started with. “The Slytherins know the truth, Ginny. They know that I was working with you and Dumbledore’s Army last year. Honestly, I didn’t know what Joshua was planning. But you don’t realize what a huge relief it is that he’s gone. He and my father hated me. They bound me to their family only because it suited them, only because they gained something by my existence. And I feel so alone now. I don’t know how much longer I can handle this, Ginny.

“You glare at me like I was a Death Eater, the Hufflepuffs and Ravenclaws follow your example, and the Slytherins torture me. Every night in my room they make my life miserable. They curse me, play pranks on me, and, worst of all, everyone ignores me. Some of them make me relive memories that I’d just soon forget. Painful memories, like the one in your class, Professor.” Amber turned towards Stephanie and she shuddered.

“What’d they make you remember, Amber?” She asked empathically. She knew what it felt like to relive horrible memories and she didn’t wish it on anyone.

“You know, it doesn’t really matter.” Amber shrugged her shoulders. “It’s nothing significant, just every day of my life with my father and brother. But the loneliness is slowly killing me. I need your forgiveness, Ginny, or I don’t know how much longer I can hang on. You are the key to ending my isolation. Please forgive me Ginny. If I had known what Joshua was planning, I would have told you or I would have tried to stop him myself.”

Ginny’s face was unreadable and they stood in silence for a long time. Both Stephanie and Neville knew the only person who should break that silence was Ginny. And Stephanie knew that Ginny would make the right decision. She would make things right and Amber’s suffering would be minimized.

“What do you have that your brother and father needed?” Ginny asked reluctantly, as though she doubted there would be an answer that would suit her.

“An illusion of innocence.” Amber responded simply, though no less sure of herself.

Stephanie watched Ginny’s expression with interest. Ginny merely nodded in understanding and then surprised them all by leaning in and giving Amber a tight embrace.

“I’m sorry, Amber.” She whispered in the girl’s ear. “We shouldn’t have treated you like that. You didn’t do anything wrong and I’m sorry.”

“Thank you.” Amber whispered back as tears rolled down her cheeks. Stephanie couldn’t help but smile at the exchange. Finally, Amber was getting the companionship that she deserved and alliances were delving deeper than she could have imagined. There was one very simple reason why there were so many Slytherins this year and Stephanie was starting to see its effects take place. Things were about to change at Hogwarts; things were about to get better for all the students at the ancient school.

*~*~*~*

“Look at them. It’s so disgusting.” Rachel hissed under her breath, staring at Professors Potter and Longbottom and Ginny Weasley. Daniel felt his face curl up into a vicious smile. “They think they run the school.”

“You’re just jealous, Rachel.” Daniel laughed conceitedly. He knew that Rachel didn’t like Weasley, and he had never been fond of the traitor himself, but she needed to keep herself in check. They had a mission to do and annoying the blood-traitor would only delay their plans.

“Of what, Blaiser?” Rachel eyed him with pure hatred and he couldn’t help but smile even wider.

“You know that you loved him and he wanted her.” As much as Daniel knew he shouldn’t push her buttons, he couldn’t help it. Rachel was his friend, but she definitely needed to get over herself. It was utterly ridiculous the way she had thrown herself at Joshua Zacharias—and his rejection fueled her hatred towards Amber and Ginny.

“And she thought she was too good for him.” Rachel snarled at him. “But don’t worry, she’ll pay. I’ll make sure that she pays for Joshua’s death by the end of the school year.”

The tone of her voice took away the humor he felt. She could not jeopardize their mission—Abby’s life was on the line. His friends had promised to keep her alive at all costs in exchange for being handsomely rewarded, each Slytherin receiving their heart’s desire. Jason Seabold had offered all he had to ensure that the Slytherins would protect his daughter and Daniel would not allow any of them to fail. Abby meant too much to him to see them lose her.

“Don’t you dare, Rachel Marie Sorenson.” Daniel muttered under his breath, slowly emphasizing each syllable of her name. “Do you remember what Jason promised you? You will see your father again, that I promise you.”

“How can he promise that?” Rachel’s tone softened and tears came to her eyes in remembrance of her father. He hadn’t been a Death Eater, but he had been recruited by the Dark Lord to assist in Stephanie Potter murdering the Minister of Magic, Rufus Scrimgeour. “They are investigating him for his role, and I am sure that he is going to be arrested soon. How can he promise anything?”

“Don’t you ever question what he is or is not capable of.” Daniel’s voice turned to the dangerous tone of a natural born leader. He stared directly in her eye and sat forward, knowing that he could convince her to help him without any form of compensation. People tended to listen to him, regardless of the ethics and morals of what he requested of them. He had merely been polite by allowing his friends the option of getting something in return. “You cannot touch one hair on Weasley’s head; you know that she is key to keeping Stephanie Potter alive. The main focus of our job is to keep Abby alive, and to do that, Potter needs to remain accessible. The traitor will lead us to those that want Abby dead, I can feel it. It is only a matter of time.

“Once that happens, and we ensure Abby’s permanent safety, you may do whatever you like to Weasley. Just remember that Potter is mine.” He ended with an excited smile. Daniel would show the world that he was more powerful, thanks to the training his father had provided him, than the disgustingly great Stephanie Potter.

“Fine.” Rachel stuck out her lower lip and sat back in her chair, folding her arms across her chest. She was pouting, something that made her look even more hideous than usual.

“And stop that.” He pushed a butterbeer towards her. “Stick to the plan. Look like we’re having fun. This is supposed to be a date.”

Her posture eased immediately, almost as though he had used his wand instead of his voice to instruct her. It was a gift he had been born with, really. Sometimes he had way too much fun with his ability to manipulate, but right then he was focused on his task.

He leaned closer to Rachel and touched her fingers that lay gently on the table. Then, he smirked up at her and her tears immediately disappeared. She looked directly into his eyes as they listened to the conversation that was happening in the booth right behind him.

“You said she was coming.” Longbottom whispered with irritation and Daniel could feel the booth move as Longbottom started to get up. There was a high divider and Daniel knew that the two sitting there could not see them. He and Rachel had made a point to get there plenty early so that Longbottom and Weasley wouldn’t see them come in.

“Sit down!” Weasley hissed back and the booth stopped shaking. He must have returned to his seat. “She’ll be here.”

“What if someone got to her?” Longbottom sounded like he was going to cry and Daniel held in his laughter. Oh, come on. He thought to himself. Give the idiot some credit. Does she really deserve or need constant security detail? “What if she’s hurt?”

“Neville. Breathe.” Weasley whispered, trying to calm down her friend. “Don’t worry about her. She’s with George and the DA is watching her; she’ll be okay.”

“But I want to know where Blaiser is.” Longbottom spoke through gritted teeth and Daniel couldn’t help but notice the amused expression in Rachel’s eyes. “He’s the only threat to her right now. We need to be watching him more closely.”

Daniel couldn’t help but let out a snort. Of course he hated Stephanie Potter and couldn’t wait to see her dead. Jason had told him and his father the real reason why he hated Potter even more than Lucius Malfoy. The Dark Lord hadn’t given the orders to kill Abby’s family—it had been Stephanie Potter. Potter had had Lucius relay the message that if Jason failed, Abby wouldn’t be so lucky the next time. And when the Dark Lord fell, many of the Death Eaters accused Jason of treason. Many of Jason’s dragons had been released prior to the final battle and then ultimately destroyed by the Order of the Phoenix. That’s why they wanted Abby dead and Daniel was certain that Potter was behind the threats to Jason and Abby.

Daniel was certain there were others who wanted Abby gone, too, and that's why he couldn't kill Stephanie Potter too quickly; she would lead him to the remaining Death Eaters. He knew they were gathering and forming some sort of army, and he knew they were after Stephanie because they were threatening her, too. Once Potter led him to the remaining Death Eaters he would be able to eliminate any and all threats to Abby's safety.

He had recognized the fear that everyone was talking about. It had happened the first day of school in her first years’ Defense Against the Dark Arts class, and it was all those first years could talk about that day. She had seen something that terrified her and he knew the only thing that could cause that level of fear in someone who had seen it all would be a ghost. Someone from her past was threatening her life. Eventually that person, or group of people, would come for her. And he would be waiting to exact his revenge so that Abby would remain safe. He loved Abby too much to see her suffer any more than she already had. That’s why he had been so strict on her. And she seemed to understand his desperate need.

“They are keeping as close a watch on him as they can without inciting any suspicion. Right now, he seems to be completely focused on Abby Seabold.” Weasley’s voice softened as she tried to cover it so that no one else could hear. But of course he could hear because he was sitting right next to them.

So, Dumbledore’s Army was obsessively watching him. Well, he’d give them something to watch. Daniel slammed Rachel’s hands onto the table and stood up forcefully, almost tipping the table over.

“That’s it, Rachel!” He shouted so loud that Rachel almost jumped out of her skin. Her eyes went wide with surprise. “How could you ever think that you were good enough for me? ME! Daniel Blaiser! I don’t date losers.”

He stormed past Weasley and Longbottom, whose eyes were wide in terror. Of course they would know he had heard everything they had just said. His smile only got wider as he thought about the reaction Rachel would most certainly have. He would have hurt her by that outburst, but he didn’t care. His smooth manipulation abilities would require that she still submit to his wishes. It was moments like this that allowed him to have the enjoyment he deserved. Hogwarts could just be so boring sometimes.

*~*~*~*

“It is so great to see you.” Stephanie inhaled deeply as she held George tightly in her arms, embracing him for a long time. “How have you been?”

“That’s not important.” George responded with a smile. “I promised you that we’d spend the day talking about you. Have you been thinking about what I told you?”

Stephanie shook her head in embarrassment. She knew she should never have sent that letter to him at the beginning of the year, but she was ultimately glad she had. He was able to give her some insight and it helped her get through the last two months.

“Every day.” She responded sheepishly.

“Good.” George laughed, patting her on the back lightly. He grabbed her shoulders and made her face him. His expression turned solemn and Stephanie braced herself for the worst that he could do. She had expected that he was going to be harsh with her, and she deserved it, but she wasn’t expecting the next words that came out of his mouth. “Now tell me who has earned this crush of yours?”

She immediately felt her cheeks burn and she forced herself to look away from his gaze just as a big smile brightened his face. Stephanie couldn’t help but smile at his ability to lighten the mood. She definitely didn’t deserve his friendship, but she would take it because he was the person she felt closest too since Fred died. He knew her inside and out.

“Not a chance, buddy.” Stephanie laughed and playfully slapped him on the shoulder. He pretended to be offended, but she knew he was joking with her. After so much trouble with some of her students, and having to pretend with Ginny and Neville that everything was alright, it was nice to just be herself for a few minutes. She knew that it wouldn’t last long because she had promised Ginny and Neville that she would meet them before it was time to return to Hogwarts. George would have to go back to selling his products soon, too. It was a shame that she didn’t have much more free time.

“I’ll get it out of you one way or another.” His look pierced through her and she couldn’t look him in the eyes for fear that he would realize who she was falling for. It was safe for George because he was stationed far from Hogwarts. There was little danger that he would be harmed, but Neville, Ginny, and the rest of her students were in danger by her presence. She had to stay as far from Neville and Ginny as possible. And she cared for them both more than she valued her own life. They were important.

“Sorry.” She smiled broadly.

But suddenly George’s expression turned serious once again and her stomach dropped. She knew immediately that something was wrong as George took her hand and led her towards a secluded path. They were alone and Stephanie finally felt safe enough to whisper her thoughts out loud.

“What’s going on, George?” She whispered hoarsely. “What’s wrong? Is it Harry? Your mum?”

“They don’t want us telling you about this, Stephanie.” George’s large eyes pierced her mind now for very different reasons than just moments before. She felt her breath tighten and her hands instinctively reach for her wand. George placed his strong hand on hers and held it in place. “Harry and Ron are training with the Aurors even more strenuously than before to protect you, Stephanie. Kingsley wants them prepared.”

“For what?” She could only get her voice to come out in a high-pitched squeak. Harry and Ron were in danger. Her mind raced quickly through all the scenarios that could be playing out outside of Hogwarts, but she couldn’t wrap her mind around any of them. They were too horrible to imagine.

“When Fred died, I promised myself that I would do what it took to protect you, Stephanie.” George’s voice was full of sadness now, which only made Stephanie even more panicked. How many people were going to place themselves in danger just to protect her? It didn’t make sense and she definitely didn’t deserve it. She couldn’t say anything and he just continued. “They don’t want you to know about this information because they want you to be happy. But I think you deserve to know so that you can be prepared for the worst. You need to be ready.”

“Just tell me.” Stephanie commanded, gaining some sort of control. If she knew what was happening, then maybe there was a way she could figure out how to make things right. She had to be able to keep her friends and family safe. “How bad is it?”

“Stephanie, they’ve reactivated the Order of the Phoenix.” George said it like it was supposed to make sense to her. There was only one reason why Kingsley would reactivate the Order, and that would be…

“He’s not back.” Stephanie whispered disbelievingly, stunned into a state where nothing made sense. The world was flipped upside down and nothing seemed right. Nothing would ever be right again. Nothing would be right until she was dead. Dead. Cold. Alone. “He can’t be back.”

“No.” George shook his head and Stephanie breathed out in relief. If it wasn’t the Dark Lord who had returned, what could be so awful that required the reassembly of the Order of the Phoenix? He soon answered her unspoken questions. “Stephanie, they have been unable to locate some of the Death Eaters who escaped capture. It appears that these individuals have banded together and are creating an army for one specific purpose…”

His voice trailed off and he gave Stephanie a minute to put all of the pieces together and order her thoughts. She didn’t want to believe what he was telling her, but she knew that out of all of her friends, George was the least likely to lie to her. He would be blunt and up front with her because he respected her so much more than the others did. He trusted her ability to cope much more than she deserved. She really appreciated his effort.

“Me.” Stephanie said the word more loudly than she even thought was possible. She had imagined her voice would falter with fear. But, surprisingly, she wasn’t afraid. The fact that they were after her was a very good thing. They would want her, not her students and not her friends. Sure, they would try to get to her by using her friends. But it didn’t need to come to that. She could keep them safe. She alone was capable of that.

“Stephanie, it’s important that you tell me the absolute truth.” His eyes burned with the pleading that was in his voice. “Can you do that for me?”

“Of course.” Stephanie responded automatically, though she knew what he was going to ask. She could tell because of the look in his eye and it was the only thing she was unwilling to tell him. Her friends would not put themselves in danger because of her. It was a simple fact and she would not allow it.

“Has anyone been in contact with you?” George whispered urgently. His voice was soft and she knew that he cared about her, even more than she had suspected. He loved her like a sister and she felt the same way towards him. She loved him like a brother, like Harry. He was family. How could she lie to him? “Have they tried to threaten you?”

But she had to. To protect him, to keep them all safe, she had to make sure that they knew nothing of the true danger she was in. No one must know how terrified she was. She had tremendous experience in lying to many sorts of people, so it wasn’t even a challenge. It just tore her apart inside to lie to George. She was lying more to him; she was lying to them all. But she had to do this alone. It was the only way.

“No.” Stephanie said simply, as though there were no other answer. It was a confident reply and George sighed in relief, seeming to believe that she was telling the truth. Poor George. Stephanie tormented herself.

“But you would tell me if someone had or does, right?” George’s voice was more pleading than commanding. Stephanie nodded, unable to get the words out, and he hugged her tightly. “You don’t have to do this alone. We’ll make sure that you survive this. There is no need to be afraid. You are safe.”

“I have to go.” The look in his eyes as they pulled apart ripped at her stomach. He was hurt by her abruptness. But she was weak; she was very close to telling him the whole thing. And that wasn’t good for either of them. He was safer not knowing that she had been threatened. That someone, she still didn’t know who exactly, had broken into Sirius’ place and stolen her diary and then returned it to her at Hogwarts. She wasn’t safe anywhere. “I promised Ginny and Neville I’d meet them at Madame Rosmerta’s. They’ll be worried about me.”

His face lightened and he smiled at her. “Well, take care of yourself, Stephanie.”

“You too.” She responded, not willing to promise him anything. When the Death Eaters came for her, she’d be ready. And she would be more willing to sacrifice herself than put her friends in danger. So she couldn’t lie to George now, not after she had already given him the biggest lie she had to give.

“And I’ll find out who it is!” George laughed, trying to cheer her up and Stephanie knew that he had returned them to their earlier conversation. He could probably guess if he gave it a few moments thought, but she wasn’t about to give him that small hint.

She turned back towards him and spoke with a quick wave of her hand. “Goodbye, George!”

“Bye Stephanie!” He called and they went their own separate ways. Stephanie sighed as she started on her way back to Hogsmeade and attempted to put on her happy face. Everything was going to be okay for her friends, which was great for her. No one else would suffer because she existed. That was good news.


Sorry it has been taking me so long to post, but I have a feeling that this is going to become the norm. I've been too exhausted when I get off work to write, and I use my mornings to exercise. But my goal is to post on the weekends, so the next chapter probably won't be posted until next Saturday or Sunday. But please be patient and I would love it if you stuck with me anyway! Let me know what you thought about this chapter! I love the Daniel POV!!!

Chapter Twenty: The Package

“Just get over yourself, Rachel.” Daniel refused to look at Rachel Sorenson. They had been acting strangely since their trip to Hogsmeade, but Abby couldn’t really care any less. Daniel appeared to be more amused than angry at Rachel’s behavior and so Abby had told herself that she wouldn’t worry about what was going on between them.

Rachel and Daniel had been working on something for the Hogsmeade trip, but they refused to talk about what they were planning or what had happened. Abby heard through rumors that they had been on a date, and that Daniel stormed off on her, but she couldn’t bring herself to believe it. Daniel would never be attracted to Rachel that way. No, Abby had concluded. They had been up to something; she just didn’t know what it was.

“Are you ready for that test today in Transfiguration?” David whispered across the table towards her and Sammy. “It’s going to be so hard!”

“You’ll do just fine.” Sammy rolled her eyes. Abby knew they all would do okay. Only Sammy and David had been able to go off and study with the Gryffindors, and they came back with information that she would need. Matty was so brilliant in Transfiguration she couldn’t help but pout a little that she couldn’t go. But it was too dangerous for her to attempt to get together with the Gryffindors. Daniel would either have isolated her completely or told her father, so she didn’t have any other choice.

Daniel had picked up on the amount of time she spent alone. He attributed it to the fact that Sammy and David didn’t want to spend time with her or were sick of the constant presence of the older students. But little did he know that he was so far off base it was almost embarrassing for him.

Things had been busy in the past week for her and their alliance. They had approached Professor Potter with their yearning to learn more advanced material, and she gladly obliged to tutor them once a week. They would meet on Sunday afternoons for a couple of hours to gain the experience they desired. Professor Potter assumed they were just eager, but Abby knew better. They needed to be prepared if the Death Eaters came after her. The five of them had to stick together and try to defeat anyone who wanted to kill her. It was all so exciting!

“We know this stuff.” Abby confirmed what Sammy was saying and David merely nodded in skeptical agreement. She knew that David was brilliant for his age and so he would do just fine. His lack of confidence in school-related abilities surprised her, especially since he never lacked confidence when facing Daniel. Maybe it was false bravado, but whatever it was, David gave Daniel a run for his money.

David was just about to say something when his eyes opened wide. Before Abby could ask him what was wrong, something rock hard hit her in the head and she turned around quickly, trying to catch the perpetrator.

But what she found was Lauren pointing towards the front of the Great Hall. And she forced herself to look in the direction that Lauren was gesturing so that Daniel would not see the silent exchange between friends.

“Oh my goodness!” Sammy whispered while grabbing onto Abby’s hand and squeezing hard, also trying not to gain attention of the other Slytherin students.

“What is she looking at?” David asked softly, but almost demandingly as though Abby would have the unknown answer.

Abby could only shake her head. Professor Potter was sitting at the teacher’s table looking at some mail she must have just received. There were several smaller pieces of paper and then one regular sized piece of parchment. But that wasn’t what Lauren wanted them to see. Professor Potter’s face was completely white, as though something had given her a terrible fright, and the paper in her hands shook violently.

That was it. Their first day in Defense Against the Dark Arts had been enough to stir alarm, but now there was something else that was scaring her. Abby was determined to figure out what was going on. She stood forcefully and Sammy followed. David stayed seated, knowing that he couldn’t follow where they were going.

“It’s not time to go to class yet, Abigail.” Daniel’s voice was smooth, almost like velvet, and she hated when he tried to use that tone with her. As far as she knew, she was the only person that could not be manipulated by his voice; she knew him too well for that. “Where do you think you are going?”

“Bathroom, if that’s any of your business.” She snapped. Abby had agreed to let his friends follow her around, but they didn’t need to know her personal business. She was definitely getting sick of it and was yearning for an escape, though she had promised him that she wouldn’t even attempt it. But she just couldn’t sit back and watch Professor Potter any longer; she needed to try to do something to help. And doing so would mean that more than just Daniel’s rules would be broken that day. Abby’s heart beat rapidly in anticipation.

“Rachel.” Daniel stated with a bored expression.

“I can’t.” Rachel just stared at her full plate of food. “Corey and I have to get to Potions early to help Professor Slughorn.”

“Craig.” Daniel said another name, and this time the person nodded. That was good for Abby, because that meant she, Sammy, and Lauren wouldn’t be followed into the girl’s restroom. They could speak openly, as long as the bathroom was unoccupied. They would just have to get lucky.

Abby lead the way towards the hallway where the girl’s restroom was located and she saw Lauren nod in her direction from her peripheral vision. Sammy and Abby walked without talking as Craig followed close behind them. Finally, they had reached the restroom and they each opened the stalls to make sure that they were alone. They were.

Just a few moments later, Lauren walked through the door and the girls quickly rushed together. Lauren looked a little worried, but both Abby and Sammy were exhilarated. They were going to go on an adventure and it was going to be amazing.

“What do you think she got?” Sammy whispered, making sure that Craig didn’t get suspicious by their chatter. They’d have to make their rendezvous quick so that he wouldn’t either come in or send someone else in to look for them. Being caught fraternizing with a Gryffindor would be horrible for Abby.

“I don’t know.” Lauren shrugged. “An owl dropped off a pretty thick envelope. She looked intrigued at first, but her expression changed the minute she opened the letter. Professor Potter looked at the smaller pieces first and her face got whiter with each one. Then she read the letter and she started trembling. Whatever it was frightened her. She’s definitely scared of something.”

“Do you think someone’s threatening her?” Abby asked.

“I don’t know.” Lauren shrugged again. “But it can’t be anything good, right? I mean this happened on the first day of class when she saw something on her desk, too. She’s the best teacher here at Hogwarts. We have to do something for her.”

“What about Dumbledore’s Army?” Sammy suggested. “There are more of them and they could know how to help her.”

“If she wanted Ginny to know what was going on, I’m sure that she would have told her.” Lauren spoke slowly, thinking through their options. “And I know for a fact she didn’t explain what happened on the first day of classes. Ginny didn’t have a clue why Stephanie reacted that way. Professor Potter doesn’t want anyone to know, and that’s why we have to figure this out secretly.”

“So what do we do?” Sammy asked.

“We have to find out what she received today.” Abby kept her eyes on the door, waiting for it to open. They were taking too long. “I’m pretty sure she’ll keep it in her classroom because that’s where she kept whatever scared her before. We need to see if we can find it and it has to happen tonight.”

“But you won’t be able to come with us.” Sammy pouted, crossing her arms over her chest and Abby couldn’t help but smile.

“Of course I can. I wouldn’t miss this for the world.” Abby knew that her good behavior would pay off. Daniel had never kept surveillance on her when they were sure that she was asleep. All she needed was to make Daniel think she was asleep and then she, David, and Sammy would be able to sneak out of the Slytherin dormitories. “Let’s meet outside the Defense Against the Dark Arts classroom at two-thirty. That’ll give Daniel and his friends enough time to get to sleep. They won’t check on me because I promised Daniel that I wouldn’t sneak around the castle. He doesn’t think that I’d ever disobey him.”

“You are horrible, Abby.” Lauren giggled, but just then the door opened.

“Abby!” Craig called into the bathroom. “Come on, you’re going to make me late! If you don’t come out of there in the next ten sec-”

But she had emerged from the bathroom before he could finish his sentence. Sammy skipped out just moments later and Lauren stayed behind, so as not to arouse any form of suspicion. It was going to be exciting sneaking through the castle. And she would finally be able to feel a little bit of freedom. Hopefully that feeling wouldn’t be addictive because she wouldn’t be able to sneak away too often. She didn’t want to even think about the repercussions if Daniel found out what she was up to.

“What are you so happy about?” Craig murmured in response to the huge grin plastered on her face. But she didn’t care what he thought. He’d never guess what she was up to. Instead of responding, she just shrugged in his direction and he rolled his eyes. Then he dropped her and Sammy off at their first class of the day and walked away after he watched them enter the classroom.

*~*~*~*

The day before had been pretty uneventful except for the information George had provided her. She couldn’t believe that no one would tell her how active the Death Eaters were becoming to get to her. And even more than that, she couldn’t believe they were going to so much trouble to lay their hands on her. Honestly, was her life really worth all that trouble? Her friends were risking themselves for her safety and the Death Eaters were willing to attempt an attack on her just for revenge.

When was life going to get less complicated? If she had known what she would go through by staying behind at Malfoy Manor back when Professor Dumbledore wanted to keep her safe, would she have chosen the same thing? Would she have allowed herself to suffer so much for so long if she had known? They were difficult questions to answer, but regardless of what she had gone through, Stephanie knew the exact answer without even having to think about it.

Of course she would have. She would have done anything to protect her brother. Twelve years she had gone without one other person to lean on, besides Dobby, but he had been in the same position as her so he couldn’t really help. For her brother, and the friends she made in the process, her suffering was worth it. That’s why she had to make this one last sacrifice. And it would be her last; she would make sure of that.

Stephanie jumped in surprise when an owl dropped an envelope into her breakfast, splattering her face with eggs. She slowly wiped the residue from her eyes as she read the outside of the envelope addressed to her. The messy scrawl didn’t look at all familiar and that worried her. Who would be writing her?

Stephanie Potter
Teacher’s Table
Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry

She quickly looked around the room to make sure that no one was paying attention to her. The students appeared to be engrossed in their breakfasts and talking about the trip to Hogsmeade that had happened the day before. It was amusing the way they couldn’t stop talking about Daniel Blaiser’s outburst with Rachel Sorenson.

It looked like Ginny was talking Quidditch strategy with a few of the other Gryffindors. She had been upset that she couldn’t let Matthew Finnigan on the team, but as horrible as the rest of those who tried out were, he was just too young. He had been heartbroken, but Ginny said that he’d have another opportunity next year. He’d be a good addition to the team once he gained some more experience.

Neville was busy talking with Hagrid about something that she could care less about. No one was paying attention to her, so it was the perfect time to open the mysterious package. She took a deep breath and ran her finger under the flap, cutting an edge on the top of the envelope so that she could open it.

Several items came out when she reached her hand inside. Several pictures and a letter. What is this? She thought to herself in confusion as she shuffled through each photograph. And with each new one she looked at, she felt the blood slowly drain from her face.

The first was a picture of her in her bedroom at Grimmauld Place. She was on the floor in the middle of a mess looking distraught. She was looking for something. Her photo album. The second was a picture of her curled up in Neville’s arms at Severus’ house. She had only been there once—it was the day that Neville had surprised her. She had realized that someone was watching her, but she refused to tell Neville. She felt her hands start to shake as she continued looking through the rest of the pictures.

There was another one of Hermione and Kingsley at the Ministry of Magic; Harry and Ron looking to be in deep concentration as they practiced some lesson at the Auror Training Facility; George as he helped a customer at his shop; Ginny and Neville in Hogsmeade from the day before. But the ones the disturbed her the most were the ones taken inside of Hogwarts. There were pictures of so many students. Her heart dropped as she realized what was going on. What these pictures represented.

Forgetting where she was, Stephanie laid the pictures on the table and lifted the letter closer to her so that she could read the unfamiliar scrawl. She didn’t care who it was from; she just wanted it to end. Why couldn’t they just come after her already? Why wouldn’t they just get everything over with? They obviously wanted her dead. If she knew how to find them, she’d surrender immediately. She took a deep, ragged breath and began to read the letter.

Dear Stephanie,

We were such good friends for several years and I am disappointed that I have not heard from you in almost a year. I truly hope that you have not forgotten about me. Or my brother. It was your doing that led to his death, was it not? Would you really forget about that or what you are capable of? You seem to have forgotten that I have seen the real Stephanie Potter.

But that is your little game, isn’t it? You are very skillful at the art of manipulation, Stephanie. Almost as good as me, I’d say. Though we all know that no one is better at manipulation than I am. Even you should be willing to admit that much. But don’t worry, Stephanie. I will not attempt to manipulate you into leaving the safety of Hogwarts or the guard of Aurors that have been protecting the castle and following you on your little escapades outside the castle. And I have no doubt that you are unaware of Kingsley Shacklebolt’s order to keep you protected at all costs.

No worries, there, Stephanie. I would like to speak with you about your treason to myself, my brother, the Death Eaters, and the Dark Lord, but I will not force you outside of the castle. No. You will come to me of your own free will. And I am sure you are wondering how I know that you will come, so I have included several reminders, though you have most likely already noticed them.

I was there, Stephanie. You were downstairs while I was in your bedroom. I didn’t want to hurt you then; I just wanted to show you that if you do not come to me, there are ways I can get to you. I was also in the woods outside Snape’s house. The way you wrapped yourself in Neville Longbottom’s arms was disgusting and I almost murdered you right then and there. But I composed myself, and you should consider yourself lucky. Because it would have been so easy to kill you both. I know that you sensed that someone was there, but you felt safe with Neville. I just couldn’t believe you would betray my brother like that. Or have you forgotten Kieran? Oh, that’s right. We’ve already covered that. I apologize for my digression.

These photographs will serve as a reminder for you and what your motivation will be for coming to speak with me once I summon you. No one else needs to be harmed, so do not fear over the safety of your friends. Though I wonder if I am making a miscalculation on your personality. I witnessed the emotions you displayed to your friends when Draco held you captive—the foolish boy should have just taken care of you, but he wanted to gloat over his successes. Have no fear, Stephanie. I will not make your death a public one, though I cannot promise that it will be quick and painless either. There are others that need to speak with you, as well, though I can promise that I will be the one to end your life.

Again, I digress. My apologies. I was wondering about the honesty behind your words to your friends. You do not turn to them when things go wrong. You never told anyone about your photo album going missing. And you didn’t tell anyone when it was returned to you, untouched. You don’t let your friends near you, emotionally speaking of course, and you push away the ones that try. No one else has isolated you, Stephanie. You have done that all by yourself. What you should ask yourself now is what harm was done in that action? Will your friends still attempt to protect you when your life depends on their allegiance? Do you even want that?

When I summon you, you must come alone. That symbolizes the isolation that you have created for yourself. There will be enough of us to defeat any who you would bring, so does it really make sense to sentence your friends to their death just to keep yourself alive? I don’t think so, but what do I know? You always were the most selfish person I had ever met, so it may make sense to you.

Don’t worry, Stephanie. I have been and will continue to watch over you. No one will harm you until I summon you.

Take care of yourself,

Dedrick Hargrave

Stephanie looked up from the piece of parchment and looked quickly around the room. No one appeared to have noticed her at all and she had to keep it that way. Dedrick was right. She was selfish and it was time to end it all. She would do this alone, no matter what it cost her. She would not put her friends in danger just to keep herself safe. That was wrong and she would not allow it.

She slowly got up from the teacher’s table, and made her way to the classroom where she held the morning’s Study Hall period. That would give her enough time to compose herself and try to think of a plan. She needed to figure out how to stop Dedrick from communicating with her in front of so many people. Should she just leave Hogwarts and try to find Dedrick? No. He would have instructed her to do that. What if he came looking for her and she wasn’t there? Would he hurt the students? Of course he would. She had to stay put.

Stephanie laid her head down on the table and took several deep breaths, willing herself not to cry. She had been prepared to die three times before: when she released Neville and Ginny from their captivity; the night the Dark Lord was defeated; and while she was held prisoner by Draco Malfoy. She could prepare herself for the inevitable one more time.

*~*~*~*

“Abby.” Abby could hear someone calling her name, but she couldn’t quite bring herself into consciousness enough to register who would be talking to her so late. Just then, she felt herself shudder and realized that someone was shaking her. “Abby, wake up. It’s time. We have to meet David in the common room.”

“All right.” She mumbled more to herself than to Sammy. Abby was more excited for the little ounce of freedom that she could barely contain herself, but she forced herself to stay focused.

She and Sammy quickly put some dark clothes on and crept towards the common room. Every few seconds, they would peek behind their shoulders to see if anyone was following them. No one was, of course. Daniel would never imagine that Abby would sneak away like that. And she shouldn’t have, but she felt safe enough inside the school walls.

They quickly met up with David and crept through the entrance of the Slytherin dormitories. Their trek down the halls of the school went quickly and without incident. Abby thought it had gone too easily, but they still had so much to do, so she couldn’t feel safe until they all returned to their beds. Soon enough, they reached the Defense Against the Dark Arts classroom and found Lauren and Matty waiting for them. Lauren looked antsy, but Matty looked absolutely frightened. Abby couldn’t be sure, but she thought his expression turned to excitement the minute he saw her round the corner. It had to be her imagination, but she returned his smile.

“We were starting to think you weren’t coming.” Matty whispered jokingly. Abby shook her head quickly.

“Little miss perfect fell asleep.” Sammy giggled and the others joined in. Abby, however, didn’t find anything funny about that comment.

“I’m not perfect.” She stated matter-of-factly, which only erupted their quiet giggles even more forcefully. “I’m not.”

“Whatever you say, Abby.” Lauren responded softly and then turned towards the door. “Let’s go.”

Lauren opened the door and they all slunk inside the dark classroom. Abby lit her wand and walked towards the front of the room. “Whatever scared her the first time was on her desk. We should start there.”

They made their way towards the desk and David and Matty took the drawers on the left while Sammy, Abby, and Lauren took the drawers on the right. Almost immediately after opening the bottom drawer, Abby heard Matty gasp in surprise.

“No way!” He said just a little bit too loudly as he reached down to grab a piece of parchment. “I didn’t think this really existed! I thought Seamus was pulling my leg.”

“What is it?” Abby craned her neck to see what Matty had found.

“The Marauder’s Map.” Matty said the words like they were supposed to mean something to the rest of them, but David, Lauren, Abby, and Sammy just stared at him blankly. “It was Harry Potter’s. Here, let me show you.”

He unfolded the parchment and Abby couldn’t help but wonder if he had lost his mind. The parchment was completely blank. But she could only open her mouth in wonderment as he tapped the parchment and muttered under his breath, “I solemnly swear that I am up to no good.”

In front of her own eyes, the parchment began to fill itself and she could soon tell that it was a map of Hogwarts. Matty continued to explain the purpose of the map. “This map shows you where everyone in the castle is located. See, there.”

He pointed towards the Slytherin dormitories. “Daniel is in his room. There’s Craig, and Rachel, Tom, Mark, Fred, and Corey and Tom. They don’t have a clue. And, see here.” He pointed towards the top of the castle and Abby recognized it as Gryffindor Tower. “Ginny Weasley is sleeping in her room.”

“This is amazing.” Sammy breathed softly and Abby was speechless.

“Do you realize how much this could help us?” David spoke excitedly.

“No!” Abby responded quickly. This map would be useful, but there was only one problem. “It’s Professor Potter’s! We can’t take this.”

“Oh, come on. What does she need this for?” Matty argued, trying to convince her that they needed to keep the map. “This will help us help her, Abby. We can keep an eye on the castle for her.”

“I don’t know…” Abby muttered, though she did want to have the map. It could also help her keep track of Daniel; it would make it so much easier to hang out with Matty and Lauren. And she did want to spend more time with them.

“Come oooonnn.” Matty fidgeted and Abby couldn’t help but smile at his enthusiasm. He was so much fun to be with and she would never give up his friendship. The map would make it so much easier…

“Fine.” Abby conceded, knowing that it was wrong. But she wouldn’t agree to steal the map without one condition. “But I get to keep it.” She requested this so that she could keep it safe.

“Of course.” David and Matty replied in unison.

“Now, can we get back to business?” Lauren tapped her foot anxiously and they all went back to looking for what they had come for. No one spoke until a few moments later when Abby had reached the very top drawer.

And there it was, though she didn’t realize its significance until she opened the letter. Her breath got caught in her throat as she read the letter, and again as she slowly lifted the pictures that had accompanied it. She felt four pairs of eyes boring into her skull as she looked over the materials.

“Matty…” She whispered, fingering one of the photographs.

“What?!?” He exclaimed, unsure of why she was reacting that way to a simple piece of paper. She knew that he couldn’t tell that it was a photograph from his angle.

“It’s you.” She turned the photograph around so that he could see it in his own wand light. And there he was, on the Quidditch pitch with the other Gryffindors trying out for the team.

But that wasn’t all. There was a picture of her as well, only she was all alone. How had someone taken a picture of her alone when she was never left without some sort of company? Shivers went through her entire body, though she couldn’t let her friends see how scared she was. Was someone, this same person who had threatened Professor Potter, trying to get to her, too? She had heard that the Death Eaters wanted to murder her to exact revenge on her father, but she hadn’t truly believed it until that very moment. It was true; it was all true. And Daniel knew exactly what he was doing, only he had been wrong about Professor Potter. Professor Potter wasn’t trying to kill her, she was trying to protect her.

While she had been thinking about the meaning behind the pictures, Lauren had grabbed the letter from her hands and had read it aloud. There was silence as they all thought about what it meant.

“What do we do with this?” Sammy whispered, looking absolutely terrified. Abby knew that Sammy cared about Professor Potter too much to not do anything to help her.

“Dumbledore’s Army?” Lauren offered, which was always the next step because of Lauren’s sister being a part of the group.

“No.” Abby shook her head. “There is only one person who can help her. He can figure out how to help Professor Potter.”

“NO!” Four voices whispered in unison, though Abby had expected the reaction. It would be a long shot and they could all risk getting into serious trouble by showing this to him. Abby, though, would go alone. She would make sure that she was the only one punished for their crimes.

“It’s the only way. Look what happened before—she never told anyone. We need to tell someone about this. She’s in too much danger.” Abby tried to reason with them, though she could tell that it wasn’t working. “I’ll do it alone. Everything will be fine, I promise.”

“Imagine what he would do to you.” Sammy whispered.

“We will go with you.” Matty responded, standing up straight. The others nodded and Abby knew it would be fruitless to argue. She grabbed the stack of papers and began walking towards the door. They would go to the only person that she could think of that could help Stephanie Potter, regardless of the repercussions of her decision. This was about more than just herself or her friends now. It was the right thing to do.


Okay, so I absolutely love the letter that Dedrick sent to Stephanie!!! And I posted the chapter sooner than I thought! I doubt that I'll get another one up this weekend, but I will really try. If anything, it should be posted towards the middle of the week. Please take the time to leave me feedback, we all know how feedback motivates me to write that much more quickly. I'd also like to thank DW and Kathleen for your wonderful and faithful feedback'ing! It is so very helpful!

Chapter Twenty-One: Promises and Secrets

It was close to three in the morning the day after the incident in Hogsmeade and Neville still couldn’t sleep. So much had been going through his mind that he couldn’t focus long enough to drift off to sleep. And it had been the same way the night before, so he paced his quarters trying to figure out a solution to all of his problems. The only thing keeping him from doing so, however, was the fact that there was no easy solution. There was no right or wrong, just subjective responses to the different situations that had come up.

For instance, he had been at The Three Broomsticks pub in Hogsmeade the day before waiting for Stephanie to return from her meeting with George. While he and Ginny waited, they talked about Dumbledore’s Army’s role in protecting Stephanie. He had almost been begging Ginny to increase the detail that was following Daniel Blaiser around the castle. His argument had been that if they knew where Daniel was at all times that they’d be better prepared for what he was planning on doing to Stephanie.

What they hadn’t counted on, however, was the fact that Daniel Blaiser was sitting next to them in The Three Broomsticks. At first, Neville blamed Ginny for not noticing that Daniel and Rachel were sitting there, but then he realized that blaming her would not solve anything. He could just as easily glanced around the pub, but he hadn’t. They had been foolish to assume anonymity and so both of them were to blame equally.

But Ginny hadn’t been as upset by Daniel’s discovery as he had been. She tried to explain it away, though Neville only had one thing on his mind: Stephanie’s safety. How could Daniel’s knowledge that Dumbledore’s Army suspected him of planning to harm Stephanie do her any good? Wouldn’t he just plan his attack around the safeguards that Dumbledore’s Army had in place? Daniel now knew that he was being followed and that put Dumbledore’s Army at a huge disadvantage—Neville wasn’t willing to risk Stephanie’s life on that.

Ginny’s reaction had been a little different, however. Instead of getting upset by Daniel’s grandiose display, and that’s what they had decided it was—Daniel wanted to show them that he had heard everything, so he made a huge show in front of the entire establishment—Ginny had responded by getting excited. She couldn’t hide the huge smile that had been bubbling to the surface and Neville remembered looking at her like she had gone mad. In fact, it was almost as though she had.

“Neville, breathe.” She had instructed him excitedly. Her eyes were on him, though he was looking out the front door of Madame Rosmerta’s. Daniel had stormed out quickly and Rachel had stayed behind for only a few moments. Neville felt sorry for Rachel, being used and manipulated in front of most of the older students, but he also couldn’t help but tell himself that she deserved it. Rachel Sorenson truly was a horrible person and deserved whatever she got. And then he immediately felt horrible for having those kinds of thoughts. “Look at me, Neville.”

Ginny instructed him so forcefully that he couldn’t help but look towards her. And then he had gotten sick to his stomach by the amused look on her face. She was happy that Daniel had overheard them. Maybe he had been wrong when he assumed that Ginny hadn’t known that Daniel was there. Maybe she had been hoping that Daniel would overhear their conversation. Neville felt his look of shock disappear quickly and turn into an accusatory stare. Her eyes narrowed suspiciously in response.

“What?” She snapped.

“You did that on purpose!” Neville whispered hoarsely, leaning across the table towards her. They had already had Daniel overhear their conversation, he couldn’t risk that any others hear them, too. It would be even worse if Dumbledore’s Army felt there was discord between him and Ginny.

“Did what?” Ginny’s voice was hard, but Neville could also detect a bit of humor there. He blinked at her question.

“You knew Daniel was there!” Neville spat at her. He should have felt bad for accusing her like that, but some things were more important than his friendship with Ginny. “You may well have just gotten Stephanie killed!”

“I did not!” She had huffed in response and then leaned back in the booth, crossing her arms angrily across her chest. “I did not know he was there, thank you very much.”

“Then why were you so happy by Daniel’s reaction?” Neville asked.

“Because this could be good for her, for us.” Ginny sighed, rolling her eyes at Neville. He had ignored her gesture and hadn’t forgotten the danger that Stephanie appeared to be under, though he suspected that Ginny had.

“What do you mean?” He phrased his question hesitantly and with caution. There was definitely something on Ginny’s mind and he shouldn’t have been too quick to judge her. Of course she wouldn’t intentionally do anything to jeopardize Stephanie’s safety. She cared about Stephanie almost as much as he did. “We no longer have the element of surprise.”

“But now he has to work even harder to find a way to get to Stephanie.” Ginny’s smile returned as she imagined the possibilities. “It’s unfortunate that he overheard us, that’s true. But now he knows that we are watching him and maybe he’ll think twice about placing an attack on Stephanie. I mean, Daniel’s pretty smart. He knows that the world will learn pretty quickly who was behind the attack if something happens to her. We couldn’t have planned it better if we tried.”

“I don’t know…” Neville responded slowly, still not sure he understood Ginny’s rationale. But he had to admit that she could be right.

That’s why he had been stressed since that incident in Hogsmeade. The whole situation was subjective and based upon chance and he didn’t like that. What if they had made a mistake by not changing their plans? What if Daniel found a way, thanks to the knowledge that Neville and Ginny had given him, to get to Stephanie. Could he ever forgive himself if something happened to Stephanie while he had been at Hogwarts, mere feet away from her?

That was why he couldn’t sleep. He should be outside her room guarding it nonstop, but Ginny would have scolded him for being so overprotected, and he didn’t feel like listening to her complain any more. He was getting enough from her just about his doubt in her assessment of the situation and he couldn’t handle any more.

But he wished he could sleep.

Just then, however, he was aroused from his thoughts and obsessions by a knock on his door. He immediately lunged for the wand that he had placed on his nightstand earlier that evening, but his eyes never left his door. Who would be at his door so early in the morning? An emergency, that was all that he could imagine. But if it was serious, they wouldn’t have bothered knocking.

“Who is it?” He called out and was surprised by the hoarse quality to his voice. It was rough by nonuse.

“Professor!” A young, high-pitched voice called out. He lowered his wand and walked quickly towards the door. “We need to talk to you!”

“Abby?” Neville asked incredulously when he opened the door. “David, Lauren, Matty, and Sammy. What in the world are you doing out of your beds at this hour?”

“Please professor.” Sammy whispered, looking nervously back and forth down the hall. “It’s about Professor Potter.”

“It’s an emergency.” Lauren bounced on her heels and Neville nodded in response. What could they possibly tell him about Stephanie? Whatever it was, these students—and they were five of his best first years—were risking getting in serious trouble by leaving their dormitories and coming to him at his quarters so early in the morning. That meant that they probably had important information.

“Come in.” He responded solemnly and moved out of the way so the five students could file into his room. And he conjured six chairs so that they could all sit comfortably. Then he waited for them to speak—he needed an explanation immediately, but he would wait until they were comfortable enough to speak.

Matty started playing with the hem of his shirt and then looked up at him wide-eyed. “I’m sorry for waking you up, professor. We just didn’t think that this could wait until morning.”

“You didn’t wake me.” Neville responded simply. He wasn’t about to explain to his students why he was awake so early, or late depending on how one looked at it. “Now please tell my why you are out of your beds.”

Four of the students turned their eyes onto Abby Seabold. She clearly was the ringleader in their little group. Neville had been suspicious that these three Slytherins and two Gryffindor students had befriended each other, but he hadn’t been sure. They were so careful not to be seen by others that he had thought he imagined it. He was happy to see students from opposing houses form such a strong bond. But he couldn’t think about that right then, he needed to find out what they knew about Stephanie.

“Professor, you have to understand that the reason we broke into her office was because we were worried about her. Something happened during breakfast and she looked so scared. We had to find out what was going on so that we could help her…” Abby tried to explain. Despite her calm and even voice, Neville could tell that she was extremely nervous.

“Wait. I was sitting next to her at breakfast. She was fine.” Neville tried to remember what had happened at breakfast, but all he could remember was his conversation with Hagrid.

“An owl dropped a package in her food.” David explained.

“She got really scared, professor.” Sammy’s voice was barely audible. Her face was a ghostly white, probably from nerves. “You should have seen her.”

“Go on.” Neville prodded the students.

“And she never told anyone what she had seen on her desk back on the first day of classes.” Lauren added.

“We know that because Ginny would have told us when we asked her.” Matty spoke confidently. Neville was sure that Ginny wouldn’t have told the first years anything, but they were right about the fact that Stephanie hadn’t told him or Ginny what had happened that first day of school.

“And she has done so much for us, with the tutoring and all.” Abby said, her voice was full of respect for his friend.

“Professor Potter hasn’t even told anyone that she is doing that.” Lauren nodded in agreement. “Daniel would get mad at Abby if he knew that she was friends with us.” She pointed towards Matty and herself and then continued. “And Professor Potter has kept our secret. We owe her so much.”

“Wait.” Neville shook his head. This was a whole lot of information to process at three in the morning. “What do you mean that Daniel would get mad?”

“It’s a long story, professor.” Abby spoke this time. “But my father has placed Daniel in charge of protecting me from the Death Eaters that want to hurt me. I’m not supposed to know that, but these guys helped me find the article in the Daily Prophet. Please don’t tell anyone. I can’t leave Hogwarts, I just can’t.”

“Don’t worry, Abby.” Neville nodded, hoping to get the full story from Stephanie later. But he would never betray a student like that. “I won’t, if you tell me what’s going on.”

“Well…” Matty breathed out in expectation.

“We broke into Professor Potter’s office to find out what got her so scared.” The others silenced again as Abby began explaining what they had found. She pulled an envelope out of her back pocket and handed it to him. “We found this letter in her desk drawer.”

Abby handed him the letter and Neville felt the blood drain from his face. So he and Ginny had been right. Someone had been threatening Stephanie, but it hadn’t been Daniel Blaiser as they had suspected. It was Dedrick Hargrave. They should have known better, but that didn’t clear Daniel of anything. How had Dedrick gotten those pictures inside of Hogwarts?

“Thank you students.” Neville spoke calmly, trying not to display his tremendous level of fear to the students. “However, you broke into a professor’s office and stole her property. I am afraid that I have to take fifty points from each of you. Matty and Lauren, you will also receive one week’s worth of detention. Abby, Sammy, and David, I will be forced to speak with Professor Slughorn in the morning about your disciplinary action.”

“Of course, professor.” Lauren whispered disappointedly.

“We’re sorry, professor.” Sammy’s voice shook and Neville immediately felt horrible for having to punish these students. They had clearly been attempting to protect Stephanie, but that didn’t change the facts. They still broke the rules.

“I do appreciate your bringing this to my attention.” Neville tried to reassure the students that he wasn’t angry with them. “Now please return to your dormitories. Quietly.”

“Thank you professor.” Abby nodded and led the group out the door. Neville looked down at the letter and photographs again, trying to decide how best to handle the situation. And then he realized that it couldn’t wait until he spoke with Ginny or even until later that morning. He had to see her immediately.

Neville stood up, not even taking the time to change his clothes, and rushed down the hall towards Stephanie’s living quarters. Without even knocking, he threw the door open and yelled at the still, beautiful, and perfect form of Stephanie curled up in a ball on her bed.

“STEPHANIE ANNABELLE POTTER!” He bellowed, letting his anger take over. How could she not tell him about this? She needed to know that they were supposed to protect her and they couldn’t do that if she kept things this serious from them. She jumped up with a start and reached for her wand.

*~*~*~*

She jerked awake at the sound of her door being shoved open and then at the bellow of her full name. Only a handful of people knew her middle name and that made her nervous. Why was someone intruding into her room so early in the morning? By instinct, and only half awake, she reached for her wand. But just as she felt the cool wood underneath her fingertips, Stephanie heard the intruder roar again.

“EXPELLIARMUS!” The man bellowed and her wand flew across the room; she heard the clink when it landed on the hard floor.

Stephanie had no other options, so she crawled to the very end of her bed and curled her knees up to her chest and cuddled the headboard. She didn’t recognize the voice of the intruder—he was so furious at her. And she had never imagined that anyone would actually attack her at Hogwarts. Where was Dedrick?

At this point, Stephanie wasn’t even shocked that her mind immediately turned to the person who had overtly threatened her life. But he had promised that she wouldn’t be harmed until he summoned her—he was watching her, protecting her. Where was he now? The voice clearly wasn’t Dedrick’s, that much she knew. Stephanie had heard him in a blind rage before and his voice never reached the octave of her intruder now.

And she forced herself to remain quiet. All the intruder wanted was to see her panic, and she wouldn’t give him the satisfaction. She wouldn’t whimper and she wouldn’t beg for her life. All that she could do was look him in the eye and meet her end with as much courage and bravery as she could muster. It was then, when she had made the decision to look at her intruder, that she realized she did know the person who had just barged into her private quarters.

“Neville!” She called out, surprised by his behavior. What was he so angry about? As far as she knew, she hadn’t done anything to him recently. Well…her tendency to try and avoid him wasn’t the best thing she could have done. But it was for the best, and it sure wasn’t anything new. She thought as hard as she could, trying to figure out what she could have done to make him so angry. Neville had never been this furious in his entire life, that was something she was sure of. “What’s going on?”

“Stephanie. Annabelle. Potter.” He muttered the words slowly and more deliberately than before. Neville was the first person to use her entire name and it sent chills down her spine. For the first time in a long while, she was absolutely speechless. So, all she could do was sit there and watch him approach her. It was then that she noticed that he had something in his hand. A package… “What were you thinking? How could you keep this from us?”

“What-” She was going to ask him what he was talking about, but her eyes couldn’t leave the envelope in his hand. Her brain was working too slow; she was too exhausted and she couldn’t wrap her brain around what was happening. Before she could finish her sentence, however, Neville cut her off.

He waved the envelope in the air and then ripped it open. Neville walked closer to her until he was next to her bed, and then he sat down next to her with a soft thud. “Don’t give me that innocent look of yours. It won’t work for you this time, Stephanie. Why would you keep this a secret?”

And she suddenly remembered the contents of the envelope, and then she felt stupid for not realizing it sooner. Especially since she had almost been wishing for Dedrick to show up and protect her from the intruder. It was Dedrick’s very letter, and his convincing photographs, that Neville was so upset about. She sighed in relief and then realized that he shouldn’t have those. She hadn’t given them to him.

“How did you get those?” She hissed at him and reached out to grab the envelope from his hands. But he quickly raised them above his head and out of her reach. His lips were pursed in anger; there was no teasing in his eyes now.

“It doesn’t matter, Stephanie.” Neville spoke harshly, but his voice was much softer than it had been a moment ago. “What is important is that we tell Kingsley about this immediately. You are in danger.”

“No.” Stephanie responded through gritted teeth. “You went through my things, Neville. How could you?”

“I did not.” His eyes softened with this comment, but Stephanie wasn’t going to back down. “And it appears that Ginny and I are not the only ones at Hogwarts that are concerned about you. A few students brought these to me a little while ago because they were worried about what they saw at breakfast.”

“No one was looking…” She whispered in disbelief. And she had made sure of that before she opened the letter—she had been very careful to scan the entire Great Hall that morning, or the morning before.

“Students are always watching, Stephanie.” Neville spoke honestly, and as though what he was saying were obvious. “Especially you. The students adore you, Stephanie, and most will do whatever they can to protect you. You are always being observed.”

“Who?” Stephanie asked, though it didn’t really matter. She was just surprised that her students cared enough about her to break the rules and sneak into her office to steal her things. The news should have upset her, but it reassured her that she wasn’t alone. And now Neville knew her secret. It felt better than she had imagined it would, even though he was in even more danger than he had been before.

“Not now. We’ll talk about this later, but I need to know why you didn’t tell us about this sooner.” Neville’s voice was a command and the reality of what he was saying brought tears to her eyes. “You don’t have to suffer through this alone, Stephanie. We love you. I love you.”

She just stared into his eyes and felt the tears roll down her cheeks. Neville moved just slightly as though he were debating whether or not to comfort her, but Stephanie realized he must be too angry to touch her. And Stephanie realized then that’s exactly what she needed. She needed Neville close; she needed to feel his skin touching hers, caressing her.

“Please, Stephanie.” His voice was just above a whisper now. He was pleading to understand why she had kept the secret from him. “Why?”

And she could hold it in no longer. She needed him to understand why she had to do this alone. She had to push him away so that he wouldn’t have to suffer along with her. He had to understand why no one was safe while she was still alive.

So, she took a deep breath and prepared herself for what she had held in for so long. She looked up into his eyes and told him the truth that had been burning a hole in her stomach and tearing apart her heart. “I didn’t tell you because I’m afraid for you, Neville. I can’t lose you. No one else should have to die because of me.”

“But we are your friends, Stephanie.” He was struggling to understand, so Stephanie knew that she hadn’t done a very good job at explaining. She had to keep trying. “We want to help you.”

“Neville. Stop.” She whispered, placing her finger on his lips. Stephanie took another deep breath and forced the words out of her mouth. They were something that she had only thought and speaking them aloud only made them more real. They were the truest words she had ever said and a huge wave of guilt crashed over her once they were out of her mouth. “But I could never ask that of you, any of you. I love you too much to do that to you, Neville. I have to take responsibility for the choices that I have made. Everyone I love dies and I can’t be the cause of that any longer.

“You read the letter, Neville. No one else has to suffer, no one else has to lose their life, because of me. It is someth-” But he broke her off midsentence. She felt her face being crushed into his. And it felt nice, familiar.

He was kissing her and she couldn’t even bring herself to stop him. She reached around his shoulders and grabbed hold of the hair behind his head, and then she urgently pushed her lips closer to his.

This is amazing, she thought to herself. A picture of Fred suddenly popped into her mind and she immediately felt guilty for her betrayal. But his words floated into the front of her mind:

“One of your close friends cares about you more than you know. I could always see it in his eyes and it always bothered me that I was the person that won your heart while he had to watch with his own heart breaking. I know that you care for him as well. I want you both to be happy.”

He knew; Fred had always known. And Fred wanted her to be happy. Stephanie knew that she could be happy with Neville, but could she really put him in so much danger? Was she really that selfish? And the answer was yes. She had yearned for Neville’s touch before she even realized why. Now that she had him, she couldn’t ever let him go. It would just motivate her even more to survive Dedrick’s attack. She had something to live for now and she wasn’t ready to die. This time she would not prepare to die, she would prepare herself for battle. She would prepare to survive.

After a few minutes, Stephanie pushed back. She didn’t want to, but she had to breathe. If she lost consciousness in Neville’s arms, it wouldn’t be the end of the world, but she would lose her focus. And she needed to focus now more than ever.

He stared at her curiously until she spoke. This time her voice was soft and a smile was playing at her lips. “It was you.”

“I love you so much Stephanie Annabelle Potter.” Neville whispered, squeezing her hand. “And I have always loved you, since the first time I heard about you.”

“Why didn’t you ever tell me?” She asked. So many years had been lost, would they have the rest of their lives to be together? Or would their time be cut short?

He smiled in return and then let out a painful laugh. “I guess there was never a right time. You are a popular woman, Miss Potter.”

“You always were my best friend, Neville Longbottom.” Stephanie caressed his fingers as she spoke, not taking her eyes off of him. Just moments ago he had looked like he wanted to murder her, and now there was nothing but love in his eyes. She had to keep him safe at all costs. “And I love you, too.”

“You don’t know how long I’ve waited to hear you say those words.” He spoke with a passion that she had never encountered before, not even with Fred. “Now promise me one thing, please.”

“Whatever you want.” The words came out before she could even think about them, but she didn’t regret it either. She would give her entire self to him.

“Stephanie, please don’t keep secrets like this from us. It doesn’t matter how dangerous you think this may be for us. That is our decision to make and we will all choose you every time.” His voice was softer than before, but it held the same commanding tone that he held when he first entered her living quarters. His fingers traced her arm and reached upwards towards her face, sending chills through her entire body that wasn’t unpleasant in any way. “I don’t care how terrifying this is for you or how protective you feel you need to be. You don’t have to go through this alone.”

“But you don’t understand-” Stephanie started to say, but he stopped her. There was a sadness in his eyes that tore at her heart. She had done that—she had caused him to feel that sadness. Everything she touched had been ruined. The next words that came out of her mouth brought a fresh round of tears to her eyes. She had spoken them just moments before, but she had to make sure that Neville understood. Stephanie couldn’t lie to Neville; she had to tell him why she had to keep secrets from him—she had to protect him at all costs. “Neville, no matter what, I can’t put you in that kind of danger. I can’t lose any of you. Too many lives have been lost because of me and I just can’t let it go on any longer. You read the letter—no one else needs to lose their life because of me.”

“But you’re wrong-” Neville started to argue, but she couldn’t let him finish. She had to get it all off her chest and then he would decide that he didn’t love her, that he couldn’t love someone so tarnished.

“No, Neville. I am completely right on this. Everyone that I love dies, and I can’t lose you.” She reached up towards his cheek, not allowing herself to touch him yet. He had a decision to make first. “My parents died trying to protect my brother and me; Sirius died before I even got a chance to meet him. Look at Dobby, Fred, and Dumbledore. They all died because of me.”

“Stephanie Potter.” Neville’s face was scolding, but the sadness seemed to ease a little. He seemed to understand where she was coming from. “Lord Voldemort would have murdered innocent people whether or not you were present. They would not want you to blame yourself and you know it.”

She didn’t want to argue this point with him anymore. Stephanie knew that she was right, but she wasn’t sure she could make him understand completely. So, instead, she changed the topic. “I know that it’s not completely true, and that I’ve done this to myself, but I’ve felt so alone. I’ve tried to push you and Ginny away to protect you, but I’ve felt like I couldn’t do enough to keep you safe.”

“Stephanie, my dear.” Neville’s hands gently lowered from her face to the locket that still hung around her neck. “Do you remember the night of your birthday party when I gave this to you? I tried to say that there was more to the locket than met the eye, but you got so upset that I couldn’t finish.”

She tried to remember the night of her birthday party and another wave of guilt crashed through her entire body. Stephanie couldn’t even remember why she had gotten so angry at Neville, but she did remember that he had tried to explain himself.

Before she could say anything, he continued with an amused smile on his face. “You have never been alone, Stephanie. I added some special magic to this locket of yours. Because they haven’t been able to remove the curse that stops the Auror’s pendant from working when it is around your neck, I didn’t even attempt to create a similar spell. You merely have to grasp onto the locket and say my name and I will come running to you wherever you are.”

“Why?” She asked in disbelief. He had given her a tremendous form of protection and warmth ran through her entire body. Neville truly did care about her.

“Because you were alone for so long and I didn’t want you to feel that way ever again.” His eyes were piercing her and she couldn’t help but smile. “But more importantly, because I love you and I want you to be safe.”

With that, Stephanie pulled him towards her. Neville held her in his arms as they lay on the bed and for the first time since Fred died, Stephanie felt completely safe. No one could touch her in that moment.

“I love you, too.” Stephanie whispered into the darkness after awhile. She closed her eyes and fell asleep that way, curled up in Neville’s arms. They would have to tell Ginny about the events of that night, but she doubted that Ginny would completely believe what had happened. Stephanie wasn’t even sure that she could make herself believe what had happened between the two of them. As unbelievable as it was, it was definitely amazing. She sighed before drifting off into a wonderful sleep.


Okay, so there's that next chapter I promised you! So much has changed!! And I apologize if the ending of it is kind of anticlimactic. I had it all typed and absolutely perfect and then my computer crashed..and I lost the last two and a half pages (at least it wasn't the whole chapter!!), and so I did the best that I could. I really hope you enjoyed it as much as I did!!

Chapter Twenty-Two: Dangerous Confrontations

Ginny couldn’t help but stare curiously at Stephanie and Neville. Something was so different and she couldn’t figure it out. They both looked so…happy. And as far as she knew, nothing had changed between them. But then again, Neville had barely spoken to her since the incident in Hogsmeade.

Sure, he had disagreed with her relief that Daniel Blaiser learned they were keeping a watch on him and his friends, but Neville realized that she would never want any danger to come to Stephanie. Daniel’s knowing of Dumbledore’s Army’s involvement meant he had to plan that much more carefully before he even thought of attacking Stephanie.

Stephanie had been just as distant towards both of them that day as she had been recently. Sure, Stephanie spent time with them and talked to them but both Ginny and Neville knew that Stephanie was hiding something big from them. They just figured Daniel had threatened her in some fashion, and they were waiting for Stephanie to confide in them. That’s why they had to keep Dumbledore’s Army close—Stephanie didn’t feel as though she could trust her friends.

And Ginny had to admit that it hurt; it hurt much more than she had anticipated it would. After all Stephanie had gone through and after all Ginny had done for her, it would just be assumed that Stephanie would let her know what was going on. It scared Ginny that Stephanie was still too far gone to confide in her friends, to let her friends help her overcome whatever was bothering her.

But, if she knew Stephanie as well as she thought she did this was exactly what Stephanie was doing—Stephanie was probably trying to protect them for some unknown reason. All of them together were much stronger than they were separate, and that’s what Stephanie was doing to them right now—she was dividing their group and driving a wedge between their bond. And still, Ginny would risk her life for any of them: Harry and Stephanie, Ron and Hermione, Neville, and anyone else who was threatened. She wasn’t afraid of what would happen if they all stuck together; Ginny was only terrified of what would happen if Stephanie decided to suffer and do this alone. She was certain that Stephanie wasn’t strong enough to survive another attack on her life.

It wasn’t that she didn’t believe in Stephanie’s abilities, but her friend had sacrificed so much in the past few years, if not her entire life. It was just so horrible that poor Stephanie couldn’t have a moment’s peace. And Daniel wasn’t a threat, that was easy to determine. Daniel didn’t have enough experience to even be a danger to Ginny. But the problem was that he was such a good manipulator, similar to Dedrick Hargrave, and that was dangerous.

How easy would it be for Daniel to gain enough supporters to render Stephanie defenseless? All they needed to do was take her by surprise and it would be over within a matter of minutes. And then even if Daniel didn’t hurt her, there were still too many Death Eaters on the loose for it to be safe for her. Ginny had been furious that George hadn’t walked Stephanie to the Three Broomsticks in Hogsmeade—she had even written George a threatening letter for that. His response was that Stephanie was safe. There was definitely more that he wasn’t telling her, but she didn’t care. It seemed like no one was taking Stephanie’s safety too seriously.

And she had written as much to Harry, though he wasn’t any more comforting. He had told her that there was something major building out there, but that he wasn’t able to share anything else. And she had pieced together a little between letters from Harry and Hermione, though none had been too informative. All Hermione would say was that Ron and Harry spent so much time at the Auror Training Facility that she hadn’t seen Ron in three weeks and that it was really bothering her.

Ginny knew that there was only one thing that would keep Ron from Hermione now that they had finally shared their true feelings for each other, and that was a commanding order from Kingsley Shacklebolt. And if Kingsley ordered for the Aurors-In-Training to study so much harder than normal, something huge was coming. They knew something and Ginny was so frustrated that no one would tell her anything.

Did it have anything to do with Hogwarts? Was Harry in danger? But she knew that every moment Harry was in an Auror uniform put him in extreme danger, so that worry was always in the back of her mind. She didn’t know what she would do if she lost Harry—would she be able to go on living without him? She doubted it and hoped that nothing bad would happen to him. He was her other half. She loved him more than anything in the whole world and it was excruciating being so far away from him.

He was supposed to have visited with her during the Hogsmeade weekend, but due to his training requirements, he hadn’t been able to make it. That was tough, but bearable because she knew she would see him soon. Christmas vacation was coming in a few weeks and he promised he would see her then. Ginny felt like a little school girl; she had started a countdown that she had magically etched on the ceiling above her bed. That way it was the last thing she saw before she fell asleep at night and the first thing she saw when she woke up in the morning. She would see him soon.

She sighed and continued to play with the food on her plate, completely lost in her thoughts. Ginny wanted nothing more than to look at Harry, to hold him in her arms. But if she kept thinking like that, she would never make it until Christmas. Pull yourself together, She sucked in her breath, nodding to herself. You have to be strong for the younger students. For the team, for Dumbledore’s Army, and for those first years that look up to you for some strange reason. Don’t let them see your weakness, Ginny. For goodness sake, it’s not the end of the world.

“Isn’t that so sweet?” A girl’s hushed shriek broke Ginny away from her thoughts and she looked around to find the source of the noise. It was Lauren, one of the first years that seemed to admire her for an unknown reason. “They look so happy! Can you imagine, Matty. We did that!”

The two first years weren’t looking at each other or at Ginny. Their attention was focused on the front of the Great Hall and towards the teacher’s table. In fact, they were staring straight at Stephanie and Neville. And for the first time, Ginny realized what was so different about her two friends. Under the table, their hands were clearly clutched together tightly.

She gasped in surprise and she felt her hands go up to her mouth as she realized the significance of this small gesture. So he finally did it, Ginny thought to herself and smiled broadly. But, wait. What did Lauren say?

“It is definitely worth all those detentions we are going to be doing.” Ginny looked curiously towards Matty as he spoke. His eyes were bright with enthusiasm and they had finally removed themselves from Stephanie and Neville. Now, however, he was looking towards the Slytherin table with a goofy grin on his face.

Abby Seabold just finished nodding her head towards him and then turned her attention back towards Daniel Blaiser who appeared to be speaking to her. She rolled her eyes at whatever Daniel was saying to her. The girl named Samantha and her friend David were trying to cover their giggles as they kept looking towards each other, then at Stephanie and Neville, and then at Matty and Lauren. They weren’t paying attention to the conversation that Abby and Daniel were having. What is going on here?

Ginny couldn’t handle it anymore, so she poked Matty in the side, getting his attention. She was just glad that he was sitting next to her so that she could get the information she needed.

“What are you talking about, Matty?” Ginny tried to ask as sweetly as she could, but her voice came out stern and demanding. Why didn’t Stephanie and Neville tell me? was what she was really thinking.

“Well…” He trailed off, looking towards Lauren with uncertainty. “We kind of—OW!”

He glared at Lauren and leaned down to rub his shin. Ginny looked across the table and noticed that Lauren looked angry, almost as though Matty had, or was going to, betrayed her.

“We promised him, Matty!” Lauren scolded.

“You didn’t have to kick me, Lauren.” Matty responded coolly. “I wasn’t going to tell her any of the details. She is probably going to find out sooner or later anyway. Besides, we don’t even know what happened after we left last night.”

“Still. It’s not our place to tell.” Lauren’s voice softened and then she turned towards Ginny. “I’m sorry, Ginny. I know you’re best friends with them and I’m sure they’ll tell you themselves.”

“Wait.” Ginny lifted her hand, totally not comprehending the whole situation. “What do you mean, after you left last night?”

“I’m sorry, Ginny.” Lauren shook her head and got up from her seat at the table. She eyed Matty, who followed close behind.

“Sorry, Ginny.” He mumbled on his way past her, following closely behind Lauren. “Go talk to them. Tell Neville that he has our permission to tell you the whole story.”

Ginny nodded and stood up, herself. She quickly made her way towards the front of the Great Hall and she couldn’t help but notice that both Neville and Stephanie were watching her the entire way. Both faces were brighter than Ginny had ever seen them and she couldn’t stay angry at them for not telling her right away what had happened. Their excitement was infectious and she could feel her face loosen as the smile made its way onto her face.

“So, you finally told her.” Ginny laughed as she reached them. “It’s about time, Neville.”

“It is pretty special, isn’t it?” He beamed at her and then rubbed Stephanie’s shoulder. Ginny could tell that he was truly happy and that made Ginny burst with pride. After all the comforting she had done for him the previous year, it was nice that he didn’t need her for that anymore.

Honestly, she had never thought that Neville and Stephanie would end up together. And, though they had only just told each other how they felt the day before, Ginny could tell that it made them happy. Who knew where it would go, but both of them deserved to have a little happiness in their lives right now. It was wonderful.

“So when are you going to tell me how it happened?” Ginny asked lightly, though she wanted to plead with them to tell her right then. However, class was going to start soon and they wouldn’t be able to do their story justice with that short amount of time. “There are some first years who are taking credit for this, you know.”

“Well, they have every right to take credit, though there is much more that we need to tell you besides what happened between Neville and me last night.” Stephanie spoke quietly and leaned closer to Ginny. Ginny’s smile faded at her friend’s comment; Stephanie’s tone was deadly serious. Is she going to finally open up to us? Ginny’s mind wandered and she lost track of why she was at the teacher’s table.

“Meet us in Stephanie’s quarters after dinner, okay?” Neville whispered and Ginny nodded. There was concern in his eyes, but he refused to let it show on his face. She couldn’t help but notice that his face was still bright with eagerness.

“And you better tell me the entire story.” Ginny ordered, not liking being kept in the dark about things having to do with her friends. But at least they were going to share with her, that was the most positive step that Stephanie had taken since accepting the Defense Against the Dark Arts position. Things were going to change now, and Ginny wasn’t sure whether that was going to be for the better or worse. Whatever it meant, they would be united as one. Nothing could break them now. Absolutely nothing.

*~*~*~*

The day had finally come to a close and Ginny couldn’t be more relieved. She had never felt more alone and uninformed in her entire life. At least when things were going on with Voldemort and the Order of the Phoenix, she had had Harry and the rest of her friends to lean on and speculate what was going on. But now all she could do was listen to the rumors that were rapidly spreading across the school.

Every single student had taken notice of Stephanie and Neville’s newfound excitement, though it wasn’t that hard to see. And all she wanted to do was find out what had happened, though she could guess what was going on. Neville kept shooting her excited then concerned looks during their Herbology lesson. She was definitely getting mixed signals with the whole thing and it was driving her absolutely insane.

The whispers grew even louder during dinner with the absence of both Stephanie and Neville. And with no one else to look at, it felt like the entire student population had decided to look to her for answers that she couldn’t provide. She felt like she knew even less than everyone else and it was so frustrating. She tried to tune out their incessant gossiping, but she had to admit to herself that she was a little intrigued. So, she looked down at her food and attempted to appear as though she wasn’t interested in the conversations going on around her, listening intently for answers to her many questions.

“He was in such a good mood today that he let us out of class twenty minutes early.” A third year student was telling a friend nearby.

“Where do you think they could be?” A Hufflepuff student asked from behind Ginny, but she didn’t look up from her plate to see who it was. She couldn’t help but wonder the same thing.

“Maybe they’re on a date.” Another girl giggled and Ginny rolled her eyes. She couldn’t help but let a smile escape her lips at the thought that this had to be the biggest scandal that had hit Hogwarts since the beginning of the school year. And it didn’t help matters that everyone, except for the Slytherins, seemed to adore Stephanie.

Ginny knew that Neville was a hopeless romantic and that would have been exactly what he would have done for Stephanie had they not made plans to meet with her immediately after dinner. He would want to be able to take his time and show Stephanie just how much she meant to him. There wasn’t enough time for that. They must be in Stephanie’s quarters waiting and preparing for her to arrive. But she couldn’t go just yet. They had said after dinner, and she should try to eat something.

She let her eyes rise from her dinner plate and she couldn’t help but notice that Matty and Lauren were sitting side by side for a change. Neither was speaking, and neither was speculating on the budding relationship between Stephanie and Neville like the rest of their classmates. Instead, their eyes were glued across the room. Matty looked like he was having an internal struggle and Lauren held her hand tightly around Matty’s upper arm, restraining him from doing anything rash.

Ginny’s eyes followed their gaze and rested on the Slytherin table. The Great Hall was too preoccupied with discussing Stephanie and Neville that no one had even noticed the little spectacle happening at the Slytherin table. Daniel Blaiser was grabbing Abby Seabold by the arm and pulling her across the Great Hall towards the doors. Abby’s friends Sammy and David were being held in their seats by Rachel and Corey, while the two captors wore huge smirks.

She instinctually turned towards Matty and Lauren and pointed in their direction. “Stay.” She instructed, hoping that they would listen to her.

Then she stood from her seat and followed the two Slytherins out of the Great Hall; Daniel didn’t seem to notice that she was close behind them. Shortly down the hall, he reached for a door handle and pulled it open. A broom closet.

She could faintly hear Abby whimper towards Daniel. “Please, D. You’re hurting me.”

But he ignored her pleas and pushed her into the broom closet. He followed behind and slammed the door shut. Ginny quietly crept down the hall and towards the closet. Then she leaned her ear up against the door, but all she could hear was muffled argument. Ginny was struggling as to whether she should intervene on Abby’s behalf, but she wasn’t sure if that would endanger Abby any further. There was something sinister about the relationship these two held, and Abby truly did seem like a sweet student.

But she didn’t have time to debate further when there was a crashing sound inside the closet just moment’s before Daniel’s voice boomed, “Bloody hell, Abby! What are you trying to do to me?”

Ginny quickly opened the closet door and rushed inside, raising her wand towards Daniel. She would not stand by and let him harm, or even threaten, another student. Earlier in the year she had warned him about that and as the leader of Dumbledore’s Army, she couldn’t stand idly by and let Abby get hurt.

“What do you want, Weasley?” Daniel turned towards her, but he didn’t release Abby’s arm.

“Are you okay, Abby?” Ginny asked, completely ignoring the boy standing in front of her. He was glaring at her angrily, but she didn’t care.

Abby just nodded in her direction, but was completely speechless. Her face was drained of any blood, though she didn’t look frightened. The look that was on her face was a mixture of defiance and determination.

“We were having a private conversation, Weasley.” Daniel hissed and Ginny couldn’t help but release an amused snort.

“Sure you were.” Ginny responded. “Let her go, Daniel. Didn’t I warn you about this sort of behavior before? Or would you prefer that I have a conversation with Professor McGonagall about this?”

“This doesn’t concern you.” His eyes narrowed in questioning hatred. He was wondering if she was bluffing, but her face told him that she deadly serious. His behavior was completely unacceptable. Despite his aggressive stance, he released Abby’s arm and she rubbed the red-spot that had been caused by his pressure.

“When you are hurting another student, then it most certainly does concern me, Blaiser.” Ginny spoke through gritted teeth.

“Really, Ginny.” Abby’s voice was soft, but very confident. “He didn’t mean anything. I’m fine.”

“He can’t treat you like this, Abby.” Ginny’s voice softened, too, as she looked at the little first year. The relationship between Abby and Daniel appeared to be one of dominance and control and Abby needed to realize that she didn’t have to take that kind of abuse. “You don’t have to take this. We can go to McGonagall right now if you want to.”

“No.” She whispered, looking towards the ground. “I’m fine, Ginny.”

Daniel grabbed Abby’s chin and forced her to look him in the eyes. “This isn’t over, Abigail Seabold. We will discuss this further in the common room. Mark, Fred, and Craig will be waiting to take you back.”

“This most certainly is over.” Ginny threatened, thrusting her wand in Daniel’s direction. His expression didn’t change as he ignored her comment and walked out of the broom closet. But she wasn’t going to let him get away without some sort of promise, not that that meant much, that he wouldn’t hurt Abby, so she followed him into the hall.

He noticed this time and turned around quickly, pushing her into the wall just outside the broom closet. Then he kicked the door shut, making sure that Abby couldn’t leave and listen to the conversation. Ginny struggled against Daniel, but she had accidentally dropped her wand in the struggle. He was much stronger than he looked.

Daniel slapped her hard on the face so that her head bounced to the side from the force, but she didn’t cry out. She merely eyed him with hatred as he held her to the wall. Then he moved his face so that it was only inches from hers.

“Don’t you ever disrespect me like that again, Weasley.” His voice was cool and harsh and his eyes were dangerously dark. For a tiny moment, Ginny was terrified of what he could do. There were no witnesses; everyone was still in the Great Hall having dinner. Would he attack her right there with Abby locked in a broom closet just feet away from her?

But she wouldn’t let him see the small flicker of fear that coursed through her body. And that meant that she couldn’t scream for help; he would know that he had gotten to her. No. She had to do this alone.

“Then don’t give me a reason to.” Ginny spoke defiantly.

As a response, Daniel lifted his knee and swiftly kicked it into her stomach. She gasped in surprise and pain, and her body wanted to double over with lack of air, but he still had her tightly pinned against the wall.

“No, Weasley.” His words had turned light, almost as though he were amused. But his eyes were still filled with the evil that had frightened her just moments before. “You will learn to respect me.”

With that, he thrust his knee into her other side and she couldn’t help but cry out in pain this time. His response was not laughter, but his eyes now danced with it. His mouth remained in a thin, straight line. He was not amused by her behavior but was enjoying the torment he was placing on her. And she wondered where he got his confidence from, attacking her in the middle of a hallway with the Great Hall full of students just a short distance away. He truly had no remorse whatsoever.

He finally let her go and she slid down onto the floor, gasping for the breath that he had knocked out of her. Daniel followed and crouched down to her level. His voice was a low whisper, threatening her. “You may be the golden child and teachers’ pet around here, Ginny Weasley, but I own you; I own them all. I have let you get away with too much this year and it will stop now or your life will get so much worse.”

“You..don’t…” She tried to get out, but her breathing was just too sparse. He had started to rise, but lowered himself back down to her level.

He patted her cheek lightly and let out a soft chuckle this time. “Oh yes I do, sweetheart.” Then he stood and turned away from her, kicking her wand clear down the hallway as he made his way towards the broom closet. His hand touched the doorknob, and then he turned back towards Ginny. “Oh, and Weasley.”

Ginny looked up at him, still clutching her stomach. She didn’t say anything and so he continued with a bright smile. “Stay away from Abby, will you?” He laughed as he opened the door. “Abby, let’s go. The guys are waiting to escort you to Professor Slughorn’s office.”

Ginny watched as Abby quickly made her way out of the broom closet and followed Daniel as he hurried down the hall and back towards the Great Hall. She could hear Daniel’s booming laughter as he disappeared from sight, and then she let out the cry of pain she had been holding inside.

A few moments later, there were voices talking rapidly in her ear, but she didn’t want to open her eyes right then. She wanted her breath to come back to normal first. “Oh, my goodness. Ginny, are you okay? We saw Daniel and Abby come back into the Great Hall and you didn’t come back. Are you okay? What happened?”

“Lauren, breathe.” Another voice ordered the first. Matty Finnigan, Ginny thought. She forced herself to open her eyes and look at the two first years in front of her. They looked absolutely terrified for her, so she smiled to reassure them that she would be fine. “Are you okay, Ginny?”

Ginny nodded, hoping that she was being convincing. She tried to sit up, but the pain in her stomach came shooting back to her. And then she suddenly got angry with herself. How could she have let Daniel surprise her like that? She should have been prepared to Curse him. It wouldn’t happen again, that was for sure.

“Can you go get my wand?” Ginny was surprised by the hoarseness of her voice. She pointed down the hall and Matty nodded and headed in that direction.

“We never thought he’d actually hurt anybody.” Lauren murmured as she knelt closer to Ginny. “We shouldn’t have let Abby get in trouble like that. This is all our fault, Ginny. I am so sorry.”

“What are you talking about, Lauren.” Ginny’s words were forced, but she was happy that her breath was slowly returning to normal. The first year’s words were confusing her even more.

Lauren’s eyes widened in anxiety as she leaned closer and whispered in Ginny’s ear. “We all got detention last night, that’s what Daniel is so angry about. She snuck out of her room and didn’t tell him. Daniel is very smart; he figured out that she had to have gotten into trouble after he went to bed.”

“What is he going to do to her?” Ginny asked, very concerned for the first year. Maybe Dumbledore’s Army would have to expand their protection to the first years, too. He had to be stopped, but they didn’t have enough proof to go to McGonagall.

“I don’t know.” Lauren’s eyes showed how scared she was for her friend, and she shook her head as Matty returned with Ginny’s wand.

“Thank you, Matty.” Ginny said.

“Are you going to be okay?” Matty asked her, smiling in her direction.

“Yeah.” She responded with her own smile. Lauren and Matty offered to stay with her as she attempted to gain some composure before the Great Hall started to empty, but she declined. She needed to be alone for a few minutes and think about all that was going on before she went and found Neville and Stephanie.

And most importantly, she had to make sure that Neville and Stephanie didn’t see her in pain. She had decided that she would not go to the professors with her concerns about Daniel. This was between him and her. They would settle this once and for all.


There it is! Sorry it took so long to get posted, but I wrote it pretty quickly. I think it is one of my favorites so far!!! I fully intended to have Stephanie/Ginny/Neville's conversation in this chapter, but I got a little carried away. So, it will be first thing in the next chapter!! I promise you that much, at least! And I am hoping to have the next chapter posted sometime this weekend. We'll see if I can stay away from the mechanic long enough to write a chapter!! Have a great week!

Chapter Twenty-Three: No More Secrets

Ginny just sat there for a few minutes, trying to gather her thoughts. Had that really happened? Had Daniel Blaiser really attacked her and then threatened her? What was she going to do about it? Was he going to hurt Abby? Or the other first years? Since when had Matty and Lauren been friends with the Slytherins? How much was going on at Hogwarts that she didn’t know about? Did anyone else know? What damage would be done if people found out about the first years? Would people still respect her, follow her lead, if they knew that Daniel had beaten her?

It was too overwhelming and Ginny wished that she could just go to her room and figure things out. She wasn’t sure if she could handle much more information that night, but she had promised Stephanie and Neville to meet with them after dinner. The Great Hall would start clearing out soon, so she had to get moving. She didn’t want anyone else to see her in her disheveled state. Her clothes were wrinkled and her hair was matted in places. She hadn’t allowed herself to cry, and for that she was grateful. There wouldn’t be tear streaks on her face and her eyes wouldn’t be swollen and red. The rest she could fix before she made it to Stephanie’s living quarters.

She stood and quickly made her way towards the girl’s bathroom. Once inside, she brushed her fingers through her hair. And because that didn’t seem to be doing any good, she quickly put her hair up in a loose ponytail. Then she smoothed out her clothes, she had changed out of her school robes just before dinner, and then exited. Stephanie’s quarters weren’t too far from where she was, so she walked slowly and tried to compose herself. She didn’t want her friends to get suspicious that anything was wrong or had happened in their absence. She could take care of herself, just like Stephanie could.

Ginny took a deep breath to steady herself before she knocked, and when she finally had the courage to do so, the door flung open instantly. Before she could register anything, Stephanie was in her arms and hugging her tightly, whispering apologies into her ear.

“I am so sorry, Ginny.” The words came out in a rush as though she had been holding them in for a very long time. “I was so scared and I just wanted to protect you and Neville. It would be all my fault if something happened to you, but I really should have told you the whole truth. Please forgive me.”

Ginny pulled away at her friend’s words and looked Stephanie in the eyes. All of Stephanie’s emotions and past horrors lay deep in her eyes and Ginny knew that her friend had meant well. But it was time for them to come clean, about everything. That meant that she and Neville would have to tell Stephanie what had been going on behind her back and Stephanie would have to share everything with her. That also meant that she had to tell them about Daniel. It was time and Ginny sighed in relief.

So, she took Stephanie’s hand and pulled her to the sofa that was placed in front of the roaring fire. Neville was already there and Stephanie plopped down in his lap while Ginny sat on the brick steps next to the fireplace so that she could face them. This was an intimate moment and she pulled her knees up to her chest, hugging them tightly. All she could do was smile as Neville held Stephanie close, almost as though he was holding her for the last time. He probably can’t comprehend that this is actually happening for him, Ginny mused with a slight grin.

“So, where do we start?” Neville asked, looking at Ginny but rubbing Stephanie’s arms gently and methodically.

“The only place to start.” Ginny responded with a quiet chuckle and she turned her head to look towards her friend. “The beginning. Stephanie?”

Stephanie nodded in acknowledgement, and she looked away and into the fire, seemingly trying to organize her thoughts. Ginny watched as her friend closed her eyes in preparation to share what had been bothering her, and as much as she wanted to say words of comfort, Ginny knew that it was best to keep the silence going. It would be easier for Stephanie to share that way.

Finally, Stephanie nodded and opened her mouth to speak. She didn’t look at either Neville or Ginny as she spoke, but instead looked directly into the fire. And her voice was soft with a tiny quaver of concern. Ginny wouldn’t even have noticed it if she hadn’t known Stephanie so well, but it was clearly there.

“Someone’s been following me, watching me for awhile now.” Stephanie said. Ginny wanted to interrupt, to tell her that she and Neville had figured that much, but she kept quiet. She would let Stephanie tell the entire story. “And I was so afraid to be alone. But I had told Kingsley that I wanted it so much and I couldn’t tell him that I desperately needed companionship all the time. At the time I thought that I could handle it, and it just spiraled out of control.

“On my birthday, when you were all out at Diagon Alley shopping for Harry’s and my birthday party someone broke into Sirius’ house. I was downstairs when there was a crash in my bedroom and I went to investigate.” She took a deep breath and continued staring into the fire. Her voice was distant and full of fear. “My room had been destroyed. Pillows had been ripped open and feathers were everywhere; my water glass had been knocked to the floor and splashed onto everything. And that’s when I noticed that something was missing…”

She paused and wrapped her arms tightly around her chest. Neville took that moment to pull her even closer to him. Ginny was lost in thought at what Stephanie had just shared with them. Someone had been in the house with Stephanie? How had they gotten in? Kingsley had made sure that it would be impossible for someone to gain entry into 12 Grimmauld Place without security clearance. How could they have left Stephanie so vulnerable? What had the person wanted? What did they take? And most importantly, why hadn’t Stephanie told any of them about it?

Finally, Ginny couldn’t take it any longer. “What did they take, Stephanie?” Her voice shook with curiosity.

“The photo album that Harry had given me for Christmas.” Stephanie’s voice was barely above a whisper and Ginny felt shivers flow through her body. “It was all I had to remind me of my parents, of my family. He knew that and he knew what it would mean to me when it was gone.”

“Who’s he, Stephanie?” Ginny asked.

Stephanie finally looked towards her and she smiled shyly, and a little mysteriously. That little look made Ginny feel a little better and so she smiled softly in return. Stephanie merely shook her head. “I’ll get to that.”

Ginny rolled her eyes and Stephanie returned her gaze onto the fire. Neville just sat there silently, listening, and Stephanie continued. Ginny realized that Stephanie had probably already told him this entire story already, and she felt a twang of jealousy. It seemed like she had been the last to know about everything so far. But that was alright because Stephanie was sharing with her now.

“And I started feeling as though I were being followed. No matter how many people were around, I would get so scared. That was when I started wondering if I was just imagining everything, which I was sure was what everyone would tell me.” Stephanie continued softly. “Then there was the day I went to work on Severus’ house. He made it so obvious that he was there, just watching me—he was snapping branches as he walked and ruffling leaves in the nearby woods. And I didn’t know what to do. Then Neville,” she paused and looked up towards him with a weak smile, “you showed up and I felt so safe. And I realized that I didn’t want anything to happen to you. That’s when I decided I really couldn’t tell anyone. It was me that he wanted, and I wasn’t going to let anyone else get hurt because of that. It was something I had to do alone.”

“But you don’t have to do it alone.” Neville responded into her ear, barely audible for Ginny to hear.

Ginny shook her head in agreement. “Of course you don’t, Stephanie. We all care about you and, no matter what you think, we can defend ourselves. We can protect you.”

Stephanie nodded her head. “And I know that now. It was just too easy to get inside my own head and convince myself that what I was keeping a secret was for the best. And I thought I was handling it well, until…”

And she trailed off again. Just as Ginny was about to ask, Stephanie continued. Her gaze returned to the fire that seemed to be a calming effect for her as she confessed what had been bothering her for months. Stephanie had kept all of this to herself since the end of July…She must be hurting so much. Ginny couldn’t even imagine how much pain Stephanie must have been in, keeping all of this a secret.

And as she started to speak again, Stephanie raised her eyes and looked directly at Ginny. There was remorse and fear welled deep into her large eyes and Ginny felt horrible for not trying harder to get Stephanie to confide in her. “Ginny, on the first day of school, at the beginning of my first years’ class, I noticed something on my desk. I glanced at it out of the corner of my eye and realized it had been the thing I had been looking for for well over a month. It was my missing photo album.”

“Photo album.” Ginny whispered the words as Stephanie said them, realization dawning on her. “But…But. How did it get there?”

Stephanie shook her head. “I don’t know. But how had he gotten into Sirius’ house? The weird thing is that he didn’t do anything to the album. All of the pictures were there, there was no damage. He didn’t even leave a note. Nothing. It was just there.”

“I’ve been thinking about that, Stephanie.” Neville spoke gently, and continued rubbing her arm. “He wanted to frighten you. And I’m sure you realized that, too. I don’t find it odd at all—He truly is a master at manipulation.”

“That’s what the first years saw you reacting to.” Ginny walked through it out loud. “But, you still haven’t answered my question of who left it.”

“Well, we haven’t gotten that far in the story, yet.” Stephanie laughed heavily and Ginny smiled reassuringly. Since Ginny didn’t say anything, Stephanie continued. “So, that brings me to yesterday morning, when I got this.”

Ginny watched as Stephanie pulled a letter and some smaller pieces of paper from under herself. Stephanie handed the packet of papers to Ginny and she slowly read through what Stephanie had given her. Her light amusement turned to shock as she realized the true threat behind Dedrick Hargrave’s words.

“We have to take this to Harry.” Ginny said, pulling herself to a standing position. If they left immediately, they’d be able to reach Harry before he attended his evening training session. They had been doing evening trainings so that the Aurors could learn to battle at night and in the dark, when they were at a heightened disadvantage.

“No.” Stephanie demanded, though she didn’t move from her position against Neville’s chest. “Let us finish. He can’t know about this, Ginny. Just hear us out.”

“Fine.” Ginny sighed and sat back down on the bricks. She waved the letter and pictures towards Neville and Stephanie. “I assume this has something to do with you two.” She was motioning towards them, gesturing that she had understood the link between the letter and Neville and Stephanie’s current relationship.

“It was those pesky first years.” Neville blurted out with a laugh and then placed his hand over his mouth as though he had said something wrong. Stephanie’s eyes widened in concern as she looked at Neville first, and then Ginny.

Ginny immediately realized what Neville had said and why he was ashamed. She just smiled in turn and let them know that it was alright. “Matty told me that you could tell me the entire story. And quite frankly, I think I deserve to know. I was quite confused when I learned that Matty and Lauren have been getting along quite well with the Slytherin first years.”

Stephanie and Neville shot each other questioning looks, but Ginny couldn’t explain what she meant just then. First, she wanted to hear about how the first years fit into the whole scenario.

“How did you find out about that?” Neville asked with a surprised look on his face and Ginny let out of a soft chuckle.

“I’ll get to that.” Ginny repeated Stephanie’s words and she watched as both Stephanie and Neville nodded their heads and smiled softly.

“Of course you will.” Neville joked and Ginny was relieved that they were still able to have a little fun even though the conversation was serious. And she knew that she only understood a portion of what was going on—Stephanie and Neville probably realized how dire their situation had become. Sharing was vital to their strength and survival at that point.

Ginny turned back towards Stephanie for an explanation. This time Stephanie didn’t turn her attention towards the fire, but stared at Ginny with determination. Stephanie’s story had redirected attention away from her and Ginny could sense Stephanie’s relief.

“Let me just say, Ginny, that I don’t know the entire story and so what I am about to tell you will only be as accurate as the research I was able to uncover.” Stephanie started to explain and then continued after Ginny nodded her understanding. “All I knew about Abby’s father before I started to work here at Hogwarts was that the Dark Lord had sent Lucius Malfoy to Jason Seabold for some sort of service and Jason had refused. At that point, Lucius was ordered to murder Jason’s family, including Abby, to gain his cooperation. But somehow Abby survived that attack, though his wife and son were not as lucky.

“And at the beginning of the school year, Abby and her friends came to me asking if I would tutor them. At first I wondered why any of them needed my help because they were all very talented and proficient in class, but then I recognized that strong sense of determination that empowered all five of the students.” Stephanie paused to see if Ginny had understood what she was saying.

“Five.” Ginny whispered, understanding completely. “But how?”

Stephanie smiled at Ginny’s question, but Ginny was too concentrated on the story to return the gesture. So, Stephanie continued. “I asked myself that very question, but to truly understand the fear that drove the creation behind their friendship, you must understand all of the relationships that are involved.

“After they came to me, I felt compelled to learn the reasoning behind their need for additional lessons and training. So I spent a long time trying to figure out what was truly going on, and then one day I discovered the truth. Death Eaters are well known for placing blame on their losses.” She spoke with a knowing and amused smirk; Ginny just stared at her friend. “Well, Ginny, your brother Charlie, with the help of the Order, released and killed many of the dragons that the Dark Lord had obtained from Jason Seabold and several Death Eaters blamed Jason for the treachery. And these same Death Eaters have vowed to take revenge on Jason by murdering the only thing he has left to live for.”

“His daughter.” Ginny whispered, comprehension flowing through her body. “Wait. But how does Daniel fit into this? And the Gryffindor students?”

Again, Stephanie smiled mischievously as she continued the story. “Daniel Blaiser is the son of the man Jason hired to keep him safe. The Blaiser family has been close to Jason Seabold for many, many years. In fact, I believe Jason and Jeffrey were Prefects together.

“Anyway, apparently, Daniel and Abby had always been like brother and sister and were very close before it all happened. And then Daniel was really there for her and helped care for her when her mother and brother were killed. Jason asked him to keep Abby protected at all costs, and Daniel has taken him quite seriously. However, no one thought it would be wise to share that information with Abby.

“Daniel threatened Abby once they arrived at Hogwarts and mistakenly told her just enough information so that she got curious. Abby decided that she needed to find out why Daniel had suddenly turned into this horribly demanding and possessive person and so she-” Stephanie spoke quickly, but Ginny couldn’t hold her doubt in anymore.

“Daniel didn’t change.” Ginny demanded skeptically. “He’s always been this manipulative, controlling, and evil twit.”

“He changed towards her.” Stephanie’s words were soft and understanding and Ginny knew that Abby had shared a lot of herself with the professor. “Daniel was always nurturing and took very good care of her. She has a high respect for him, while knowing at the same time that he isn’t a good person towards others. But she can’t let go of all that he’s done for her and, quite frankly, I don’t blame her. And she rationalizes his behavior towards her, stating that he is treating her like that because he cares for her.”

“You should see how he treats her, Stephanie.” Ginny spoke harshly, not believing for one second that Daniel could possibly care for Abby in any fashion. “He thinks he owns her, that he can control her every movement.”

“I completely believe that Daniel cares for Abby Seabold. He was raised in a controlling environment and, similar to Draco, he is responding the only way he knows how. Daniel is doing all he can to protect her.” Stephanie’s voice was sincere and Ginny narrowed her eyes at her friend. Was Stephanie saying that his behavior was acceptable?

“We haven’t seen how he behaves towards her, Ginny.” Neville spoke for the first time in a very long time, surprising her a little. He must have understood the disgusted look on her face and responded. “But Abby has talked to Stephanie about it and we understand. The most important thing to Abby is that she stay here at Hogwarts and if we intervene then that will not happen. Now that we know, we can keep her safe.”

“But you can’t, that’s the problem!” Ginny was losing her patience with the discussion about Daniel. She looked towards Neville for some support—after all they had done to ensure that Daniel stay away from Stephanie, Neville was now defending him. It was time. Ginny lowered her eyes, ashamed of what she had allowed to occur outside the Great Hall that afternoon.

“What do you mean? We’ve been having Dumbledore’s Army keep track of Daniel, it won’t be too difficult to make sure that he doesn’t hurt Abby.” Neville responded calmly, though his voice didn’t help Ginny.

“What do you mean you’ve had the DA following Daniel?” Stephanie looked up at him.

Neville stroked Stephanie’s cheek in response and pulled a loose strand of hair behind her ear, and then he hugged her closer. “We thought he was after you, but we were wrong. From what you’ve described, his only goal is to keep Abby safe.”

“Neville, Stephanie. Look at me.” Ginny demanded, leaning forward. It was taking all of her strength to keep sitting instead of getting up and throwing something across the room. Keep your temper, she repeated to herself, breathing through her nose. When her friends looked at her, she continued while trying to keep her voice even. “During dinner, everyone was preoccupied with conversation about the relationship between you two. I was trying to ignore what people were saying, but two voices caught my attention. Matty and Lauren were staring at the Slytherin table where Daniel was arguing with Abby. He quickly pulled her from the Great Hall and trapped her in a broom closet. He was going to hurt her and the DA members in charge of following him didn’t notice that he was gone.

“So I went in after him.” Ginny’s voice softened to a whisper, completely ashamed and wracked with guilt. “I don’t know how it happened, but I dropped my wand and he attacked me. It was my fault, I wasn’t prepared. But if he can render me defenseless, I am positive that he can do so to the younger students. He’s dangerous.”

There was silence for a few moments and Ginny didn’t dare to look up. Suddenly she felt arms wrapped around her shoulders, hugging her tightly and she let out a little gasp as pain shot up through her side. Stephanie pulled away and looked at her from head to toe. Ginny just looked away and Stephanie gently lifted the bottom of her shirt, revealing her stomach.

On her stomach were two large, round bruises where Daniel had kicked her. Stephanie quickly lowered the shirt and looked into Ginny’s eyes again. “You need to see Madame Pomfrey about that.”

“I’ll be fine.” Ginny responded quickly. If she went to the hospital wing, word would quickly spread and she did not want the whole school to know that Daniel had hurt her. It would be horrible if the Dumbledore’s Army members found out. They would no longer respect her and her leadership abilities. She decided the best course of action was to change the subject, so she smiled and looked back at Stephanie. “You never told me how the Gryffindors got involved.”

Stephanie eyed her suspiciously for a moment, probably trying to decide whether or not to force Ginny to go see Madame Pomfrey. She thought better of it and spoke, this time with no hint of amusement in her expression or voice.

“Abby, David, and Sammy were trying to figure out who they needed to talk to in order to figure out why Daniel was following her around so incessantly. Matty and Lauren overheard and just pushed themselves into the group, demanding that they help in any way they could.”

“That sounds just like them.” Ginny allowed herself a laugh at the realization that her statement was true. “Leave it to Matty and Lauren to break all the rules about fraternizing with the enemy.”

“It’s really cute, actually.” Stephanie allowed herself to smile at her thought. “I think that Matty has a crush on Abby, the way he looks at her is very protective and yet innocent. He blushes every time you mention her name.”

“Do you think she likes him?” Neville asked with a half-smile. Ginny had to chuckle at the question because she knew that he was truly interested. He had spent so many years in love with Stephanie, knowing that they would probably never be together. And here they were, Neville was staring lovingly towards Stephanie as though they belonged together. He was whole and Ginny realized then that a part of him had been missing all along; she had just never recognized it for what it was. Her smile broadened at her friends’ happiness.

“I can’t tell.” Stephanie nodded her head, knowing what Neville was thinking as well as Ginny. “But they are helping each other gain strength so that if someone does come for Abby they can all fight together. Five strong. It’s quite the opposite of Harry and myself, and I’m glad to see that they are banding together. I am doing my best to make sure that they are prepared for what could happen.”

“But we can’t let anything go that far.” Neville answered protectively from the couch. “They are just first years.”

“Remember all of the trouble Harry, Ron, and Hermione got into their first year? I’m sure that as prepared as I can make them and as safe as we can keep them, trouble will find them. At some point we may need to seek Daniel’s support.” Stephanie spoke slowly, letting her request sink in.

“No. Absolutely not.” Ginny responded immediately. The idea was so absurd that she wanted to burst out laughing, but she controlled herself.

“Ginny, we have to keep the students safe no matter the price. I am willing to lose my life to protect my students, that’s why I didn’t tell you and Neville about Dedrick. And I refuse to ask you to do the same, but I know for a fact that Daniel would do anything he could to protect Abby. If there’s any morsel of good within him, it is his unyielding tie to Abigail Seabold. We will need him.” Stephanie made a lot of sense and Ginny merely nodded. Of course she was willing to do whatever it took to ensure the safety of the younger students—she wasn’t a coward.

“What do we do?” She whispered, trying not to think about the alliance she may be forced to create with Daniel Blaiser, Slytherin extraordinaire.

“Nothing at this point.” Stephanie stated matter-of-factly, thinking through the plan she was devising in her head. “If he demands anything of you, follow his instructions without argument. You are our way into his good graces, Ginny. I suspect, after what you told us about his comments this afternoon, that he has a plan for you.”

“I will try, though I can’t promise anything.” Ginny admitted, knowing how difficult it would be to listen to Daniel and to obey his orders. But she couldn’t help but wonder what he would need her for.

“You must do it. Trying is not an option, Ginny.” Neville commanded in a tone that he rarely used. Ginny could only nod in response, knowing that they were both right. She had to do this.

“And if anything serious happens, the Aurors are just outside the castle.” Stephanie said, attempting to reassure Ginny that nothing could happen inside the castle. “They can be inside its walls within seconds.”

Neville and Ginny looked knowingly at each other.

“Something is going on out there.” Stephanie looked towards the window, lost in thought again. “Kingsley has ordered my constant protection, though they refuse to inform me of that decision for some reason. And that’s why I cannot allow my brother to learn what is happening between myself and Dedrick. I don’t want him here when Dedrick comes for me.”

“We’ll do what we can, Stephanie.” Neville got up from the couch and made his way towards the fire, where Stephanie was sitting next to Ginny. Then he wrapped his arms around both of them and held them tightly.

After a few minutes of their closeness, Ginny pulled away. She had learned too much information for one night and she had to be alone to process her thoughts. Maybe she would write Harry a letter—she really did miss him and she yearned to feel connected to him once again.

When she was almost to the door, a quick thought ran through her mind. She turned towards her friends and spoke with urgency. “Abby can’t get detention again. Daniel is getting suspicious about what happened, though I’m sure she can smooth it over this time. But he was angry and I could tell he realized that she had been sneaking around the castle without his protection. If it happens again, I’m sure he’ll make sure her father brings her home.”

Both of her friends nodded in understanding, and then Neville spoke to her. “We will make sure of that. We also need to make sure that he doesn’t learn about the Gryffindors. He may not tell her father about that, but he would make sure that she was isolated from them and the rest of her friends. That’s what we can do for her right now.”

“And, Ginny.” Stephanie spoke confidently, which surprised her. She looked at her friend with curiosity. “No more secrets.”

Ginny nodded and left Stephanie and Neville alone for their very first night of being a couple. As scared as she was about all the new threats that she had learned about, and as much as she missed Harry, she still felt a sense of accomplishment. This was her chance to shine, her chance to show the world what Ginevra Molly Weasley was made of. She smiled broadly as she made her way back to Gryffindor Tower.


I just want to say thank you so much for being patient and sticking with me for so long! I have been working on this entire story for well over a year now and I just can't believe how far it's come! But this is one of my favorite chapters because there is just so much substance. And I promise you an Abby POV next chapter!!! It WILL be there! I'm hoping to have the next chapter posted towards the middle or end of the week, but once again I cannot promise anything! Keep reading and keep leaving feedback! (We all know how much feedback motivates me to write so much more quickly!!!)!! Have a great weekend everyone!

Chapter Twenty-Four: Isolation

Abby rested her head on her arms that lay on the tabletop and closed her eyes. She was so tired and could barely keep everything together. Daniel was driving her absolutely crazy with his constant watch over her. It all started the day after she received detention for sneaking out of her dormitory and going through Professor Potter’s belongings and, ironically, Professor Potter was the only professor who was understanding enough to let her rest during class. Professor Longbottom was more lenient than the others, but Professor Potter never said anything if Abby fell asleep in class.

Daniel had been absolutely livid when he found out that she had received detention overnight. He had concluded, correctly, that she had snuck out of her dormitory, though he didn’t know why. And he hadn’t realized that she had been out with the two Gryffindors who had also received detention—Daniel was too focused on the fact that she and her two Slytherin friends had risked her life by leaving the protection of the Slytherin dormitories. And he hadn’t let her forget it.

The evening after they had received detention everyone in the Great Hall was focused on Professors Longbottom and Potter’s newfound and clearly obvious relationship. Daniel, however, had been completely focused on her misbehavior from the previous night. She knew that she was in trouble and so she didn’t fight him when he pulled her out of the Great Hall into their broom closet for the conversation. But Ginny Weasley had brought it upon herself to try to protect Abby, which Abby greatly appreciated, but Ginny had placed herself in the middle unnecessarily. And Daniel now had some sort of control over Ginny that no one had ever expected would be possible. Even the Slytherin students were gossiping about it—no one could figure out what had changed.

But Abby knew that something significant had happened when Daniel had locked her in the broom closet while he confronted Ginny in the hallway. When Daniel had finally let her out and escorted her back to the Great Hall, Abby desperately wanted to turn to Ginny and apologize for Daniel’s behavior, but she knew that that action would make things so much worse. She was already going to get punished in some form for disrespecting Daniel’s commands. It was going to be bad, Abby could just feel it. But she deserved it—she had known what she was getting herself into when she snuck out with her friends. Professor Potter’s safety was much more important than Abby’s freedom and she knew that it would all be worth it in the end. She would suffer whatever she had to. And she would do it again if necessary; she would do what she could to protect the ones she loved.

That night had come much too quickly and Daniel never once left her side. His friends wore knowing smirks, though none of them seemed too pleased, so Abby had concluded that Daniel had told them what he had planned for Abby. And because they did not like what Daniel had told them, Abby figured it had to mean spending more time with Abby, though she couldn’t figure out how they could spend any more time with her. But at that time she had been wrong, they could spend a lot more time with her.

He had taken her to the potions classroom later that evening to have a private conversation with her. During their walk, Daniel didn’t speak a word; he just held on tightly to her arm and pulled her at a gruesome pace towards the classroom. Professor Slughorn had told Daniel that he could use the room for some “tutoring.” Or, at least, that’s what D had told the professor he was going to use it for. She would be alone where no one could hear her if she needed to scream. But she wasn’t afraid because she knew Daniel too well. As terrifying as he could be at times, Daniel would not harm her. He cared about her too much.

After sitting her down on a chair in the front of the classroom, Daniel pulled a similar one closer to her, and then he sat down as well. He crossed his arms over his chest and just stared at her for a few minutes. His expression was a mixture of anger and disappointment. And the look on his face suddenly caused a wave of guilt to crash through her body. She had disappointed him, her best friend and care taker. What had she done?

“I’m so sor-” Abby tried to apologize and reach out for him, her voice breaking with anxiety. But he pushed her hand away and glared at her even more angrily than she had ever seen him. He was breathing deeply as though he was trying to control his temper. At that moment Abby knew that he was deadly dangerous and she shrank back a little. If she said anything more to upset him, he would hurt her in that room.

He sat there in silence for a few more moments, trying to calm himself down. Finally he spoke slowly and through clenched teeth, balling his fists into tight balls. “What. Did. You. Think. You. Were. Doing?”

“I just-” Abby started but stopped midsentence when Daniel interrupted her again.

“I DON’T WANT TO HEAR ANY EXCUSES!” Daniel bellowed, standing up and placing his face just inches from her own. She took in a deep breath but didn’t say anything.

He took a step back without taking his eyes off hers, and then took a few more deep breaths. His arms were still crossed tightly to his chest, and his hands were balled into fists. “What did you think was so important to risk your life, contrary to all I have sacrificed to keep you safe, that it couldn’t wait until morning when I or one of the others could accompany you?”

Abby swallowed and didn’t say anything. She didn’t know what to say that would calm him down. He was so dangerous when he was this upset and she wished that she hadn’t allowed him to bring her all the way to the Potions dungeon. He seemed to grow impatient with her silence and he finally decided to issue an order. “Speak,” he commanded simply but darkly.

“Daniel, I’m just so sick of it. I can’t handle being followed everywhere I go. It’s like I’m a child and I am not a child.” She whispered her response, hoping that he wouldn’t be able to hear her. And she didn’t look at him while she spoke, lest the courage to tell him the truth disappear with his angry glare. “I just wanted to have some fun.”

She heard Daniel exhale and shuffle his feet. He pulled the chair closer to her and sat down, and then she felt his hand on her chin apply just enough pressure that persuaded her head to rise so that she was forced to look him in the eye.

“Abby, I am not being so protective and demanding for my own health. There is so much more that I could be doing with my free time that it’s sickening.” His voice softened with understanding. “But do you realize what is going on out there?”

“No.” Abby admitted, shaking her head.

“Of course you don’t. It’s dangerous out there. The Death Eaters are gathering and gaining forces, Abby. There are Aurors stationed outside Hogwarts to protect Professor Potter, I presume. But they are there, nonetheless. I’m assuming by their presence that Potter is being threatened or is in danger from the Death Eaters.” His eyes pierced hers with hatred for Professor Potter and concern for her. “I could care less what happens to Potter, and quite frankly, I would be content if they disposed of her properly. But her presence places you in even more danger and that makes me thankful the Aurors are present.”

“But doesn’t that mean that Hogwarts is safe?” Abby asked and Daniel only laughed at her naivety.

“Their presence merely puts you in more danger. Aurors cannot stop these Death Eaters from entering the castle, my dear Abigail.” He slowly ran his fingers through her hair and smiled at her innocence. “These are the most dangerous wizards in the world, and I am almost certain, though I have no proof at this point, that they have entered this castle. That is why I cannot allow you to go gallivanting around on your own.”

“I won’t, I promise, Daniel.” Abby raised her voice and stuck out her chin, showing him her confidence and desire to please him. “I am so sorry for disappointing you.”

“I know you are.” He dropped his arm and stood, though he didn’t take his eyes off of her. “But I cannot trust your word anymore, Abby. You promised me this same thing at the beginning of the school year and you have shown me that you cannot be trusted. My father failed your father, Abby, in protecting your mother and brother. I will not do the same. Bryce was my best friend and I will not fail him again.”

Abby lowered her head at the sound of her older brother’s name. She hadn’t allowed herself to think the names of her mother or brother since their death—it made the loss more real somehow. And she couldn’t stop the tears that sprung to her eyes, so she turned her head so that Daniel wouldn’t see. It was terribly embarrassing to have Daniel see her at her weakest. And he didn’t say anything; instead, he just allowed her time to compose herself.

When the tears stopped and she turned back towards her best friend, Daniel spoke without missing a beat. She just nodded her head in response, knowing that she deserved the punishment he was bestowing upon her.

“And I have ordered that the others restrict your access to those friends of yours. They are a terrible influence on you and I fear that they will only attempt to convince you to disobey me again. And you know I cannot have that, Abby.” His voice was so sweet it was disgusting. Daniel was trying his hardest to stay calm and act like he was giving her a choice, but he was doing exactly what she had feared all along. He was isolating her from those she loved and who loved her. The next step would be for her to be forcefully removed from Hogwarts and she could not let it get that far.

“I will not disobey you again, D.” Abby whispered, using her affectionate nickname for her best friend while trying to hold back the tears that had returned to her eyes. This time they weren’t from hearing her family’s names but from the loss of friends that she had waited so long to gain.

“That is a good attitude, Abigail.” He didn’t smile or laugh—his tone was dead serious and it sent shivers down her spine. “Now we should return to the dormitories as you have homework to do.”

He reached out his hand and Abby grabbed it by instinct. His touch had always comforted her, especially since the death of her family, and this time was no exception. As much as he was dictating her life, she still cared about him deeply and he felt the same towards her. It was a bond that no one else could understand, even her closest friends, and that made her happy. She didn’t want to share this type of friendship with anyone else, and she knew she never would.

In the hallway on the way back to their dormitories, Abby looked up to Daniel and asked a question that had been on her mind. “D, who is Dedrick Hargrave?”

He looked down at her curiously and something flashed through his eyes that she didn’t recognize. Then, he stopped walking and knelt down to her level. His voice was unexpectedly soft. “Abigail Seabold, Dedrick Hargrave is the most dangerous Death Eater there ever was with the lone exception of the Dark Lord.” He paused to squeeze her hand and then he continued. “But I am positive that he is the only one that you do not have to worry about.

“He is obsessively and solely focused on getting revenge on Professor Potter. There are other Death Eaters, however, that feel more betrayed by your father and would stop at nothing to seek their own revenge.” He looked deep into her eyes and squeezed her hand again. “But I don’t want you to worry because I will never let that happen. They will not get close enough to even lay eyes upon you. I will protect you until the ends of the earth—I owe your family that much, and I love you, Abby. There is absolutely no need to worry.”

Words would not come into Abby’s brain, so she merely nodded her head. She knew he was wrong—there was every need in the world to worry. Dedrick Hargrave, the most dangerous Death Eater in the world, was determined to murder her favorite professor. And the others wanted to see Abby dead because they believed her father had betrayed them, though she knew in her heart that her father would not have done that. He wouldn’t risk her life that way.

To make things worse, the Death Eaters had somehow gained access to the castle. Daniel was worried about that, and was sure it had happened, and she couldn’t come up with any reason to believe that he was wrong. Someone had left something on Professor Potter’s desk the first day of school that had terrified her; there could be no other alternative for what had happened.

Abby and Professor Potter’s presence at Hogwarts placed the entire student body in danger. Dumbledore’s Army had been working very hard to keep a watch over Professor Potter and would most certainly get involved if an attack occurred. Daniel and his friends’ constant presence around her placed their lives in danger. And what could she do but allow it? She wasn’t talented enough to take on a full fledged Death Eater on her own—she wouldn’t even be able to protect herself from Daniel if he ever decided to harm her. It was hopeless.

So there was absolutely every reason in the world to worry about what Daniel had just told her. She couldn’t even talk to her friends about it until class—that would be the only opportunity they would have to talk. What was she going to do?

And with her silence, Daniel had resumed their trek towards the Slytherin dormitories. He did surprise her by turning towards her just outside the entrance to their common room with a sweet smile. “And don’t tell anyone that I am capable of being nice.” Abby had smiled in return at his statement.

“Of course not.” She had to laugh at his attempt to lighten the mood.

And since that night, Abby had gotten very little sleep which had caused her to be completely exhausted and have little energy to converse with her friends at the few opportunities they had been given.

Daniel would not allow her to go to her room until very late at night, most of the time it was early morning before he would release her to bed. They spent the majority of the evenings completing her homework. He told her the reason for this was that he needed to ensure she was too exhausted to roam about the school after he went to bed. And her promises to stay in her room were fruitless; he kept reminding her that she needed to earn his trust.

He and his friends had not allowed her to go into her classrooms early. They would not even escort her to the rooms until just seconds before the bell would ring. Then they would enter the classroom immediately following the bell releasing the class, giving her absolutely no opportunity to speak with her friends. They were a bad influence on her, Daniel kept reminding her.

But it didn’t make things easier on her; she had never felt so alone in her entire life, having her friends dangled in front of her just out of reach. It was excruciating, and by the looks they gave her, she knew they were worried about her. But Daniel could not be reasoned with, and she would not fight him because what she had done to deserve this punishment had been worth it. She had most likely saved her professor’s life. If she kept telling herself that, she could probably survive until the end of term and holiday break.

“These pixies are horrible creatures…” Professor Potter’s voice broke through her thoughts and a question popped into her mind. Suddenly she had this urge to ask the question that had been on her mind and she couldn’t stop herself from interrupting.

So, she lifted her head and raised her hand. She could sense the eyes of Sammy, Lauren, David, and Matty immediately turn in her direction at the sudden movement. Abby had been like a zombie for the last few days and this was the most action she had made—she was usually just too exhausted from lack of sleep to do much.

“Yes, Abby?” Professor Potter looked surprised as well and paused her lesson to address Abby.

“Why do you always wear long sleeves?” Abby asked and Professor Potter looked taken aback at her sudden and random question. “I mean, even when it was still warm outside you still wore long sleeves and high-necked sweaters.”

“Excuse me?” Professor Potter asked, clearly trying to figure out where Abby was taking the question.

“I’ve noticed that when you’re nervous, you tug on the sleeve of your shirt. What is it about your arms that you are hiding?” Abby asked.

“I’ve noticed that too.” Matty raised his hand and started bouncing in his seat. He looked towards Abby and smiled for the slightest moment and then returned his attention towards the professor. “Is it because of your tattoos?”

“I don’t see where this is relevant to pixies, Abby.” Professor Potter narrowed her eyes suspiciously towards Abby.

“It’s not.” Abby responded matter-of-factly. “I’m just curious.”

“Is he right, professor? Is it because of your tattoos?” Lauren asked.

“How many tattoos do you have?” Maisie piped in from just behind Abby.

“Ooh, Ooh, Ooh.” A short, chubby first year Gryffindor named Erik started bouncing in his seat in excitement. “Can we see them professor? Please?”

“Absolutely not.” Professor Potter responded more harshly than Abby had ever heard, but she persisted.

“They can’t be too bad.” Sammy spoke quietly from next to Abby.

“Why won’t you show us, Professor?” David leaned forward in his chair and looked intently towards the front of the classroom.

“I am not particularly proud of these tattoos, students.” Professor Potter spoke quietly and leaned against her desk, sighing heavily. “They were forced upon me during a dark time in my life and I do not wish to display them for the world to see.”

“Tell us about them, professor.” Matty spoke softly, trying to convince Professor Potter to elaborate. And Abby was positive that they were breaking their professor down. She would share and Abby would feel that much more connected to Professor Potter. The class would have a bond with Professor Potter that no one else had.

Professor Potter took a moment to look around the classroom at all the anxious faces and then sighed in defeat. Abby giggled a little excitedly and couldn’t take her eyes off her professor. Professor Potter gestured for the students to get closer and all Abby could hear were the scraping of chairs as everyone hurried to the front of the classroom.

When everyone was settled and surrounded Professor Potter, she slowly rolled up the sleeves of the shirt on her left arm. Everyone gasped as the Dark Mark appeared on her arm and then a second, unfamiliar marking was displayed a little higher. She pointed towards the tattoo that Abby didn’t recognize.

“This is the Malfoy family crest.” Professor Potter explained the two snakes entwining together to form the letter M. “For thirteen years, I was a servant in the Malfoy home. When I was thirteen, shortly after I met Harry for the first time in Diagon Alley, Lucius Malfoy felt it would be appropriate to brand me with his family crest. Whenever any member of the Malfoy family wished to summon me, they merely needed to activate this crest and it would burn my skin. I was to find them immediately to do their bidding or else I was punished.”

“Why didn’t you run away?” Maisie asked in her sweetly high-pitched voice.

Professor Potter smiled in response to the question. “Before I met Harry in Diagon Alley, I had no where else to go. If I ran away from the only home I had ever known, I would have been truly alone, and that terrified me more than staying with the Malfoy family.”

“And after?” Matty whispered.

“That is a more complicated question. Harry and I met in Diagon Alley and something about me drew him towards me. He was concerned about the way Draco had been treating me and he went to Professor Dumbledore, who realized immediately who I was.” Professor Potter was looking directly at her students, but her gaze was far away, as though she was remembering some painful memory. Abby took in a deep breath at the information that Professor Potter was sharing with them. “He offered to protect me but I declined, the reason, however, is very complex.”

“Please tell us, professor.” Sammy squeezed Abby’s hand as she continued to stare at the tattoo burned onto Abby’s arm. Abby knew that the Dark Mark reminded Sammy of her father, Peter, who was in Azkaban for his actions during the battle where Lord Voldemort was defeated. It was the only information Sammy would share about her father.

“Well, first, my life had had little meaning up until that point.” Professor Potter’s voice softened as she continued with her story. “All I had been was a pathetic little servant. But my gut was telling me that by staying with the Malfoy family, I could help protect Harry’s life. That would give me meaning and a reason to continue living, and that’s why I chose to stay behind.”

“And the second reason?” Abby prodded.

Professor Potter smiled in Abby’s direction. “Honestly, I was scared. I would rather stay at the Malfoy home, where my life was made miserable, because it was familiar and I knew what to expect. Going to the protection of Professor Dumbledore terrified me.”

“You were scared?” Abby asked, surprised that Professor Potter had ever been terrified in her entire life. She was so strong.

“Most of the time, actually.” Professor Potter smiled in understanding. She nodded her head and spoke with her heart. “It’s alright to be afraid; fear doesn’t make you any less talented or worthwhile. Fear can drive us to do great things—you just have to learn to overcome that fear.”

“Tell us about the Dark Mark, professor.” Erik pointed towards the tattoo of the skull that lay directly below the Malfoy family crest.

“There’s not too much to tell.” Professor Potter admitted, shrugging her shoulders. “I know that you have all seen this image before.”

“Did it hurt?” Lauren asked.

“I hear that there is a ceremony and an initiation.” Sammy spoke quietly and Abby looked at her friend questioningly. “Is it true?”

“Yes and yes.” Professor Potter responded by looking towards Lauren and Sammy respectively. “To join the Death Eaters, I first had to watch Draco Malfoy suffer the Cruciatus Curse for five minutes. It is no easy task and watching someone suffer that much, even if it was the person who had tortured me relentlessly for years, was much worse than experiencing the actual Curse itself.

“And then a special member of the Death Eaters was chosen personally by the Dark Lord to perform the Curse as part of my initiation.” Professor Potter continued. “And then I suffered the Cruciatus Curse for a total of five minutes. Yes it was very painful, but I had endured the Curse many times by that point and so I was able to recover much more quickly than poor Draco.”

“Who Cursed you, professor?” Maisie asked from the back of the group of students.

“Professor Severus Snape.” Professor Potter responded more confidently, and her voice sounded full of contempt. Abby could tell by those three little words that, despite the torture Snape had cast upon her, Professor Potter truly cared about the man, maybe even loved him dearly.

“How could he do that?” David spit out, surprised by Professor Potter’s tone of voice. “I heard he was part of the Order.”

“Don’t you dare accuse Severus of wrong doing, David McNitt.” Professor Potter stood up and turned back towards the blackboard. “Severus sacrificed his life for the Order of the Phoenix and I am terribly saddened by that loss. He was a very good man. His Cursing me during the induction ceremony was a comfort—it eased my anxiety of being an official Death Eater knowing that he was there with me, watching out for me.”

“I’m sorry, professor.” David hung his head.

“It’s alright, David.” Professor Potter smiled. “Now, there is one more if you students are interested.”

“Of course!” Erik shrieked and Abby had to cover her ears.

Professor Potter slowly lowered the high neck of her shirt to reveal a simple tattoo with four numbers. Abby read them in her head: 5283.

“Your prisoner number.” Matty whispered in awe. “Azkaban.”

“You were in prison, Professor?” Maisie asked in disbelief.

Professor Potter smiled as she nodded her head. “But I wasn’t in Azkaban. After the mass breakout that had occurred when I was fifteen, the Ministry erected prisons around the country to house the most dangerous wizards who had been captured. I was sent on a mission by the Dark Lord with the sole purpose of my capture and I was housed with Lucius Malfoy, Antonin Dolohov, and Rodolphus Lestrange.

“I will admit that my time in prison was very therapeutic. It was where I learned to stand up for myself against Lucius Malfoy, though it also fueled the superior attitude the Dark Lord had worked diligently to create in me.” Professor Potter finished just as the bell rang to dismiss them from class.

Before Abby could say anything, Corey and Rachel walked into the classroom and eyed her impatiently. She knew it was her cue to leave, but she definitely wanted to try and speak with Professor Potter soon. It was amazing that the professor would trust them all so much to share with them.

Just as she was out the door, she heard her name and she turned. Rachel placed her hand on Abby’s arm to pull her along, but Abby stopped and looked for the source of the sound. It had been Professor Potter who had called her name.

Professor Potter merely smiled at Abby sweetly and tugged on the sleeve of her shirt. “Comfort.” She said simply and Abby nodded. Professor Potter was always tugging on the sleeve of her shirt because it simply made her feel better. They had shared something special that day and she was positive that they would work well together in the future. That knowledge made her isolation more bearable and she smiled as Corey and Rachel led her to the Great Hall for lunch.


So I am so, so, so sorry it's taken me two weeks to post the next chapter. My parents surprised me with a visit last weekend and this week was very exhaustive and tiring!! But I promise you another chapter by Friday. My guess is that I'll be able to post it by Tuesday but I won't promise that. Please leave me feedback and let me know your thoughts!

Chapter Twenty-Five: Mutiny

“I don’t know why you care so much, Daniel.” Rachel twirled her hair around her fingers, but Daniel wasn’t paying attention to her. Instead, he was staring in Ginny Weasley’s direction in the Great Hall. That fact, however, didn’t deter Rachel from speaking. “She’s going to get you killed, you know. You do realize that, don’t you?”

“Rachel’s right.” Corey reached towards Rachel and squeezed her hand. “Daniel, Abby isn’t worth risking your life over. Do you realize how many Death Eaters are still out there and waiting for their chance at her?”

“Why would you want to protect her, anyway?” Mark asked. “She sure doesn’t show any appreciation for what any of us are doing.”

“We’ve been talking…” Craig started out and paused to look around at everyone. This caught Daniel’s attention immediately and he turned angrily towards his group of friends, suspecting what Craig was about to say. “…and we have decided that-”

“That is enough!” Daniel bellowed, standing up. He knew exactly what they were going to say, but there was absolutely no way he could allow them to stray from their mission. They had all agreed to protect Abby for the duration of the school year, no matter the price. Jason Seabold had promised them each something in return. He leaned over the table and quieted his voice so that it was calm but threatening. “You will not abandon your posts, do you understand me?”

“But-” Fred replied, but Daniel wouldn’t let him speak.

“Do not disappoint me, Fred.” Daniel’s voice was still calm because he knew that his friends would not dare to disobey him. “Or you will have worse things than Jason Seabold to worry about. But maybe you have forgotten the promise, in blood I might add, that you made to him, and to me. If you break the agreement, you will not get what your heart desires. And there might be an accident where people lose their lives. Who knows, anything can happen.” He shrugged his shoulders nonchalantly and then turned towards Rachel.

“And Rachel. Trust me when I say that if you break your contract, you will never see your father again.” Rachel’s eyes opened wide and he knew that he had hit his mark. Rachel’s father was in Azkaban for his participation in the Death Eaters organization. Jason Seabold promised Rachel that he would allow her opportunities to visit her father if she kept Abby protected.

“You wouldn’t.” Rachel whispered.

“I would see to it personally.” Daniel allowed a smile to creep onto his face. He was telling her exactly how it was. And if she, or any of them, betrayed him, he would do far more to them than Jason Seabold would dream of. He would first murder their family members and then, when they had suffered enough, he would end their lives. That’s how protective he was of Abigail Seabold.

“Why is she so important to you, Daniel?” Corey hissed in his direction before standing up to leave. He looked livid at Daniel’s threats.

“You know the answer to that question, Corey.” Daniel blurted out, glaring at the boy standing above him. He rose to his friend’s level. “She is family and I will not allow her to lose her life because you are a traitor.”

“We will continue as promised.” Rachel responded quietly, placing her hand on Corey’s shoulder. Everyone shuffled out of the Great Hall, leaving Daniel at the Slytherin table alone for the first time ever. It was a good thing that Tom had taken Abby back to the common room—it would have been terrible for her to witness that mutiny.

Ever since her detention, Abby had been more compliant with his requests. He hadn’t realized how much her friends influenced her decisions and it had benefited her greatly to be separated from them.

He returned his gaze towards Ginny Weasley and nodded in her direction, gesturing that she should come over and speak with him. He hadn’t been surprised that Ginny didn’t fight his control over her. It was the normal hierarchy of nature: he could get anyone to listen to what he said, no matter the consequences.

The other Slytherins had been surprised when Ginny would come when he summoned her and follow his orders without question, but of course he had been expecting it. Daniel had allowed Ginny to realize her true place in this school. He smirked as Ginny stood and made her way over to his table.

“What is it, Daniel?” Ginny breathed as she plopped down across from him. She spoke in a mocking tone. Daniel was always amused by her consistent compliance without ever attempting to hide her pure hatred for him. “Have a little fight with your groupies?”

“That is none of your business, Weasley.” He snapped back at her. “Have you discovered any leads on what Nott, Bulstrode, and Goyle are up to?”

Ginny shook her head and he pounded his fist on the table in response to her failure. “They are up to something and we need to figure out what that is.”

“Well, Dumbledore’s Army can only do so much, Daniel! Have your Slytherin mates help out a little if you aren’t pleased with our work.” She retorted.

Shortly after he had confronted her outside the broom closet in the hallway, he had come to her demanding her help in keeping track of the three eighth year Slytherins. They were always sneaking away and he suspected that they were up to something, whether it was planning something or helping someone enter the castle, he didn’t know. And he hadn’t trusted Dumbledore’s Army enough to allow them to assist in Abby’s protection, so he sent them after the three nitwits of the Slytherin House instead.

They hadn’t come up with anything yet. “You know they are stretched thin as it is, Weasley. I thought you were better than that. I am truly disappointed in you.”

“We’ll figure out what they are doing.” Ginny responded through gritted teeth. His manipulation powers were working on her just as he had wanted them to. Daniel smiled internally at himself as she continued. “Dumbledore’s Army will not fail.”

“Very good.” Daniel nodded in acknowledgement. “Now I have bad news for you.”

“What?” She asked, narrowing her eyes suspiciously. Times like these made him really enjoy the fact that he truly was better than most of the students that attended Hogwarts. He could do things like this, even though he knew it was wrong but it was so much fun that he couldn’t resist, and not have an ounce of regret.

Ginny’s face dropped in disappointment and then scrunched together in anger at what he had just told her. She slammed her chair backwards and just glared at him. “Absolutely not. NO!”

“Don’t worry, Wealsey.” He reassured her in a falsely sweet voice. “We’ll take good care of you. Let me know by eight o’clock whether or not you’re going to help. I will need to make alternative arrangements if you refuse me.”

He laughed as Ginny huffed and made her way towards the entrance of the Great Hall. She wouldn’t dare to disobey him; he knew that she would come to him later that evening. And he would make sure she knew it was not appropriate to disrespect him like that in front of other students again.

*~*~*~*

Ginny knew it was going to be bad when he gestured her over to his table during dinner. She had been watching him have a disagreement with his friends, which only meant trouble for her. And she wasn’t sure how much more she could ask Dumbledore’s Army to do before they mutinied on her; they had been close already. Most of Dumbledore’s Army was questioning her loyalty after spending so much time with Daniel Blaiser.

But the worst had been the first time she had come to them with a request (it had been more of a command, but she hadn’t worded it that way to her peers) from the Slytherin fourth year. Also, it was quite embarrassing to take orders from Blaiser, but Stephanie and Neville kept encouraging her to do as he asked. They needed his help in protecting Abby (and ultimately, Stephanie).

It had been difficult for her to swallow her pride and agree to have Dumbledore’s Army follow Nott, Bulstrode, and Goyle. A Slytherin was suspicious of someone in his own house. She doubted that she would ever have someone follow a fellow Gryffindor, though it was possible. And it had been even worse going to her friends within Dumbledore’s Army to break the news to them.

She had called the meeting to order in the Room of Requirement the same night that Daniel had made his demand. They no longer needed to meet in secret, but it was just an easy location for students from all the houses to get together and practice their magic.

Ginny had tried to keep the origination of the request a secret, but a few of the students were too smart. “My sources tell me that Theodore Nott, Millicent Bulstrode, and Gregory Goyle are up to something. We need to figure out what that is and stop them immediately. I want at least two members within earshot at all times.”

“Who told you this?” Amber Zacharias asked curiously. “I haven’t heard anything within Slytherin.”

“Well, they wouldn’t exactly be open in front of you, would they?” Matty responded. He and Lauren had joined Dumbledore’s Army shortly after Daniel had tightened security around Abby. They wanted to feel like they were doing something productive to help Abby and Ginny couldn’t deny them that. With their extra lessons with Stephanie, they were getting pretty good at defensive magic—far beyond the levels of a first year.

“But I still have access to places you don’t.” Amber retorted, looking at him with a mixture of disappointment and anger.

“That doesn’t help if they won’t talk in front of you.” Lauren broke in.

“Stop.” Ginny ordered. “It doesn’t matter who my sources are. What is important is the fact that this information is highly credible and it is our duty to learn its validity.”

“It was Daniel Blaiser, wasn’t it?” Karen Graham, Lauren’s sister, asked quietly.

“What?” Ginny had asked, surprised by the correct guess. She also didn’t want the others to know who was forcing her to work with the Slytherins.

“I saw you talking to him this morning.” Karen looked at Ginny with knowing eyes and Ginny realized that she couldn’t keep it a secret. Though, she also couldn’t tell them the entire story, either. “The question I have is why we are working with Daniel Blaiser when you have asked us to keep track of him all semester.”

“Fine.” Ginny breathed out in defeat. “Daniel cannot spare enough Slytherins to watch over the three eigth years and keep it a secret, so he has asked us to assist him. There are many factors in play that I just cannot share with you at this time, but I am positive everything will become clear in the future.”

“So you want us to blindly follow your instructions, without knowing your motives and endangering our safety?” A seventh year Ravenclaw asked from near Ginny.

“That’s exactly what I want you to do.” Ginny replied quietly, but with the determination of a born leader. It was important that they continue to help her. Stephanie and Neville needed Daniel on their side for some reason, and she was the only one who could make that happen. She had to convince Dumbledore’s Army to assist her. “I need you to trust me completely. So, who’s with me?”

“I am.” Amber and Matty said at the same time, standing up to show their support.

“Absolutely.” Lauren spoke almost defiantly. Then she looked at her sister demandingly and Karen reluctantly nodded her head and stood.

Slowly, and one-by-one, the rest of Dumbledore’s Army acknowledged their faith in Ginny Weasley and stood to show their support. Not one individual decided they didn’t want to help.

But things had been difficult since then. She could sense the members of Dumbledore’s Army were getting suspicious of the time that she was spending with Daniel and his cronies. Karen had approached her earlier that week and informed her that some of her fellow students were starting to think Ginny had allied herself with the Slytherins for a more sinister purpose.

Karen also told Ginny that she didn’t believe that; Lauren knew more about the situation than Karen did, but she trusted her sister’s judgment and would stick with Ginny and Dumbledore’s Army until the end. That had made Ginny feel a little better, seeing as Karen would be able to convince her friends to stay and help. But the other members of Dumbledore’s Army would start to stray if something didn’t happen to show her true loyalties.

How could she tell them how much she hated being ordered around by Daniel and the Slytherins without sharing with them how deep she was in? They would have to know the full story and that wasn’t something she was willing to share quite yet. If only she had powers of suggestion similar to Daniel’s powers of manipulation.

But what Daniel had just told her had crossed the line. She had, not by choice, stuck up for him with Dumbledore’s Army many times within the past couple of weeks. And now he was asking her to do the one thing that she was not willing to sacrifice. So, she did the only thing she could. Ginny stormed out of the Great Hall, leaving Daniel’s laughter and her fellow students’ stares behind her.

Instead of returning to her dormitory, Ginny quickly made her way down the hall, through the school, and towards Stephanie Potter’s living quarters. Neville had prepared a meal for the two of them so Ginny knew exactly where her friends would be. She didn’t even bother knocking when she reached the door. Instead, she just barged inside the room. It was just as much their fault as it was Daniel’s because they had told her to do as he asked without question. They would make things right.

“Ginny?” Stephanie looked up from the makeshift table that Neville must have created for their date. “What’s going on? What’s wrong?”

“I can’t do it anymore.” Ginny shook her head towards her friends. Neville stood and made his way towards her. He attempted to reach his arms out and guide her towards the couch in front of the fireplace, but she shrank back. “No. I don’t want you telling me that I need to do this. Daniel Blaiser is absolutely impossible. Most of Dumbledore’s Army is doubting me and I am certain we will start seeing people drop out soon and he doesn’t even seem to care.”

“What happened?” Stephanie asked as she stood and made her way closer to them as well.

“He wants me to stay here for Christmas to help protect Abby.” Ginny’s breathing was heavy with anger and longing. She couldn’t stay at Hogwarts for Christmas; she had been looking forward to this break since the term began. If she didn’t see Harry, she wouldn’t be able to keep herself together. And for everyone’s sake, she needed to keep herself composed and strong.

“Has he ever asked you to help with that before?” Neville asked curiously and Ginny was so angry that she couldn’t figure out why it even mattered.

“You know he hasn’t.” She snapped at her friend.

“What exactly did he say?” Stephanie asked quietly.

“He had a fight with his friends, though he wouldn’t tell me what it was about. They all stormed out of the Great Hall. Then he called me over and said ‘Now I have bad news for you.’ And I asked him, ‘What?’

“Then he said, ‘With several of my friends having to leave for the holidays and a decrease in general population of the school, I am in need of additional bodies to assist in Abby’s protection. Therefore, I am requiring your presence to help guard Abby.’

“That was when I stormed out of the Great Hall after telling him that I would not stay here for the holidays.” Ginny finished and couldn’t believe the reaction she was receiving from her supposed friends. They appeared to be astonished by what she had just told them instead of appalled.

“Do you know what this means?” Neville asked excitedly, looking at Stephanie with a huge smile on his face.

Stephanie nodded and turned back towards Ginny. “This is important, Ginny. He hasn’t asked anyone else to help in Abby’s protection, and he didn’t ask for the DA’s. He specifically asked for you. He is starting to trust you.”

“Daniel Blaiser doesn’t trust anyone.” Ginny spat as she thought back to the conversation that she just had with Daniel moments before in the Great Hall. Nothing about his demeanor had suggested that he trusted her. “He’s just desperate.”

“I don’t think so.” Neville shook his head. “If there’s only one thing I know about that boy, it is the fact that he wouldn’t trust Abby’s fate with just anyone. Stephanie’s right. He asked for you specifically, not another Slytherin or any other alternative. He asked for you. This is a big step in our allying with him if the situation needed to warrant it.”

“But what about Harry?” Ginny was starting to understand, though it didn’t mean that she wanted to remain at Hogwarts throughout the holidays. She still needed to set eyes on the man she loved; she needed to touch him and kiss him. Most importantly, she needed to feel him to make sure that he was real. Harry had started to fade into just a memory by not seeing him for almost four months. “I need to see him.”

“Neville and I have volunteered to stay at Hogwarts through the holidays to act as chaperones for the remaining students. I am sure that Harry, Ron, and Hermione would love to join us here for the holidays.” Stephanie’s voice was reassuring and Ginny nodded as her friend spoke.

“What about mum and dad? They would be so upset if I didn’t come home.” Ginny asked hesitantly. She didn’t want to upset Stephanie by saying her brother’s name, but it had to be said. “Since Fred died, mum has been very insistent on family get-togethers.”

“Let me take care of that, Ginny. It is very important that you stay in Daniel’s good graces.” Stephanie nodded her head in understanding, and she didn’t appear affected at the sound of her first love’s name. “Did Daniel say anything else?”

“He wanted me to let him know by eight o’clock if I would be staying. The weird part was that he said he’d ‘take good care of’ me.” Ginny scrunched her eyebrows together at the remembrance of his statement. What had he meant by that?

Neville and Stephanie smiled at her disclosure. After a few moments of their staring at each other, it was Stephanie that spoke. “Would you do as he asks, Ginny?”

“If you can convince Harry to spend the holidays at Hogwarts, then I’ll stay.” Ginny conceded. Her friends had an ability to convince her of things that she wouldn’t normally agree to. “What do you think he meant when he said that he’d take good care of me?”

“We’ll just have to see.” Neville responded with an annoying grin. Ginny just grunted in response. “But I think that you need to go let him know.”

“Fine.” Ginny turned around and left Stephanie’s quarters without another word. She was so disappointed that she could barely think straight, but everything would be fine if Stephanie could convince Harry to spend the holidays at Hogwarts.

She headed back towards the Great Hall in search of Daniel, but he was nowhere to be found. The entire Slytherin table was empty, though a few students lingered at other tables. She didn’t even bother asking any of them where Daniel could have gone, seeing as he wouldn’t have told them.

The next obvious place to look for him was the Slytherin common room, so she made her way towards the tunnel that would lead to the entryway. Of course she couldn’t enter, and so she had to wait for someone to come through.

Ginny waited for close to an hour before a couple third years finally made their way down the hallway towards the entryway to the common room. She stood as they approached and they paused when they noticed her.

“Can you get Daniel Blaiser for me?” She asked before they could say anything. One of the girls giggled but they nodded and disappeared through the entryway.

A few minutes later Daniel emerged with a smug look on his face. “You’re thirteen minutes late, Weasley. My offer has officially been rescinded. Have a good night and I’ll see you tomorrow.”

He turned to leave, but Ginny spoke anyway. “How did you expect me to get in there? Break down the door? I was here an hour ago, Blaiser, so don’t give me that.”

Daniel turned around and laughed lightly at her response. “I like your attitude Weasley. I take your reaction to mean that you are willing to assist me, after all. Am I correct?”

“Yes.” Ginny responded matter-of-factly, keeping her voice as flat as possible. She needed to keep her emotions in check so that he wouldn’t notice how much he could upset her. That was very important.

“Very well.” Daniel nodded, smiling brightly, but keeping a solemn expression on his face. “I will let you know very soon what the plan and arrangements will be. Good night.”

With that, he turned and made his way back into the Slytherin common room. And Ginny was left wondering what he meant by “arrangements.” As much as she couldn’t stand Daniel Blaiser, she couldn’t help but admit that he also intrigued her. She had to figure out how his mind worked. That would give her motivation to continue working with him throughout the school year.

Ginny turned and slowly walked back through the dungeon hallway, away from the Slytherin dormitories, and towards her own common room. She needed to write to her mum and dad and Harry about the holidays. What was she going to tell them?


So, here is that chapter. And I know I haven't been keeping my promises lately, but I fully intend to get another chapter posted for you by the end of this weekend. If you have any questions about the story that you want me to address, let me know. All questions will be answered by the end of the story. Have a great weekend!

Chapter Twenty-Six: Holiday Cards

“Samantha, can I see you for a moment, please?” Stephanie asked the young Slytherin to come to the front of the classroom prior to the first years’ final Defense Against the Dark Arts class for the term. Sammy nodded her head and made her way towards the front of the classroom.

She had already had the students demonstrate their abilities. In the place of a term-ending final exam, Stephanie had preferred to have a practical exam. She had placed each student in a predicament, the higher level students in more difficult situations, where they had to demonstrate their skills in order to pass. All of her first years had performed wonderfully, especially the five students whom she had tutored all semester. They were so dedicated that it had impressed Stephanie beyond words.

So today she had something special planned for the students. It was a task that she felt would be fun for them, but it was also cruel of her to conduct. There were several students, however, she thought might be disturbed by her request. She had already spoken with Sammy about the task and the student had expressed her interest in it. However, it was a request that Stephanie didn’t want to make on the youngster unless she was certain that Sammy wanted to complete it. She would give Samantha Sienko the opportunity to sit out of this assignment.

“What’s up, professor?” Sammy asked Stephanie in her typically shy and quiet voice. The student placed her hands behind her back as she waited for a response.

“Sammy, I just wanted to make sure that you were alright with the assignment for today.” Stephanie spoke quietly so the other students in the room could not overhear their conversation. “If you do not want to participate, I would fully understand. I know that this may be hard for you.”

“Professor.” Sammy smiled and giggled in response. “I want to do this. Please don’t worry about me.”

“And you are sure that you want to send it to your father?” Stephanie asked cautiously, trying to decide whether Sammy was being truthful with her. “I could assign you a different one if you wanted that.”

“No.” Sammy shook her head almost violently, but kept her voice just above a whisper. “I want to send this to my father.”

“Alright, then.” Stephanie was satisfied that Sammy was being honest with her. She nodded her head to gesture that Sammy could return to her seat.

Stephanie had ulterior motives in assigning this project to her students. First, she did not think that the Death Eaters in prison would appreciate nice, fluffy Christmas cards from the students at Hogwarts. It was a task that she could not resist. In all honesty, George had given her the idea. He had come to visit during the most recent Quidditch game; he wanted to watch Ginny play in her final matches. It was too bad that Gryffindor had lost, but there had been many factors in play. Ginny hadn’t told her everything, but rumors were spreading wildly that she had lost the match on purpose. Ginny, however, wouldn’t share any details relating to that.

They had been watching the game and Stephanie had made a random comment, wondering how Draco was doing in prison. It couldn’t be easy for him, being that he had been so spoiled during his life. He had been given everything and waited on constantly. And suddenly he’s thrust in prison where he is locked in a cell for 24 hours a day. High security prisoners weren’t even allowed out of their cells for daily exercise. As much as she hated Draco, she felt sorry for him. She still felt that the way he developed was mostly his parents’ fault. They had raised him to be that way, after all.

And George had just randomly told her that if she cared so much about Draco that she should send her love in a Christmas card. “That git would probably soil himself with excitement at any outside interaction.” It had been a statement to elicit laughter from her, especially since Draco had not been allowed visitors since his sentencing, but it had given her the idea. She would have her students send the prisoners of Azkaban Christmas cards to show them that even though these people had done horrible things, it was important to feel some sort of compassion for the people they had become. There was always a reason for why people do what they do. And we don’t know their reasons.

And the Death Eaters would absolutely hate it.

Stephanie smiled at the last thought. After all of the years they tormented her, it was nice to have some sort of revenge on them. And then she felt horrible for her thoughts—she had rarely sought revenge against those who had hurt her. But it also helped her to overcome the obstacles in her life. She was starting to feel freer than she had ever felt before, like a weight was lifting off her shoulders.

And that was because she had begun to share more of herself than ever before. Neville was allowing her to heal, similar to how Fred had assisted with the same thing. Some higher power had brought these people into her life for more reasons than just support. They were there to save her from herself. Even Ginny was helping more than she could ever imagine.

She felt like a horrible friend by asking Ginny to suffer even a little, but it felt amazing not to be the one sacrificing everything. It was the first time that she could remember when she wasn’t the person that had to suffer for the greater cause. Ginny understood that, too, and, though she complained some, that was the reason she complied with Stephanie and Neville’s requests. Ginny’s work was important.

Stephanie had a feeling in the pit of her stomach and in the back of her mind that they would need Daniel’s help in the near future. If the Death Eaters, especially Dedrick Hargrave, came for her, they all had to be as prepared as they could. And as pompous and righteous as Daniel was, he was above his wizarding level in all skill sets. He had been trained by a man that would have fit in well with the Dark Lord’s Death Eaters. But the man, Jeffrey Blaiser, had decided to follow his best friend instead of joining the Death Eaters. That was definitely a blessing unbeknownst to the Dark Lord.

“Welcome to your last class of the term.” Stephanie awoke from her memories and flashbacks to address her students. She was amused by the depressed looks that she received at her statement. “Hey, now. Don’t worry. We’ll be back to it after the holidays. You all have six and a half years left with me.”

“We enjoy your class, professor!” Matty bounced in his seat and Stephanie couldn’t help but smile at his reaction.

“I’m glad. But I hope that you all feel the same after I make my request of you today.” She paused to look around the class for a moment. It was still divided into Slytherins and Gryffindors, which disappointed her slightly. “On the first day of class, I gave each of you one specific responsibility. Can any of you tell me what that was?”

For the first time all semester, the classroom was dead silent. Not one single hand raised as they each thought back to the first class of the term when she had introduced herself. They had had many questions for her and she had done her best to answer them all. Several of her students had even followed through with her request, even though they may not have been aware of it.

Finally, a hand raised and Stephanie smiled to see Abby looking at her shyly. Stephanie nodded towards the first year Slytherin and encouraged her to provide the answer. “You wanted us to dispel the Slytherin/Gryffindor stereotypes.”

“Very good, Abby.” Stephanie smiled proudly. “And many of you have done that, but I do not feel that I have done enough to encourage you in this task. You are the very first class where this change will take effect, but each of my other classes will follow suit as the new term begins after the holidays.

“The tables are going to get a little larger and I will be assigning seats. Most of the projects next term will be group assignments where I will be requiring work both inside and outside the classroom. In each group, there will be at least two people from each House.” Stephanie also had ulterior motives for this decision. Mostly it was so Stephanie could facilitate interaction between Abby and her friends, since Daniel had banned her from communicating with her friends outside of the classrooms. Her other reason was so that the students in each grade could learn to work together efficiently and effectively. The Houses were still divided to the point of concern and she felt that it needed to be corrected.

Neville had encouraged her to rethink this decision but she held firm to her morals. Being in Slytherin did not mean that the student was a bad person and the rest of the school needed to learn this. Students should not be judged based on the House that they were sorted into. She would do her best to make sure that each of her students learned this lesson, though she had to admit to herself that the older students would be more difficult to reach. Stephanie would do what she could. It was her responsibility.

So, she sorted the students into their groups and made sure that Abby, Sammy, Matty, David, and Lauren were in the same group. The other students grumbled as they made their way to the new tables, but the five she had grown very fond of smiled at her in appreciation. She would not acknowledge to them her true motives, but she would encourage their friendship. It was a rare thing to find bonds so strong, especially with so many people from two rival Houses.

“Now that we have that settled, I have a special project for you today.” Stephanie smiled at the questioning glares she received from the students. She waved her wand and a multitude of art supplies appeared on the tables in front of the students. A second wave of her wand placed small pieces of parchment in front of each student. “We are going to be sending holiday cards to some people who may need them this year. On the parchment in front of you, you will find the name of an individual that I have personally matched for you. If you have questions or hesitations, please let me know immediately.”

With that, Stephanie placed herself at her desk and watched the students learn which Death Eaters she had matched them with. There were a few giggles from some of the students when they realized who they would be sending greeting cards too, which made Stephanie a little nervous.

Maisie squealed excitedly when she opened her parchment. No one else seemed to notice, but Stephanie eyed the girl suspiciously. Maisie was always so quiet and shy that Stephanie had decided it would be more appropriate to have the girl paired with another female. So, Sarah Hawthorne would be receiving a holiday card from Maisie. Maybe Stephanie was reading too much into Maisie’s reaction, but she made a quick note to keep a closer watch on the quiet student.

She had had specific reasons in pairing each student with their Death Eater. Abby, for example, was matched with an unlikely individual. One that Abby would not have chosen, herself, but Stephanie felt that Abby was the most appropriate person to address the specific card.

Samantha Sienko had also been paired with her father. Stephanie knew absolutely nothing about the relationship between the two, but she did have enough life experience to understand Samantha’s bond with her father. That was why she felt the need to ask Sammy if she was okay with this matching. Their relationship may be strained and Stephanie didn’t want to place Sammy, or any of her students, in an awkward position.

“But, Professor.” Erik looked up hesitantly from his piece of parchment. “Aren’t these Death Eaters?”

“Very good observation, Erik.” Stephanie responded.

“But, why would we send them Christmas cards?” He looked at her suspiciously and Stephanie suddenly felt the amusing need to defend herself. But she knew that what she was asking would teach her students the lesson of tolerance. “They killed.”

“I have killed.” Stephanie responded matter-of-factly, staring openly towards the first year Gryffindor. His face dropped and he was speechless, unsure of how to respond.

“That’s different, professor.” The first year Gryffindor, Sten, spoke diligently and with confidence. “You didn’t want to and these Death Eaters did. They enjoyed what they did.”

“It is not different at all, Sten.” Stephanie was surprised that the students still hadn’t realized what a monster she was. As much as she tried to convey to them that she was different than the Death Eaters locked in Azkaban, she still felt they judged her too lightly. Even though she hadn’t wanted to commit those crimes, she still had. And she was still capable of doing so again. “Regardless of what we have done in our past, each one of us is human.

“You may not agree with the actions of another, but you must realize that they are still human. What we must look at is what happened to these people that made them turn to the Dark Lord. Why did they choose killing?” Stephanie took a deep breath and continued slowly, looking at each of her students in turn. “Let’s look at me, for example. Why did I become a Death Eater?”

“You didn’t have a choice.” Lauren spoke without raising her hand.

“That’s not true.” Stephanie responded patiently. “I may have been forced into tough situations where my decisions were life-threatening, to myself and to others, but I always had a choice. If I would have chosen not to obey the orders that were given to me, I would have been killed immediately. And I had to weigh the consequences of each side; what would happen if I was murdered and what would happen if I did as I was told?

“With conditioning, the decisions became easier to make, but they were the same nonetheless. After a lot of internal conflicts, I decided that even though I may have killed many innocent people, including children, the end justified the means. If I had not done so, there was a good chance that Harry may not have survived. And if Harry hadn’t survived, then the Dark Lord may have prevailed. Too many lives could have been lost if I hadn’t followed my orders, if I hadn’t survived.” Stephanie had thought about this many times before and it felt strange to finally be sharing this. She shouldn’t have shared with the first years, but she needed them to understand that just because the Death Eaters were in prison didn’t mean that they didn’t deserve kindness. “Don’t get me wrong, students. I don’t think that these Death Eaters should be released from prison, but we shouldn’t shun them, either. We don’t know what they have gone through in their lives to make them the way they became.

“Who has Draco Malfoy?” Stephanie looked around the classroom even though she knew exactly who had received the name of her nemesis. She had given this student Draco’s name for a very specific purpose.

Abby slowly raised her hand and Stephanie could tell that Abby was working very hard to keep her mouth quiet. Abigail Seabold was so angry that her hands were shaking. Stephanie couldn’t help but smile at the young student.

“I know that I speak about Draco very frequently, but he is the one Death Eater that I feel I know inside and out. Do you know why I chose to give you Draco, Abby?” Stephanie asked in a soft and understanding voice.

Abby shook her head, refusing to speak.

“It is a widely known fact that Lucius Malfoy killed your mother and brother, Abby. That is the very reason that I did not give you Lucius’ name. Instead, that honor went to one of your close friends and protectors, David.” Stephanie gestured towards David McNitt, the student sitting to Abby’s immediate right. “Instead, you have been given his son. After all of the information I have provided you about Draco Malfoy and my feelings towards him, why do you think that I would give you his name for my little project?”

Lauren started bouncing in her seat with her arm raised, signaling that she knew the answer. Stephanie nodded towards her and spoke as nicely as she could. “I want Abby to try answering this question, Lauren.”

Lauren nodded her understanding, so Stephanie turned her attention back towards Abby. Abby just stared down at the piece of parchment and thought for a few moments. Finally, she looked up towards Stephanie and spoke barely above a whisper.

“Forgiveness.” Abby whispered.

“Exactly.” Stephanie smiled. “Ten points to Gryffindor. They may not deserve it, but the ability to forgive makes you a much stronger person. That one emotion allows you to heal beyond any other emotion or action. The ability to forgive my captors has been the one factor that has kept me sane. All other things in my life, including my family and friends, come second to that ability. For I would not have been able to express my love for them if I had clung to my hatred for those who have hurt me.

“That is why I ask you all to do the same. Show these Death Eaters that you forgive them for what they have done and you will be stronger witches and wizards for it.” Stephanie ended with a soft tone and watched as understanding crossed the faces of her students. She decided to continue explaining her point because it appeared as though some remained hesitant. “Have any of you heard of the Death Eater named Peter Pettigrew?”

“Yeah.” Matty said as he raised his hand. “Seamus called him Wormtail.”

“Exactly.” Stephanie responded. “Why do you think that he sought the Dark Lord and joined the Death Eaters?”

“Acceptance.” Lauren responded matter-of-factly.

“Yes and no.” Stephanie explained. Lauren had provided the obvious answer, but, as shallow as Wormtail had been, there was a deeper reason that he had joined the Dark Lord. “He had friends. In fact, my father and his two best friends had welcomed Peter Pettigrew into their group. So, why would he join the Death Eaters to seek acceptance when he was already accepted by students his own age?”

“Cowardice.” David spoke confidently. “He was afraid.”

“But why was he afraid? Why couldn’t he turn to James Potter, Sirius Black, Remus Lupin, or even Professor Dumbledore?” Stephanie prodded.

There was absolute silence in the Defense Against the Dark Arts classroom. Stephanie knew that each of her students was thinking about why someone would join the Death Eaters. Finally, it was Maisie that raised her hand.

“Your father and his friends were cruel to him. They played pranks on him and he never really fit in. So, Wormtail turned to the Dark Lord because he offered his followers a family. He wasn’t alone anymore.” Maisie didn’t look up from her piece of parchment as he spoke and Stephanie couldn’t help but wonder if there was more to Maisie’s interpretation of Wormtail’s situation than she knew. There was definitely something intriguing about Maisie.

“We can never be completely sure, Maisie, but I believe that you are correct. My father was not a perfect man, but he was a good man. Sometimes good people do terrible things and we may never fully understand the reasons behind their actions. But we can forgive.” Stephanie nodded in agreement. “Ten points to Slytherin.

“Now, are there any other Death Eaters that you have heard of who may have had similar reasons for seeking the protection that the Dark Lord could offer them?” Again, the students looked perplexed.

“I have never met my dad.” Sammy whispered quietly. Stephanie almost didn’t hear her, but she was positive of who had spoken the moment she heard the words. “Mum says that he is a horrible man for leaving her when she was pregnant. But he had a gambling debt and got in too deep with the wrong kind of people. Lord Voldemort relieved his debt in exchange for a lifetime of servitude. He has written me since he was arrested and he tells me that even though he enjoyed what he was doing, he would have chosen another path if it meant that he could have been with me.”

“I didn’t know.” Abby whispered into Sammy’s ear and rubbed her friend’s shoulder as Sammy’s head lowered onto the table.

“Thank you, Sammy.” Stephanie was moved by the strength that it must have taken Sammy to share this story with the entire class. “This shows that everyone makes their own choices. Had he been given the option, Peter Sienko would have chosen a different path.”

“He still chose to become a Death Eater.” Sten sneered.

“When fear is involved, Mr. Voltz, it may not appear as though you do have a choice. But trust me when I say that no matter how bleak the situation may seem, you always have a choice to make.” Stephanie replied and Sten leaned back in his chair.

“Now, we have used enough of our class time. Please begin your holiday cards. It is acceptable if you do not wish to participate in this activity.” Not one student voiced their desire to sit out of this project. She just hoped that the students had learned something from her today. Forgiveness truly was important in order to heal, and she was sure that many of these students were still hurting, or at least questioning, from the results of the final battle against the Dark Lord.

She collected the cards at the end of the class period and dismissed her students for the last time that term. Stephanie was excited because her brother would be arriving the next morning and that would make Ginny truly happy. Harry hadn’t objected to meeting her at Hogwarts; in fact, he seemed almost relieved by her suggestion. He would never stop trying to protect her.

That last thought reminded her of something that had slipped her mind for the past few weeks. “Abby.” She called as the girl had just reached the classroom door. Abby turned around and made her way back towards the front of the classroom.

“Yes, professor.” Abby asked her.

“I know that your friends have decided to stay here with you over the holiday break.” Stephanie smiled at her student. “And I know that you are in possession of a certain artifact of mine.”

Abby started to say something, but Stephanie just laughed. She had realized immediately who must have taken the Marauder’s Map, seeing as it went missing the same night that Abby and her friends had broken into her classroom in the early hours of the night. It hadn’t bothered her that the students had taken it, but she did want them to be careful. The map could be a dangerous tool.

“Don’t worry, Ms. Seabold.” Stephanie interrupted Abby before she could speak. “But you will be in a lot of trouble if I catch you using the map to sneak around the school after curfew. Do you understand?”

“Of course, professor.” Abby nodded, still looking serious. Abby turned back towards the door where two older students were waiting impatiently for her. Just as she reached the door, Abby turned her head back towards Stephanie and said, “thank you.”

“You’re welcome, Abby.” Stephanie responded. After Abby had left the classroom and under her breath, Stephanie added, “just be careful.”

Chapter Twenty-Seven: Excursion to Azkaban

“I am so sorry, Sammy.” Abby whispered as they started working on their holiday cards to the Death Eaters in Azkaban.

“It’s fine.” Sammy replied softly, not taking her eyes off the craft supplies in front of her.

Abby felt like she didn’t know Sammy at all after the story her friend had shared with the entire class. She had also felt a sharp pang in her stomach when Sammy shared her story with everyone. Why hadn’t Sammy trusted Abby enough to talk about her father? It wasn’t like Abby had never asked Sammy about him; Sammy always responded the same way: “I don’t want to talk about it.”

Abby eyed Lauren, Matty, and David as they sat at the table and began to work on their assignment. Matty kept his eyes on her much longer than the other two and she could see the concern there. Abby could tell that he was thinking the same thing: What else is Sammy keeping from us?

Matty just shrugged his shoulders and started working on his card. Abby appeared to be the only person who hadn’t begun, so she forced herself to concentrate on the task in front of her. She would talk to Sammy later that night because she didn’t want to believe that Sammy would keep secrets from them. Sammy’s dad was a Death Eater and they couldn’t ignore that fact. Death Eaters were not only threatening Stephanie, but were attempting to murder Abby.

“Who do you have, Lauren?” David nudged the Gryffindor in the ribs with his glue stick. When Lauren didn’t respond immediately, he did it again with a chuckle. “Huh? Who do you have, Lauren?”

“Stop it, David.” Lauren hissed and swatted his arm away. “And for that, I’m not going to tell you.”

“Be that way.” David grunted and slowly placed his eyes back onto the project in front of him. Then, without warning, he lunged towards the piece of parchment Lauren had placed towards the center of the table. Lauren stood and tried to stab his hand with a pair of scissors, narrowly missing his hand.

“You guys. Stop it.” Abby hissed as Lauren pulled the scissors from the hole she had created in the table. David smirked at Lauren as he unfolded the piece of paper.

“If he would stop acting like a baby, then I wouldn’t have to stab him with a pair of scissors.” Lauren returned to cutting out a snowflake from a white piece of paper.

“Yaxley.” David spoke, ignoring the previous comment. “Isn’t he an idiot? Why would Professor Potter give you an idiot, Lauren?”

“How should I know?” Lauren muttered under her breath and Abby couldn’t help but smile quietly at the reaction. Lauren and David had started bickering a lot lately, but it was usually all in fun. David had found enjoyment in picking on Lauren and Lauren always played into it with her reactions.

“I’ll tell you, Mr. McNitt, why I assigned Lauren the task of creating a holiday card for one of the more ignorant Death Eaters that was ever a part of the organization.” Professor Potter surprised them all by appearing at their table. She turned from David to Lauren and then continued. “I know that your parents belonged to Hufflepuff when they went to Hogwarts and that you wanted nothing more than to be sorted into the same House. I also know that you were highly disappointed by your sorting into Gryffindor.

“But, though I am not sure what that reason is quite yet, I am positive that there is a reason you were sorted into Gryffindor instead of Hufflepuff. The Sorting Hat saw something special in you, Lauren Graham.” Professor Potter walked over to Lauren and placed her hand on Lauren’s shoulder. Lauren turned and looked expectantly towards the professor as Abby sat on the edge of her chair, forgetting about her own holiday card.

“Your parents were both excellent Hufflepuff students, or so Headmistress McGonagall has shared with me.” Professor Potter smiled down at Lauren and then continued. “But Yaxley decided it was his personal mission to make your father’s life miserable. He would conduct the most horrible pranks on your father with the main purpose of embarrassment; Yaxley would also flirt indiscriminately with your mother in front of your father, though at the time they were not yet married.

“And though revenge is not my purpose or lesson here, students, imagine how Yaxley will react when he receives a holiday card from the daughter of his arch nemesis. Maybe he will learn that everything he does will come back to him eventually.” Professor Potter patted Lauren on the back quickly. “Now, get back to work.”

“Wow.” David whispered, breathing out. His face was bright red with embarrassment at his earlier jab towards his friend. “I’m sorry, Lauren.”

“Whatever.” Lauren responded by picking up the pair of scissors again and returning to her work, though Abby couldn’t help but notice the smile Lauren was trying to hide from David.

“Who do you have, Matty?” Abby asked, trying to break the tension.

Matty grabbed the piece of parchment from the table and unfolded it quickly. He looked at it and then looked up at Abby. “Rodolphus Lestrange. Was he married to Bellatrix Lestrange?”

“No. I think it was Rabastan.” David answered matter-of-factly.

Abby shook her head. “No, I think Rodolphus was married to Bellatrix. Rabastan was Bellatrix’s brother-in-law.”

“I think you’re wrong.” David replied. “Rabastan was married to Bellatrix.”

“Rodolphus,” Maisie’s voice could be heard from across the room, “was married to Bellatrix.”

“How do you know, Maisie?” David stood up and pointed his marker towards his fellow Slytherin. “It’s not like you knew them.”

Maisie lowered her eyes and her face flushed at the statement. Abby couldn’t help but question whether Maisie was embarrassed by the confrontation or if Maisie knew one of the Lestranges. That wouldn’t make her a bad person, but it was highly suspicious.

“Sit down.” Professor Potter demanded. David complied sulkily and mumbled something under his breath that Abby couldn’t understand. Professor Potter smiled and spoke confidently. “Rodolphus was married to Bellatrix Lestrange, though it was never a happy marriage. Does that answer your question?”

“Told you.” Matty boasted and lifted his shoulders knowingly.

“Stop acting like a know-it-all, Finnigan.” David looked towards Matty with threatening eyes and Abby couldn’t take all the bickering anymore. What is getting into these guys? Abby wondered.

“Can you believe that she actually blew the game?” Abby purposely changed the subject. “I knew Daniel wanted Ginny to lose to the Slytherins, but I never thought that she would actually go through with it.”

“I know. I mean, Gryffindor can't win the House Cup now.” Sammy shook her head, speaking for the first time in awhile. Her voice was soft. “How are the rest of the students taking that?”

“No one is speaking to her. It’s absolutely horrible because no one believes her when she says that it wasn’t her fault. Dumbledore’s Army has unanimously discharged her from the organization for being a traitor.” Matty explained and Abby couldn’t help but shake her head sadly.

“Everyone’s been talking about her relationship with Daniel. Ginny has even started to eat meals with them. It’s not looking good for her.” Lauren said as she sprinkled some glitter on her holiday card. “People are even spreading rumors that Ginny is cheating on Harry with Daniel.”

“That’s ridiculous!” Abby shrieked and quickly placed her hand over her mouth. Professor Potter cleared her throat and Abby nodded in the professor’s direction. Then she leaned closer to her friends. “She would never do that. And no one knows that Daniel basically forced her to throw that game?”

“Those that do aren’t talking.” David shook his head.

“Of course we know that Daniel threatened her and used this as a punishment for telling him ‘No’ in front of everyone, but that doesn’t change anything.” Lauren continued. “Ginny asked us not to tell anyone. I want to know what she is up to.”

“Why do you think she’s allowing Daniel to walk all over her?” Abby asked, twirling a strand of her hair between her fingers.

Her friends just shook their heads. None of them could understand why Ginny would allow Daniel to order her around like he was. As far as they knew, she had never let anyone speak to her the way Daniel did. Matty’s brother had told him about how Ginny had even defied the Death Eaters when they taught at the school the year before. Why would she back down now?

It was a mystery, and Abby was going to get to the bottom of it even if it took all school year. She returned her attention back to the card in front of her and tried to focus on writing a Christmas message to Draco Malfoy.

*~*~*~*

Stephanie gently placed the stack of holiday letters in her bag, placed the strap around her chest, and began the short journey to Neville’s sleeping quarters. The day was over and the students were on their way home. Only a few remained in the castle for the holidays and the silence was strange to her. The emptiness of the halls was an eerie reminder of her time in the Dark Lord’s cellar and she quickened her pace.

“I need to confront him.” Stephanie said as soon as Neville opened the door. She burst into his room and he was left in the doorway with a shocked expression. The decision had come to her during the first year class while her five favorite students were bickering over whether Rabastan or Rodolphus was married to Bellatrix.

She had come a long way since she had last seen him and it was time to meet him face to face. It was something she needed to do to prove to herself that she was better than the other Death Eaters. The holiday cards would give her the perfect opportunity to take this important step in her recovery.

“Confront who, Stephanie?” Neville looked concerned at her outburst and she couldn’t blame him. Sometimes her mood swings could be a lot to handle, but this was something that she needed to do.

“Draco.” Stephanie responded nonchalantly, as though the answer were completely obvious. Her tone suggested that Draco was someone that she had constant communications with. She needed to feel that this was nothing out of the ordinary, that confronting her previous captor was something she did every day. Otherwise she would never have the courage to follow through with her intentions.

“Absolutely not.” Neville walked closer to her and tried to take her hand. “I will not allow it.”

“You will not allow it?” Stephanie asked, throwing his hand away. “You can’t tell me what I can or cannot do, Neville Longbottom.”

“I didn’t mean it that way, Stephanie.” He rubbed his hand against her cheek, his eyes wide with concern. “Draco Malfoy does not deserve to set eyes on you ever again. Why would you show him the kind of mercy that he would never show you?”

“Because that’s who I am, Neville.” Stephanie spoke confidently. “And I want you to come with me.”

“Of course I’ll come with you.” Neville responded softly and grabbed her hand. Shivers ran down her spine at his touch this time. “When do you want to go?”

“Right now.” Stephanie spoke instantly.

“Right now?” He asked hesitantly. Stephanie knew that he had never been to Azkaban, so this experience would probably cause him some anxiety. But it was important that she go right away. She didn’t want to lose her courage.

“When did you want to go?” Stephanie asked curiously, there was no malice intended in her voice. “Harry, Ron, and Hermione arrive in the morning. And I’m sure that they don’t want to know about my little excursion.”

“What about Kingsley? He knows, doesn’t he?” Neville questioned.

“Yes, Kingsley knows. And several Aurors will be greeting us outside the prison. The Aurors stationed outside Hogwarts are ready for our departure, as well. None of them will disturb us, though, because Kingsley gave me top security clearance. We can see any prisoners we would like.” Stephanie explained patiently.

“Fine. Let’s get this over with.” Stephanie could tell that Neville didn’t really want to go, but he wouldn’t say anything to her. Ever since they clearly defined their relationship, thanks to the first years, he had shown a higher level of protection.

At first it really bothered her, but it began to be adorable after awhile. He really did care about her and that flattered Stephanie. She didn’t deserve such a great wizard as her boyfriend. To make things better, Neville even forgave her past. Stephanie couldn’t have asked for anything more.

With that, Neville took her hand and led her outside the gates of Hogwarts. He raised his wand and Apparated them both to the entrance of Azkaban prison. Stephanie allowed herself to giggle at his gasp of surprise. Clearly he had not expected it to be so large.

“You cast the Dark Mark above this place? How did you get the spell so high?” Neville was clearly impressed.

“A mixture of concentration and fear. Imagine what would have happened if I hadn’t been able to do it.” Stephanie smiled.

“Professors. The Minister told us you would be coming. Please follow me.” A young-looking Auror greeted them at the front door.

“Seth, I see you’ve been transferred. What did you do to deserve scum detail?” Neville laughed as he shook the Auror’s hand.

“Rotation.” Seth responded simply.

“Of course.” Neville said.

“I need your wands.” Seth reached out and Stephanie and Neville placed their wands in his hand. Kingsley told her that she would not be allowed her wand inside the prison because the Ministry couldn’t risk one of the Death Eaters getting hold of it. It would be disastrous if one of them escaped. “Thank you. We will return your wands when you are ready to leave.”

Stephanie and Neville followed Seth down the hall towards a bank of elevators. Seth turned towards them when they reached the end of the hallway. “Kingsley said that you would like to see Draco Malfoy. Would you like to start with him?”

Neville looked at her and she shook her head. “Let’s hand out the cards, first.” Stephanie gestured towards her bag.

“Very well. I will allow you to walk through on your own. If you need one of us, just yell. We can be anywhere within this prison in less than one second.” Seth explained. He began to return to his post, and then he hesitantly turned back towards Stephanie. His voice softened. “Stephanie, I don’t need to tell you that these wizards are very dangerous. Be careful.”

“Of course. Thank you, Seth.” Stephanie smiled to reassure him that she would be alright. Neville pushed the button for the elevator and they waited in silence. As soon as the doors opened, Stephanie walked through. She didn’t even watch as Neville pushed the button to send them to their next destination.

She was too deep in thought. Why am I doing this? Why am I hand-delivering these letters? Have I gone mad? But the other side of her conscience knew that what she was about to do was right. She needed to confront her demons.

The door buzzed and then opened. She took a deep breath, reached for Neville’s hand, and started on her journey for redemption.

“Potter!” Stephanie heard a familiar voice cackle. She held in a cringe as the Death Eater attempted to taunt her. It surprised her that she didn’t feel any amount of fear towards these witches and wizards who had made her life miserable for years; they had tormented, tortured, and terrified her repeatedly. All of the fear and hatred she had once felt towards them was completely gone. It was amazing. “Stephanie Potter, here in Azkaban. I was under the impression you were too good for your family.”

“You are not my family, Yaxley.” Stephanie spoke determinedly, but squeezed Neville’s hand for support. He returned the gesture to reassure her that he was still by her side.

“After all we’ve done for you. After all you’ve done. You are as much a follower of the Dark Lord as we are.” Yaxley’s voice was full of amusement. Apparently, her appearance was doing nothing but providing him entertainment.

“You are a disgrace.” The purr of Sarah Hawthorne could be heard from a few cells down the row. “You should be locked away in the cell next to Draco’s.”

“She does not deserve to be in the same building as my son.” Lucius Malfoy’s drawl hissed from across Yaxley. Stephanie jumped at Lucius’ voice because she hadn’t even noticed him sitting there. He had lost so much weight since being locked away for the second time that Stephanie barely recognized him.

She had not expected a warm welcome, so this conversation was not disturbing to her. Instead of letting their comments bother her, she reached into her bag and pulled out a handful of the letters her students had written.

“My students wanted to share the holiday season with you.” Stephanie smiled slyly at Yaxley as she handed him his letter.

“We heard they are allowing you to teach the students Defense Against the Dark Arts.” Yaxley grunted as he opened his card. She turned and shoved Lucius’ through the cell bars and continued down the hall.

“You piece of filth!” Yaxley screamed. Stephanie turned towards the Death Eater as the paper was thrown out into the hallway. She made her way back towards Yaxley’s cell with Neville in tow, laughing as loudly as she dared without attracting Auror attention.

“Randy’s daughter is turning out to be one of the brightest in her year, Yaxley.” Stephanie said sweetly, tilting her head to the side. “You should be honored. She’s a Gryffindor, too. I’m positive that she will turn into a fine prefect some day, just like her sister.”

“How dare you bring this smut in here?” Lucius hissed in her direction. “What makes you better than any one of us?”

“My conscience.” Stephanie smiled in his direction and continued on her way. She stopped quickly at Sarah’s cell.

“Don’t worry, Lucius, dear.” Sarah spoke with a harsh tone. “Dedrick will get his revenge.”

“Dedrick Hargrave will not touch her.” Neville stepped forward defiantly and protectively. Stephanie touched his chest and he immediately backed away.

“I am not afraid of Dedrick, Sarah.” Stephanie responded seriously, but honestly. “And we shall see who is better talented.”

“You will die, Stephanie Potter.” Rodolphus Lestrange added in an ominous voice. Stephanie giggled at her absence of fear. It amazed her how much she had changed since she had last seen these Death Eaters. She had so much more confidence than she had ever imagined was possible.

“We will all die, eventually.” Stephanie spoke without addressing any of them specifically. She meant to speak the truth to them all because they needed to know that she was not the same person she had once been. “And I am not afraid anymore.”

With that, she finished handing out the holiday cards without much more incident. Neville never once left her side, and that fact alone gave her the courage to continue to visit the one person she needed to see. He squeezed her hand as they reached the floor that housed Draco’s solitary cell.

“Neville, I need to do this one alone.” She nodded her head in encouragement.

“Are you sure?” He asked with concern.

“Yes.” Stephanie responded. He dropped her hand and allowed her to continue down the hall and confront Draco Malfoy.

She walked slowly down the hall, breathing in and out with a steady rhythm. Her heart was beating rapidly in anticipation for what she was about to do. How would Draco react to her presence? Would he acknowledge her? Would he accuse her of being a traitor? Would he be smug about how he had once overpowered her?

Finally, she reached his cell. Draco’s skin looked paler than she had ever seen it. Like his father, Draco, too, had lost a substantial amount of weight and he drowned in his prisoner robes. He sat on his bed and stared towards the wall without looking up at her.

She cleared her throat and he didn’t even flinch. Draco was ignoring her, but she would not allow that to deter her. She was there for a reason and she wasn’t going to leave without speaking to him.

“Draco. Would you please look at me?” She asked quietly, not wanting to startle him. Stephanie was probably the first person to speak to him since he was sentenced over four months before. Again, he didn’t move. “Fine, then I will do the talking. We have known each other our whole lives. Because of your father, you were always destined to be sent to Azkaban.

“I have been teaching my students the art of forgiveness. It is much more powerful than any other emotion that can be shared. It is something that can assist in overcoming difficult times.” Stephanie was pouring her heart out to Draco Malfoy and he wouldn’t even acknowledge her presence. “Students all over Hogwarts are creating unexpected alliances for greater purposes. You wouldn’t believe it. Daniel Blaiser has requested the help of Ginny Weasley and they are working together to keep Abby Seabold protected; Slytherins and Gryffindors are working together.

“I know that you despise me for many reasons. And as much as you have done to me, I should hate you too. But I don’t.” Stephanie’s voice softened to just above a whisper. She was losing her courage with each passing breath. Draco was making it even more difficult for her. The least he could do was look at her. But he wouldn’t even do that. “I forgive you for what you have done. And I wanted to let you know that I will be advocating for your release when the time comes. You have my word that you will not spend your entire life in prison. Please look at me.”

But he didn’t look at her. He didn’t even take a breath to acknowledge that he heard her. The boy did not move any part of his body; he merely sat rigidly, staring at the blank, stone wall. After all of their time together, Stephanie meant nothing to him. It hurt that he felt nothing towards her. Even after all he had put her through, after all he had done, she still felt compassion for him. Maybe she was crazy.

She took a deep breath in defeat. “Fine. Abby Seabold wanted you to have this holiday card. You should recognize the name because your father killed her family. She forgives him, too.”

Stephanie shoved the final holiday card through the cell door and heard it flutter to the ground. Draco didn’t even move to retrieve the letter. She took in one more deep breath and made her way back towards Neville. Tears of disappointment came to her eyes as she walked away. She knew she shouldn’t feel this way, but she couldn’t help herself. How could she mean absolutely nothing to him?


I hope this chapter added some much needed fun. I really enjoyed writing the conflict between the five first years. I think it's a natural part of friendship, don't you? So, I'm not sure when the next chapter will be posted, but I will really try for next weekend. I'm not sure how realistic that is, but I will try really hard! And, I would like to thank ChannelingGinny for her help in helping go through and revising previous chapters. You are amazing!!!

Chapter Twenty-Eight: Her Lips are Sealed

Ginny looked again at the clock that hung on the wall across the room. She curled herself tighter and counted the minutes in her head. Harry wouldn’t arrive for fifteen hours and forty-seven minutes and she wasn’t even sure if she’d be allowed to see him immediately. It was times like this when she really doubted why Stephanie was asking her to comply with Daniel’s commands. Regardless, she knew what she had to do.

As horrible as he was, Daniel was on the same side as her, Neville, and Stephanie. If Dedrick or another Death Eater came into the castle, he would be able to help them. They did not enlist the assistance of Dumbledore’s Army because those students, though many of them had first-hand combat experience, were not as talented or discreet as Daniel.

They didn’t want the Death Eaters to know they were preparing to fight. Stephanie had promised Ginny that she would not go to Dedrick alone, even though he had instructed her to do so when he eventually called for her. Ginny believed Stephanie when she said she would bring her friends; Stephanie had grown so much since the beginning of the school year.

“Stop fidgeting. You are driving me mad.” Daniel reprimanded her strictly, looking up from the books he was studying from.

“Sorry.” Ginny mumbled and returned her attention to the books in front of her. She didn’t have a lot of Defense Against the Dark Arts homework over the holiday break because Stephanie had instructed all of her students to enjoy the time away from school, but that didn’t release her from the rest of her classes. Potions alone was going to take up the majority of her time when she wasn’t working for Daniel Blaiser or spending time with Harry.

They were alone in the Slytherin common room. Abby was upstairs in her room, on her own for the first time in months. Sammy and David were in the library studying with Matty and Lauren, who had also decided to stay behind for the holiday break.

The same day Daniel commanded her to lose the Quidditch match against Slytherin, he also informed her that she would be spending the break residing in the Slytherin dormitories. He had arranged the sleeping arrangements with Professor McGonagall, though she had agreed only hesitantly. After Stephanie heard what Daniel was seeking, she went to McGonagall asking for a favor.

That part hadn’t bothered Ginny as much as losing the Quidditch match. The fact that he wanted her near Abby while his friends were absent from the school spoke highly towards her; it meant he trusted that she would be able to keep Abby safe. But she felt like a traitor for losing the Quidditch match against Slytherin. She was captain and it didn’t send a good message to her team or House.

In fact, she had been exiled from the organization she had led the previous year, Dumbledore’s Army. The love of her life had started it with his friends to teach students Defense Against the Dark Arts when it was forbidden, and she had continued it to defy the Death Eaters. Its purpose this year was to keep students like Abby, Sammy, David, Lauren, and Matty safe. Its members were also providing security for Stephanie. What would they accomplish now?

Ginny had faith that they would continue with Dumbledore’s Army’s mission. Luna Lovegood had taken over as leader because she had more experience fighting Death Eaters than the rest of the students, so that made Ginny feel a little better. She just hoped that they wouldn’t disband completely.

Barely any of the members or students in her own House were speaking to her. Luna, Amber, Daniel, Abby, Matty, Lauren, Sammy, and David were the only people who would even look at her without pure hatred and disappointment. Many of the Slytherins, however, would smile at her as she passed. As difficult as it was to endure, she also felt empowered by the experience. This was exactly what Stephanie had felt while she was a Death Eater. Harry had even experienced the same thing when he tried to convince the world that Lord Voldemort had returned. Even Ron had experienced a similar circumstance when he first joined the Quidditch team. Now, she could truly understand what her friends had gone through.

She believed this was one reason Stephanie asked her to follow Daniel’s requests without question or complaint. The other was to protect Abby at all costs. Ginny could tell that Stephanie cared about all of her students deeply, even the ones that might not take too kindly to her, such as Daniel or the other older Slytherins. And Stephanie would do everything she could to protect each and every one of them, no matter how much or little they deserved her help. Ginny hoped she could reach that level of determination and compassion one day, but if she had to choose right then, she wouldn’t protect Daniel for any price.

Ginny was stolen from her thoughts when Daniel sucked in his breath and placed his quill onto the table in front of him. She looked up to find him eyeing her suspiciously, but also with an air of curiosity.

“What?” She asked, narrowing her own eyes at him. This had to be the first time she had ever been alone with the despicable Slytherin student, and it was definitely awkward.

“I’ve been wondering about something, Weasley.” Daniel spoke slowly and purposely, choosing his words very carefully. Ginny just stared at him, wondering what he was going to ask. “You are stubborn and don’t take orders from anyone easily. I watched you last year with Alecto and Amycus Carrow; you defied them at every opportunity.”

“So…?” Ginny trailed off, knowing exactly what he was asking. The question Ginny had to answer for herself was how much information she would divulge to Daniel. Did he really deserve an honest answer?

“Why do you listen to me without complaint?” Daniel’s voice had a skeptic tone. He was very observant and had been pondering this question since they had their first interaction regarding Abby. Ginny took a moment to think about how she would answer, but he couldn’t wait for her response. “You have an agenda.” He pointed out.

“Yes.” Ginny nodded affirmatively. She realized that the best way to get his cooperation was to be painfully honest. The worst he could do was say no, and then she would be free from him. She wouldn’t have to stay in Slytherin and conform to his every command. At that thought, she secretly hoped that he would decline her request.

She pushed the books away from her so that she wouldn’t be distracted. Ginny needed to look him in the eye and confess her true intentions at obeying his commands. Ginny took a breath to prepare herself and then she answered his rhetorical question.

“Stephanie received a threatening letter from Dedrick Hargrave. He has somehow gotten into the castle to frighten her, but she won’t scare easily.” Ginny knew that she had to contort her words to gain his agreement. As much as she wanted him to decline, she also knew that Stephanie was depending on her to get Daniel to assist them. She had to do her best to get him to accept her request. “He plans on summoning her at some point. She is afraid that he will come for Abby, as well.”

“I figured as much. What do you want from me?” Daniel nodded his head understandingly. Ginny got the feeling that he had suspected Death Eater presence in the castle for some time. He didn’t display even a little amount of surprise at her statement.

“You are an excellent wizard, Daniel. Your father has taught you very well.” Ginny attempted flattery, knowing that it couldn’t hurt her cause at all.

“Yes. I know this.” He responded matter-of-factly. His face remained emotionless, though his eyes hinted at amusement. Ginny wanted to scream out because he had realized what she was going to ask him and yet, he was going to make her say the words. She held in a grunt at his awareness.

“Stephanie needs-no.” She cut herself off and shook her head. Ginny rephrased her statement to let him know how serious she was taking this request. “We. We need your help when he comes for her. Dedrick is developing an army—I will point out that some of them want Abby dead—and we can’t defeat them without you.”

“Of course you need me.” Daniel finally let out a knowing smirk, but it didn’t reassure Ginny that he was going to accept. “But why would I want to help that half-blood?”

Ginny fought to keep herself calm. She pursed her lips and took several deep breaths until she could control her temper. He was only saying these things to get a rise out of her, and she could not afford to lose her temper in front of him. Daniel knew what he was doing.

“Simple. We continue to help you keep Abby safe.” Ginny responded flatly, trying to show him that he couldn’t get a reaction out of her.

“I can do that on my own.” Daniel pointed out.

“With no experience battling a single Death Eater?” Ginny asked, referring to the Slytherin members’ departure before the final battle had begun. “I don’t think so.”

“Why not ask Dumbledore’s Army?” Daniel asked suspiciously.

Ginny knew that she was starting to get closer to an answer and had to fight to keep the smile off her face. “You know very well that they are not speaking to me. That was your intention, wasn’t it? To isolate me the same way you isolated Abby.”

“But they were still working for you when you began your mission here.” He gestured throughout the Slytherin common room, and he was right. She had had this intention before he started controlling her every move.

“Yes. But you have skills that no one in the DA has. We need you.” Ginny pointed out softly, gesturing towards him.

Daniel leaned back in his chair and crossed his arms, deep in thought. He rubbed his chin as he contemplated what she had just told him. “What’s in it for me?” He asked.

“Protection for Abby.” Ginny responded immediately.

“Are you kidding me, Weasley?” Daniel let out a malicious laugh and leaned forward again. “I know that you and Potter will keep her safe whether or not I decide to assist you. You are too predictable. What else can you offer me?”

Ginny thought for a moment and then offered the only thing she had: herself. “I will continue to do as you ask, without complaint. If you want me to eat with you, I will. If you want me to stay in the Slytherin dormitories for the remainder of the year, I will. For goodness sake, if you want me to become a Slytherin, I will.”

“No.” He laughed loudly at her last statement. “I don’t think green and silver suit you, Weasley. But I will accept your offer. Tell Potter that if Dedrick summons her, I will assist her.”

“I do have several requests in relation to that.” Ginny didn’t want to push her luck, but there were a couple of things that she needed to say to him. She hoped that her courage wouldn’t hurt their agreement.

“Of course you do.” He chuckled and placed his hand on his chin. He waved at her. “Go ahead.”

“You need to give Abby a little more freedom. She has shown that she will do as you ask. But if you keep her isolated from her friends as you have, I can guarantee that she will run. It could even get her killed, Daniel.” Ginny explained.

He thought about the statement for a few minutes and then nodded his head. “Is that an offer to keep watch over her when she is with her friends, Weasley? I still don’t trust them.”

“I will do that.” Ginny nodded.

“Then she may have a little more freedom. But if she misbehaves once, I will make sure that her father sends her home immediately. Is that understood?” Daniel spoke harshly, but Ginny knew that it was a victory for her.

She nodded her acknowledgement. There was just one more thing she needed to ask. But would he be as understanding with this request as he was to the one regarding Abby? She didn’t think so but she had to ask him.

Ginny spoke without preparing herself, not wanting to lose her courage. “Harry is spending a few days here at Hogwarts. I need to spend some time alone with him.” She opted for demanding rather than requesting, figuring that he would respond more favorably that way.

“I will allow that.” Daniel nodded once again. “As vicious as I may appear to be towards others around me, Weasley, it is just a façade. The Blaiser’s have a reputation to protect and I use that image to keep my family safe. I am not a completely horrible person.”

“Thank you.” Ginny said softly. She hadn’t expected that Daniel would show even a little compassion towards her. And she never thought that Daniel would allow her to spend Christmas with Harry. Maybe she had been wrong about him this whole time.

“But if you tell anyone about my leniency, I will kill you. Do you understand?” Daniel threatened harshly. She knew that he meant it. Even if she did decide to tell someone, she doubted that anyone would believe her.

“Of course.” Ginny smiled and pulled her books closer so that she could get back to studying. She had to do as much homework as she could before Harry arrived. It was going to be a wonderful Christmas. “My lips are sealed.”

*~*~*~*

Neville wrapped Stephanie tighter in his arms so that she couldn’t escape. This was the very thing he had dreamt about for so long and he wasn’t about to let the moment end anytime soon. They were on the floor in front of the fireplace in his living quarters with Ron and Hermione laying on the sofa and Harry and Ginny cuddled in each others’ laps in the chair. It was the perfect moment.

But Neville had to chuckle in remembrance at their reunion that morning. He hadn’t seen Ginny go that crazy or be that happy in a long time. Neville was glad that Harry, Ron, and Hermione were able to join them. It was time together that they all needed. It was nice.

“Harry!” Ginny had squealed the moment she saw Harry as he walked into the Great Hall. Ron and Hermione followed hand-in-hand close behind Harry.

Neville remembered cringing at the sound. The minute he saw Ginny, Harry started sprinting across the Great Hall. His face had brightened immediately.

Ginny stood up and was half-way to Harry before Neville could even register that she was moving. Ginny’s chair crashed to the ground a few inches behind the table that everyone was sharing. Since there were so few students remaining at the school over the holidays, they all decided to eat together.

Neville and Stephanie stood at the same time. As he reached for her hand, Neville couldn’t help but notice the large smile on her face. It really made her happy to see her brother again after four months, so he was happy for her. And he had to admit that it was nice to see Hermione and Ron again. They looked so content. However, Harry and Ron looked completely overworked and exhausted. Each had dark circles under their eyes.

“Sheesh, Ginny.” Ron said just as Ginny jumped into Harry’s arms and kissed him like she would never see him again. “You’re embarrassing him.”

Ginny swatted her brother without breaking free from Harry’s embrace. Neville let go of Stephanie so she could hug Hermione. While the two girls were greeting each other, Neville reached over and shook Ron’s hand. Neville noticed that Ron barely took his eyes off Hermione. The girls then switched places so that Stephanie could say hello to her brother.

“Sorry we’re late.” Harry apologized. “But Kingsley held us a little later than expected. Things have been so busy lately.”

“Don’t worry. There’s still plenty of food if you’re hungry.” Neville reported and gestured towards the table.

“Food?” Ron asked excitedly.

“For goodness sake, Ronald. You just ate twenty-five minutes ago.” Hermione rolled her eyes as Ron sat down and started filling a plate of food. She looked at Neville and laughed. “Molly wanted to feed us well before she sent us off. She’s disappointed we won’t be there for Christmas, but she understands. She sends her love, Stephanie.”

“I miss her so much.” Stephanie sighed and returned to her position next to Neville. He smiled as she curled into his chest.

“Oh, I am so excited for both of you! I couldn’t stop smiling for days when I found out.” Hermione gushed at them and Neville let out a chuckle.

“I can actually picture that.” He responded.

“No. I’m serious. The people at work had to tell me to stop because I was freaking them out a little bit.” Hermione laughed, but her smile suddenly faded to a playful frown. “However, I am a little disappointed that I had to hear the news from George.”

“I’m sorry, Hermione.” Stephanie said quietly. “Things just happened so quickly that I didn’t really know what was happening.”

“I’m only joking. It is great to see you both so happy.” Hermione’s smile returned and Neville could tell that she was being sincere. It didn’t bother her that Stephanie hadn’t told her immediately about the formation of their relationship. Neville, on the other hand, had had to fight the urge to shout the news from the rooftop.

“I can’t get over this. Stephanie and Neville. It is so sweet!” Hermione’s voice brought Neville from his thoughts. He was once again curled on the floor with Stephanie cuddling into his chest. Again, he squeezed his arms more tightly around her.

She was playing with the locket that he had given her. He kissed the top of her head and took in her scent. Life couldn’t get any better for him than it was at that moment. He was surrounded by his good friends and curled up in front of a warm fire with the woman he loved on Christmas Eve.

“Stephanie,” Neville said her name quietly, but she responded by craning her neck and looking into his eyes. He could have melted right there, but he kept himself together and smiled broadly. “You don’t know how many times I dreamt about this exact scenario, though I was also giving you that locket at that time. You are absolutely perfect.”

“Oh, you don’t want to know, Stephanie.” Ginny snorted, giving Neville a playful look. Harry rubbed her hand as Ginny commented on his statement. “Every night. Sometimes you were on a beach at the Mediterranean Sea, other times you were in the mountains. But he would always moan your name. Even though he was too shy to tell you, he was desperately in love with you.”

“Still am.” Neville responded without embarrassment and ran his fingers down Stephanie’s hair. He looked at her face searching for a reaction of discomfort. Hearing that someone had dreamt about you on a constant basis could be a little frightening sometimes.

“That’s sweet.” Stephanie responded with a light smile. Neville was relieved that she appreciated his obsessive tendencies.

“How do you know?” Harry asked Ginny skeptically, though Neville could see that he was attempting to hide a smile behind his serious façade.

“Don’t even think that, Harry.” Ginny laughed and then leaned forward to place a light kiss on Harry’s lips. “We would talk about it last year. But I actually saw it happen when Voldemort held us captive at Malfoy Manor.”

“Wait.” Stephanie sat up and pulled herself away from him. He had the urge to reach out to her, but he forced himself to remain still. She looked him straight in the eye. “You were dreaming about giving me such a precious gift, about being with me, while I was torturing you for information so that I could murder my brother?”

“Yes.” Neville nodded in agreement.

“Like I said,” Ginny added with amusement in her voice, “Neville Longbottom was a man in love.”

He took a moment to look at her face, but he couldn’t read her expression. Her eyebrows were knitted together and she looked confused. There didn’t appear to be anger or hurt embedded there, but he couldn’t be sure.

“What are you thinking?” He asked hesitantly, honestly wanting an answer but afraid that he had offended her in some way.

“You are so sweet.” Stephanie’s smile came so suddenly that Neville was taken off guard. She leaned forward and wrapped her arms around him, squeezing his chest tightly. Neville immediately returned the embrace. “And I don’t deserve you.” She whispered into his ear.

“Don’t say that.” Neville pushed her away and looked into her eyes. Their friends were forgotten, Stephanie was the only person in the room that mattered at that moment. “I love you no matter what your past may hold. And, Stephanie, that will never change.”

He leaned closer to her and pulled her face towards his. He took that moment to kiss her—he needed to show Stephanie just how much he loved her.

“Hey!” Harry spoke up, breaking the silence. Neville suddenly jolted away from Stephanie. “That’s my sister. You better be careful, Longbottom!”

“Harry!” Hermione and Ginny reprimanded at the same time.

Neville had to laugh at their reaction. He had completely forgotten that his friends were there. The situation could have gotten out of hand if Harry hadn’t interrupted them, and he was thankful for that.

“Sorry, Harry.” He laughed.

He suddenly felt soft hands on his face and he turned his attention back towards Stephanie Annabelle Potter. She looked so innocent and sweet. She was more beautiful than his memory could ever picture her.

“I love you, too.” She whispered to him.

“Aww.” Ginny and Hermione’s high-pitched voices sounded at the same time. Stephanie giggled into his face and he smiled at her amusement.

“Girls.” Ron sighed as he rolled his eyes.

“Tell me about it.” Harry responded solemnly.

“You know you guys love them.” Neville laughed at his friends’ responses to his public display of affection.

Ron leaned over and pecked Hermione on the lips. “Of course I do.”

Harry and Ginny were rubbing their noses together and giggling. Harry’s voice was low when he spoke to his girlfriend, “I love you.”

“Now, you need to tell us what is going on in the world.” Stephanie broke through the sappy barrier and took the conversation in a more serious direction. “Harry, you barely have time to talk through the mirrors.”

Harry and Ron looked at each other, trying to read each other’s thoughts. It was finally Harry that broke the silence.

“We can’t say much, but Kingsley has been preparing us for a second war.” Harry told them honestly and Neville wasn’t surprised. He, Stephanie, and Ginny had surmised that much, at least.

“We know you can’t talk about it, and we won’t press you, but is Stephanie in danger?” Neville asked, hoping he was wrong about the answer he was about to receive.

“Yes.” Harry replied solemnly. He nodded his head and turned his attention toward his sister while Neville wrapped her once again in his arms. “But you are safe at Hogwarts, Stephanie.”

“I know about the Aurors outside the castle.” Stephanie said. “No, don’t ask how I know.” She interrupted Harry before he could speak; Harry closed his mouth in response. He must have known that if he asked for details, Stephanie would, too.

It was awkward for Neville knowing only one part of the story and not being able to share with his friends. But the level of danger that Stephanie was in at Hogwarts was best kept secret from Harry. Harry would stop at nothing to protect his sister, even die. Stephanie didn’t want Harry interfering, and so Neville would do what he could to keep Harry uninformed. His main goal was to keep Stephanie happy. That’s why they had employed the assistance of Daniel Blaiser.

“Several Death Eaters are forming another army and we are training very hard so that when the time comes, we are able to defend the Ministry.” Ron added through the silence.

“Keeping you safe is the Ministry’s top priority, Stephanie.” Hermione tried to reassure her, but Neville knew it was unnecessary. Stephanie wasn’t afraid of Dedrick Hargrave or the rest of the Death Eaters—she was afraid for the safety of her students.

“There’s no need.” Stephanie laughed darkly. “I’m not worried about that. I was just curious what was taking all of my brother’s time.”

“Speaking of brother.” Ron’s train of thought led the conversation in a different direction. “George said that you got trampled at the Quidditch match against Slytherin. What happened, Ginny?”

“I don’t want to talk about that.” Ginny spoke into Harry’s shirt, keeping her face hidden from the curious looks.

“How is the rest of the House taking the loss?” Harry asked her, rubbing her shoulder. “I don’t think Gryffindor has lost to Slytherin in a fair match in years.”

“Mmm.” Ginny mumbled into Harry’s shirt again. Neville could barely understand her, but Harry could clearly hear her next words. “Not very well. They kicked me out of the DA because they think that I threw the match.”

“What?!?” Harry exclaimed. “Why would they think that?”

“Because I did.” Ginny’s voice was soft and ashamed. Neville was concerned that she was sharing too much information, but she clearly needed to confess her conscience. She had a lot on her mind and Neville couldn’t fault her.

“Why?” Ron asked with an agitated voice. He stood up to confront his sister. “Are you insane?”

“It’s a long story.” Stephanie tried to step in and protect her friend, but Ron was too upset. He walked closer to Ginny and Harry, whose expression was one of confusion.

“Are you sure they are upset with you?” Harry asked. “Maybe you misunderstood.”

“No. They are very upset.” Ginny looked into his eyes and then spoke to her brother. “Ron, calm down. You don’t even go to school here anymore.”

“But you lost to Slytherin!” Ron almost yelled at her.

“Ginny, let’s go up to your room and talk about this.” Harry spoke softly. Neville could tell that he understood there was a deeper reason for Ginny’s throwing her final Quidditch match.

“I, uh, am not living in Gryffindor, anymore.” Ginny said. “Again, long story, and I can’t share the details with you.”

“Where are you staying, Ginny?” Hermione asked. She, too, was very confused. Neville knew that they would all be shocked to learn where Ginny would be staying for the remainder of the school year.

“Slytherin.” Ginny mumbled towards the floor, now too uncomfortable to curl into Harry’s chest.

“What?” Ron, Hermione, and Harry bellowed at the same time.

Harry looked completely baffled by what was going on. Neville couldn’t blame them, but they could have been a little more understanding. “I can’t believe that you wou-” Harry started to reprimand Ginny for her decision to reside in the Slytherin dormitories, but he suddenly cut himself off and looked at Ron.

“What is that?” Neville asked Stephanie, feeling something vibrating near the top of her thigh.

She reached into her pocket and pulled out a vibrating Galleon. It was a fake coin similar to what Dumbledore’s Army had used to communicate and organize meetings during his fifth year.

“What’s going on, you guys?” Stephanie asked.

“Kingsley.” Harry and Ron said in unison.

Harry turned towards Stephanie and spoke in a hurried tone. “You wanted to be a consultant for the Aurors. It must be something big if he’s calling you. We need to go, now.”

He turned and kissed Ginny quickly on the lips while Ron did the same towards Hermione. Neville was in too much shock to move. He had never thought that Kingsley, the Minister of Magic, would ever call for Stephanie’s assistance. Neville knew it was a possibility, but he hadn't allowed himself to think that Kingsley would go through with his offer. Right now he hated the Minister of Magic for placing his love in danger.

Stephanie followed behind Ron and her brother, clutching her wand in her hand. She giggled slightly on her way out the door, but her expression looked absolutely terrified. And Neville was left wondering whether he would ever see Stephanie again.


I am honestly back in a BIG way!! I had some great ideas about which direction this story is going to go. I apologize for the cliff hanger. However, I am so excited that there is finally some action returning to the story. Maybe that's why I have had such a hard time writing lately. I have already started the next chapter and anticipate that it will be ready for posting next weekend. However, I will remind everyone that leaving feedback really motivates me to continue posting (and to post at a quicker rate!). Anyway, thank you so much to those that have continued with this story so long! Have a great weekend!

Chapter Twenty-Nine: The Benefits of Eavesdropping

“Go away.” He murmured and pulled the blankets over his head, but that didn’t stop the shaking. “I’m sleeping.”

“Matty, come on. Wake up. We have to go!” A familiar voice whispered urgently in his ear, but he still didn’t want to move. It was nice and warm under the heavy blankets of his bed. He didn’t have school in the morning and all he wanted to do was sleep.

“Sto-op.” He whined incoherently and rolled over, away from the person trying to get him out of bed.

“David and Sammy are downstairs waiting for us. We need to go.” And suddenly Matty realized who was at his bedside irritating him: Lauren. He sat up immediately and rubbed his eyes.

“What? Why?” He asked.

“Abby sent them with the Marauder’s Map.” Lauren whispered. She was fully dressed and going through his drawers. He just blinked as she threw him a pair of pants and a shirt.

“Why? Where’s Abby?” He asked, still unable to comprehend completely what was going on. Matty rubbed the sleep out of his eyes as he got out of bed and walked to the corner, hidden by a large dresser.

“You know she can’t come along.” Lauren whispered louder, but did not wake his only roommate who stayed behind for the holidays. “Ginny isn’t back yet and Abby’s afraid to leave her room. You know Daniel threatened to send her home if she misbehaves. He’ll do it and she doesn’t want to risk Daniel finding out.”

“What time is it?” He asked groggily as he quickly tried to change out of his pajamas.

“Two a.m.” Lauren responded.

“And Ginny’s not back yet? I thought Daniel told her to be back in Abby’s room by midnight.” He stated. This realization concerned him. Is Ginny alright? he wondered. The rest of the Gryffindors despised Ginny for losing the game against Slytherin on purpose. Would they do something to her?

“The map says that she’s in Professor Longbottom’s room, pacing, with Professor Longbottom and someone named Hermione Granger. Now come on, we have to go.” Lauren commanded just as he finished getting ready. Matty pulled a sweatshirt over his head and they began their descent down the stairs towards the common room.

“That’s right. Harry Potter and Ginny’s brother were coming to visit Professor Potter. Where do you think they are?” He asked curiously.

“You are full of questions.” She stated matter-of-factly, rolling her eyes. “How should I know?”

“What’s up, Sammy?” Matty asked David and Sammy when he reached them. Together, David and Sammy held the map in front of them and were whispering amongst themselves.

“It’s Teddy Nott, Milli Bullstrode, and Greg Goyle. They are in the Transfiguration classroom even though they are scheduled to be at home over the break.” David informed them and Matty just nodded in response. What are they doing there? He couldn’t imagine why those three would sneak around classrooms when they should have been at home.

“Well, let’s go take a look.” Lauren giggled.

Matty had to agree with Lauren. The five of them had had so much fun the last time they went exploring the castle at night, the night they discovered the Marauder’s Map. They hadn’t seen too much excitement lately because of Abby’s isolation. Matty was worried about Abby, but she continuously reassured him that she was surviving just fine. She repeatedly told him that she had to watch out for Daniel just as much as Daniel felt the need to watch out for her, so she did not blame him for his over-protectiveness.

Matty, on the other hand, couldn’t believe that Daniel would separate Abby from everything. So, he had been grateful when Ginny Weasley made that deal with Daniel Blaiser, though he didn’t know the full extent of what Ginny had promised him. All he knew was that he and Abby, and the rest of his friends, could now hang out together if Ginny was present.

Of course, he and Lauren needed to meet with Abby, Sammy, and David in private. They didn’t want Daniel to know Abby was friends with two Gryffindors. Abby was still unsure how he would react and none of them wanted to do anything to make him angry. Daniel would go through with his threat in an instant if he felt Abby was in any sort of danger. But it was a step in the right direction and each of them felt they owed Ginny for her sacrifice.

But they also knew Ginny had her own reasons for offering her assistance to Daniel, though none of them believed the rumors that Ginny was cheating on Harry Potter with the Slytherin. She was so stubborn that there had to be another explanation.

And he had a feeling that that reason was related to the letter they found in Professor Potter’s belongings. Professor Potter never divulged what the letter from the Death Eater meant, but he had a small understanding that she was in danger. Is that why Ginny is spending so much time with Daniel? He had contemplated the same question many times over the past couple weeks.

A loud crashing sound broke him from his thoughts and he quickly muttered under his breath. “Lumos;” his wand illuminated the dark hallway immediately.

“Watch where you’re going!” Lauren hissed at David as he rubbed his foot.

“I wouldn’t have to if you wouldn’t rush me, Lauren.” David retorted as he picked up the sword that had fallen to the ground. “Has this knight always been here?”

“Always.” Sammy giggled.

“Let’s keep the light on for now.” Matty put his finger to his lips to hush them. “But be careful! You know what will happen if we get caught.”

“It was just an accident.” David snapped as he placed the sword back in the knight’s hand. His face suddenly brightened as a thought occurred to him. “Anyway, Professor Potter isn’t even in the castle. No one else knows about the map. We’re good.”

“No, Potter isn’t here.” Lauren grabbed the map from David and pointed at it forcefully. “But Longbottom is and I am sure he knows about it. Ginny does too. So, no, we are not ‘good.’”

“Let’s go.” Matty said and took the lead before Lauren and David smacked each other. Their fighting was just getting too intense for him and it made Matty uncomfortable at times. Matty had once confronted David on his behavior towards Lauren, he always seemed to aggravate her on purpose, but it didn’t appear to help. David just responded by stating he enjoyed Lauren’s reactions.

Matty was starting to wonder whether David had a crush on Lauren, but he didn’t think that anyone would push someone’s buttons if he or she liked them. He just couldn’t figure it out, nor did he really care. They had a mission to do; the four of them had to figure out why Nott, Bullstrode, and Goyle were in the Transfiguration classroom.

Soon, Matty could see light up ahead and he knew they were close to the classroom. “Nox,” he whispered and the light on the tip of his wand darkened.

“Where is it?” Milli’s voice hissed in the darkness. Matty could hear the ruffling of papers and the slam of drawers being pulled from their slots.

“Calm down, Bullstrode.” Nott commanded and his voice made it clear that he was in charge of the trio. “It has to be here. She wouldn’t take it with her over the break.”

“It’s just that if we don’t find it-” Milli whined, but Nott interrupted her.

“We’ll find it. Just keep looking.” He hissed snidely into the dimly lit classroom.

Matty looked backwards at his friends with a curious expression. What are they looking for? he silently questioned. The other students were just as confused as he was.

He slowly knelt closer to the floor and crept towards the open classroom door without a sound. As he grew nearer, Matty could see Goyle pulling books and papers from the cupboards. The classroom was a mess as a result of Milli, Nott, and Goyle tearing it apart to look for the unknown item. The floor was a cluttered mess with papers, books, supplies, and chairs thrown everywhere.

“Accio master.” Milli held her wand forcefully and then waved it around the room, trying to summon whatever they were looking for. She looked defeated when nothing happened. “It’s not here.”

“You’re right. It’s not here.” Nott responded without emotion. “We’ll just have to look elsewhere.”

“I can’t fail, Teddy. I just can’t.” Milli complained as she reached out to touch Nott. He responded by slapping her hard across the face. “You don’t know what father will do to me if I fail.”

“We’ll find it.” Nott responded coolly. “Now quit your complaining. We have to get out of here.”

Matty quickly turned around and crawled in the direction he had come, accidentally bumping into Sammy. “We have to get out of here!” He whispered so quietly that even he could barely hear himself.

He could hear his friends’ feet rustle as they moved to the nearest doorway. Matty heard it open and he sprinted in the direction of the sound. The door closed silently behind him and he just stood there, trying to listen for sounds in the hallway.

“Do you think they heard us?” Sammy whispered after what seemed like hours of waiting.

“I don’t think so.” Lauren responded as though she was out of breath. “But whoever is squeezing me, I can’t breathe.”

“Sorry.” David muttered and Matty stifled a laugh. Of course David would be freaked out enough to clutch the first thing he touched.

“Thank you.” Lauren whispered and Matty figured David had released her so she could breathe again. A light suddenly appeared as Lauren whispered the spell to illuminate her wand, “Lumos.”

“What were they looking for?” Sammy asked as she took a seat against the wall of the classroom. They weren’t sure if it was safe to head back to their respective dormitories, so the four of them would have to stay put for awhile. They couldn’t let the older Slytherins know they had been listening.

“Milli tried summoning the master of something.” Matty informed them of what he had witnessed. “My guess is that they were looking for some sort of document.”

“It’s got to be.” David nodded his head in agreement. “What could be in the Transfiguration classroom that would be of use to them, though?”

“They don’t want it.” Matty responded knowingly. “Milli said that her father would be upset with her if she didn’t get it. I think her father wants whatever they were looking for.”

“Is he a Death Eater?” Sammy asked as her teeth started to chatter with nervousness. Matty pulled off his sweater and handed it to his friend; she smiled with gratitude.

“I don’t think so…” Lauren replied slowly, thinking through the known Death Eaters in her mind. “But whatever it is they were looking for has to do with Professor Potter. Daniel knows that they are involved—he had Dumbledore’s Army following them.”

“We have to find out what they want so we can get to it first.” Matty was already starting to form the plan in his mind. “Then we can take it to Professor Potter.”

“Oh, we’ll be able to help her!” Lauren clapped her hands together excitedly. “This is so much fun!”

“Lauren, where are Ginny and Professor Longbottom now?” David asked, pointing at the map in Lauren’s hands.

“Still in his room.” Lauren nodded. “And Milli, Nott, and Goyle aren’t in the castle anymore. It’s safe to head back.”

“We’ll walk you guys back to the Great Hall.” Matty looked at David and Sammy as he stood. They showed their acknowledgement by standing and stretching their arms. They were all exhausted.

“Nox.” Lauren whispered and her wand darkened.

With that, they silently crept their way back towards the Great Hall. He wanted to walk with them to make sure they made it alright. Sammy could get frightened sometimes and David was insensitive to that kind of reaction. David never meant to be malicious, he just didn’t think a lot before he spoke. The hallway to Slytherin House was just beyond the Great Hall, so Sammy would be fine after that. He was sure that he and Lauren wouldn’t need the map to get back safely to Gryffindor Tower.

But suddenly, he felt someone tug his shirt and pull him backwards. They were already inside the Great Hall before he could turn around and look at his attacker. He opened his mouth to speak, but was interrupted by someone placing their finger on his lips.

“Voices.” He could read Sammy’s lips in the false moonlight displayed on the ceiling of the Great Hall.

“There were so many of them.” A high-pitched male voice groaned in the darkness. Matty looked at Sammy, who shrugged in response. He could see Lauren holding the map up high, trying to read it in the moonlight. She was having difficulty and kept moving the map to different positions.

“I can’t believe I was so stupid.” Professor Potter’s voice rang out clearly this time. Matty’s eyebrows folded together in concentration.

“You didn’t do anything wrong, Stephanie.” Matty recognized this voice as belonging to Harry Potter. He was in the same building, mere feet, from the most amazing wizard in the world!

“I sent the Aurors to Azkaban. I should have realized-” Her voice was filled with sadness, but she was quickly interrupted.

“Stop it!” Harry demanded forcefully. “It was your best guess and you did better than any of us combined. You single-handedly captured Rabastan Lestrange.”

“It was so cool, Stephanie.” The strange voice praised Matty’s professor. “The look on his face when he knew it was over was classic.”

“But so many people died tonight.” Professor Potter sounded like she had been crying. Matty could only look at his friends with concern. Sammy looked downright frightened at the conversation she was hearing. He reached out and patted her shoulder; she smiled up at him in response. Matty just wished that Abby could have been there to help them interpret this information.

“Kingsley will take care of that, Stephanie.” Harry reassured his sister. The voices were getting farther away and Matty had to strain to hear what was being said. “Now, we have to get Ron to Neville’s room. Maybe you and Hermione can work your magic and stop the bleeding.”

“Oh, I wish Madame Pomfrey could be here to help.” Professor Potter said softly.

“You know she has to be at St. Mungo’s right now. It’s only a flesh wound, he’ll survive.” Harry laughed softly.

“Thanks, mate.” The male voice Matty hadn’t recognized must have been Ron Weasley, Ginny’s older brother. “Thanks a lot.”

“No problem, Ron.” Harry’s voice had a hint of amusement this time. “You’ll be fine.”

“Do you think Kingsley…” Professor Potter’s voice trailed off as they continued towards Professor Longbottom’s living quarters.

“Lumos.” Lauren murmured and quickly looked at the map, then exclaimed, “Ronald Weasley!”

“Shh!” Sammy hushed.

“Sorry.” Lauren smiled as she whispered her apology. “I couldn’t remember the guy’s name and it was driving me crazy.”

“What was that all about?” David asked them.

“Something major happened tonight.” Sammy wrapped her arms tightly against her chest. “Do you think we’ll find out in the morning?”

“We’ll have to get a copy of the Daily Prophet.” Matty replied. “But we should get back before we get caught.”

The others nodded. He watched as Sammy and David silently made their way towards the hallway that would lead them back to their House. Finally, he placed his arm around Lauren’s shoulder and the two of them walked back towards Gryffindor. The whole way, he couldn’t get a picture of Abby alone in her room out of his mind.

*~*~*~*

“What’s going on?” Stephanie begged her brother for an answer. She was out of breath from running through the halls of the school and then out onto neutral ground where they could Disapparate.

“Don’t know.” Ron yelled over his shoulder, but didn’t slow his pace even a little.

“Kingsley said he wouldn’t call us over the holidays. Says we’ve been working too hard.” Harry gasped as he suddenly came to a halt. In fact, he stopped so quickly that Stephanie almost ran into him. “There’s an emergency.”

“How do you know that? Did he call you, too?” Stephanie was confused about what was going on.

Ron rolled his eyes at her question and pulled a pendant from under his shirt. It was exactly like the one Kingsley had given her shortly after she met Professor Dumbledore for the first time.

“Yes.” He answered impatiently.

Stephanie immediately understood why it was such an emergency. She nodded her understanding as Harry grabbed her wrist and Disapparated.

Suddenly, Stephanie was outside a large building that she knew housed Auror Headquarters. Kingsley had moved the Aurors from the Ministry of Magic to an undisclosed location to make it more difficult for the remaining Death Eaters to attack them. She had been there only once, before school began in September, but she remembered it well.

Harry let go of her arm and ran into the building. Stephanie followed quickly, not sure exactly where she was going. Her brother led her and Ron into a large, open room. Kingsley was staring at a transparent map high in the air with a man that Stephanie didn’t recognize.

“Ahh, Potter and Weasley. You’re late.” The man turned around at their entrance.

“Sorry Ignatius.” Harry spoke apologetically. “We were inside Hogwarts.”

“What’s going on?” Ron asked.

“There is an attack on St. Mungo’s.” Kingsley’s deep voice was full of concern, but Stephanie was impressed by his ability to remain calm. “We are not sure how many, but there are several casualties already.”

“Why would they attack St. Mungo’s? There’s no one there on Christmas Eve.” Harry pointed out.

“There was a smaller attack at the magical ice skating rink in downtown London. It was a relatively small explosion, injuring about twenty people. St. Mungo’s had called in their entire staff to assist with the traumas.” The man named Ignatius explained. “We have sent all of our Aurors to assist.”

“Let’s go.” Ron clutched his wand tighter. He had a determined expression on his face that made Stephanie proud to know him. He was definitely courageous and willing to risk his life for the Ministry.

“Wait.” Stephanie said, thinking through the scenario in her mind. This had to be the work of the Death Eaters that Kingsley had tried to protect her from. Why would the Death Eaters attack St. Mungo’s? There had to be a deeper reason. And she suddenly realized why Dedrick would create a diversion by attacking a location that seemed irrelevant.

“What is it?” Kingsley asked as Ron and Harry stopped in their tracks. They looked at Stephanie curiously.

“What do you think, Miss Potter?” Ignatius asked.

She wondered who this man was, and Kingsley must have realized by the look on her face. He gestured towards the man. “Stephanie, this is Ignatius Dumont. I have appointed him as our new Head Auror.”

“Of course.” Stephanie replied, reaching for his hand. “It’s a pleasure to meet you.”

“What is your impression, Miss Potter?” Ignatius nodded at her, requesting her input. It felt odd to her for a complete stranger to ask her opinion unquestioningly. He trusted her judgment without knowing her personally. This was a new experience and it gave her a little more confidence to state her theory.

“What about Azkaban?” She asked.

“What about it?” Ron asked as his eyes narrowed in a confused expression.

“You think it’s a diversion.” Kingsley stated, and then thought about Stephanie’s question in more depth. He nodded. “That makes sense.”

“You think it’s a break out?” Ignatius understood what Stephanie was trying to point out. Stephanie knew Dedrick pretty well and she knew that he had to be attempting to break out his fellow Death Eaters. They would owe him deeply if he succeeded. It was the only explanation Stephanie could think of, and it did make sense.

“Well, let’s get to Azkaban, then.” Harry nodded at Ignatius and held his wand higher in the air, signaling that he was ready to fight.

“No. I want you and Ron to go to St. Mungo’s.” Ignatius commanded. “Go.”

Harry and Ron followed his instruction immediately and without further argument. Stephanie started to move towards the door to join her brother, but Ignatius asked her to remain behind.

“Miss Potter, I would like you to assist in the defense of Azkaban.” Ignatius spoke politely to her and Stephanie realized that he was being careful not to command her as he had done to her brother and Ron. He was asking for her help, not demanding it. How refreshing.

“Of course.” Stephanie nodded.

“I will send as many Aurors as I can spare to help. We need to keep those prisoners detained at all costs. Do you understand?” He asked.

“More than most.” Stephanie replied. And she did understand the importance of keeping the Death Eaters locked away in Azkaban more than the average witch or wizard. She and her students would be placed in more danger if even one of those wizards escaped from prison.

Stephanie turned and started sprinting, leaving the room as quickly as she could. She had to get to Azkaban before Dedrick would have a chance to start his attack. The implications were too great if she failed this task. Just as she was out the door, Ignatius called to her again.

“Miss Potter.” Ignatius’ voice stopped her and she turned around. “Be careful.”

“I always am.” Stephanie replied with a smile and quickly left Auror Headquarters. Outside the building, she pointed her wand towards her chest and returned to the prison she had just visited with Christmas cards. This time, it wasn’t to visit the prisoners of Azkaban, but to keep them from escaping. Stephanie just hoped that she wasn’t too late.


First of all, I'd like to give a big thank you to ChannelingGinny for providing amazing beta services and recommending this story to be a featured fic. I can't say this enough, but you truly are amazing. Thank you SO much! Also, I owe BRoyals a great big thank you, as well, for recommending this story in the WIP thread. Your review was absolutely wonderful. And thank you to everyone who has stuck with this story over time. My readers and reviewers are absolutely wonderful!

I absolutely loved this chapter, and I know that it only gets better from here. I had somewhat of creativity block lately as I have been planning future chapters. But I have good news! The creative juices have been flowing very freely over the past couple of days and I have some great twists and turns planned, so I hope that you continue to stick with me! The next chapter SHOULD (and I say should because you never know what will come up) be up before Christmas. We'll see if I can write this weekend and have it proofread before I leave for the holidays! Enjoy.

Chapter Thirty: St. Mungo’s Hospital for Magical Maladies and Injuries

Stephanie arrived outside Azkaban in a matter of seconds. The action of Disapparition didn’t make her sick anymore, but it was still a little disorienting. After she caught her bearings, Stephanie looked around the open water.

All was silent. The Aurors had not arrived yet and there was no sign of Dedrick Hargrave or any other Death Eater. Stephanie immediately got an uneasy feeling in the pit of her stomach. Something was seriously wrong.

She aimed her wand defensively at the sound of a pop, but it was only an Auror arriving. Stephanie’s heart rate increased with each Auror that arrived. It was too quiet. Where are they? Stephanie wondered. If the Death Eaters were going to attempt a break out, they would want to start soon. It would get more dangerous for them if they waited much longer.

“The Minister said there was an escape in process.” Kristin LaMonaco, a senior Auror, said as she made her way closer to Stephanie.

“It appears that they haven’t arrived, yet.” Stephanie informed her and the other Aurors that began to gather. The group was getting larger by the second and Stephanie knew that something wasn’t right. “I need you to check the air and waters surrounding the prison. They will attack soon if they plan to break out the Death Eaters. It would be too risky to wait much longer.”

“What makes you think they will attempt a break out?” Seth asked curiously as several Aurors from the group dispersed to survey the area surrounding Azkaban.

“The attack on St. Mungo’s has to be a diversion. Why else would they attack innocent civilians and then the hospital that is treating those civilians?” Stephanie thought through the process out loud. She was trying to reassure herself that she was right about Dedrick’s plans, but each moment that passed created just a little more doubt in the back of her mind. “Dedrick needs talented and experienced reinforcements. He will attempt to rescue his colleagues.”

“Of course.” Seth nodded and disappeared with the other Aurors.

Stephanie stood on the grounds, alone, and raised her wand towards the sky. She wasn’t afraid that a Death Eater would attack her there because Dedrick had promised to summon her. He wanted her alone and she definitely wasn’t by herself at that moment. She just didn’t want to be taken by surprise.

While she waited for the return of the Aurors, Stephanie wondered what was going on at St. Mungo’s. If the attack on the hospital wasn’t a diversion, what could their motivation be? Healers. Stephanie’s stomach dropped and she suddenly got the urge to throw up her dinner at the realization that hit her like an explosion.

“GET BACK!” Stephanie screamed into the air, running to find all the Aurors she could. “GET BACK TO ST. MUNGO’S! NOW!”

The attack on the hospital wasn’t a diversion; it was in anticipation of what was to come. The purpose of the first assault was to get all of the Healers to St. Mungo’s. Then, the Death Eaters attacked the hospital to assassinate those Healers. Dedrick was planning an attack on a larger scale and he wanted to eliminate any possibility that people could recover.

“What’s going on?” Mathew came back quickly. He looked worried at her sudden change in demeanor. He was a senior Auror and still felt weary of her, at times. Mathew had known and dealt with her when she had still been a Death Eater.

“Everyone needs to get back to St. Mungo’s.” Stephanie tried to explain, but she was out of breath. Her panic was rising and she just needed to get to the hospital and see her brother. She didn’t know what she would do if Harry died because she had been so stupid. “They aren’t coming.”

Mathew and a few others looked at her with skeptical expressions; they were obviously suspicious of her motivations. It was as if she could read their minds: Why would she send us here? What information does she have?

But no one said anything. One-by-one, the Aurors Disapparated back to St. Mungo’s Hospital for Magical Maladies and Injuries. When all of the Aurors were gone, Stephanie pointed her wand towards her chest with shaky hands and Apparated to the first floor of the hospital she had come to know well.

The sounds of screaming overwhelmed her for a moment. Spells were flying in every direction of the darkened hallway. She could barely see two feet in front of her, so she threw herself to the ground and out of the way of the spells.

She quietly felt her way down the hall and quickly found the doorway to the stairwell. Stephanie used the door to help her stand, and then she opened it softly. Someone’s painful moaning could be heard echoing in the stairwell and, after illuminating her wand, Stephanie quickly followed the noise to find its source.

Stephanie ran up the stairs without regard for the amount of noise she was making. Once she reached the landing between the third and fourth floors, Stephanie was able to see a crumpled body lying on the ground.

She knelt to the man’s level and moved her wand up and down his body, trying to identify him. When he moved his head just slightly, Stephanie was able to recognize him immediately.

“Healer Sorenson!” She whispered urgently. There was blood everywhere and Stephanie didn’t know how to help him. Her healing skills were very minimal; the Dark Lord had never thought it pertinent to teach her how to heal since it was her job to kill. “You’re hurt. Tell me what I can do to help you.”

“You-you-you c-c-c-an’t.” Healer Sorenson’s teeth chattered as his body entered shock. “It’s too bad.”

Tears came to Stephanie’s eyes as she realized that Healer Sorenson was dying because of her. If she hadn’t asked Ignatius and Kingsley to send the Aurors to Azkaban, maybe they could have prevented his death.

“Do-do-do-do-don’t cry.” Healer Sorenson sputtered. Stephanie couldn’t look at him directly, she was too ashamed. This was her fault. He smiled up at her. “This is not your fault.”

Instead of allowing him to focus on who was to blame, Stephanie decided to change the subject. She didn’t want the last thing he thought before he died to be about her. She needed to find out what had happened so she could figure out how to help. “Healer Sorenson,” she whispered, “what happened here?”

“I don’t know.” He sighed and closed his eyes. Even in the darkness, Stephanie could see his skin get even paler. Healer Sorenson was very close to death. “Only a few masked…” His breathe was raspy and uneven. “Many unmasked…Couldn’t be…Death Eaters.”

It was getting difficult to understand him. He was only able to say a few words at a time before his strength failed him. Before Stephanie could ask him anymore questions, he stopped breathing completely.

“No!” Stephanie cried as she felt his body go completely limp. She didn’t know what to do, so she began banging on his chest with her fists. “Please! Healer Sorenson, hang in there. Please!”

But he didn’t move. Stephanie knew that he was gone, but she couldn’t let herself believe it. If she had come straight to the hospital, maybe he would have survived. It felt the same as though she had killed him. She lay across his body, the body of a man who had done so much to help her, and cried. Her energy was depleting with every sob. It was. All. Her. Fault.

Stephanie didn’t think she could handle much more destruction because of her errors. She should have accepted when Dumbledore offered to rescue her from Lucius Malfoy’s home. But she hadn’t. Now, even more people were dying because of her. It had to stop. Immediately.

She was determined. Stephanie clutched her wand so hard she could feel the blood drain from her knuckles. The attack needed to stop and she would make sure it happened immediately.

But she was stopped in her tracks at the sound of a door in the stairwell slamming open, and a woman breathing deeply as she descended the stairs. Stephanie extinguished the light on her wand and slid against the wall as the woman got closer. She didn’t know who the woman was, so Stephanie wasn’t going to take a chance in calling out to her.

Then there was a loud banging and swooshing noise as the woman tripped over Healer Sorenson’s body and tumbled past her and down the stairs to the next platform. The woman stopped with a thud and Stephanie couldn’t allow herself to stand still any longer.

“Are you alright?” Stephanie whispered into the darkness, unwilling to light her wand. She still didn’t want this woman to know who she was before Stephanie could identify her.

“Stephanie?” The woman grumbled as she pulled herself up.

“Nikki?” Stephanie silently lit her wand so that she could see the Auror. Stephanie let out a breath of relief when she saw Nikki Fullbright. “Nikki!” Stephanie exclaimed.

“Stephanie, are you alright?” The Auror asked as she scanned Stephanie’s full body length, looking for any sign of injury.

“You just tumbled down a flight of stairs and you are asking me if I’m alright?” Stephanie couldn’t help but laugh. “Nikki, how many are there?”

“I don’t know, but there are clear leaders.” Nikki explained softly, rubbing her arm. “There are only a few masked Death Eaters and they are mostly remaining in the shadows. We think that the majority of the attackers are under the Imperius Curse.”

“What about the Healers?” Stephanie had to ask the question that was burning in the forefront of her mind. Had they all suffered the same fate as Healer Sorenson? And had it all been her fault?

Nikki coughed in hesitation of answering Stephanie’s question, so she knew immediately that the answer was not one she would be happy to hear. “Tell me, Nikki.”

Nikki closed her eyes and spoke honestly, for which Stephanie was grateful, but it still cut Stephanie’s insides so deeply that she fell to her knees. “All dead.”

”Why?” Stephanie whispered into the darkness, placing her head in her hands. “I can’t understand. It wasn’t an attempted escape from Azkaban. Why would they attack St. Mungo’s.”

“The answer to that is not important right now, Stephanie.” Nikki knelt down to her level and rubbed her shoulder. “We need to capture the people responsible and stop more people from dying. Then we can worry about motives.”

Stephanie looked up at Nikki. “I was wrong,” she whispered.

“So?” Nikki demanded forcefully. She pulled Stephanie to a standing position. “Stephanie,” Nikki said as she placed her hand in Stephanie’s. “Most of the Healers were gone before we even arrived. This is not your fault, do you hear me?”

Stephanie nodded, not knowing what else to say. She knew that it was her fault, but then again, everything always was. Instead of prolonging this conversation, Stephanie knew it was up to her to end the attack. “Where’s Harry?” she asked.

“Last time I saw him, he was on the third floor with Ron Weasley.” Nikki nodded and Stephanie turned to descend the stairs one level. “Stephanie, are you okay?”

“Of course.” Stephanie nodded, lying to Nikki. She didn’t even feel bad about it because she had to do what needed to get done. When it was all over she could pull herself into a self-pity spiral. But now, her brother needed her.

“Be safe.” Nikki nodded and it looked as though she didn’t believe Stephanie.

“I always am.” Stephanie responded. “And you, too, Nikki.”

Stephanie slammed through the door on the third floor. Everything was silent, which surprised her. No spells were flying and there was no noise whatsoever. She lowered herself to the floor and crept along the hallway, looking into each of the rooms as she passed them. Stephanie didn’t dare to light her wand; she didn’t want anyone knowing where she was.

Suddenly, she was taken by surprise as a spell blasted into her and she flew into the wall across the hallway. She landed with a grunt on the floor but immediately raised her wand in defense. Another spell pulled her into an open room at an incredible force. She was stopped immediately as her body slammed into the metal wheel of a hospital bed.

Stephanie moaned at the pain in her back, but stood up as quickly as she could. Her attacker would not render her defenseless. She would survive.

The light turned on and the door slammed shut, and standing across the room was one masked Death Eater. Even with the mask covering his face, Stephanie recognized his confident and arrogant stance immediately: Rabastan Lestrange.

So, she greeted him with a smile. “Rabastan, how nice it is to see you again, though I had imagined our reunion would be in more pleasant circumstances.”

“More pleasant for you, I presume.” Rabastan removed his mask and nodded in her direction. He casually flicked his wand in her direction.

“Of course.” She acknowledged.

“You know, I am suffering quite the dilemma, Stephanie.” Rabastan allowed a smile to form on his face as he took a step closer. Stephanie couldn’t resist reacting in the same fashion, though she remained completely still.

“What’s that?” Stephanie asked, playing along with his game.

“Dedrick has claimed you. He has demanded that none of us touch you until he is ready to end your life.” Rabastan took another step towards her and waved his wand nonchalantly. “But it is just so tempting…”

His voice trailed off and Stephanie knew that he was going to go against Dedrick’s wishes. All of the Death Eaters would, just to be the one to claim victory for murdering Stephanie Potter. So, she quickly cast a spell in his direction to stun him.

But Rabastan had been ready. He easily flicked the spell away with one small wave of his wand, and then he burst into uncontrollable laughter. “Honestly, Stephanie,” he said in between breaths. “You have to do better than that.”

Stephanie tried another spell, but once again Rabastan flicked it away. She was starting to get frustrated. She knew that she was better than Rabastan and she couldn’t understand why her spells weren’t working. So, she decided to stall until help could arrive.

“What about Dedrick, Rabastan?” Stephanie allowed a confident smirk to form on her lips. “You know that he will kill you if you lay one finger on me.”

“Crucio!” Rabastan laughed and Stephanie collapsed on the ground as the pain began. She could hear herself screaming even though she couldn’t focus on anything but the stabbing needles coursing through her entire body. He had cast the spell so quickly that she hadn’t been prepared. She had expected him to hesitate at her taunt, but he had seen it coming. Finally the pain subsided, but she remained crumpled and breathless on the ground.

She could hear Rabastan as his feet shuffled slowly towards her. When he reached her, he knelt on the ground and whispered in her ear. “Don’t worry about me, Stephanie. I can handle myself against Dedrick Hargrave. You should be worried about what I am about to do to you for sending my brother to Azkaban.”

“You can’t touch me.” Stephanie threatened. As long as she still had her wand in her hand, she still had a chance at defeating Rabastan. But maybe she deserved to lose her life for sending all those Aurors away from the hospital. They could have helped. They could have prevented so many deaths. It was all her fault.

She felt her hair being pulled and she stood at the force. Rabastan’s breath was immediately felt as it burned her neck. His chest was jumping up and down in amusement.

“It looks like I am, dear Stephanie.” Rabastan’s dark voice laughed in her ear. He ran his wand up her stomach, across her chest, and around her neck. “You are still as pathetic as the last time I saw you.”

“LET GO OF HER!” There was a crash as someone sent a spell at the door, trying to open it, but it stayed intact. She could see her brother’s face in the window. “When I get in there, Lestrange…”

“We seem to have company.” Rabastan was clearly enjoying the scene that was unfolding. He pushed Stephanie to the floor and she slid across the room. “Let me take care of Potter first, and then I’ll come back for you.”

Rabastan smiled as he prepared to cast a binding spell on her, but Stephanie had had enough. He had been allowed to evade her spells and torture her because she had allowed her guilt to take over her body. She felt she deserved the punishment he was sure to provide her. But Stephanie would not allow Rabastan Lestrange to cast one miniscule spell against her brother.

She used the skill that Severus had engrained in her from their very first lessons. Quick succession was the only way to defeat a talented Death Eater, such as Rabastan Lestrange. Stephanie easily deflected the binding spell and immediately sent an offensive spell in his direction. Stephanie’s face brightened as Rabastan’s lightened.

“What is this?” Rabastan asked softly as his wand left his hand, the anger and hatred momentarily escaping his body.

“It’s nice, isn’t it?” Stephanie smiled as she bound Rabastan in place. Accio wand, Stephanie thought, and Rabastan’s wand immediately appeared in her hand. “It’s just a little something I created.”

She turned and waved her wand in the direction of the door, allowing it to open for her brother. He rushed in and pulled her into a tight embrace.

“I am so sorry, Stephanie!” Harry exclaimed in her ear.

“What are you talking about?” She asked, surprised by his reaction. It should have been Stephanie apologizing to him for placing him and the rest of the Aurors in so much danger.

“Nikki said that you had come looking for me, and then I heard you screaming. I thought we were going to be too late.” He pulled away for a moment to look at her, to make sure that she really was alright, and then he embraced her again.

Stephanie laughed when he finally released her. “I would have been, but in typical Death Eater fashion, Rabastan, here, needed to gloat about his success in capturing me.” She rolled her eyes and Ron giggled nervously behind her.

“Are you alright, Stephanie?” Ron asked her.

She took a moment to look herself over. She could feel some moisture on her back and she wasn’t sure if it was sweat or blood from her collision with the hospital bed, but she knew she was okay. She nodded in affirmation.

But then she looked at Ron for a moment. Blood was soaked through his pants and it looked like it was still flowing. “Ron, you’re hurt,” she pointed out.

Ron looked down at his leg and smiled for a moment. “It seems I am.” His eyes rolled to the back of his head and he collapsed to the ground.

Harry just stood there and stared for a moment, but Stephanie rushed immediately to her friend’s side. “Ron,” she patted his face and he slowly regained consciousness.

Harry finally moved and appeared next to Stephanie. “Ron, are you okay?”

“Yeah, mate.” Ron’s voice sounded queasy, but coherent. Stephanie knew that he needed a healer to patch the nasty gash on his leg.

“We need help.” Stephanie informed her brother.

“The other Aurors are busy rounding up the civilian attackers. Rabastan, here, is the only Death Eater that was captured.” Harry tore the bottom of his robe and used it as a tourniquet for Ron’s leg. “And, the Healers…”

“Is it over?” Stephanie asked, surprised that it had all ended while she was with Rabastan. She didn’t feel like hearing about the fate of all the Healers again, since she already knew it was her fault.

“Yeah.” Harry nodded. He turned his attention back to Ron. “We should get you to Hogwarts. Hermione should be able to fix your leg pretty easily.”

Ron nodded and grimaced as Harry and Stephanie lifted him into the air. Per protocol, as soon as the hospital had been secured, Ignatius put up an anti-Apparition field, making sure that no one else could Apparate into the area. That also meant they could not Disapparate, either. So, they walked Ron down three flights of stairs and out the door of the hospital. Meanwhile, Stephanie attempted to keep her mind off the tragedy that had just occurred on Christmas Eve.


Once again, I'd like to thank ChannelingGinny for her wonderful beta skills! The next chapter won't be up until into the new year, so I hope everyone has a great Christmas!! I will try to post the next chapter as close to the 1st as possible, but it may be a few days. Don't forget to leave me feedback and let me know what you like and what you'd like changed!

Chapter Thirty-One: Veritaserum

“Will you please stop pacing? You are driving me absolutely mad.” Ginny yelled at Hermione with an anxious voice.

Hermione attempted a weak smile, but stopped pacing and slowly moved back to the couch where Neville and Ginny were waiting for Harry, Stephanie, and Ronald to return. “Sorry.”

Neville stood and met her at the corner of the couch. She wiped a newly formed streak of tears off her cheek as he pulled her into his chest, embracing her tightly. He laid his head in her hair and murmured quietly, rocking her back and forth in his arms. “We’re worried, too, Hermione. They’ll be fine.”

“Of course they will.” Ginny’s voice was reassuring now, as Hermione felt her friend’s hand rubbing her back.

How did it get to be this way? Hermione asked herself. She was now the witch sitting back waiting for word that her boyfriend had survived another night as an Auror, and he wasn’t officially given the title yet. It would only get worse as time went on, especially since the situation with Dedrick Hargrave and other Death Eaters was escalating.

There was only one reason Ron would be called to active duty on his few days off during the holiday season. He hadn’t had a day off in months and Kingsley promised her that she could spend some quality time with him. He would not break this promise easily; she knew and trusted that of the man she considered a close friend. So, Ron’s departure must mean that a Death Eater attack was either imminent or in progress.

And she was torn by her emotions about the situation. If an attack was in progress, many people, possibly civilians and muggles, would die. Hermione knew she should feel bad about that, but all she cared about was that Ron made it back to her safely. Of course she was almost as equally worried about Harry and Stephanie Potter, but she wasn’t sure if she could survive losing Ron. She could, Hermione knew, continue living if Ron died, but it would not be a happy life. The closer she and Ron grew in their relationship, the more this fear grew into an irrational obsession.

“They’ll be back before you know it.” Neville finally released her and she looked into his eyes. Hermione honestly missed his company; he was always so innocent.

She tried to smile again, and nodded her head in agreement.

“Now,” Ginny began, turning to sit down on the big comfortable fluffy chair next to the couch. “We’ve been curious. What’s going on out there?”

Hermione hesitated. She wasn’t sure how much information to share, so she decided to provide them with only a few details. Each word she spoke was deliberate and carefully thought out. “Harry and Ron spend all of their time at the Auror Training Facility. There have been several disappearances and murders, though this has been kept out of the papers. It is taking most of Kingsley’s energy to keep that information from the press and, honestly, I’m not sure how much longer the Ministry can keep it quiet.”

“What do you think is happening?” Ginny asked. It looked to Hermione as if Ginny hesitated in asking the question. No. Hermione shook her head at the thought. I must have imagined that. This anxiety is sure doing strange things to my head.

“They don’t know, but Death Eaters are gaining in strength and size. It is getting dangerous out there.” Hermione whispered. The conversation was turning in a dangerous direction; she hated keeping things from her friends, but she also knew that she couldn’t share with them. If she kept talking, Hermione knew she would blurt out the Ministry’s fears that the Death Eaters were developing an army to gain access to Stephanie. It was also hypothesized that Dedrick Hargrave was seeking world domination, the same aspiration Lord Voldemort once held. With Stephanie and Harry out of the way, it would almost be easy for him to gain the level of power Lord Voldemort had been unable to achieve. Dedrick was so much more manipulative than Voldemort, that this idea was both terrifying and possible. The world, both wizarding and muggle alike, depended on Harry’s and Stephanie’s survival. How could she keep that information from Neville and Ginny? But she had to, so she changed the subject.

“What’s been going on here at Hogwarts?” She asked, hoping that Ginny or Neville would have enough to say on the topic that they would forget about life outside the school. “Ginny, tell me more about what’s going on with Daniel Blaiser.”

This time, Hermione noticed Ginny look quickly at Neville before she responded. Hermione realized that she hadn’t imagined the hesitation just moments before. They, too, were keeping secrets from her, Harry, and Ron. All of them were bound by secrets they could not share with the others—what kind of damage were they causing their friendships? The repercussions of this knowledge were too horrible for Hermione to ponder, but she could not share her own secrets and, therefore, could not expect Ginny or Neville to share theirs. She felt torn inside.

“There’s not much to tell, really.” Ginny sighed, but didn’t take her eyes off Hermione. “We have just come to an understanding, that’s all.”

“Oh.” Hermione replied, knowing better than to press the issue. There had to be more that Ginny wasn’t sharing with her. Hermione could not think of one good reason why Ginny would suddenly hang around with any Slytherin students.

With that latest comment, Hermione realized they no longer had anything to talk about. Each was restricted by the secrets they held close. So, she collapsed onto the couch and waited in silence for any word about Ron.

*~*~*~*

“Let me see that!” David pulled the parchment from her hands. She sighed in frustration, knowing that David wasn’t intentionally trying to push her buttons. But the day had been pretty stressful and she was losing her patience.

It was Christmas Day and, because Ginny was spending all of her time with Harry Potter, Daniel felt it was his personal responsibility to keep watch over her. She still owed Daniel so much for all he had done for her, and as much as she cared for him it was nice to have some girl time, too. And because Ginny was preoccupied, Abby couldn’t spend any time with Lauren or Matty.

She had hoped to spend some alone time with Matty to explain the very special gift she had prepared for him. Ginny had given her the idea and had actually found someone to make it special for her. Because of the sensitivity of the item underneath the beautiful wrapping, she hadn’t wanted to write its significance or an explanation in the card that had accompanied the gift. So, all Matty knew was that she had given him an old ratty-looking diary. He was sure to be disappointed.

The gifts she had given Sammy, Lauren, and David had been much more generic. Lauren had wanted some potions to experiment with, David had asked for some Weasley’s Wizard Wheezes products, and Sammy wanted some books. But she felt increasingly drawn toward Matty, recently. Sammy had been her best friend since their very first day at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry, but Matty had an understanding of her that no one else could begin to fathom. And it bothered her that she couldn’t be open about her friendship with either Lauren or Matty.

But Daniel would be angry if he found out that she was friends with two Gryffindors. Daniel, himself, was socializing with Ginny Weasley, but Abby figured that Daniel was just using her in some way. He would do whatever he could to keep Abby safe, even threaten someone as influential as Ginny. Abby sometimes felt sorry for Ginny; she oftentimes looked so sad. But in all honesty, Abby was pleased to have someone know about her friendship with the Gryffindors. Ever since Ginny became involved in her protection, she had been able to spend a lot more time with Matty and Lauren. It was nice.

“I’ll take that.” Daniel pulled the parchment from David’s hand and sat down in the chair next to Abby.

They were in the Great Hall waiting for the Christmas feast to start. Everyone was there except Ginny and Professors Potter and Longbottom. Professor Potter’s brother and friends had left shortly after lunch, but Ginny hadn’t yet returned to her post as Abby’s protector. Daniel surprisingly understood and it was almost creepy.

“Come on, Daniel. What’s it say?” She asked, leaning over his arm to read the Christmas edition of the Evening Prophet. There had been nothing in the newspaper that morning, but each of them figured there hadn’t been enough time to get the article in that edition. They couldn’t even ask about what had happened because they weren’t supposed to know, and Abby was dying with curiosity.

“Why are you so curious all of a sudden?” Daniel eyed her suspiciously. “You’ve never taken an interest in current events before.”

“I’m not.” Abby crossed her arms and leaned back in her chair, attempting to appear as though she couldn’t care less about the news that had to be on the front page.

“Sure.” Daniel smiled knowingly and looked over towards her. “You know, don’t you?”

“Know what, D?” She asked innocently.

“Don’t give me that.” Daniel slammed the newspaper on the table, making her jump. His smile disappeared immediately and she knew his reaction didn’t mean anything good for her. “You’re expecting there to be news in the paper, Abigail. I saw your reaction this morning, too. You were out of bed last night, weren’t you?”

“I wasn’t.” Abby told him honestly and she hoped that he could read the truth in her eyes. His gaze was so piercing that she had to look away; she could feel her friends’ eyeing her with desire to intervene. But they knew better.

Abby felt Daniel’s grip on her chin as he squeezed and pulled her face so that she was forced to look at him. “Don’t lie to me, Abigail. Tell me how you expected this to happen!” He demanded as he thrust his finger towards the headline on the front of the Evening Prophet.


“I-I-I didn’t.” Abby had a difficult time speaking with Daniel’s grip on her chin. Tears sprang to her eyes as he pressed even harder. “You’re hurting me, D.”

“Stop, Daniel.” Matty’s voice was quiet, but firm. Abby cringed at his interference, knowing that it would only end badly for him.

“I’m fine.” She whispered, not daring to attempt the force it would take to look in his direction.

“This does not concern you, Finnigan!” Daniel spat in his direction. With his free hand, Daniel raised his wand towards Abby’s closest friend and it took all she had not to show her fear for Matty’s safety.

“You bring this to the dinner table and it does concern me.” Matty stood up and raised his own wand in defense. “Let her go, Blaiser.”

“Don’t.” Lauren whispered so quietly that Abby only heard because she was familiar with her friend’s voice. “It’ll be okay. Sit down, Matty.”

“You don’t want to go against me, little boy.” Daniel hissed, still not releasing Abby from his firm grip. Abby decided to take a chance and she moved only her eyes in Matty’s direction, pleading him to walk away. Abby knew all too well what Daniel would do to him and she wasn’t sure if she could handle it if Matty got hurt because of her.

Matty simply nodded and sat down.

“That’s what I thought.” Daniel laughed hoarsely and turned his attention back towards Abby, placing his wand back in his pocket. Then, he thrust a little vial into her hand. “Drink.”

“What is it?” She asked.

With his now free hand, he grabbed her hand and forced it to her mouth. “I will find out what you were up to last night, Abby. Drink or I will be forced to make you.”

“But that’s illegal!” Sammy squealed, realizing immediately what Daniel was asking Abby to drink. Abby, however, was too frazzled to fully comprehend what he was about to force into her system.

“What did I say?” Daniel boomed at the entire table. “This does not concern you. And I must say that you first years really do need to learn some respect.”

“No.” Abby whispered, defeated. She didn’t want Daniel to hurt her friends, so she would have to do as he asked. “I’ll drink it.”

“Good girl.” He released her chin and patted her head as she lifted the vial of liquid to her lips. It had a sweet taste as it flowed down her throat. Daniel just looked at her for a moment and then finally spoke. “Were you out of your bed last night?”

Abby didn’t have to lie to answer this question. “No.”

“Were your friends out of their beds?” His eyes narrowed, but he didn’t take his eyes off her. Her stomach dropped as she realized what he had given her.

She wanted to lie to him, but there was no possible way she could do so. He had forced her to drink the one potion that made it impossible to say anything but the honest truth.

Veritaserum.

“Yes.” She cringed as she said the words and attempted to look away, but Daniel placed his palm on her cheek and forced her to continue looking at him.

“What were they doing out of their beds, Abby?” His voice had a sweet undertone, as though he wasn’t forcing her to tell him everything. Would her friends ever forgive her for betraying them?

She fought against the potion as hard as she could, but it was no use. She had to tell Daniel Blaiser everything; in that moment, she truly hated him. How could he do this to her? “They were spying on Gregory Goyle, Theodore Nott, and Millicent Bullstrode.”

Daniel looked taken aback for a moment, but he composed himself before he asked the next question. “What do you mean, Abby? They went home for the holiday break.”

“No.” She whispered meekly. “They didn’t.”

“How did you know they were here?” Daniel prodded; his voice was terribly sweet with manipulation. Abby knew that he didn’t have to manipulate her while she was under the potion’s spell, but he did it anyway. Abby knew he was attempting to torment her friends, as well.

“I saw them.” Abby closed her eyes in disgust; she knew where this was going. He was going to force her to tell him about the map.

“How, Abigail?” He asked the expected follow-up question.

“Stop it!” David demanded urgently. “You have the information you need. She wasn’t out of bed, she didn’t lie to you!”

“Silence!” Daniel commanded without taking his eyes off Abby. “I will get to you, later. Now, Abby, how did you know they were in the castle?”

Once again, Abby fought against the potion and she felt it wane just a little. She took the opportunity while she could. “I’ll tell you everything if you let them be. This is about you and me, D.”

Daniel smiled at her and the gesture made Abby sick to her stomach. He patted her hand, which still held the vial of Veritaserum, and slowly lifted it towards her mouth. “You know that you have no choice, dear Abigail. But I will humor you. Drink.”

Abby drank from the vial again without complaint.

“Now, how did you know that Bullstrode, Goyle, and Nott were in the castle?” He asked more harshly this time, his eyes narrowing with suspicion.

“The map.” Abby muttered angrily. How could he do this to her? She loved him as much as she had loved her brother, but he was crossing the line.

“What map?” His face didn’t display any emotion at her disclosure.

“Marauder’s Map.” Abby answered and she heard a few sighs in frustration. The one person she wanted to look at was the one person she couldn’t allow herself to. Matty would be able to make her feel better, but Daniel would not tolerate that.

“Where did you ge-” Daniel began to ask, but the voice of Professor Longbottom could be heard.

Abby looked up and saw Professors Longbottom and Potter walk into the Great Hall with Ginny just ahead of them. Abby took the moment of distraction and stood up forcefully, her chair falling backwards. She ran out of the Great Hall and towards her bedroom. She was so angry with Daniel that she couldn’t focus on anything; the halls were a blur as tears ran down her cheeks.

Behind her, Abby could hear Ginny’s surprised question, “What’s wrong?”

But she didn’t stop to respond. She couldn’t believe Daniel had done that, he had broken all the trust she had once held in him. Abby no longer cared if she got sent home or had to suffer under his protection, there were only two things that mattered now: she had to make sure that her friends were kept safe from him and Daniel would never control her again. The rest were moot points.

Abby shook her head in disgust as she curled up under the covers on her bed. She couldn’t believe he had done that. He had crossed the line today.

Veritaserum.

*~*~*~*

He wanted to go after her, but he knew it was not practical. He looked up at Lauren as she placed her hand in his. She knew how worried he had been about Abby and she also understood that he would do anything for Abby.

It had been painful watching Abby fight against the Veritaserum that Daniel had forced her to drink. Matty had lost control for only one moment, but it was enough for Daniel to notice something was wrong. Would Daniel realize that Abby and Matty were more than just classmates? For everything they had shared, Matty sure hoped not.

“What’s wrong?” Ginny asked, hesitating to sit down at the table. She looked worried as Abby disappeared from sight.

“Nothing.” Daniel responded, eyeing the first years threateningly. If they told anyone what had just happened, Daniel would hurt them. Worse, he might hurt Abby. Matty could not risk that, and so he kept quiet.

“It doesn’t look like anything.” Professor Potter looked at Daniel with concern. Her eyebrows knitted together deep in thought and Matty wondered what she was thinking. Could the Professor know more than he and his friends thought? Probably, he realized.

But he was so sick to his stomach over what had just happened that he couldn’t eat. All he could do was play with his food and wait until Lauren was ready to leave the table. He couldn’t even risk talking with David and Sammy because of Daniel’s mood. Daniel was keeping an eye on each of them as they ate their dinner.

Finally, Lauren stood and asked if he wanted to get back to the dormitory. He nodded his head vigorously and quickly walked back to Gryffindor Tower.

“What do you think he’s going to do to her?” Matty blurted out once they were safely inside the common room. He looked at Lauren passionately, hoping for reassurances of some kind.

“Don’t worry, Matty.” Lauren’s voice shook, so he knew that she wasn’t as sure of herself as she was trying to sound. “Ginny won’t let anything happen to her. He claims he is doing all of this for her, so I doubt that he’ll really do anything to her. Suddenly her face lightened just a little as she reached into the pocket of her shirt and pulled something out.

“Lauren!” Matty was surprised that Lauren would even attempt such a move in front of Daniel, but he was glad she had. She had stolen the copy of the Evening Prophet that Daniel had confiscated from David.

“Shh.” Lauren smiled slyly. “Let’s read it.”

And he read it silently.


“Oh my goodness.” Lauren breathed as she finished reading the article. “Professor Potter had to go help at St. Mungo’s.”

“They are gaining in strength. Do you think they’ll really come after Abby?” Matty asked, getting even more afraid for Abby with each passing moment.

“Who knows?” Lauren shrugged. “But we have to be ready for whatever happens. We need more training from Professor Potter.”

“Maybe Ginny will help, too.” Matty offered, knowing he would not sleep until Abby was safe. He would make sure that she was not harmed in any way.

“Of course she will.” Lauren nodded. Matty stood up and started walking towards the stairs that would lead him to his bedroom. “Where are you going?”

“I want to lie down for a little bit.” He responded. “Merry Christmas, Lauren.”

“She’ll be fine.” Lauren smiled at him knowingly. “Trust me.”

He just nodded and walked up the stairs to his dorm room. He bounced onto his bed and removed the tattered journal Abby had given him for Christmas. He was confused by the gift, but knew that she meant well. He opened the card and read it again:

Merry Christmas, Matty! I know this isn’t much and not what you wanted, but I promise to explain soon.

He folded the card again and placed it back inside its envelope. Then he opened the journal and was surprised to find writing on the first page. It had been blank when he looked through it briefly earlier that morning.


He didn’t know what to think. This was weird. Did Abby write that? Matty closed the journal and flipped it around, looking at it from all angles. Then he opened it up again and grabbed the quill that was sitting on his bedside table. He wrote one quick word.


A few moments passed and writing started to appear underneath his question. It was mind-boggling to think that he would have this secret way to communicate with Abigail Seabold, his best friend.


And he told her about the article he had just read. They talked well into the night about what was going on and what they could do. Finally, Matty closed the diary and put his hands behind his head. Of course Abby blamed herself for what happened in the Great Hall. He would have to correct that immediately, and then he would have to figure out how to get Daniel off her back. She needed a break from Daniel’s possessiveness. How to do that, though? That was the question.


Hey everyone! Sorry for the delay in posting a new chapter! But life really has gotten hectic. Things should slow down now that the holidays are over. We'll see...but I do have some big plans for the next few chapters, so they should be pretty regular. Thanks to ChannelingGinny for being my wonderful beta! And don't forget to put feedback on the feedback thread! Thanks everyone!

Chapter Thirty-Two: Spells and Letters

“The art of nonverbal spells was a skill that I absolutely despised learning.” Stephanie explained to her 4th year students. School had been in session for a little over a week and it had been close to three weeks since the incident at St. Mungo’s. “But it is a skill that is highly useful when you are dueling with a talented witch or wizard.”

She hadn’t spoken about the attack very much with anyone except Neville, nor did she have any desire to do so. According to Kingsley, the Death Eaters did tremendous damage in the area of Healers, and he was attempting to find some less experienced witches and wizards to work as Healers, such as Madame Pomfrey. The Ministry was working diligently to prepare for another wave of attacks; the only reason for the massacre they could agree on was that the Death Eaters didn’t want anyone to be saved at the conclusion of their next attack.

But Stephanie knew the Death Eaters, Dedrick Hargrave specifically, didn’t care about whether any of their victims survived an attack. No amount of Healers would save anyone’s life if Dedrick decided to murder them. Dedrick had one person in mind when he launched the attack on Christmas Eve, revenge possibly, for someone who had been saved by Healers several times in the past: Stephanie Annabelle Potter.

Maybe it was selfish to think that everything revolved around her, but nothing else made sense. And she hadn’t even talked about this theory with Neville because she didn’t want to worry him or anyone else unnecessarily. Dedrick would summon her, the anticipation was eating at her, slowly driving her mad, and she would go to him. As much as she didn’t want to ask for Ginny’s, Neville’s, or Daniel Blaiser’s help, she knew that she must; other students’ lives were on the line if she failed. Stephanie would do anything for her students, even the ones that hated her.

Since she had to put her friends in danger, she wouldn’t allow them to see how hopeless the situation appeared. Sure, she was able to defeat Rabastan Lestrange on her own, but there was no way she could handle a multiple person attack, which was what Dedrick was most likely planning. There would be no boasting this time, just a quick and smooth death.

Of course there was always a chance at survival. She would always remain optimistic, but she also had to be realistic. Dedrick knew her skills better than anyone else as she had been forced to spend a torturous amount of time with him while she had been involved with his brother, Kieran. And this involvement led to his death, which is what fueled Dedrick’s passion for eliminating Stephanie.

So, she would not worry her friends until the time came. Ginny and Neville had been practicing their dueling skills, which was quite humorous to watch at times because they liked to push each other’s limits. Stephanie was there to step in if things got too heated, but they rarely allowed it to get that far. Each enjoyed their time while realizing the seriousness of the situation. They were improving each day.

And she had been busy tutoring the first years. After the attack on St. Mungo’s, Matty Finnigan and Lauren Graham came to her requesting more practice time and she had immediately obliged them. Abigail Seabold was in almost as much danger as Stephanie was, and she wanted them to be as prepared as they could be. They were now practicing three nights a week instead of just one afternoon. Ginny’s presence, which was the only reason all five of the younger students had been able to practice so often, had a positive effect on Abby’s demeanor; she seemed so much happier than when she had been isolated with Daniel and his friends.

But something strange had happened between Daniel and Abby that she couldn’t place. She attempted to ask the first years about it, but none of them would say anything. They were obviously fearful for what Daniel would do to Abby if they said anything, despite her attempt to reassure them that she wouldn’t allow anything bad to happen to their friend. Abby wouldn’t even tell Ginny what had occurred, though Ginny, too, noticed the change.

Abby was no longer as obedient as she once was. After her outburst at the meal on Christmas Day, students reported a yelling match coming from Abby’s room. By the time Ginny got there, however, it was over. Since then, Abby only allowed Ginny to follow her, which Daniel had surprisingly obliged to. Stephanie was really intrigued to learn what had happened to strengthen Abby’s confidence.

After a couple days of review, she was ready to move the 4th years to a very difficult task. It was one that she had despised while she was growing up, but the skill truly helped her in tight situations. Now, she rarely spoke any spell out loud unless she wanted someone to know what she was about to do.

“The Dark Lord went to extremes to make me learn this skill by casting the Cruciatus Curse on me whenever I spoke a spell out loud.” Stephanie smiled as worried looks crossed the faces of several of her students, but one in particular smiled cruelly. “I will not go to such extremes, but it is something that will prove to be useful in battle should any of you have the unfortunate experience.”

“How will you teach us, then?” Daniel crossed his arms over his chest and looked smug about his question. “For motivation, I mean.”

“With your own sheer desire to learn, Mr. Blaiser.” Stephanie responded honestly, but attempted to curb his confidence.

Ever since she had Ginny request Daniel’s assistance, he felt the need to be defiant in her classes. But as much as she needed Daniel’s help in keeping Abby Seabold and, unknowingly to him, her friends safe, she would not allow Daniel to disrespect her in front of the other students.

“What if I don’t need to learn nonverbal spells?” Craig Miller asked snidely. He and his friends had arrogant expressions and looked like they were enjoying putting her on the spot. Stephanie just smiled in return.

“Do you think you are good enough in battle to defend yourself against spells you don’t know are coming?” She asked calmly. “When they are shooting spells at you in quick succession?”

“Of course I am.” Craig responded confidently.

“Then you wouldn’t mind coming up to the front of the class.” Stephanie stated matter-of-factly, pulling her wand out of her robes and waving it nonchalantly in the air.

“What? You are going to attack a student?” Daniel’s voice emulated false concern, but his tone also held a hidden threat coupled with amusement. Stephanie merely nodded in his direction to acknowledge that he had spoken. “We are all witnesses.”

“Would you please come up here so I can demonstrate, Mr. Miller?” Stephanie tried asking as politely as she could even though her patience was being tested. She wasn’t going to harm a single hair on Craig’s head.

Craig stood and strutted self-assuredly towards the front of the classroom. Stephanie waited patiently as several of the girls giggled as Craig walked past them; his wand was dangling from his hand as his arm hung at his side. She knew it would be very easy to defeat this boy, and it made her even more grateful that Ginny was now protecting Abby Seabold. He was so cocky that it made him incompetent, and Stephanie suppressed her amusement.

“Now, poise yourself for battle, Mr. Miller, and attempt to disarm me.” Stephanie instructed her student as the others leaned forward in their chairs with interest. This was the first time she had ever demonstrated on a student, but her prey was more than capable of defending himself and handling the situation.

Craig stared at her for a moment and then quickly attempted to cast a spell on her, “Expel-”

Before he could even form the third syllable, Stephanie had already put up her defensive shield. He shook his head in disgust as his spell bounced off the shield and disappeared.

“That’s not fair; you knew what spell I was going to use and when it was coming.” He complained. “You knew how to defend yourself.”

“Alright, Mr. Miller. That is fair. You can choose the spell and I will defend myself without the use of my protection shield.” She compromised with him and suppressed another laugh. It wasn’t supposed to be fair, but leave it up to Craig Miller to point out the obvious. She didn’t even have to look at Daniel to know that he was amused, thinking that he could defeat her much easier than his friend, Craig. That’s why she hadn’t chosen him for this little experiment—she had other plans for him.

As soon as she finished her sentence, Craig’s lips started to move, “Duro!” But she was not taken by surprise and easily deflected the spell with a quick wave of her wand. She was, however, impressed by her student’s choice in spells. In addition, however, Stephanie inconspicuously pointed her wand towards Daniel and silently cast a spell in his direction.

“Very nice try, Craig.” Stephanie praised him, but he didn’t want to hear it. He raised his hand to dismiss her comment and stormed back to his seat, mumbling something that Stephanie couldn’t hear under his breath. A couple of students giggled as he walked by.

“You still knew it was coming.” Fred McAdams pointed out as Craig placed his head on the table.

“That is what I’m trying to teach you.” Stephanie nodded at the Slytherin. “Your opponent always knows what is coming when you verbalize your spells.”

Then the giggles started, as students nearby noticed the second nonverbal spell she had cast. She hadn’t meant to use this lesson to embarrass him, but she was sure it would benefit him to see how effective nonverbal spells could be.

“What do you want?” Daniel asked as the students started to look at him. One of the female students handed him a mirror and he took a sharp breath of air. He looked at Stephanie in fury, breathing deeply and attempting to control his temper. “What did you do to me?”

“Like I said before, your opponent can’t know what is coming if you don’t tell him or her.” Stephanie reminded him and waved her wand in his direction again. His flamingly bright pink hair returned to its natural shade. She turned to walk back to the front of the classroom and separate the students into pairs.

Stephanie knew it was coming before she heard the word; she heard the scraping of the chair as it was forced back quickly, the rush of the wind as the student raised his wand rapidly, and the intake of breath as he gained the strength needed to cast the spell.

“Evanesco.” So, Stephanie had enough time to stop the spell before it could escape the caster’s wand.

“SILENCIO!” She bellowed, pointing her wand towards Daniel Blaiser. She followed her verbalized spell quickly with a disarming one and the student’s wand flew across the room.

Each of her students wore a stunned expression as she raced towards Daniel. Without looking at her, Stephanie addressed Amber. “Amber, please confiscate Mr. Blaiser’s wand.”

The girl quickly rose from her seat and crossed the room to retrieve the wand, but Stephanie wasn’t paying attention. She merely stared in the self-righteous face of Daniel Blaiser, trying to determine what he was thinking. He had attacked a professor in the classroom, what did he think he was going to accomplish? For the first time since she accepted the position as Defense Against the Dark Arts professor, she felt the strong desire to utilize Legilimency. She took a deep breath and squeezed her wand deliberately, trying to calm herself down before she did something she would regret later.

“What do you think you are doing, Mr. Blaiser?” Stephanie asked through gritted teeth, fully aware that every single eye in the room was on her. She couldn’t afford to lose her temper on a student.

“You were trying to show us the benefits of nonverbal spells, but I, personally, wasn’t getting anything out of your lesson, professor.” Daniel smiled up at her, which angered her even more. Stephanie was very close to utilizing a banned spell on this student and she knew she had to be careful. She could not risk all Ginny had worked for and she could not risk losing her job.

“You attacked a professor, Daniel.” Stephanie spoke slowly, attempting unsuccessfully to calm down. “I do not care about your motives. Five-hundred points from Slytherin, and, Daniel, you will speak with Professor Slughorn about detention.”

Daniel’s voice dropped to a whisper only loud enough for her to hear, but his expression did not darken with the tone of his voice. He was still very proud of himself, which made Stephanie sick to her stomach. As he spoke, he placed his hand over hers. “Don’t forget our deal, Professor Potter.”

She just stared at him in disbelief. The sacrifice wasn’t worth dealing with his attitude. He was overconfident in his abilities and his worth to her. Stephanie knew she was going to lose his support, but it was something she had to do. Daniel Blaiser could not treat a professor with such disrespect, or else the other students would begin to follow his example. She just wouldn’t sleep if it meant that she had to keep watch over the first years. They were her responsibility, anyway, not Daniel’s.

“Detention, Mr. Blaiser.” Stephanie commanded without regret. “You should consider yourself lucky that you are not being expelled, though I cannot guarantee Professor McGonagall’s decision when she learns of your behavior.”

Daniel’s expression faltered in his surprise only momentarily, but it was enough for her to notice. He was livid with Stephanie’s refusal to back down; he had never had anyone stand up to him before, with the exception of Abby. Ginny had attempted, but failed. But she had authority over Daniel and so his options were limited.

Stephanie knew that she hadn’t heard the last from him, but she would worry about his reaction later. At least Ginny should be able to return to Gryffindor, though the students still wouldn’t speak to her there. Stephanie felt horrible for everything she had put Ginny through, but her friend had offered and getting close to Daniel wasn’t something she could do. Now the effort appeared to be all for nothing.

“Class dismissed.” Stephanie muttered as she turned back to collect papers from her desk. She needed to get out of the room before she lost her control. Quietly, the class packed up its things in unison and slowly made its way out the door.

“Professor?” Amber slowly approached her, placing Daniel’s wand on her desk. “Are you alright, professor?”

Stephanie took a deep breath as she finished gathering the papers that needed to be graded and returned to the seventh years. “Not now, Amber.”

“Alright.” Amber’s soft voice responded and Stephanie could hear the student quickly make her way out of the classroom.

Stephanie slowly followed behind, making her way towards the teachers’ lounge. The room was empty because the rest of the professors were still in class; she had released her students twenty minutes before class was supposed to end and her teacher’s preparation period would begin.

Without much effort, she was able to expel the incident with Daniel out of her mind and focus on grading the papers she had been putting off. Before she knew it, the door was banging open and Neville came rushing in.

“Are you alright?” He gasped between breaths and she would have laughed at the sight if she wasn’t in such a horrible mood. “I…” He sucked in a deep breath again. “Heard…” Neville reached for his side as he apparently felt shooting pains from the exertion of running. “Daniel…Blaiser attacked you in class.”

“I’m fine.” Stephanie assured him and then looked at her watch as Neville wrapped her in a tight embrace. “How did you hear about it so quickly? Class just got out two minutes ago.”

“Amber Zacharias came to the greenhouses and told me what happened. I came as soon as class got over.” His breath was slowly returning but he was far from being calm. He stroked her hair without releasing her.

“No, it’s okay.” She said. “He only tried to vanish me, but he’s not as talented as he thinks he is. I think our agreement is null and void, though.”

“Don’t worry about that.” Neville whispered in her ear. “We’ll take care of everything. Honestly, I never really thought we needed him.”

“But, Ginny…” Stephanie admitted her true concern. Ginny had worked so hard and sacrificed so much for her and she felt guilty for ruining all of that work in just a few minutes. She really did mess everything up, didn’t she?

“Ginny’s a big girl, Stephanie.” He chuckled lightly in her ear, laughing as he realized where her thoughts were headed. There was so much passion in his voice that it almost brought Stephanie to tears. She loved him so much and couldn’t believe how long it had taken to realize it. “She’ll be fine. Daniel has no right to treat you or anyone else that way.”

“But she’s worked so hard.” Stephanie pointed out.

“Do you really think Ginny would have allowed Daniel to treat her that way if he attempted to use a spell on her in manipulation? She wouldn’t and she wouldn’t expect you to, either. He needs to learn that he’s not in control, we are.” He spoke with brutal honesty and Stephanie couldn’t find an argument to refute him. Neville was absolutely correct; Ginny wouldn’t fault her for destroying the alliance she had only begun to create with the Slytherin.

“That’s what I thought.” Neville laughed at her silence, but his expression quickly turned solemn again. “You’re sure you’re alright?”

Stephanie nodded as the door to the teacher’s lounge opened again and Ancelin Mallard, the new Transfiguration professor came in. Stephanie sat up so that she leaned into Neville’s chest as the professor grunted, slammed a stack of papers on the table, and collapsed into a chair.

“What’s wrong, Ancelin?” She asked curiously.

“Perfect scores. I can’t believe it.” Ancelin shook hear head in disbelief. “Three students received perfect scores on the written exam I gave this morning. It’s impossible; I created it too difficult for any student to receive a perfect score, let alone those three second year seventh years.”

“Who is it?” Neville raised an eyebrow.

“Theodore Nott, Millicent Bullstrode, and Gregory Goyle.” Ancelin listed off the names without looking at their exams and Stephanie let a snort escape as she tried to hold in her laughter.

“The other two are a possibility, but Goyle has trouble dressing in the morning let alone passing an exam.” Stephanie replied. “How did they cheat?”

“That’s the problem.” Ancelin sighed. “I don’t understand how they could have. When I got back from the holiday break, my classroom was trashed. I’d assumed that several students had gone through the room looking for a copy of the exam, but it wasn’t in there. It had been in my living quarters under lock and key. And these three students weren’t even at the school over the break. I know they cheated, but I can’t prove it.”

“Don’t worry, Ancelin.” Neville smiled and reached over to pat the professor on the hand. “They aren’t the brightest bunch of students, they’ll give you cause to confront them at some point.”

“I know, but it’s just so frustrating.” She sighed, but leaned back in her chair as she accepted that there was nothing she could do to punish the three students who had clearly cheated on the exam.

“Well, I should get to my next class.” Neville reluctantly stood, but didn’t let go of Stephanie’s hand. “Are you sure you’re alright?”

“I’m fine.” Stephanie smiled to reassure him that she was. “See you at lunch?”

“Of course.” He returned her smile and leaned down to kiss her lightly before he turned and left the teachers’ lounge. Stephanie sighed as she watched the man she loved walk out of the room.

*~*~*~*

“I can’t believe that old hag!” Daniel slammed his fist into the wall and heard the bone crack as it made contact with the concrete, but he didn’t feel a thing.

“What’d you get?” Rachel asked without looking up from her nails; she was painting them a deep shade of black.

“Three weeks of nightly detention with that loser Hagrid, not Slughorn. McGonagall had the audacity to threaten me with expulsion.” He was Daniel Blaiser; how dare anyone force him to do the work of servants and house elves? “Professor Potter is going to pay for what she did in class.”

“You kind of had it coming, mate.” Fred replied. “I mean, you did attack her in front of the entire class.”

In an instant that Daniel couldn’t even remember, Fred was flying through the air and landing on the ground with a grunt. “Really, you think I deserved it?”

“No.” Fred’s word came out in a hoarse whisper as he tried to suck the air back into his lungs. “What she did was uncalled for.”

“That’s what I thought.” Daniel looked around the common room. “Where’s Weasley?”

“Still in the Great Hall stuffing her face, last time I saw her.” Rachel spat, now painting her toenails.

“At least she eats, Sorenson. You could use a little meat on your bones, too. And maybe then you could get a date or two.” Corey lightly punched her on the shoulder.

“Don’t touch me!” Rachel hissed and stormed out of the room. She was jealous by the amount of time that Daniel spent with Ginny Weasley and she never attempted to hide it, though she didn’t think of him romantically. At least, he hoped she didn’t like him that way. How disgusting.

“She should be back soon.” Craig informed him. “Ginny asked whether you still wanted her around after what happened this morning in Defense Against the Dark Arts and I told her that she should still assume her post unless you tell her differently.”

“Good.” Daniel acknowledged by nodding his head. “I need to lie down for awhile before practice. Come get me when she gets back.”

And he quickly made his way towards his dorm room. It had been a long day and he couldn’t wait until it was over. Ginny had oftentimes defied his commands, but she was easily put back in her place. She was stubborn but knew what her role was. So, only one other person had challenged him and it was something he wasn’t used to. Potter would pay for what she did, but his thoughts immediately returned to the night Abby had made him proud.

He would never tell her, though. The night he had used Veritaserum on her was the night he had pushed her too far, and he had known that even before he forced her to drink it. She had screamed at him for almost half an hour about how he couldn’t order her around anymore; Abby would allow Ginny, and only Ginny, to provide security from then on. Otherwise, she wouldn’t listen or speak to him anymore. And she had been honest when she told him she didn’t care if she got sent home. He was also never to threaten any other first years because of her.

Honestly, her sheer stubbornness made him prouder of her than he had ever been. Daniel had much more respect for her because of her defiance, but she was the only one that could be allowed to do so. And so he had given in to her demands, without making it look obvious, of course. She had been happy with the progress she made that night and he had been equally pleased with her increased compliance, despite the fact that he had confiscated the Marauder’s Map. She thought she was in charge now and Daniel had to laugh at how wrong she was. But he would let her believe it if the thought made her happy.

He stopped when he noticed a manila envelope sitting neatly on his bed. His eyes narrowed in suspicion as he slowly approached the package; his name was written neatly across the front. Two envelopes, one smaller than the other, fell out of the package when he opened it.

Each one had a different name written on the front. He first picked up the larger one, the one without his name and read the front: Stephanie Potter. He tried to open it, but received a sharp shock as his finger slid under the flap.

“Ouch.” He dropped the envelope and placed the finger in his mouth for a moment. Then he picked up the envelope with his name on the front and opened it slowly.

The letter was short, but informative. At first, he thought it was a prank, but he realized that none of his friends would dare to send something like this as a joke. Enclosed in the letter was a single picture. When he noticed the picture, he lost his control. How dare she put Abby’s life at risk? He thought to himself as his body began to shake in anger and pure hatred for his Defense Against the Dark Arts professor. She was going to regret the day she ever crossed Daniel Blaiser.

He grabbed his wand and clutched the letter and attached photograph, quickly stuffing the letter addressed to his professor into his back pocket, and ran from his room.

“What’s going on?” Tom asked as he ran past his friends and headed towards the door.

“I am going to kill Professor Potter.” He admitted as he stormed out of the Slytherin common room. He was going to find Stephanie Potter and do what he should have done at the beginning of the school year. He was deadly serious when he told Tom that he was going to murder her; she needed to die if Abby was ever going to be safe.


Here is the next chapter! I absolutely love this one and I really enjoyed writing it. We are seeing Daniel's true, honest character and Stephanie's determination and internal struggles. I really do enjoy the cliff hangers I leave you with and I hope they leave you wanting more! Please review and enjoy!!

Chapter Thirty-Three: Ultimatum

“Stop talking.” Ginny interrupted her friend and raised her hands in frustration. She was irritated with the fact that Stephanie always blamed herself for everything bad that happened. She had heard about the altercation between Stephanie and Daniel Blaiser even before Stephanie could spare a moment to pull her to the side and talk about it.

“But I really am sorry, Ginny.” Stephanie apologized for what seemed to be the hundredth time.

Ginny just rolled her eyes in response. “Craig told me that Daniel hasn’t said anything about releasing me from duty, so as far as we know, our deal is still in effect.”

“Even if he tells Ginny to shove off, it isn’t the end of the world.” Neville attempted to reassure Stephanie, too. “We always have options.”

The three of them were in Stephanie’s quarters; Ginny and Neville were watching Stephanie pace around the room as they deliberated over the incident that occurred that morning. By the end of that class period, the entire school was talking about what had happened. Most of the students were excited to see that someone had stood up against Daniel, even though it was a professor, but a few blamed Stephanie for what happened (though those students were primarily Slytherins).

Ginny had gotten sick to her stomach at the comments made by the Slytherin students, even though she could see the fear in some of their eyes; she knew that Daniel demanded the others in his House support him no matter what had actually happened. Daniel, however, hadn’t made an appearance at either lunch or dinner, and Ginny wondered what he was up to. Was he shamed into hiding? That didn’t sound like him, but you never know how people will react.

“But, speaking of Daniel,” Ginny looked at the clock on the wall and stood. “I should probably get back. They’ll be wondering where I am.”

“You really don’t have to.” Stephanie told her again.

“I know.” Ginny smiled at her friend’s concern. It was difficult working with Daniel each day, but it was nothing compared to what Stephanie had suffered while Ginny had led a relatively normal childhood. She owed Stephanie at least that much.

Just then, there was a loud knock on the door and Ginny stopped. Stephanie was closest to the door and she turned to answer it.

“Are you expecting anyone?” Neville asked.

“It’s probably just one of my students.” Stephanie replied over her shoulder and opened the door. But before Stephanie could react to the person behind the door, a spell hit her square in the chest.

“Stupefy.” A male voice said calmly as Stephanie flew backwards and landed on the ground. Ginny had her wand out in a quick moment, but Neville was already ahead of her.

“Levicorpus!” Neville shouted in the direction of the door and scowled as he realized who had attacked Stephanie. “Daniel Blaiser, what do you think you are doing?”

The spell caused Daniel to rise into the air and dangle upside down. Ginny barely listened to their conversation as she rushed to Stephanie’s side. Her friend was lying on the ground, unconscious. She waved her wand over Stephanie’s body and muttered, “Rennervate.” Stephanie slowly opened her eyes as the counter-spell allowed her to regain consciousness.

“What happened?” She asked weakly, sitting up and rubbing the spot on her chest where Daniel’s spell had hit.

“I don’t know.” Ginny replied as she gently stroked Stephanie’s forehead while looking spitefully in Daniel’s direction.

“Put me down!” Daniel hissed through his teeth. Neville had confiscated Daniel’s wand and continued to question him.

“You better tell me why you just attacked Professor Potter, Mr. Blaiser.” Neville didn’t take his eyes off the student and Ginny knew he was barely controlling his temper. He kept taking in deep breaths in an attempt to calm himself down.

“She,” Daniel pointed in Stephanie’s direction, “is going to get Abby killed. I have every right to protect her and will do everything in my power to make sure she is safe. Potter is going to die.”

“What are you talking about?” Ginny asked, standing upright and walking closer to Daniel.

“I have been trying to protect her, why do you think I would kill her?” Stephanie asked, standing up and slowly walking towards them as Ginny had just done.

“Stay where you are.” Neville demanded, looking away from Daniel for the first time. Stephanie didn’t say anything and just kept walking. Ginny saw him sigh in defeat at Stephanie’s stubbornness. She wished Stephanie would listen to them just once, but she knew that wouldn’t to happen tonight.

“Here.” Daniel started to reach up into his pocket, but Neville interrupted him.

“Don’t move, Blaiser.” He demanded threateningly, waving his wand forcefully at the upside down student. “Or I swear I will do something I shouldn’t.”

“Calm down.” Daniel huffed, attempting to reach into his pocket again. “I’m just getting a letter from my pocket.”

Neville eyed the boy suspiciously, but allowed him to continue. Ginny watched as Daniel skillfully pulled himself up and took several envelopes from his pocket.

“Would you mind letting me down?” Daniel sneered.

“No.” Ginny and Neville replied at the same time. If Stephanie’s actions during Defense Against the Dark Arts that morning didn’t, Daniel’s actions now would end their alliance. He would most likely be expelled, anyway, so there was no longer any reason to put up her obedient façade.

“Let him down.” Stephanie replied softly, looking at Daniel curiously. Neville just stared at Stephanie disbelievingly.

Neville shook his head and it looked like it was hard work for him to form the words. “Stephanie, you can’t be serious.”

“Put him down.” Stephanie repeated and Neville couldn’t respond. Ginny wondered why Stephanie was being so reasonable after just being attacked by a student, but she didn’t say anything. She, too, was curious about the letter Daniel had offered.

After another reassuring nod from Stephanie, Neville finally decided that it was safe to release the spell. Daniel dropped a little more harshly than was absolutely necessary, but he didn’t say a word. Instead, he held the first envelope out to Stephanie. She reached to take it from him; Neville stood poised and ready for attack if Daniel decided to make a move. Ginny was more relaxed because Daniel no longer had his wand—there wasn’t much damage he could do without his magic.

“Read it.” Daniel instructed bitterly, eyeing Stephanie with pure hatred. Stephanie nodded and read the letter aloud.

“Where’s the picture?” Ginny asked, looking at Daniel. His eyes never left Stephanie as she read the letter. They narrowed in anger the deeper into the letter she went, but he did not falter. Ginny understood why he was so irate, but it didn’t excuse the fact that he had attacked Stephanie.

“Right here.” Stephanie pulled the picture out of the envelope and handed it to Ginny. The picture depicted Abby brushing her teeth in the girl’s bathroom. Who took this? Ginny wondered. Abby had to notice someone that close to her.

“Where’s Stephanie’s letter?” Neville demanded. His lips were pursed and his eyebrows were knitted together. Ginny recognized the worried expression because she felt the same. What information did Dedrick want from Stephanie?

“Here.” Daniel handed Neville the second letter. “I tried to open it, but there’s a spell on it. She needs to open it.”

Stephanie took the envelope and opened it without incident. She silently read the first part of the letter before Neville gently took it from her shaking hands. Her expression was one of shock and Ginny became extremely intrigued. What is it? Ginny asked herself and waited for Neville to read it aloud.

After a moment of silence, he began.


The four of them were silent for a moment as they processed what they just heard. Ginny looked at the faces of each of them and saw the same shock that must have been displayed on her own face. Dedrick was no longer threatening only Stephanie, but the younger students as well. He had picked the object of his intimidation carefully, knowing that Daniel would protect Abby until the day he died.

“What do we do?” Ginny whispered, breaking the silence. They obviously couldn’t share the incantation with Dedrick—it was too dangerous of a spell. But they also couldn’t ignore the threat and risk Abby’s death. Should we tell Abby about the threat on her life? Ginny shook her head. No. There is no need to worry her.

“You tell him!” Daniel stepped forward and leaned closer to Ginny, invading her personal space. She fought the urge to step backwards, refusing to show him any sign of weakness. “There is no other option.”

“It’s not that simple.” Neville responded, placing his hand on Daniel’s chest and pushing him backwards. “And if you don’t calm down, I will gladly restrain you.”

“Go ahead.” Daniel lifted his head arrogantly. “And you will be hearing from my father. You cannot lawfully restrain a student, no matter the provocation.”

“Watch me.” Neville stepped forward aggressively and Ginny placed herself between them. They weren’t going to accomplish anything with those two bickering constantly, though she completely agreed with Neville. Daniel should be locked up. He didn’t have a say in how this matter would be decided, no matter how much danger he thought Abby was in. This was none of his business.

“Stop it.” Stephanie responded dismissively. She ran her fingers through her hair and looked at Neville thoughtfully. Ginny was surprised at how calmly Stephanie was reacting to the letter. “I don’t know what we are doing yet.”

Daniel crossed his arms over his chest and narrowed his eyes. “If you cared about her at all, you wouldn’t even have to think about it. Tell him and she stays alive. Period.”

“You don’t know the whole story, so stay out of it Daniel.” Ginny warned him. They weren’t about to share the entire story with this boy who was only involved because he, for some reason, felt compelled to protect an innocent first year student. “She won’t even share the spell with the Aurors, so how could she tell a Death Eater. It’s wrong.”

Daniel glared at her for a moment before he responded, speaking through gritted teeth. “If she doesn’t tell him what he needs to know, I will either force the information from her or make sure she discloses what she knows. Abby is my only priority, even if she is not yours. She will remain safe; that is my guarantee.”

“No one has made any decision, yet, Mr. Blaiser.” Neville said harshly. “He isn’t going to hurt Abby; there is no possible way he could get close enough now that we know she is being watched.”

“Like what you say should matter.” Daniel muttered in response, shaking his head in disbelief and anger. “You obviously have only one thing on your mind.”

“You are out of line, Blaiser.” Neville stepped forward again and Ginny gripped her wand, ready to intervene if he lost control. “I will not warn you again. If you can’t control yourself, I will be happy to assist you.”

“Stop it.” Stephanie demanded again, rubbing her face with both of her hands. She was clearly deep in thought about what needed to be done. She turned to Daniel and spoke softly. “Daniel, my main priority is the safety of my students. I will do what needs to be done to protect them. But I can’t make this decision alone because it would affect the safety of the Aurors, as well.”

Stephanie paused and then looked at Ginny and Neville. “I really don’t want to bring Harry into this, but I think it’s time. This is much bigger than we originally thought. Dedrick is no longer threatening me; he is threatening students and the safety of both the wizarding and muggle worlds. We can’t handle this by ourselves.”

“He’s going to be mad we kept this from him.” Ginny pointed out seriously, but with a hint of amusement in her voice. It served him right for keeping so much from them, even though he had been instructed to keep the information secret. While he had been at Hogwarts for Christmas, they had discussed the amount of secrets they were keeping from each other. Harry couldn’t understand why Ginny would keep anything from him, but none of the secrets she held were hers to share.

“Well, he’ll just have to deal with it.” Stephanie shrugged as she walked towards her bedside table. “I didn’t want him to be placed in anymore danger than he already is, but Dedrick made this unavoidable.”

Ginny watched as Stephanie pulled out the mirror Harry had given her—Harry and Stephanie had been using them to communicate frequently since Harry couldn’t get away to visit. Stephanie had even let Ginny use the mirror quite often so that she didn’t lose her mind from missing Harry.

After a few moments of looking into the mirror, Stephanie started speaking to what appeared to be her own reflection. “Harry, I need to meet with you. It’s somewhat of an emergency.”

“What’s going on? Are you alright?” Harry’s worried voice could barely be heard from where Ginny was standing.

“I’m fine.” Stephanie reassured him, but continued quickly before Harry could interrupt. “But I need to talk to you. Can you get away for a few minutes?”

“Yes.” Harry responded without hesitation. “What do you need from me?”

“Nothing right now.” Stephanie instructed him. “But I also need to see Kingsley, Ignatius, and Ron. We will be at the Auror Training Facility in twenty minutes.”

“We’ll be expecting you.” Harry said.

With that, Stephanie placed the mirror back in its spot in the drawer of the bedside table and walked briskly towards the door.

“Let’s go.” She said.

“Where are we going?” Ginny asked. She was confused because they should have been able to use the Floo Network through the fireplace in Stephanie’s room. But Stephanie was not heading in that direction.

“We have to notify Minerva.” Stephanie responded without looking back. Ginny and Neville nodded, quickly following behind and ignoring Daniel. He could be dealt with when they returned—he was not a threat to students, just Stephanie.

As they were almost out the door, Stephanie stopped in her tracks and turned towards Daniel. “Are you coming?” She asked.

“He can’t come with us!” Neville demanded, looking at Stephanie as though she had just lost her mind.

“Of course he can.” Stephanie said softly. “This involves him just as much as it involves the rest of us. He needs to know what is going on.”

“Fine.” Neville grunted, looking at Daniel in warning. “But if you place one finger out of line, I will make sure that Stephanie presses charges for assaulting her. Do you understand me?”

“Whatever.” Daniel smiled cunningly at the threat. It was clear that he was amused by Neville’s attempt at intimidation, though Ginny had to admit that Neville made her nervous when he thought one of his friends was in danger. She would never want to cross him.

With that, the four of them raced down the hall and through the school towards the Headmistress’s office. They needed to inform Professor McGonagall about the threat they had just received.


Thank you ChannelingGinny for your quick and wonderful edits! This chapter has to be one of my favorites to date. Dedrick threatens Daniel, too. Who would have imagined that?!? Anyway, I hope to have another chapter posted either this weekend or at the beginning of next week (Monday is a holiday, so I'll definitely get some writing in then!). Take care and don't forget to leave feedback!

Chapter Thirty-Four: Conference Room

Stephanie couldn’t believe that it was really happening. Dedrick had found out about the spell she created and was now demanding to know its incantation. How could she deny him that information when the lives of her students and friends were at stake?

She hardly believed that giving Dedrick the information he requested would satisfy him for long. He would soon summon her and utilize her own spell to defeat her. The irony of the situation was incredible. He had planned everything so well and what he couldn’t know just fell in place for him. Maybe it was her fate to lose everything at Dedrick’s hand. Fate was repaying her for the selfish act she committed when she used Kieran for her own means, regardless of the fact that she had saved two innocent lives. There had to have been another way.

And now Dedrick was going to use her weakness for her students. She would have released the spell in a heartbeat if she had known of a counter curse that could stand up to Perdo Infestus, but she didn’t. The dilemma tore at her heart; did she release the spell she wouldn’t even give to the Aurors and let countless people die because of it just to spare one life, or did she sacrifice the life of one innocent eleven-year-old to keep the spell a secret?

But it would not only be one life she would be sacrificing. Dedrick would slaughter all those she cared about one-by-one until she provided the information he wanted. He would save her for last and by that time he wouldn’t need her spell. Either choice would be the wrong one.

While they had remained in her quarters during the discussion of what to do next, Stephanie had been insanely calm. Ginny had noticed, Stephanie was certain of that fact. Ginny kept looking at Stephanie with anticipation that she would lose her temper. But Stephanie was unexpectedly calm after Daniel attacked her and then brought news of Dedrick’s letter; so much so that it even surprised her.

Daniel had every reason to do what he had, though. She never should have accepted the position teaching at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry; all she brought anywhere was danger. Instead, she should have left her friends and gone somewhere she could be alone, away from the friends she always placed in danger.

But now teaching was like a drug to her, she had to do it. Teaching made her feel like she was making a difference, like she was accomplishing something good. Her history had so many black marks that nothing she did would ever make it better. Still, she could try and make the world safer for her students.

Despite all these concerns, Stephanie only had one question on her mind. And as she thought it repeatedly, Stephanie got even sicker to her stomach at her level of selfishness. Did everything always have to be about her?

When will it end? Will I ever just get to live in peace? The thought raced through her mind as she felt tears come to her eyes. She quickly brushed the few that had escaped away with the back of her hand and then blinked back the remaining tears. She had caused this problem and so she had to remain strong. Everyone must know that she was in control of herself and could do what needed to be done.

After what seemed like hours, but was surely only a few minutes, the four of them finally reached the outer entrance to the Headmistress’s office. The gargoyles were still standing at the base of the stairs, allowing only those who knew the password to pass.

“Fawkes.” Stephanie said without worrying whether anyone else would hear. Now was not the time for secrets; Minerva changed the password frequently anyway, even though they all had something to do with prior Headmaster, Albus Dumbledore, a friend whom she had adored and highly respected.

Out of the corner of her eye, Stephanie saw Ginny raise her eyebrow questioningly towards Neville, but no one said anything. Stephanie just kept hurrying up the stairs and towards the Headmistress’s office. When she reached her destination, Stephanie didn’t pause. She knocked and entered without waiting for a response.

“What is this?” Minerva asked, standing up in surprise at the intrusion. Her face had a worried expression as she looked at the two professors and two students that just barged into her office.

“I’m sorry for entering like this, Minerva, but something has come to my attention that needs to be addressed immediately. We need to speak with Kingsley.” Stephanie explained, though she had to work very hard to keep her voice calm. She was much more panicked than she wanted the others to know. “I have already spoken to Harry and he is expecting us.”

“What is this about?” The Headmistress asked, walking around the desk closer to them.

“The safety of the students is at stake, Minerva.” It was Neville that stepped forward and spoke before she could. He reached out and squeezed Stephanie’s hand; he could sense what she was feeling. Relief washed through her entire body as he squeezed again and didn’t let go.

“Has there been another attack?” Professor McGonagall’s eyebrows narrowed in concern, and as the group in front of her shook their heads, she posed another question. “A threat?”

“Something like that.” Stephanie attempted a smile, but it didn’t quite work the way she had planned. “We don’t have much time, Minerva.”

“Of course, go.” She responded without even questioning why Daniel Blaiser had joined them. Minerva held too much trust in Stephanie; she didn’t deserve that kind of respect. Well, that would dissipate when Minerva found out the severity of the information she had been keeping from all of them. It would all come out tonight.

“We really need you there as well, professor.” Ginny said.

“But if there is a threat to the students, I must stay here and protect them.” Minerva pointed out, and her voice held the calm that Stephanie had come to expect from the Headmistress.

“It only affects one specific student and we do not believe that she is in any danger tonight. The school will be safe with the Aurors stationed outside its grounds.” Stephanie informed her, but Minerva still seemed hesitant.

“Which student?” She inquired, looking at Daniel.

“Abby Seabold.” Daniel responded coldly, but he did not argue. He, too, must have believed that she would be safe for the evening. Stephanie did not think that Dedrick would break his promise in waiting three days, seeing as he did not harm her at St. Mungo’s when he had had every possible opportunity to do so. Abby would be safe while they were at the Ministry.

“Well, that explains your presence, Mr. Blaiser.” Minerva nodded her head and stepped forward. “Shall we?”

“They are expecting us at the Auror Training Facility.” Stephanie informed her and she walked towards the fireplace, then reached up and grabbed the bag of Floo Powder. Minerva was the first to enter, with Stephanie and the others following close behind.

*~*~*~*

She sat at the table and played nervously with her fingers, watching Harry pace around the room in anticipation. They were in a conference room at the Auror Training Facility waiting for Stephanie to bring her news.

“Where are they?” He asked again, looking first towards the fireplace and then at the clock on the wall. It didn’t appear to be moving at all.

“It hasn’t even been fifteen minutes, mate.” Ron pointed out calmly. He had an air of excitement and Hermione wanted to slap it out of him. From the way Harry had explained the situation to her, something horrible was happening. How can he be so eager about this?

“Do you know who she is bringing?” Kingsley asked, walking into the room and sitting down at the head of the table. Ignatius was following close behind.

“I don’t know.” Harry replied. “She just said that she needed to talk to me and that ‘they’ would be coming.”

“Harry,” Hermione encouraged. “You really do need to calm down. I’m sure she’s fine.”

“Sorry.” Harry sat down roughly in the chair across from Hermione. “It’s just that she’s never done anything like this before.”

“We should take this as a positive thing, Harry.” Hermione attempted to reassure him by reaching out to stroke his hand. “She hasn’t come to any of us with information or for help before. Stephanie is starting to realize that we can help her and that she doesn’t have to suffer alone.”

For the past fifteen minutes, Hermione had pondered what Stephanie would need to talk to them about. She hadn’t specifically asked for Hermione, but both Ron and Harry thought it would be a good idea for her to be here. If anything, Hermione could support Stephanie in a way the others could not. Hermione also knew everything the others did, so it made no sense to keep anything from her.

She had been at home, preparing dinner for herself when Ron came bursting through the fireplace. His presence had terrified her half to death, but it passed quickly. Without much of an explanation, he pulled her from the house and took her to the training facility where Ron had spent the majority of his time for the past few months. As worried as she was, Hermione had to admit to herself that she was happy to be with Ron again. She missed him so much sometimes.

Harry jumped up quickly when a pop sounded from the fireplace and Professor McGonagall entered the conference room. Kingsley didn’t look away from his conversation with Ignatius, but Hermione noticed him nod in appreciation that the Headmistress had joined them.

In the seriousness of their meeting, Hermione had to stifle a giggle at Harry’s reaction when Stephanie arrived. Before she could even brush herself off, Harry was all over her, asking about what was going on.

“I’m sorry, Harry.” Stephanie responded, shaking her head. “I’ll explain it all when we get settled. I made a mistake and I’m sorry.”

“You didn’t do anything wr-” Neville said as he stepped out of the fireplace, but Stephanie interrupted him.

“Not now, Neville.” Stephanie waved him off and made her way towards the large table. She reached over to shake Kingsley’s and Ignatius’s hands and then took a seat.

“Wait.” Ron demanded as the last person walked through the fireplace. He stood and pointed in the newcomer’s direction. “What is he doing here?”

“He’s involved now, Ron.” Hermione recognized the guarded tone in Ginny’s voice even though her friend rolled her eyes to disguise her contempt for Daniel Blaiser. “Sit down and listen to what Stephanie has to say.”

“Don’t talk to me like that, Ginny.” Ron responded. “You know what mum said-”

“Shall we?” Kingsley’s deep voice interrupted the argument before it could develop into a full-blown physical altercation.

Hermione could feel the tension in the air as everyone adjusted to the animosity in the room and the unknown. Why did Stephanie call us here at such short notice? Hermione’s stomach clenched tightly as she took in Stephanie’s expression—she was clearly attempting to look calm, but she was failing miserably. That’s probably why Harry finally stopped asking her questions and allowed her to sit at the table.

Stephanie took a deep breath and looked at Harry, who was sitting to her immediate right. Hermione could see Stephanie’s facial features perfectly because she was sitting across from her friend. Her face was tight with tension and Hermione knew that they were about to learn what she had felt uncomfortable asking about over Christmas.

Without making it obvious, she reached under the table and grabbed Ron’s hand. He squeezed it, but she could tell that he was concentrating more on what was going on in front of him; Ron didn’t look at her as she squeezed his hand.

“You have to understand that I didn’t want you to worry about me, Harry.” Stephanie began slowly and softly, but looked at each of the others in turn. “I didn’t want any of you to worry because I felt that it was my fight and I didn’t want any of you to endanger yourselves to protect me.”

“What are you talking about, Stephanie?” Harry asked; he, too, was trying to keep his voice calm.

“I want to tell you the story of how Neville and I got together.” Stephanie smiled weakly at Neville, who was sitting to her left, and then slowly stood from the table. She began pacing as she spoke, unwilling to look anyone in the eye.

“Please don’t say anything until I’m done.” Stephanie asked them and Hermione nodded. “And don’t get angry with Ginny and Neville, they were only doing what I asked of them.”

“Please explain, Stephanie.” Kingsley’s voice was reassuring and Stephanie looked at him only briefly, then she continued her pacing. “You have me intrigued.”

“On my birthday, when you all were in Diagon Alley shopping for the party, someone broke into Sirius’s house.” Stephanie began, finally slowing her pace, staring at the wall.

“What?” Harry demanded, standing up. “How? Why didn’t you tell us?”

“Harry, please.” Stephanie begged.

“Sorry.” Harry returned to his seat and Stephanie continued.

“I was downstairs in the living room reading a book when I heard something upstairs. My room had been destroyed and I made Kreacher promise not to tell any of you what had happened.” Stephanie’s voice was distant as she remembered that day, but she drifted back towards the table and returned to her seat. She reached for Neville’s hand for reassurance and he quickly took it. Harry was too captivated in the story to make the same comforting gesture. “And then I noticed that the photo album you gave me for Christmas was missing. I didn’t know what to make of it at the time, so I didn’t want to worry you, Harry.

“Kingsley had finally given me the freedom I needed. If I told him about the intruder he would have reassigned the Aurors to protect me. After all those years of being a prisoner, I didn’t want that again. I wanted to be able to live my life on my own terms.” Stephanie looked at Kingsley.

“You’re right, Stephanie. But you still should have told us; maybe we could have caught the person responsible.” Kingsley commented, but Hermione had to feel bad for Stephanie. After their many conversations through the diaries, Hermione understood how trapped Stephanie truly felt. She always felt like she had to take responsibility for the entire world; she always felt alone. What can we do to make her understand? Hermione scolded herself for not trying harder to connect with Stephanie since she had escaped Lord Voldemort’s control.

“Stephanie, was that the afternoon I offered you the teaching position?” McGonagall eyed Stephanie suspiciously.

“Yes it was, Minerva.” Stephanie nodded her head.

“I’m sorry, dear.” McGonagall’s eyes were full of concern. “You were such a mess and I knew you were lying to me. I should have pressed you more.”

“It’s alright, Minerva.” Stephanie once again responded with a weak smile. “I wouldn’t have told you, anyway.”

McGonagall’s lips pursed as she thought about Stephanie’s comments, but she didn’t respond. Instead, she allowed Stephanie to continue.

“Honestly, I didn’t think much more about it until I was at Severus’s house some time later. I was working on some improvements without magic—because of my time at Malfoy Manor, I enjoy doing things by hand—when I felt someone watching me. The feeling went away when Neville showed up, but I started to wonder whether I was being followed.” Stephanie spoke distantly again and no one interrupted her this time. Hermione realized where this story was going and she felt her hands clench in anticipation as she continued to listen to Stephanie’s story. “Nothing more happened until the first day of school.

“I went to get the list of students from my desk to do attendance with the first years when I noticed the photo album. It was just laying there as though I had placed it there myself.” Stephanie looked at Harry and waited for his reaction. His eyebrows were creased in concentration and he grasped his wand tightly, but he remained silent. “I still didn’t tell anyone because I thought I could handle it. There was no note, no threat. It was just simply there.”

A piece of parchment and some photographs suddenly appeared on the table in front of Harry as Stephanie waved her wand. He picked up the letter as she continued.

“And then I received this letter while I was in the Great Hall one morning.” Stephanie pointed at the letter in Harry’s hand as he began to read it aloud.

“He knew about the Aurors.” Ignatius said thoughtfully, nodding his head in recognition.

“Stephanie, you have to trust that we can help you.” Hermione said softly, trying to make Stephanie understand that she didn’t need to isolate herself. She could share this type of information with them; they could all fight together. “You don’t have to do this alone.”

“I know.” Stephanie nodded as Harry dispersed the pictures that had accompanied the letter. All of them were there, including George, and they could all sense the threat behind the pictures.

“Stephanie, why didn’t you tell us?” Professor McGonagall asked gently after she finished looking through the photographs.

Stephanie thought about it for a moment, and then spoke. Her voice shook very minutely, but it was clearly uneven. “I think I was scared. I didn’t want to get you all into something that I couldn’t get you out of. This was my problem and I felt I could do it alone, without risking the life of anyone I love.”

Ginny rolled her eyes and leaned back in her chair. She had clearly heard this explanation many times before. To be perfectly honest, Hermione was getting irritated with Stephanie’s thought processes, as well.

“And I never had any intention of sharing the information I had.” Stephanie admitted. “I didn’t realize those pesky first years had noticed my not-so-subtle reaction to the letter. They broke into my office that evening and found the letter, and then they took it to Neville who confronted me. I was forced to share everything with him.”

“We decided to fill in Ginny, but that’s pretty much how our relationship started.” Neville explained. “I was so mad that she would keep that information from us. But Stephanie didn’t want to worry you, Harry. We thought Daniel was the one bringing the letters to her, so we figured we could handle it on our own. Dumbledore’s Army started keeping a closer watch on him.”

“As if I would do something so completely obvious.” Daniel snickered, folding his arms across his chest confidently.

Stephanie ignored him as she continued. “Eventually, we teamed with Daniel to keep Abby safe. We read about the threats against Abby in the Daily Prophet and knew they were related to Dedrick somehow. He agreed to help if Ginny assisted in guarding Abby. That’s why she has been residing in Slytherin.”

“Is that why you threw the Quidditch match?” Harry looked at Ginny, who nodded sheepishly in response. Daniel just laughed at the question. Hermione held Ron’s hand firmly to his leg as he tensed at Daniel’s reaction. She reminded him gently to remain calm.

“We didn’t hear anything from Dedrick until this evening when he forced Daniel to get involved.” Two more pieces of parchment and another picture appeared on the table in front of Harry. He read them aloud and Hermione sighed in disbelief.

“We can protect her. You don’t need to share the spell with him.” Ignatius spoke, confident in the Auror’s abilities.

“But how did he get that picture of Abby?” Neville asked. “He got so close without her noticing a thing.”

“There has to be someone inside Hogwarts.” Harry voiced his opinion. “Someone she knows, someone she trusts.”

“Maybe she didn’t see the person that took the picture.” Hermione offered, leaning forward and placing her free arm on the table. “They could have been invisible. Did you ask her about it?”

“No.” Daniel responded forcefully. “I do not want her aware of this threat against her life. She’s too young to deal with it appropriately.”

“We were in worse danger when we were her age.” Harry countered, leaning forward to glare at Daniel.

“That was your choice, this isn’t hers.” Daniel shot back.

“Daniel’s right.” Stephanie replied. “I don’t want her to know what is going on. Her friends are already preparing for a fight. They could go looking for trouble in order to keep her safe and I don’t want that.”

“How do we keep the students safe?” McGonagall asked. “We obviously cannot share this information with him.”

“I think it should be Stephanie’s choice.” Kingsley said and everyone looked at him with interest. “We have two choices: one, we provide him with the spell in order to keep Abby safe; two, we increase protection at the school and deny him the information he seeks. The spell is Stephanie’s and so the decision must be hers to make.”

“What are you thinking, Stephanie?” Hermione asked, looking at the torn expression on Stephanie’s face.

“I am thinking about giving him the spell.” Stephanie spoke slowly and deliberately. Before anyone could interrupt, she continued. “There has to be a counter curse that would make the spell ineffective. If I can only figure out what that is, then providing him with the incantation will render it useless to him.”

“But like you just said, you don’t know what it is.” Harry pointed out. “We don’t have much time, either. Three days doesn’t seem like enough time, even if you didn’t have classes to teach.”

“I just don’t feel like I can sit back and do nothing anymore.” Stephanie’s voice was more determined now, as though she had a purpose to fulfill again. “I really think I need to do this.”

“What if we see if Stephanie can figure out a counter curse and then decide whether or not to provide the incantation to Dedrick?” Ginny asked, noticing the same thing about Stephanie that Hermione had. “She can spend the next three days here at the training facility working on it.”

“What about her classes?” McGonagall asked, but nodded her head at the suggestion. “We can’t cancel them.”

The room was silent for a moment, but the quiet was broken by Daniel’s voice. He spoke as though the suggestion were obvious. “Ginny could teach the younger students. She does have the experience, after all.”

“Don’t be stupid. She’s still a student.” Ron smiled at Daniel’s comment, but Hermione noticed McGonagall nodding her head.

“Would you mind, dear?” Professor McGonagall asked.

Everyone looked at Ginny as she thought about the proposition for a moment. “I could do that.” She finally responded affirmatively and Hermione smiled. Ginny would be a great teacher.

“Stephanie, if you choose this option, you must be willing to share the incantation to your spell with us so that we may help you. Only Harry, Ron, Ignatius, and I need to know, but you cannot do this alone.” Kingsley instructed, watching Stephanie carefully for her reaction.

Stephanie closed her eyes and took a deep breath as she thought about the scenario in her head. Hermione imagined that she was debating each side in her mind. Finally, Stephanie opened her eyes and nodded her head.

“I think it’s time.” Stephanie agreed. “But I would also like Nikki to help. She can push me even harder, I think.”

“Of course.” Kingsley nodded.

Hermione released the breath she had been holding throughout the conversation. She couldn’t believe that Stephanie was finally reaching out for help; this was a big step for her friend. Hermione wondered, though, if Stephanie planned on telling them when Dedrick summoned her. She truly hoped so.

Thank you ChannelingGinny, my most wonderful beta! Sorry there wasn't much action in this chapter. If you wanted to go back and re-read the first letter Harry reads (as a reminder of what was written), it is located in Chapter Twenty: The Package. The next chapter should be posted sometime next weekend! Once again, I encourage any feedback you can spare! If you don't have the time, leave a quick vote in the poll!

Chapter Thirty-Five: Gone

“Where was Daniel last night?” David whispered from across the table in the Defense Against the Dark Arts classroom. Abby looked up from her textbook and shrugged.

“I don’t know.” Abby responded quietly. “He didn’t come back until late and he didn’t say anything as he passed us in the common room.”

“I thought we were in trouble for sure.” Sammy added nonchalantly without even looking up from her book. They had been studying late last night for the test that was scheduled for that day.

Abby and Sammy had scheduled to have Ginny take them to the library so they could study with Matty and Lauren, but Ginny hadn’t shown up, either. Matty questioned where Ginny had been when she explained the situation through the diaries, but he understood why she couldn’t leave her dormitory alone or with any of Daniel’s friends. Each of Daniel’s friends were now pleased they didn’t have to follow her around and would never volunteer for the job. They hated her.

“He just walked by without saying anything?” Matty asked, his eyebrows narrowing. Abby recognized his expression; he was deep in thought.

“What are you thinking, Matty?” She asked.

“I don’t know. It’s just odd he would catch you out of bed past your curfew and say absolutely nothing.” Matty pointed out the very concern she had thought about last night. Daniel had just looked at her momentarily and continued up the stairs.

“Hey, where’s Professor Potter?” Lauren asked and Abby saw David sneak a glance at the clock. “She’s never late.”

Just then, a disheveled Ginny Weasley ran through the open classroom door and rushed to the professor’s desk. She set down a pile of papers, clutched the desk for support, and took a moment to catch her breath.

All Abby could do was stare in disbelief. It was the first time she had seen Ginny since the day before; she looked anxious and unprepared. Ginny had never been to their class before, so Abby knew something was wrong.

Before she could say anything, Lauren raised her hand and started bouncing in her seat. Ginny nodded her head, giving Lauren permission to speak.

“Ginny, where’s Professor Potter?” Lauren asked excitedly.

Ginny smiled weakly, but closed her eyes for a moment. She must have been preparing something in her mind. The classroom waited in silence and Abby leaned forward in her seat, worried about what she was going to hear. Did something happen to Professor Potter last night? Is that why Daniel disappeared? Did he do something to her? Abby knew Daniel was more than capable of harming her favorite professor, and she truly did care about Daniel more than anything in the world, so she hoped nothing bad had happened last night.

“Professor Potter has been asked by Minister Shacklebolt to spend a few days assisting the Aurors. He thinks her expertise would be helpful and she didn’t feel she could turn him down.” Ginny’s explanation didn’t ease Abby’s concerns. If something had happened to the professor, would they really share the news with the students? Of course they would. Professor McGonagall held a memorial service when Professor Sprout had passed away. “So, she and Professor McGonagall asked me to teach some of Professor Potter’s classes.”

“Something’s not right.” Matty muttered while shaking his head slightly, but he didn’t take his eyes off Ginny. Abby knew that his line of thought was similar to hers.

“Do you think she’s okay?” Lauren leaned across David to get closer to Abby. David pushed her away in response and Abby had to hide an amused smile at the reaction.

“I don’t know.” Abby responded seriously. “But we have to find out what’s going on. Maybe there’s something we can do to help.”

“Professor Potter instructed me to pass these out.” Ginny continued speaking as though none of the students were whispering over her voice, and for that Abby was grateful. “You have the entire class period to complete these exams. Good luck.”

When she received her exam, Abby lowered her head and focused on the task in front of her. She wouldn’t disappoint Professor Potter by failing the test. She would also make her professor proud by finding out what was going on and helping in any way she could. It had to be big if she left her classes behind to wonder.

Matty seemed to have the same thought because he reached over and squeezed her hand, not releasing it until the end of the class period. They completed their exams hand-in-hand. Abby smiled without looking up at him. He would be by her side for whatever she decided and that made her happy. They were in this together, no matter the level of danger they would surely face.

*~*~*~*

“PUSH YOURSELF, POTTER!” Nikki screamed in her face. Stephanie tried to hold back the tears that sprang to her eyes, though she knew that Nikki’s constant pressure had not caused her tears; she was more disappointed in herself than anything else.

“Lay off, Nikki.” Harry’s voice came from the far corner of the gymnasium of the Auror Training Facility. Ron’s snores could be heard in that direction, too. “It’s not like she isn’t trying. We’ve all been working as hard as we can.”

“No, she’s right.” Stephanie shook her head in her brother’s direction. “I know I can do this.”

“Maybe we should take a break.” Hermione’s voice was strained with exhaustion. “We’ve been at this for twenty hours. None of us have been very useful for awhile now.”

Stephanie sank to the floor and rubbed her eyes. There was no way she could pause for even a moment; she hadn’t even taken a break long enough to eat something. While she had been with the Dark Lord and the Malfoy family, she had suffered much worse tortures than hunger and sleep deprivation, and she still managed to function. Her mission was too important to Abby’s safety and she couldn’t risk failure. But she also couldn’t expect her friends to suffer, either.

“You go ahead.” Stephanie struggled to pull her head up so she could look at her friends and convince them she could still continue. “I need to keep going.”

“Stephanie,” Harry began to reprimand her and Stephanie prepared to argue with him. “We have tried everything we can think of, and Hermione’s right. We can accomplish more if we take a break and get some sleep.”

She knew he was right. Last night, Kingsley suggested they rest and start researching spells in the morning. When they finally started, Harry and Ron paired together while Nikki and Stephanie attempted to find the counter spell to her creation. Hermione, as usual, had spent the majority of the morning at the library and had finally brought some books back to the training facility so she could offer suggestions while she continued her research.

And they had tried absolutely every possible spell they could think of. Hermione even had them trying several spells she found in the Dark Arts books. The first spell they tried against Perdo Infestus was the protection shield, which failed miserably. Stephanie shook her head in disgust and disappointment as she remembered how horribly it had gone.

“It’s not going to work.” Ron taunted after Harry suggested the spell. Stephanie had laughed at the sight because it reminded her of something Hermione would have said had she been there. He was definitely spending a little too much time with Hermione.

“Why not?” Harry questioned.

“It doesn’t work against the Unforgiveable Curses. So, why would it work against this one?” Ron pointed out and that was the moment Stephanie realized it really wasn’t going to work. That would have been too easy of a solution.

“It wouldn’t hurt to try, would it?” Harry responded and lifted his wand without warning, aiming it at Ron’s chest. “Perdo Infestus!”

Ron knew it was coming and was prepared to defend himself against Harry’s attack. He immediately responded by raising his own wand and saying the spell out loud to prove that he actually had cast it, “Protego!”

Harry’s spell hit the protection shield that emanated from Ron’s wand with a loud crack; Ron’s spell shattered and the remnants slowly disappeared. His face fell peacefully for only a few seconds, but it was clearly noticeable.

“Wow.” Ron muttered when the spell cleared, impressed by the spell he had just experienced. “Wicked.”

“What was that?” Nikki exclaimed in surprise. Not even the Unforgiveable Curses reacted to the protection shield that way; they just went through the shield as though it were transparent. “What kind of spell did you create, Stephanie?”

“I have no idea. I’ve never seen anything like that before.” Stephanie responded in amazement.

“What did I say?” Ron asked with a smug expression on his face, clearly fully recovered from just a moment ago. “I told you it wasn’t going to work.”

“Shove off, Ron.” Harry said and waved his wand impatiently. “Obviously that isn’t the spell we’re looking for. Let’s get back to work.”

And they had. They had worked almost nonstop for the following twenty hours—only Nikki, Hermione, Ron, and Harry had stopped for meals. They had insisted on making Stephanie eat, but she was too determined to take a break.

“We only have 39 hours before the deadline is up.” Stephanie’s voice cracked as she tried to defend her argument, but it didn’t lessen her resolve. “I can’t stop until we figure this thing out.”

“Are you doing Abby any good right now, Stephanie?” Hermione knew where Stephanie’s sensitivities lay and exploited the fact that Stephanie’s only motivation was Abby’s safety. “You need to sleep.”

“I said you guys could go rest if you wanted to, but I need to stay.” Stephanie responded and stifled a yawn. Her eyelids were getting heavy and her forehead ached from keeping her eyes open.

“Stephanie, I am ordering everyone to get some sleep. We can resume testing in the morning.” Nikki chimed in after looking at her watch.

“But,” Stephanie attempted to argue, but Nikki interrupted her.

“Do I need to get Kingsley?” Nikki warned and Stephanie knew she was fighting a losing battle. And she had to admit that she really was tired, though it bothered her that she couldn’t force herself to keep working indefinitely.

“Fine. But I will be back here at eight.” Stephanie reluctantly allowed the others to force her to get some sleep, but she was going to set the limits.

“It’s already four in the morning, Stephanie.” Nikki disputed. “You are banned from this gymnasium until at least ten—that’s at least six hours of sleep. Do you understand me?”

“Fine.” Stephanie muttered and slowly stood up and followed Hermione to the girl’s dormitory at the training facility. They would figure out the counter spell for the curse she had inflicted on the world—they had to. She didn’t know what was going to happen if they failed, if she failed.

*~*~*~*

“Tell me the truth, Weasley.” He spoke softly so others near them could not overhear their conversation. They were at the very end of the Slytherin table in the Great Hall, away from both his friends and the younger students. He and Ginny had spent the last few days in seclusion, discussing the situation at hand.

Daniel despised the fact that he was forced to leave Abby’s safety in the hands of Stephanie Potter. But Dedrick Hargrave did not leave him any choice; if he knew the spell that Professor Potter was keeping secret, he would have run to the Death Eater immediately. Rest assured, though, that Dedrick Hargrave was going to pay for merely threatening the safety of Abigail Seabold. Daniel would make sure that revenge was sought once Abby’s safety was ensured.

“Don’t I always?” Ginny responded with an anxious, but amused grin. He would never admit this to her, or anyone else for that matter, but he really enjoyed spending time with her. She was able to hold intelligent conversations and her magical skills were top notch. He was disappointed that Ginny was not assigned to teach his Defense Against the Dark Arts class in Potter’s absence. Everyone had felt it would be a conflict.

Instead, he got Professor Longbottom. Daniel scowled at the thought of that imbecile teaching two of his classes. It was certainly a good thing Potter would be back in a few days.

But their deadline grew ever closer and his anxiety level was rising. Dedrick had given them three days to provide him with the spell that only Stephanie possessed, and Daniel had not heard from the Ministry that the counter curse which would protect the Aurors from harm had been discovered.

Daniel didn’t really care about whether they found the counter curse. He didn’t trust Potter one bit, but he had gathered a good enough read on her to know that she would do what it took to keep Abby safe; that much he was sure of. She would give Dedrick what he wanted, and if she didn’t, Daniel would take matters into his own hands. And that could possibly mean the end of Stephanie Potter. Abby was priority number one.

“That’s a whole different discussion.” Daniel attempted a bit of humor, though it didn’t really come off as amusing. “Do you honestly think Potter is capable of finding the counter curse to her mysterious spell?”

Ginny didn’t even pause before she responded; her tone was full of honest belief and sincerity. “I absolutely do. She’s stronger and much more confident than she gives herself credit for.”

“And if she doesn’t?” Daniel prodded, attempting to gain information from the woman closest to his old enemy and new ally.

“A thousand Aurors couldn’t stop her from getting that spell to Dedrick.” Ginny knew what he was asking and provided the answer he had been hoping to hear, though he had a difficult time truly believing that Professor Potter was that selfless. “Even if it kills her, she will do what it takes to keep all of her students alive.”

Shivers went up his spine as Ginny emphasized the word “all,” and he snorted in amused disbelief.

“I’m serious, Daniel.” Ginny dropped her fork and looked him deep in the eyes, her face was solemn. “Even you. You may not believe it, but she truly isn’t the monster the Daily Prophet portrayed her to be. And she will die to protect every single one of her students, including Goyle and Nott if it ever came to that. It’s ridiculous, really, but she feels so guilty about the things she has done and she feels this tremendous need to make up for all her wrongs.”

“That’s stupid.” Daniel scoffed. There was only one person he would ever sacrifice himself for, and that was only because he promised her brother that he would watch over her. Bryce was his best friend and the closest thing to a brother he’s ever had. Abby was family.

“To you, maybe.” Ginny began playing with her food again. He noticed that she hadn’t eaten anything in three days, but he didn’t say anything. “But she has sacrificed so much for each of us and we, Harry especially, can’t deny her anything that makes her happy. She has found her niche in teaching, and that means she has grown very attached to her students. Harry is now aware of her ambitions and, though he will do what he can to make sure she stays away from harm, he understands what she needs. With the abuse she has endured and the losses she has suffered, Stephanie will never be whole.”

“But why die for people who hate you? That is absurd.” Daniel rolled his eyes and opened his mouth to continue, but he noticed out of the corner of his eye an owl flying into the Great Hall. The owl headed towards Ginny and dropped an envelope onto her plate.

“It’s from Hermione.” Ginny perked up immediately and ripped the envelope open. Daniel could see the neat scrawling letters as Ginny whispered the contents of the letter.


Before Ginny could even finish, both of them were running towards the door of the Great Hall and heading outside the castle grounds. Daniel could hear footsteps thundering behind them as Professor Longbottom followed—he must have noticed the scene they created in their departure.

“Where are we going?” He yelled at them once they were outside the front entrance.

“Hogsmeade.” Ginny huffed over her shoulder and sprinted forward. Her wand was already withdrawn and she clutched it tightly. Daniel had to smile at her resolve, though he could beat her in battle any day.

He was excited because he would get to face Dedrick Hargrave for the first time and forced himself to run faster. When they finally reached Hogsmeade, the scene was not one he had expected to see.

Once they reached town, they slowed their pace. Aurors were scouring through each building and looking into every dark alley. Hermione and Harry stood outside the Hogs Head with worried expressions and Hermione had tears flowing from her eyes. Daniel knew immediately that something had gone wrong.

“What is it, Hermione?” Ginny asked loudly when she noticed Hermione’s expression. “Where’s Stephanie?”

“She’s gone.” Hermione gasped for breath between tears. “The Aurors are securing the area, but she’s definitely not here. Dedrick never showed; he had a portkey set up, and she’s gone.”

“We should have been prepared for this. Of course he wouldn’t actually show his face. He knew we wouldn’t let her come alone.” Harry muttered angrily, punching the wall of the Hogs Head. Daniel heard the sound of bones cracking, but Harry didn’t appear to notice.

“We’ll find her, mate.” Ron said, coming up to them. He patted Harry on the back and then looked at the rest of them. “But she’s definitely not here.”

“The locket.” Longbottom muttered and Daniel glared at him. How does Stephanie’s disappearance affect Abby’s safety? Does he have what he wants? Will he leave poor Abby alone? Daniel’s thoughts raced. Maybe he would kill Potter and that would be the end of it. That was the best case scenario Daniel could come up with.

“What?” Harry asked, confused. It was apparent that his thoughts were only able to focus on one topic at once: his sister.

“If she’s in trouble, all she has to do is say my name.” Longbottom spoke quietly, almost as though he were withdrawing into himself. “I gave it to her for her birthday.”

“Would she really ask for help?” Hermione questioned out loud. “Is she strong enough to ask for help?”

No one said anything in response. Daniel knew they were all attempting to answer Granger’s question in their minds. He, however, didn’t care whether she asked for help. All he wanted was for Dedrick to obtain the spell he desperately wanted and for Abby to live another day. Stephanie Potter’s safety meant absolutely nothing to him at this point. She was gone and he had to figure out how to keep Abigail safe.


I want to send out a great big thank you to my wonderful beta ChannelingGinny!! I apologize for the delay in posting this, but I have been crazy busy and a little sick. Don't forget to keep me posted on what you do and don't like about the story so I can change it or emphasize it!

Chapter Thirty-Six: The Unforgiveable Curse

“AHHH!” Hermione watched Stephanie pull at her hair as she screamed into the silent gymnasium. Then, Stephanie slumped to the ground and hugged her knees in pure frustration.

“Stephanie, we are so close.” Hermione encouraged her friend. They had been slowing down with their spell casting in the last few hours. There wasn’t much more for them to try, but Hermione knew Stephanie was so close to figuring out what the counter spell was. All Stephanie needed was a small nudge in the right direction.

“Please, Hermione.” Stephanie laid her cheek on her arm and mumbled so that Hermione could barely understand her. “We’ve been at this for almost three days and we are in the same position we were in at the beginning. It’s over. I just have to go and give him the spell. I failed.”

“Don’t worry, Stephanie.” Ron stifled a yawn, but looked confident as he raised his shoulders arrogantly. “We don’t need to give him what he wants. No one can touch Abby while she’s at Hogwarts.”

“No one will get to you, either, Stephanie.” Harry added, kneeling next to his sister and rubbing her back. “We can protect you now that we know what’s going on.”

“I don’t care about what happens to me.” Stephanie lifted her head to look at her brother. Hermione could have cried at the defeated expression on Stephanie’s face.

“Well you should.” Nikki snapped, crossing her arms. “After all we’ve done for you and you want to waste it. I know what you are planning and you are by no means going alone.”

Stephanie started to argue, but the door to the gymnasium burst open before she could speak. Kingsley rushed into the room followed by two Aurors at his side. His face was solemn and Hermione immediately understood that their deadline was up. Their three days had officially expired.

“What is it?” Stephanie stood up in distress, a worried crease forming on her forehead. “Is it Abby? Is she alright?”

“What?” Kingsley asked, confused for just a moment, but he recovered quickly. “No. She’s fine. Were you successful?”

“No.” Harry answered simply, shaking his head.

“He sent another letter.” He lifted an envelope and handed it to Stephanie. Hermione could see the Death Eater’s neat scrawl on the front:


Stephanie opened it as the others gathered closer. The two Aurors that entered with Kingsley continued to guard his flanks, but they kept their distance. Hermione held her breath as Stephanie read it aloud.


“How did the letter arrive, Kingsley?” Hermione asked when Stephanie finished reading the letter. She was intrigued because owls weren’t allowed within three miles of the training facility. It was a security measure Kingsley had implemented at the beginning of his term as Minister.

“It was on my desk when I returned from a meeting.” If Hermione didn’t know Kingsley so well, she wouldn’t have recognized the disturbed look on his face. He was good at hiding his emotions, but Hermione knew that he was wondering the same thing she was: how did the letter get inside the training facility?

“She isn’t going anyway, so we don’t have to worry about it.” Harry responded automatically, not immediately realizing the significance of the letter’s mysterious appearance.

“Of course I am.” Stephanie looked at her brother in disbelief and waved the letter animatedly as she spoke. “Dedrick is getting into Hogwarts somehow and he found me here. He’s right. There’s nothing stopping him from getting to Abby.”

“This is your choice, Stephanie.” Kingsley’s voice was calm and reassuring. “But I want you to make sure this is what you want. Providing such a powerful spell to a Death Eater without a known counter curse will be very dangerous for my Aurors.”

“I know, Kingsley.” Stephanie’s voice was soft, but firm in her decision. “But I can’t risk Abby’s safety this way. This is something I need to do. I am so sorry.”

“Well, you aren’t going alone.” Harry wouldn’t take his eyes off his sister. They were wide and full of concern, and Hermione recognized the determination behind them. He would not leave Stephanie’s side even if she requested it.

“No.” Kingsley’s eyes were also on Stephanie. His tone held a command that even Stephanie wouldn’t be able to argue against. “We will have undercover Aurors in Hogsmeade and inside the Hogs Head. If he does arrive, he will be arrested on sight.”

“Do you really think he will be there?” Nikki asked. “He has to know that we plan to arrest him.”

“No.” Kingsley responded quickly. “But he may attempt to communicate with her in another fashion such as a mirror or a diary. It is possible that he will send one of his followers to meet with her. In which case, it does little good to arrest the messenger.”

“Don’t worry, Stephanie.” Harry attempted to reassure his sister, though it only appeared to agitate Stephanie even more. “We will keep you safe. Dedrick won’t be able to hurt you.”

“Again, Harry.” Stephanie clenched her jaw. “It is not me that I am worried about.”

“And again, Stephanie.” Nikki shook her head in frustration and began to lecture Stephanie. “You should be.”

Hermione couldn’t take it anymore. She knew Stephanie was so close to the spell, her mind was just blocking her thought processes for some reason. She stepped forward and grabbed Stephanie’s hand.

“Stephanie, tell me again how you created the spell.” Stephanie gave Hermione a questioning look because she knew Hermione remembered the story well.

Stephanie hesitated before she answered, but continued anyway. “Draco set a dog after me and it was going to kill me. The incantation just popped into my head.”

“What are you thinking about, Hermione?” Ron asked, stepping closer and placing his hand on her shoulder. He was starting to recognize when she had something on her mind.

“Stress.” She muttered under her breath and inhaled deeply. She looked towards her friends with an apologetic expression. It was something she had to do to take Stephanie to a place where the spell would come to her. Hermione knew Stephanie could do it; Stephanie just needed to believe she could. “I’m sorry.”

“For wh-” Ron began to ask, but she didn’t allow him to finish. This had to be quick so the others wouldn’t have time to respond.

Expelliarmus Maximus! Hermione screamed in her mind and waved her wand around the room. Everyone’s wands left their owners and flew into Hermione’s hand. Only Stephanie remained in possession of her wand, as Hermione had wanted. Her friends each wore a shocked expression, and the Aurors were quick to lunge towards her. She immediately cast binding spells throughout the room, leaving only Stephanie and Hermione free. Stephanie just looked at her friend in confusion, not wanting to cast a protection charm against Hermione.

“What are you doing, Hermione?” Harry struggled against the ropes that bound him to the floor. “Have you gone mental?”

But she ignored the comments; she needed Stephanie to realize that she was capable of casting the counter curse they had been attempting to identify for the past three days. Hermione could not let all their time and energy go to waste.

Hermione sent a spell towards Stephanie that caused a slight gash to appear on her friend’s forearm. Again, Stephanie just stared at her. But Hermione could tell that Stephanie was starting to come around and get angry at Hermione’s actions.

“What do you think you are doing?” Stephanie asked, raising her wand.

“Taking things into my own hands.” Hermione explained and sent another spell towards Stephanie. This time, a cut appeared on her friend’s cheek. “Stand up for yourself.”

“You don’t want me to do that.” Stephanie crouched slightly and pointed her want towards Hermione.

“Oh yes I do.” Hermione smiled wickedly and sent another spell in Stephanie’s direction. This time, blood soaked through her friend’s pants. “Come on, Stephanie. Defend yourself.”

Stephanie shot a spell towards Hermione, but she easily deflected it. Hermione didn’t pause before she sent the spell that would most likely get her sent to Azkaban for life. “Crucio!” She said aloud.

“HERMIONE GRANGER!” Kingsley shouted and began struggling with his bindings as Stephanie collapsed to the ground in writhing pain. Stephanie’s short scream filled the gymnasium. “What do you think you are doing?”

“Stop!” Nikki screamed at the same time. Hermione stole a glance towards Harry and he was too shocked to say anything. Ron looked at her in frightened disbelief.

Hermione walked closer to Stephanie as Stephanie picked herself up from the ground. “Protect yourself.” Hermione repeated tauntingly, though it pained her to hurt Stephanie so badly. She knew Stephanie would forgive her, but it still felt like betrayal.

“Stop it.” Stephanie begged, clearly confused as to why one of her closest friends would attack her.

“Crucio!” Hermione said again, but this time something strange happened.

“Protego Infestus!” Stephanie shouted and the torture curse bounced back towards Hermione. She was so distracted by what happened next, that she was taken by surprise and the rebounding curse hit her in the shoulder.

Hermione screamed slightly as the spell made contact with her body and her knees gave way. She collapsed to the ground as the curse momentarily ran its course. It didn’t last long and she recovered quickly; she was able to continue staring at Stephanie the entire time.

“What?” Stephanie asked in confusion when she saw the shocked faces of everyone in the gymnasium. All her friends had stopped struggling against their bindings at the sight of Stephanie’s spell.

A golden aura had encircled Stephanie and it followed her as she moved. The golden light was slowly fading as the spell wore off, but its effects were lasting in the minds of the observers. Hermione nonchalantly waved her wand and the bindings on her friends released, freeing them. But still no one moved.

“Did we just see…?” Nikki asked, trailing off.

“You just deflected an Unforgiveable Curse, Stephanie.” Kingsley’s mouth hung open in tremendous shock. Hermione smiled as she realized that it had worked; Stephanie had done the impossible.

“Let me try something.” Ron was the first to stand. He walked over and picked up his wand from the ground near Hermione’s feet and aimed it towards Stephanie. She nodded to show that she was ready. “Perdo Infestus.”

The golden light brightened as Stephanie silently cast the protection shield and Ron’s spell was deflected. Stephanie smiled broadly as she finally began to understand what she had just done.

Hermione raised her hands as she slowly walked towards Stephanie. Her friend looked at her cautiously but didn’t say anything in response. “I am sorry, Stephanie. But please let me try one more thing.”

“I don’t think that’s such a good idea, Hermione.” Harry started to compose himself and he, too, stood to retrieve his wand. Hermione could sense several wands aimed in her direction as they all watched her suspiciously.

“Please.” Hermione looked only at Stephanie as she pleaded with her friend.

After a few moments of thought, Stephanie finally nodded her agreement. Hermione breathed a sigh of relief but could sense the defensiveness of the others. No one trusted her right then and she didn’t blame them, but she did what she had to do. She would pay for the consequences of her actions.

“Episkey.” Hermione said softly as she pointed her wand towards Stephanie’s face. The golden light faded and allowed the spell to heal the wound that Hermione had caused just a few moments ago.

“Amazing.” Stephanie whispered in awe and Hermione smiled at her own revelation.

“Did you cast the spell that time or did it linger?” She asked with interest.

“I cast it again.” Stephanie responded with a smile.

Hermione let out a chuckle and dropped her wand so the others could feel more comfortable.

“What?” Harry asked.

“Protego Infestus.” Hermione whispered, continuing to stare at Stephanie in wonderment. This was absolutely amazing. Stephanie had changed the world with merely two little words.

“What?” Harry repeated, sounding slightly agitated because he didn’t understand what Hermione was trying to say.

She shook her head and looked towards the others for the first time. “Protego Infestus or ‘protect from aggression.’ It blocks aggressive spells but allows others through. This is absolutely amazing.”

“You knew, didn’t you?” Stephanie’s voice came out in a soft, unbelieving whisper. She was still shocked that she had discovered such a powerful spell.

“Not completely, but I had my suspicions.” Hermione smiled and turned towards Kingsley. “I’m sorry about the Unforgiveable Curse. It was the only way.”

“We’ll deal with that later.” Kingsley shook his head and motioned for Nikki and the other two Aurors to relax their defensive stances. There was no longer any more danger. “Stephanie, would you still like to meet Dedrick in Hogsmeade?”

Stephanie nodded and Kingsley continued. “Then we need to leave immediately.” He turned to his Aurors and fired off several commands, but Hermione wasn’t paying attention. She ran out of the room to retrieve a piece of parchment, a quill, and an owl.

After Apparating to a nearby owlery and sending word to Ginny, she returned to the gymnasium to find Harry and Ron supplying Stephanie with advice. They were also informing her of the protections that were being put into place in Hogsmeade.

“It’s time.” Kingsley returned to the gymnasium just moments after she did. Stephanie just took a deep breath and walked towards the door.

“Remember, we can’t be in the Hogs Head because he knows what we look like.” Harry called after her. “But we will be nearby. You are going to be alright, Stephanie.”

“I know.” Stephanie smiled weakly and walked out the door. She had been instructed to Apparate just outside Hogsmeade city limits and walk to the Hogs Head. That would give the undercover Aurors enough time to get into place before she arrived.

Little did Hermione know this would be the last time she saw her friend before Stephanie disappeared. No one said any words of goodbye because they fully expected Stephanie to return. None of them wanted to jinx the situation by saying farewell and wishing her luck, but they should have; they really should have.

*~*~*~*

He was so angry that Hermione would use an Unforgiveable Curse on his sister, but he couldn’t stay mad at her for long. The look on Stephanie’s face as she left the gymnasium made that very clear. Stephanie held no grudges and so he could not, either.

Harry was torn over his role as Stephanie’s brother. On one hand, he needed to do all he could to protect her and keep her safe. But on the other hand, Stephanie was grown and capable of doing what she wanted.

For some strange reason, Stephanie felt this need to be the world’s protector. He had felt tremendous pressure growing up because everyone seemed to think he was the chosen one, the only one with the ability to defeat Lord Voldemort. People expected him to save the world. But he had merely been an average wizard with the fortune of having luck and great friends on his side.

Stephanie was a powerful witch, maybe the most powerful the world had ever seen, yet she refused to acknowledge it. She continued to question why she deserved all she had been given, and that saddened him.

It was because of this that he had to let Stephanie go meet Dedrick Hargrave. She was happier now than he had ever seen her, especially since Neville had revealed his love for her, and Harry couldn’t bring himself to deny her anything. Out of all the people in the world, Stephanie Annabelle Potter deserved to live her life free from worry and guilt. Protecting others is all Stephanie has known and so he had to allow it. But he would never let her go alone; he would always be there for her.

He sat behind some bushes on a hill that overlooked the Hogs Head. Hermione and Ron were seated to his left as they waited for Stephanie to arrive. A few moments later, he watched as his sister strolled confidently into the bar where Hermione had once scheduled meetings to discuss the forming of Dumbledore’s Army. It was a location where questionable wizards frequented, but that didn’t bother him.

Stephanie was more than capable of protecting herself against mediocre wizards. It was the fact that she was meeting Dedrick Hargrave alone, regardless of the fact that there were many senior Aurors providing security that concerned him. He should be there, by her side, and they should be facing the Death Eater together.

She couldn’t have been in the Hogs Head for more than three minutes when his stomached dropped at the sight of three Aurors running out of the pub and gesturing for Kingsley to join them. Harry stood immediately and rushed towards the small group that was beginning to form. Kingsley had arrived well ahead of him and Harry had to catch up on the conversation.

“She picked up the glass.” Seth explained as he shook his head. “Before we could react, she was gone.”

“Wait. What do you mean, gone?” Harry asked in disbelief. His mind refused to function properly.

The only word he recognized after that was portkey. His mind raced as he watched Aurors disperse throughout Hogsmeade, furtively searching for his sister who he knew they would never find. Dedrick had taken her.

And he had allowed it to happen. If she was injured or worse—he couldn’t even think about that possibility right now—it would be all his fault. He had failed his sister. Harry should have followed his gut and refused to allow her to go. But, again he told himself, how could he deny her anything she wanted?

He barely noticed when Ron disappeared to join the search or when Ginny, Neville, and Daniel arrived.

“What is it, Hermione?” He heard Ginny ask loudly, but hearing her voice was not reassuring to him at all. It should have been because he loved her so much, but all he could think about was Stephanie. “Where’s Stephanie?”

“She’s gone.” Hermione spoke through her tears. Harry felt like crying, but his body was too numb with shock. “The Aurors are securing the area, but she’s definitely not here. Dedrick never showed; he had a portkey set up, and she’s gone.”

“We should have been prepared for this. Of course he wouldn’t actually show his face. He knew we wouldn’t let her come alone.” He muttered angrily, punching the wall of the Hogs Head. Pain coursed through his fist, but he didn’t care. No amount of pain could make things better right now.

“We’ll find her, mate.” Ron said, coming up to them. Harry jumped when Ron patted him on the back. “But she’s definitely not here.”

“The locket.” Neville muttered, but Harry couldn’t pay much attention. He looked around the town and watched as the Aurors continued to search for his sister.

“What?” Harry asked, confused. His attention was being held elsewhere and he wasn’t even sure why he asked for clarification; he was only half listening to the conversation going on right in front of him.

“If she’s in trouble, all she has to do is say my name.” Neville’s voice was soft and full of concern for Harry’s sister. Harry looked up and saw the same devastated look that must have been reflecting from his own. “I gave it to her for her birthday.”

“Would she really ask for help?” Hermione questioned out loud. “Is she strong enough to ask for help?”

No one said anything in response. Harry pondered that question in his mind. He had no real answer, except that Stephanie had promised them she would not do this alone. She had allowed the Aurors to be present in Hogsmeade and she had come to them for help. He clung to the desperate hope that his sister would seek the help she so greatly deserved and barely noticed the satisfied expression on Daniel’s face.


Thanks again to ChannelingGinny, my wonderful beta!! Stephanie's POV will be up next, though I'm not sure when it will be posted. I am really hoping to get it up sometime next weekend, but we'll see how things go. I did great in posting two chapters within a few days and I'm hoping to keep the momentum going!! Enjoy!